Home

User Manual - Rental Tracker

1. Contents Search Type in the word s to search for 1 i List Topics Display P l Production Customer is on select topic d A productions In Production List you can see a Production RTPROSL 1 Adding a New Type RTPRoSL Defaults tab RTPRoSL i Option to print mailing list is a Genera Questions RIPRoSL __ Managing Production records 1 2 3 Order Header Screen RTPRoSL 4 5 Biling Schedule Te ATPRoSL 6 Production records can be added orders or invoices ES This is the Billing Schedule fur Standard Functions Display Listings Grid There are several locations within RTPro where a listing of data is displayed E Ab Faroaks 26916 Golden Valley Derio 26516 Golden Valley Road Ha Sant 2405 Petersen Road 34851 Petersen Road Aqua 1340 Commerce Stred h eyices 0468 Kewen Ave udio Equipment on Services At the top of each column the label of the column 1s defined If the label of column is Green data is sorted on that column In above sample the data is sorted alphabetically by Equipment Code To change the sort sequence position the cursor on the label and click on it to sort Note RTPro has ability to sort data on a grid using multiple labels Hold Ctrl key and click on the label of each column that you wish to have sorted data Columns can be shorten or expand by placing the cursor on the vertical line separator
2. Note There is column called Vendor Catalog in both Rentals and Sales grids The user is able to either enter in the equipment sales stock number or the Vendor Catalog If the Vendor Catalog is entered then the equipment StockNo will be populated The Equipment StockNo will be the Equipment StockNo that is entered for the selection of Catalog and Vendor from Vendor Rental Catalog or Vendor Sales Catalog screens The List Price on the PO will be populated with the price of Vendor Rental Catalog Vendor Sales Catalog as a default but user can change 1t manually 19 Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note If user tries to Close the Purchase Order program checks if all items are received and posted to inventory If not then it prompts Not all items have been received or posted to inventory Do you wish to close the PO If Yes then program marks the PO as Close A closed PO will not be able to have items added delete received and posted to inventory Receive Invoices for the PO FE The invoice number and invoice date for the selected purchase order can be entered here When user clicks on the the Inventory PO Invoice Received will appear Note This screen can also be displayed through the right click menu of Inventory Purchase Order Screen Inventory PO Invoice Received A new Packing Slip Invoice can be added and user can enter the Invoice Date Notes on top of the screen and press OK At this t
3. Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company GL Distribution grouped By GL Code Date Time 2006 06 11 4 12 04FM Page 1 of 2 Currency US Invoice Creation Production Billing Billing Date Title Begin End 1060 10 200 Allow ForDoubtful TV 100237 2004 02 07 WMinnercom 04 04 24 2004 02 07 45 00 SubTotals 45 00 te PC ommercial A ot 2004 02 07 SubTotals Report otals 31 016 256 65 GL Distribution Sorted by GL Code The GL Distribution Sorted by GL Code report prints out a report of the GL activity for each invoice sorted in the order of the GL account The options are From Date Ts by date range GL range and payment type This To Date report contains GL account description invoice number date production code and amount re GL Code Range Payment Type Location Currency l hal v OK X Cancel FF List 3 Save E GL Distribution Sorted Code RT TEN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company GL Distribution Sorted By GL Code Date Time 2006 06 1211 07 1044 Page 1 of 2 Location LA Currency US Re Ne allow Forio Tv ets 2004 02 07 WINN 46 00 Sa 68 BOD3 15 27 CLAD 4 165 00 TT AS ES poo 02 07 A E Total 1 030 976 75 Payment Received Report The Payment Received report prints out the cash payments entered on the invoice header for a certain date range You can filter this report by payment type prod
4. 030 000 000 J mf a5 4 1 sie Ocal NS aces 20 000 000 M nr a 15 000 000 3 e ES E Steen u 3 LE 10 000 000 M had 5 000 000 4 CET ne se LEE 107 18 Orders by Rental Rate This graph breaks up the orders by the rental rate The possible rental rates are either weekly or daily Example ar LS Orders By Rental Rate lpe e SBSe HSO a g o Orders by Billable Status This graph breaks up the orders by the billable status The possible billable statuses are Regular Bill No Charge and No Further Bill Example ER Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc cx Orders By Billable Status FIECGEREER EE Orders by Status These graphs will breakup the orders by the order status The possible statuses are Active Closed Empty Not Shipped Part Returned Part Shipped Returned Sales and Shipped Example E Order By Status Ele Customize Help lge SBSe S6 a a 2200 2 000 1 800 1 600 Mio i ie eee 4400 Breer ees rete tee en et teenie Res sss 2 1200 i 54000 Seen ee 800 RAR EE UN 600 fy 400 200 uses rar z Checkout Quantity To track activity in the shop this graph will display the number of items that are checked out for the selected period Checkout Quantity by Month Checkout Quantity by Quarter Checkout Quantity by Year Example ES Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E heckout Quant
5. Category Shows only the equipment nn to this o Leave this inne to show items bon all categories Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Note You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on the list select each one you want to include in report As Of Date Items that are out on this particular day Order by Equipment If this option is selected the report will sort by equipment code Order by order If this option is selected the report will sort by order number Example aig Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Rental Inventory Out Report Date Time 3 27 2012 11 16 00 AM Page 1 of 1 Equipment Ranges1812FFPGBA 1812FFPGBA As Of Date 27 2012 1612FFPGBA 16K12K FF Powergem Ballast Production Production Barcode Ps Pu bem Purchase Extended i anon nt Pictu roo e EE 0 SS LE ESE Gh amna for 12010 e 200 00 s 20000 Modem Fa ARA EE 200 3 200 00 53 200 00 A SE Peal ERAS ELLE S ESE BA cot Case 10 rs Honor 1 0292006 3 500 00 53 500 00 s ission Inn 100087 lp A 9 29 2006 3 500 00 E 500 00 Subtotal RC E Inventory Work Sheet This report is similar to the Physical Inventory Worksheet It was made available outside the Physical Inventory module so you do not have to start a Physi
6. Start Physical Inventory Process From Inventory Menu click on the Physical Inventory drop down tab and select Start Physical Inventory Process If the Start Phvsical I t P d able it i Note IF this ts the first time you run the physical ysical Inventory Process 1S gray and unavallaDle IL 1S Inventory module please refer to the printed because another inventory is in process That inventory must be manual or on line help documents completed or stopped before being able to start a new ee Dy inventory O Category bi PI Start Dialog Box It is not necessary to take a physical PI Start Dialog Box RTPro Demo Compan x inventory of all assets at the same time A successful inventory eee y can be completed through a series of cycle counts You can Po y count certain types of equipment during one inventory and do ae dt subsequent inventories for the remaining types of equipment A dialog box will appear so that you can specify the equipment Location TORONTO that you intend to inventory in this session The inventory may be conducted by Location Department Category Equipment va _X Cancel _ Hep Code range or a combination All of these fields come from system tables see File Maintenance Chapter 4 Enter the code or use the drop down arrow to make a choice from the lookup screen If you are doing a complete inventory leave the field blank and click OK Note While starting PI Process a PI
7. Togo Miscellaneous SubRental Checkin 4 is al Exit OK Exit OK Success Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 40 03 Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 41 17 Mass Check in Noncoded will display the Noncoded items to check in one equipment code at a time and will allow you to enter the quantity of each to check in In the mass Check in Noncoded page select the mode for Check in or Canceling Check in You can also filter to do only the Miscellaneous or Sub rented Items by checking the appropriate boxes on the screen If you checkmark the Subrental box then you can enter a specific Vendor You can also enter the First Equipment to start the Check in or Cancel Check in from that Equipment Code Otherwise leave this field blank In Mass Noncoded Detail page you can move between items with pressing the Prev and Next buttons Pressing previous and next does not Check in or cancel items Pressing OK checks in or cancels the Check in for the Quantity entered in the box Out The number of items for this equipment code checked out In The number of items for this equipment code that will be checked in To go in This is the number of items still out User can enter a value here This will be the quantity to Check in or the quantity to cancel the Check in Mass Noncoded Detail Information Order The Order number you are working with You can see the name of the customer in lt gt block in front of order number Mode Determines if yo
8. If you are using multi currency features you can select which currency to show for the replacement and repair cost Format Select layout of report between Summary and Detail Sort by Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report When the sort order is by Department Category Retired Reason Production report also groups the printed information with a group header Cost The report can be ran to reflect the retired cost by the replacement price what you would charge a customer comes from the equipment table the replacement cost Current market cost comes from the equipment table or purchase amount of the individual item Example EU Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Retired Inventory Report Date Time 3 27 2012 12 05 21 PM Page 1 of Date Range 3 27 2012 Sorty By Department Format Detail Calculated Using Purchase Amount Currency USD Equipment Description Qty Barcode Serial Purchase Purchase Reason Retired Retired Prod Order Loss Date Amount Code Date Comments Amount AV Audio Video 100LUMEN 2100 Lumens Projector TV1 100640 O 10 24 2011 9 50 _2 10 2012 Item is sold on order 476 En T 59 50 __ 6 22 2010 5200 00L0SS 6 22 2010flost___________ k COUGART 2 000 00 d ezo LOSS 6 22 2010flost MODERN 350 TV3 Model 3 2 009 50 CHIM Chimera 8000 11 Sml Video Pro Plus Bank 81 8000 11 Sml Video Pro Plus Bank 81 8000 11 Sml
9. In Stock means the item is currently not on any order or in repair and is available If the status is Out the item is on an order The current order number the production code for the order the date the item was checked out and who checked it out will display If the item has been out before the last order it was on the production code when it was checked in and who checked it in will also display The information about the creation date and who created this item can be seen at the bottom of Rental Inventory Entry Screen If changes are made to the record the date of last revision and who did it will also display From the Status field if the status is out you can click on the current order number and get directly to the order processing screen If the status is Repair you can click on the repair ticket number and proceed to the repair ticket screen Adding Image From the Rental Inventory Entry screen multiple images can be linked to a specific barcoded item To add images refer to the Image Screen section in this chapter Note When picture s are added to a barcode the rental inventory screen will show the pictures linked If no image is assigned to the barcode the screen shows the image from equipment level Note This feature is only for barcoded items for noncoded items the image will pull from the equipment code level Note If a barcode has multiple images a default image can be assigned to the item To do this cli
10. LD Save noted with a variance A variance could be due to an incorrect GL being coded Unapplied payments are included in the Balancing Report ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter The Labor Module allows you to schedule employee and space or to track employee working duration Within the module is the ability to set up employee information occupations space information and space type Features available are labor space scheduling report and labor space conflict report Using this module companies can charge their customers for the Labors technicians and staff going to client side to setup something and also places that companies rent to their client for making movies Space Table Menu Employee Table This screen allows the user to input the employee s personal information such as Employee ID First Name Last Name Occupation Color ID Address Lines Cell number Phone Pager and whether or not the employee is Active Here labor working days times can be set There are other fields that will track the employee s history billable rate and an image of the employee Labor Employee Detail field descriptions Employee ID This field is required and must be unique across all employees Employee Image This is where a picture of the employee can be added Under the tool bar click on Image and the options include Image Screen Take Picture Take Picture from File and Remove Picture Active T
11. RTPro Demo Company OI xj File Include Help Sf te 7 Ca Refresh F21 326163 20000 5412 2710 5 07 00 Pr 100P 30 00 326164 20000 6 12 2010 6 20 00 PM 100P 30 00 326165 20000 of 1 2 2010 6 25 00 PH 100P 0 00 3261 70 20000 6 13 2010 4 46 00 Phi 51 211275 326173 20000 6 23 2010 5 1200 Ph 100P 433 58 3261 74 20000 6 23 2010 5 13 00 Phi 1007 5443 53 S201 75 2029 624 010 1 0 00 PH 32 614 40 326176 20269 642472070 1 06 00 PM 332 614 40 mais En AAA jf Lai pad Rebill this Invoice There is ability in Billing Module that allow user to re bill multiple orders All the orders attached to the invoice will get rebilled for rental charges for the same period A confirmed invoice with rental charges should be selected and then user should click on the Rebill this Invoice menu item under the Create submenu of the Billing screen li Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E RTI Confirm Drafts RTPro has ability to list all drafts through the Confirm Draft Batch screen The user could then review print and confirm selected drafts When pressing the Refresh button RTPro shows the drafts on the grid listing The user could print the drafts select the drafts confirm drafts to invoices and print the invoices Note The list of drafts can be filtered by Production or Location If your company is multi location you should select location before continue Note As soon as a line is checked or unche
12. Rental Tracker Pro RTPro Inventory Management Software System complete inventory management system for the entertainment rental industry User s Guide Version 5 2012 TreeKer mN Rental Tracker Inc 12481 Tejas Court Rancho Cucamonga CA 91739 Phone 888 595 8041 Fax 888 595 8042 www rentaltracker com Licenses and Trademarks Copyright 2012 Rental Tracker Inc All rights reserved No part of this manual may reproduce store in a retrieval system or transmit in any form or by any means without prior written permission from Rental Tracker Inc The author and publisher have made every effort in the preparation of this manual to ensure the accuracy of the information However the information contained in this manual brought without warranty either express or implied The authors Rental Tracker Inc shall not be held liable for any damages caused or alleged to cause directly or indirectly by this manual Rental Tracker Inc 12481 Tejas Court Rancho Cucamonga CA 91739 Phone 888 595 8041 Fax 888 595 8042 Contents INTRODUCTION en Mn tester d die trad rte O en ne cana ns 17 IN FOAUCTION TO EN SM dabas 18 System REQUIEM AA it ie aies 18 CNENEWORTA ON CR Sd cd al a nm ci de 18 Server Hardware Requife mentirosa 18 Server DISK Space Requirements dd iia 18 Instalineana Starting RU PhOsSOLEW al eC ii an nent ent 18 Resources Tor learning RTPrO software iia 18 RIRO crisis Po 5 E satu eadaant a
13. Rs cry dl a Se En Code Code Name 00005 CC JARRM2SKHEADd 500309 COMEHOME Joseptnderson ACE00O1 AceRentals CT 2 00005 ______JARRM2MSHHEADd 500310 COMEHOME Josepanderson JAMERO1 JAmericaStudigquipment 2 OT LAC SE 7 ET etree ACE001 __Achentals 3 46005 _ SKHMIGLOBE 500310 COMEHOME Joseptnderson Ae p eet ee 2 48002 29 FULLSINGLESCRIM 500306 MRSPOt J ACTION Actionrip 1 48002 _ 29 FULLSINGLESCRIM __ 500509 COMEHOME Josepbnderson____________ ACEOO1_ Ac entals __ 2 48002 29 FULLSINGLESCRIM_ 500310 COMEHOME Josepbndersson______________ AMERO1 mericaGtudibquipment 48003 29 HALFDOUBLESCRIM 600306 mesPO1 ACTION ActionSrip 1 48003 _ 29 HALFDOUBLESCRIM 600309 COMEHOME Josepanderson _ ACE001 Acftentals 2 48003 29 HALFDOUBLESCRIM_ 500340 COMEHOME loseptnderson______ AMERO1 JAmericaStudisquipment 2 48004 CS 2O HALFSINGLESCRIM 500306 MRSPOT __________________ fACTIOY Actio rip__________ _____ 1 2 Scheduled Subrental Report This report shows scheduled sub rentals for the future E Scheduled Subrental Report RTPro Demo Company Production Pape Filter Options ore Ln 7 Equipment Production Shows only the Sub E OrderH rentals belonging to this given sialic D Production production Leave this option blank to BegnDate honam x C Vendo show Sub rentals from all productions EREE Vendor Select Subrental Vendor or leave it blank to prin
14. Select Retire all missing rentals The system will prompt for a reason and all the outstanding items will be retired How do search in RTPro to show the quantity of certain Equipment which is rented by the specific customer 1 Go to the Order Processing Select the Customer Production on the bottom of the Screen and then click on the Checkin By Customer Icon to the left of the yellow question mark 2 On top left of the Checkin By Customer Screen select Show All Orders 3 If you are only looking for certain Equipment then select the Equipment code from Include Only Orders having this Equipment 4 Click Refresh F2 5 Click Include All F3 6 Click Checkin Screen F10 This shows the Checkin Screen for all the items of the selected Equipment that this Customer has had across all their orders If you leave the equipment blank in step 3 then you get a list of all items across all orders for the customer Questions about Billing There is an order that do not want to bill what can do to stop it from being billed You need special rights to do this If you do have this right then you can change the Billing Type of the order to be No Further Bill on the Order Header Screen How do know what orders are due for billing From the Billing Module and under the Reports section run the Orders to Bill Report This will give you the First Billing Extended Billing Loss Damage Cleaning and Labor charges Questi
15. reservations and orders that are tying up items for this equipment code will display The order types are color coded Orders are in black reservations are in green and quotes are in gray In addition an Order Type column shows this status Other columns are Location Production Date and Quantity information Note Subrental and quote information is provided for reference only Those numbers do not affect availability Note To view the content of each order double click or right click on desired record and select Order Header Screen Rental Availability Location Detail Screen This screen shows the locations of selected equipment code and quantity available on stock Also displays quantity owned and the quantity of equipment which was ordered This page 1s accessible from the right click menu Add Barcoded Items le There are many advantages to attaching a unique barcode to as many items as possible If an item is Barcoded information can be tracked for that specific piece of equipment RTPro keeps a historical record of the item and the status of the item 1s known at all times 1 e whether it is in stock on an order in repair or retired To add Barcoded items from the Inventory Menu click the Rental dropdown tab and select Add Barcoded Items or click on the Add Barcoded Items icon You will come to the Add Rental Barcoded Items screen NOTES BEFORE STARTING Although the only required field is the Equipment Code field it
16. to sort this report by Production or Amount Enter the As of Date and select a location 1f your company 1s ROUES multi location Also unapplied payment could be seen He rt according to this report Consider the following example Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Account Receivable Aging Summary Report Date Time 2006 06 10 2 52 12PM Page 1 of 1 SortedBy Production Location LA hal Mira de RES il Basal Payment ACPYWO1 ACPowerDistribution________ _____ _____ ____ S 51075317 4602204 35 268 87 ALDK 23324 TEO 5192106 00 192 106 00 CLAIOT Clairmont Camera Ine __ 559 865 00 59 565 00 ICOMEHOME Cometo Home Please ____ ____ 90 252 26 90 2522b ICONCO1 ConceptLighting 420 00 42000 DIREO7__ DirectLighting CC 627 00 3627 00 O O ols 2 566 00 10 663 7 13 575 1 AU gt A ESPN ESPOSA 5135297 FREEO fFreedomWeerenaalot _ sr NAKIE ae 569000 1 890 00 LUCO Commercial __ gt E MESPOT Mr Spriggs Fim amp Video Corp 471100 981 94 SS HS S o O ON Of POPSD1 Popson Studio Rental lh i OE 930 0 862 00 68 0 SHAH Y A E 17 050 0 17 050 0 oO TMPROI TM Motion Picture Equipment UNITO1 gt UnitedRentals ooo o S PYININOT gt Mnmercom_ o VYOMEO1 Women sProfessionalSoccer__ o o Jo o A Reportotals J O Oj 243 0 243 0 190 0 19
17. 00020 JARRI COMPACT 2500 HMLHESD 2006 05 24 2006 06 307 i 00210 ARRI 254K ELECTRONIC BALLAST 2006 05 24 2006 05 30 if 2 AO y 2 500949 11020 HEAVY HEAD BRUTE ARC ELEMENT 2006 05 24 2006 05 53 210 00 210 0 500949 48088 13 DIFFUSION BAG 2006 05 24 2006 05 3 500949 10006 ARRI 120 POCKET 2006 05 24 2006 05 23 2 00 10 0 500949 00121 ARRI 125 POCKET PAR SPOT LENS 2006 05 24 2006 05 3 4 es 500949 00122 ARRI 125 POCKET PAR EXTRA WIDE 2006 05 24 2006 05 30 8f 500949 00123 ARRI 125 POCKET PAR WIDE LENS 2006 05 24 2006 05 30 4 PES E es y y E E D D F 500949 4e0es 13 GEL FRAME O O o fetos aa 2006 05 30 tT o es IS D D D 0 E 500945 00124 ARR 125 POCKET PAR FROSTED FR 2006 05 24 2006 05 3 500949 MIS COQ 2324 2006 05 24 2006 05 30 1 220 00 TE Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Subrent Equipment using Pick list Select Subrental Pick List from Subrental menu A list of all equipment across the order will appear These items can be attached to a subrental vendor Many of the fields have default values but before attaching items to a subrental vendor it is possible to modify them if it is necessary To attach items to a Subrental vendor enter quantity in Qty to Subrent column If subrental accessories have to include automatically check Auto include accessories at the bottom of the Pick List The information should reflect the prices that t
18. 1 of 1 DateRange 2006 06 18 Production Productiorfitle Code ACDCO1 gt ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Exceptions Report Within Rental Tracker Pro certain questionable day to EPR ge x day transaction records are tracked These types of transactions are written to a file to retrieve for reference RTPro refers to these transactions as Exceptions The Exception Code User most typical Exceptions are those operations that involve removal of data such as voids cancellations and deletions An example of an exception is canceling items off an order Because they are canceled they no Usar longer show on the order detail If for any reason you needed to see which items were canceled and who Exception Code sau them you could refer to the Exceptions From Date Pe o Teose Options Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on Sot by C Date Equipment the report You can sort the report by Exception Code Onder User Date or Equipment Equipment User If you are looking for exceptions created by a Barcode specific user enter the user code in here or leave this ee SE al F option blank to show exceptions for all users pon Exception code If you are looking for exceptions created by a specific exception code enter the code in here or leave this option blank to show all type of exceptions The lookup list shows all the exception currently
19. 11 10 2010 Projection Date 11 10 2010 Rept Cost Listrrice Bited Revenue DayRate Demand Over Purch Pre Purch Price subrent Pro Code Repl Cost ListPrice Billed Revenue DayRate Demand Over Purch Price Subrent Proj 111280 11 18000WHMI Globe 35 700 00 41 8900000 tt el i i OH AAA A AAA HA AA ATT RAJ A Op 17s s2 0000 131 131 900 00 117 900 00 s50 000 00 900 00 45 ss2 700 00 100 7 2 s10 000 00 20 000 00 S1 800 00 1 620 00 ____ 112 S 4 830 00 41 23 ssoo00 s207000 74 s102000 AB 15 530000 4 500 00 AO 15 00 les Elo O O a N m a e 48 00 oo 18 Oo __ 7al sissooo 15 15 500 00 57 500 00 soso ma seo mp 24 432 00 112 sasso wm 1 s2700 s2700 AA eel 19 310 00 of ra aa _ 552000 10 00 9 1 800 00 2000 sf o 1 33 720 001 30 00 _ 7 el saol 2 760 00 0 00 Report Total 39691700 50222800 51547700 3522500 OO 3 720 00 g 18000 22 800W Joker Bug Video Pro Speedring 1 000 00 sso0 Description of columns Qty Own This is the current quantity owned for the location specified Unit Replace Cost is taken from the Equipment table Extended Replace Cost This is the quantity owned the replacement cost Unit List Price taken from Equipment table Total Days Billed Taken from the line item of the quantity days weeks field of t
20. 11 13 2006 INHOUSE F11 Front Board 201 TRAMTOR CINDYTOR 11 13 2006 INHOUSE Fisher Large Seat Assembly TRAITOR ___ CINDYTOR Fisher 11 Dolly TRAITOR CINDYALL 2 2008 RE F11 Diving Board TRATOR CINDYALL 32 2008 TRATOR CINDYALL 32 2008 tC AUNTING ADMIN 4223 2008 saoo soap CINDYALL 532008 __ 534000 267 YESMAN CNDYLA 1192009 L M 123200 10 001 vesman CNDYLA _1 f9 2009 NHOUSE_ o sooo HE CE E Gothic Picket Fence ADMIN 4 15 2009 _ ____ _____ ___ 35100000 11469AGAPAN Agapanthus YESMAN ADMIN 612009 J _____ ___ 8K Alpha Head CASH JCINDYLA 7 28 2009 J J 14 000 00 15114000 18K Alpha Head 100003 304 GETSM CINDYLA 7 28 2009 14 000 00 ET Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Repair Report This report prints a log of items that are in repair The ees report reflects the location at which the items are being repaired Production Filter Options Equipment Production Shows only the items that are in repair Repar Location a and linked to an order for this production Leave this blank to show items from all productions Locator x Equipment The report can be filtered to print the Currency Po requested equipment that is in repair From a look up table that appears you can choose the equipment that wok X canal Mist By seve o you want select each one you want Note You also can select multiple equipment To
21. 2006 06 1811 22 554M Page 1 of 4 Cost BALLAST BALLOU ARR 246K ELECTRONIC BALLAS 10 546 20 5730 234 O BAO ARRI 125 200 OC ELECTRONIC BAL i fo ue EE AABT e e E E NN A Report otal 0 967 103 74 Rental Inventory Change Report ein LA The report will show rental transactions which affect the rental inventory owned Listed will be the purchased retires and inventory transfers Rental Inventory Change Report r PET P x Include Equipment With No Change 7 Exclude Owner Consignment Items E Filter Options Exclude Owner Consignment Items When it is apio IS gt checked any item in the Rental Inventory Screen that has Category a value in the Owner field is excluded from the report Equipment cae Department Shows only the equipment belonging to Range this Department Leave this blank to show items from all Begin Date departments End Date 10 2 2011 Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on list icon in front of Equipment Range and select each one you want to include in report Date Range Displays the detail of changes between this specif
22. 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Vendor Last Equipment 00265 Last Quantity 2 Main 00005 Code 39040 Desc 100A 220V F BATES TO Ordered 114 Out O To go out 114 pu Prey Next Exit OK Success Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 16 36 Order The number of the order you are working with You can see the name of customer in lt gt block in front of order number Vendor Represents the name of the vendor that you sub rented this item from Last Equipment The code of the last checked out equipment Last Quantity The number of the last checked out equipment Main This is the main item code for current equipment Code This is the equipment code of the current item Description This is the description of current equipment 334 Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Checkout Sheet From this page you can print the checkout sheet of an order This is the SEL same report that you can print from the desktop version of RTPro and added here for convenience to the scanner program This report saves the Ono Price selections you have made and defaults them for the next time you print it Pande ee es a Select Information 7 Partial Note As Exchange Rentals Only Only print the rental items in checkout sheet CE a ala Sales Only Only print the sale items in checkout sheet Print Kit Header V Use Biling Schedule Print Replacement Price a Print Subrental Vendor Copies Rentals and Sales Pri
23. ARRISUN 1200 PLUS PAR HEAD z x x ARRISUN 575 PAR HEAD AA ES Currently In Repair Report This report reflects the items that are currently in repair If the repair 1s linked to an order and production it will be specified on the report as well The report contains Repair Ticket Equipment code Description etc This report also shows the complete cost of repair at the bottom of sheet Filter Options Production Shows only the items that are in repair and linked to an order for this production Leave this blank to show items from all productions Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Repair location If you want to select the equipment currently in repair by the repair location you must choose this item from a look up table Location If you are using multi location features you can also select the equipment currently in repair by a location Currency If you are using multi currency features you can also select the equipment currently in repair by your different currencies in use Sort by Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report Example Rental Tracker Pro Currently In Repair Report Date Time 3 27 2012 11 26 32 AM Page 1 of 2 A cc dl ad LT EE San eon Soe Ticket Production Repair Type Location Date Out Cost 101 DOLFI1325__ F11 4 Way Low Level Head 1 201 TRAMTOR ___ JCINDYTOR
24. Abe LOB 2 514400 80 00 100 2362 1250CURVED 1250CumedBenoh___________k COUGARTOWN Abc LOB 2 514400 80 00 100 2362 1251SLATBE Green Slet ParkBench SC ICOUGARTOWN Abc LOB 2 8144 00 80 00 100 2362 14000____ BKAlphaHesad ______________ COUGARTOWN Abc LOB 576 00 320 00 100 362 14000 01 220 F Bates To M Camlock 18K 12K 6 COUGARTOWN Abe 1 100 2362 1400002 _ iSKAlphaFresnellens_________ COUGARTOWN Abc LOB 1 00 2362 1400003 i8kKAlphaClearLensW Rim_________ COUGARTOWN Abc LOB 1 00 2362 1400004 18K 12K Fresnel 29 5PcSaim Set W Bag COUGARTOWN Abe LOB Tt 1 00 362 14000 05 __ iSKAlphalensProtectoriCircular COUGARTOWN Abo oos S 1 __ 100 __362 1812FFPGBA I8K12KFFPowergemBallast_ COUGARTOWN Abe LOS Si0800 60 00 100 362 1812KPOWFE 18K 12K 6KPowerFeederICOUGARTOWN Abc LONO8 Tt __ 100 2362 18HMIDEGB__ 18KHMIDE Globe_____________ COUGARTOWN Abc LOO 1 S45 00 25 00 100 282 HEADEXT18 18K 12K6KHMI50 Head Ext JCOUGARTOWN Abo COTO 2 818 00 10 00 1 00 Subrental Equipment Revenue Billed This report displays the quantity of Cx Subrental Equipment Revenue Report RTPro Demo Company 1 x subrental equipment and the revenue generated by sub rented equipment The Sr report also contains revenue generated by id O Uploaded Invoices non sub rental equipment It lists amount C NorUploaded Invoises totals for non sub rental and sub renta
25. During a cold boot the following two items display as text on the screen e IPL e OS Then perform all the steps described in section 2 above to reprogram the scanner EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc MC3000 9000 Series Overview MC3000 9000 scanner can be used in both Wireless and Batch Mode In the wireless mode scanner communicates directly to the database and performs all operations in real time The verification of the data entered by the scanner is immediate and user gets a conformation or an error message after each scan In Batch Mode scanner gathers the information that 1s scanned which can be sent to the desktop RTPro by using a cradle and cable or it can be sent via the wireless mode Therefore if you have the wireless system available but you are out of the range of the wireless network you can use the scanner in the batch mode and then upload your data to RTPro when you get in range of the wireless RTPro Sethighting www rentaltracker com Ver 5 0 Batch Mode Preferences network Mode 1 1 2009 00 01 34 In the first screen of RTPro you will see the Version number of the scanner program For example in this picture the version of the scanner program is 5 0 and at the bottom of the main screen you will see the date and time that scanner uses If this date and time is incorrect you can set the proper date and time in the Control Pan
26. Filter Options Sending Locsion O Recenving Location alockHo i Sending Location shows only the results of selected Sending Location Leave this option blank to show all ee w OK the original Locations Receiving Location Shows only the results of selected Receiving Location Leave this option blank to show all the destination locations StockNo The report can be filtered to print the requested stock item that is belonging to the orders From a look up table that appears you can choose the stock that you want You also can select multiple stockno To do this click on list icon in front of StockNo and select each one you want to include in report Sales Drop Shipment This report prints Sales Drop Shipment for specified Vendor Date Range and Stock selection Filter Options Date Range Use these dates to filter results You can leave each of these dates blank to include all from start or to the end StockNo The report can be filtered to print the requested stock item s From a look up table that appears you can choose the stock that you want You also can select multiple stockNo To do this click on list icon in front of StockNo and select each one you want to include in report Im Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Vendor Select Vendor or leave it blank to print records from all vendors for selected criteria Management Reports Order Log Report This report pr
27. HAUNTING 1812kKPOW 241 582 a HAUNTING 1S2KPOW ms CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 18HMIDEGB 241 873 CON PC EE SH E A CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812FFPGB 09 ol J O mole CT 59369 9369 O pe ff e CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812FFPGB 445 0 28 000 00 0 2 KINOFL 23 J 2 56940 569 40 28 000 00 CHEBRIDG HAUNTS rerarroW 88 3 so A OA 3 15000 ICINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812KPOW 445 0 3 150 00 Ol 7Im0tE Tt 3 150 00 CINEBROG HAUNTING JISHMDEGB 45t 5 6 400 00 AAA fg toe 540 00 CINEBRIDG HAUNTING TIBHMDEGR 445 DL Sen 00 Ao ot Sn EZ 58 300 00 AA ota 99026000 aa MN SM 07 sol HE SN GG 80522718 Description of Columns Days Rented This column looks at the rental checkout check in detail level The days are calculated against the checkout and check in date and the date range specified This column never includes subrentals Rental Revenue This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the extended amount of the invoice rental detail level This column never includes subrentals Quantity Billed This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the quantity of the invoice rental detail level This column never includes subrentals Vendor If running the report to include subrentals then the subrentals will be broken out by vendor The vendor will be
28. If there 1s a sign then there are no more security checks under the heading On the right side of the screen the system displays which users are permitted or prohibited from using the function To prohibit a user from using a feature Click on the user s code on the Permitted area Next click on the gt the user s name will be moved to the prohibited side To permit a user to use a feature 1 Click on the user s code on the Prohibited area 2 Click on the lt the user s name will be moved to the permitted side The gt gt moves all users listed on the permitted side to the prohibited side The lt lt moves all users listed on the prohibited side to the permitted side Note Use Refresh the Tree icon from the toolbar to clear the screen Printing out a security list To print a report of all permissions click on the printer icon A list of users who have rights on certain screens of application will print New Security When New Security option under the View menu is checked program displays the new Security features for the latest version in a red bold font This way user can easily detect new security items and assign proper rights to users In example below Change Grid Colors is a new security item EN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Refresh Tree J New Security in Version 5 00 E Main Page Controls Administration Module E Administration Security Administration
29. In the Rental Order Screen kits are showing in light yellow background and kit header s description in bold Note You may edit the quantity of kit header in the grid The system will prompt update the kit quantities If yes the kits line items will be updated Removing Kits To remove a kit click on Remove Kit from Action menu in Rental Order Screen Customized Rental Order Screen A This screen is mostly used to allow the user to enter a summarized version of the order and print that one instead of printing the normal quote Select Customized Output from Goto menu or click on its icon from the toolbar Users will have ability to add edit or delete a record Program displays Subtotal Shipping Tax and Total at the bottom of the screen The value for the Subtotal Shipping Tax and Total will not be editable and they will display the same information as when user clicks the Display Totals in the Rental Order Screen Note The total amount of line items should balance to the subtotal If the user tries to exit the screen and the total amount of customized rental order does not balance to the subtotal amount then the user will be warned Line Items do not balance to the subtotal Note This screen can be used for Sales customization too and it is also accessible through the Sales Order Screen a6 Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E Customized Rental Order Screen i o File search View Record Help e
30. Inventory PO Invoice Received or by double clicking on the ordered Stocks in the middle grid of Inventory Purchase Order Detail screen The sales transaction for the selected purchase order such as quantity invoice number and the date of transaction will display on this screen Here you can add received equipment to inventory If you are adding equipment to the sales inventory system will prompt Sales Inventory Transaction Screen Enter the quantity and press post edit Note When sales items are ordered program brings over the last price which is charged against that vendor for that stock item If there has never been a purchase program brings over the cost from Sales price on the Sales Inventory ETS Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note When SU button on the toolbar is clicked program will prompt All Sales items received will be posted to inventory Continue If Yes then received items will be added to Sales inventory Inventory PO Misc Transaction Double clicking on the ordered equipment in the lower grid will open Inventory Po Misc Transaction The Misc transaction for the selected purchase order such as invoice number quantity and the date of transaction will display on this screen Here you can delete Misc items that are received through the specific Purchased Order Inventory PO Detail Search In this screen users are able to enter Equipment or StockNo and search across all Inventory POs Double cl
31. La oo iji F Pi dE ela al This report prints cost of sales for each product and its quantity for each order that TP sae ose HT Coe is shipped as well as the total cost of sales thee Cad for the selected criteria You can filter Category results of report by department category First Stock i Purchase Cost and stock date of sale location and Last Stockit ls currency There is an option for the user to include Misc ler E select Current Cost or the Purchase Cost Ber Date EE Current Cost comes from the Current value of the Cost column in the Sales Inventory End Das frovereon l Stock table And Purchase Cost is Productor bal calculated from the Sales Inventory Location el Transaction data Currency Filter Options Department Shows only the stock belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the stock belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Date Range Use these dates to filter results using the ship date of products You can leave each of these dates blank to include all from start or to the end Stock Range You can limit the range of stock displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending stock Leave these blank to show all stock You also can select multiple stock numbers To do this click on list icon in front of First Stock number and select ea
32. MONDIAL said tad EA NA A as 331 Checkout Barcode zerean idos 331 GHECKOUE NONCOG ER RSR Rd die A ee elite 332 Cancel CHECKOUT BOlCO GEO ER Re RE RM PR NS LR 333 cance he KOO NON COG CO A ars os a Ne nt ee Tan ti un 333 MaE O ne dt it d td 334 Print Checkout SABRE ee ann dt bei ae Die eee 335 c rrent Week CONTA CES 2 dis 335 ENCON 10 A0 0 10 in O e as 336 get el Cl ge 6 41 6616 lt 0 eee em eT OTe a St tO PEM TTT Ne ee AES TES POO ETT Pe TTD PP TES On RT PEN Pee Ra ee Serer re ce MY tee 336 cancel Check I0 BAlCOO losa dada 337 CON CE CHECKIN INON COC ECS si Rd AAA A AAA Re Nid 337 MIS CVC ORI raat ict acetate iranian eases RO nn de de ten do De ae niece see CO Cd 337 Mass Noncoded Detail Information occoccocnnccncnnccncnncnnnnncnncnanoncnncnncnnnnnrnncnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnncnncnnannnon 338 Mass Check in Noncoded Information ccccccccceccecceseeseeccecceceuceuseuceeceeseuseeeeeseeseuseuseeseeseeseeseeseeseueeesens 338 Print GEC INS EU a ei 339 current Week CON ta Sita ins 339 A O ic ie 339 COCCI SOU ti 340 R USSIE RON AE E aE D Se fa eee EO ET eae eee eee 340 El GIDC CK OE SIAC Cbs cise as ache aac its ecc ib bici 340 DS ee PT ARE OR AEE tin Me te a SOR ent bee de NON 341 NA A te et de 342 VIE BOOT M St NE oso 342 AGO Lar OIE TR TR RS A A iia a 343 STABO TEO E eeeee ame ae OC MTeoR RT A E das BAO RE Pele RO Ie 343 US aoe teat a eta Ne nt As nt die celle D ue 344 ODUOMalACCESSOLES ESS SAR EN NN ns Ne 344
33. POW EO R DOOE ER RS Title ta ei tee idees 345 LAURE LA LE M 1010 D lee Wet OS 345 COLO BOO A A A A AL AA A AAA 345 TIOUDICSROOUNO a a d 345 INSTANMNO RTREO OF DClSISU CINCO rere eT iE O AN AA Ai A E 346 Make RTDrOS AUTO STO a AAA dba 347 Mod VNG SPECTA 24 Mi dci 347 How to Work With Remote Registry Editor 348 AUd RIDIOSESNOMCUE TO SE MENU re i n 348 FPO EEE 349 General QUESOS iii ss tn ce as a nr di 350 Questions about AGMINIST ATION 5 i 351 Questions about File Ma Nte aC NS 351 QUESTIONS about Inventory a iia 352 Questions about Order Processi sapins an a R AAA A 352 Questions DOUE ui idad 353 QUESTIONS about Repo Sida 353 Questions about HISTORIA A NA AA E a 354 BILLING ORDER Sunat 355 Billing an Order Single and Multiple Order INVOICING ss 356 Run the Orders to Bill Report for Weekly Billing Process cooocooocoooroorooonnoconoronaronaronnnnnnonos 356 BRUNO SINGIC OFC OF SS a 356 Multiple Order INVOICING Bulk Billing 4 357 O A e An 358 CONTI S a Dr cit oda 359 PERENNE the IV OIC 53 a 359 HANDEING ORDERS alo nance ureauvie wvasaceneeeacenere waxessuseauviausasaeeneceacenens 361 Ereate a Quote Reservation Or OUR 362 Create Ordenada NA IEA 362 Create NCW POQUITO A bdo 363 Ordes rEdqUI MEN aa 363 AUS UB RENTAL ta aaa 364 TO e 0 SUD FONO FE COTAS a bie 365 Update TOTS AE E SAA AA AE 365 PARE TR QUO LOA oa 366 A nd DS te E de en ed nn 366 Ch CKINBOULITETRS RSS SNS
34. Rental Equipment Pick List The Rental Equipment Picklist is a report which can REARS bee aP X be given to a customer which list equipment they can choose to rent Equipment which prints on this Paper Size Letter 8 1 2 by 11 inches report can be controlled Equipment items which print on this report must be check marked Print on Equipment Pick List on the equipment table f Daily O Weekly This report requires a file named RtproSL rav to be available If this file does not exist then you will get an error when running the report specifying that the Location Department file was not found Please contact Rental Tracker in f Curenc this case Y w OK X Cancel List Save You can customize this report to meet your customer s needs Options Department Select the department from department Lookup Table or leave this blank to show items from all departments Daily Weekly Choose daily or weekly price Paper Size Select one of two choices from paper size drop down menu Use 8 12 x 14 size paper if your printer allows to reduce the number of pages printed Example ET Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc RTI Studios Page 1 of2 Equipment Rental Pick List 10 10 10 Customer Name TEME QTY DESCRIPTION PRICE PKG PRICE ITEM am DESCRIPTION PRICE _PKG PRICE ee RE IS adder 8 Step ROADRUNNER Roadrunner SANDERGES EE RC RE AA ILE DABLAM LE ais JMD
35. Tables Farent Table TA Add Parent y Edit Parent a Delete Parent Document Attachment ys Add Attachment Delete Attachment Production Table Vendor Table Contact T able Ele Salesperson Table EI Administration Billing Schedule E Administration Move a Change Grd Colors Maintenance Module Inventors Module Onder Processing Module Reports Module Security Search Box Program gives users ability to search for a UA RE i i LA T P pany specific Security node through the security NT Setup tree When user types something in AOS Search B t f th d z Ta earch Box on top of the screen and presses gt FdaNew Order 2 Eje Enter program will do a partial search for that searched text and display all Nodes that ATP it is found in red color and bold font E Main Page Controls If a Node is not visible program will open the F Administration Module sub tree for it If this is not possible then E Maintenance Module program will display the Parent node in red E Inventory Module F so user knows which node to open to get to Order Processing Module the one with the searched phrase El des ke Add New Order Edit Order Header Delete Onder Duplicate Current Order Rental Order Screen S40 Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Tables Master Master is the top level in customer group Each master can include many parents but it is not necessary for parents to have a master Y
36. from all departments Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Production Type Shows only the orders linked to this given production type Leave this option blank to show orders linked to all production types Production Shows only the orders belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all productions Project Shows only the orders linked to this given project Leave this option blank to show orders linked to all projects Subrental Vendor Shows only the orders with Subrental from the given Subrental vendor Leave this option blank to show Subrental from all vendors Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Current Rentals Report Date Ti me 2006 06 1710 06 5M Sorty By OrderNo Format Summary Location LA Code Name Begin Date TA Eo we Wo osependemon anf aa LA COMEHO Posephnderson 0 5008807 2004 09 15 1 2004 09 29 2004 09 30 S qq gt 2 PHAGE LA ee pe 2002 11 28 2002 11 28 2002 12 06 TR ROMEO lesepndeson f 200000 oe UIU prs 02
37. gt gt GLOVELATEX ioves Latex Box 100 IGLOVERUE oves Rubber Black HAMMER Hamm O oS LATERN patem WithBattery NAILSGTT _NaisGaugeT O o ISCREWDRVR BorewDriver2 sd STEELLOCK PisinfessStecllockWie gt Fu TIE10 Es Pack 100 Ex Alpha Hess Ferrer ERIZK FF Fowergem Balast aS KERS Mark MARKERELK Watch otMeer lt Giaoc PT Ls arke HARPER Dame Blok _ O ISHARPIERED Fharpies Reg 2 _ TAPEGRNG Distal Green Tare Sales Reorder Report Use this report to find out what you need to reorder for SSS your sales inventory Using the current quantity in stock the quantity on back order minimum quantity on hand aie ees o and quantity to reorder from the sales inventory screen e Description this report calculates how many items should be C StockNo reordered When the quantity on hand drops below the specified reorder point that stock will appear on this Group By vendor r report to prompt you to reorder To help with that task Vendor Manufacturer and Measure information is Department displayed for the stock as well as the quantity to reorder Category z and cost FiretStockt O mE Filter Options Last StockH Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on Location x the report You can sort the report by Description Currency Stock Group By Vendor If check marked this report groups and separates all the items to be ordered fro
38. you can see a list of all Contacts entered into the application They may be active or inactive m Use this button to print mailing list labels for all Contacts Merging Contact records Enter Contact x At times contact are double entered into the system because of a mistake There is the option to merge Contact to Merge with contacts so that there are not duplicates To do this right click on the contact you wish to get rid of select merge ws contact select the contact you want to merge to A record will be written to the exception file noting the merge date and time and the user who did it Note Please pay attention when you merge two A Cancel T Help contacts once merged the first contact code will be deleted and all the historical information will be transferred to the contact selected Use caution when using this tool as there 1s non reversal after the merge Managing Contact records Contact records can be added by clicking on icon To edit Existing records you can double click on them or select record and click on icon If you want to delete a Contact record you should ensure Contact record was not used Create Edit Contact record After clicking add or edit icons Contact Entry Screen will open The following fields are available Location If your company 1s multi location this field will be available This limits the access of using this contact for users which have access to the location This field
39. your shop is on top of adding purchases there should not be any unprocessed transactions This listing gives you the opportunity to reconcile the sales inventory Sales Kit List If the same combinations of stock types are needed on orders repeatedly they can be packaged together The list of stocks as a package can be included on any order without having to add each stock item individually A Sales Kit List can build in one of two ways from the Inventory Menu or from the Sales Order Screen in Order Processing In either case the Sales Kit List is building from current Stock codes in listing If there is something that you want to include in the kit that is not in the Stocks table create the Stock Code first From the Inventory menu click on the Sales drop down tab and select Sales Kit List This screen could be filtered by Department Location or both to see the available sales kits If you leave these fields blank and pressing Refresh F2 button all sales kits in the inventory will be listed Note In the Sales Kit List screen sales kits can be added edited or deleted Double clicking on any row items in this page will open the Sales Kit Detail screen and the content of each sales kit can be reviewed Department This filed is the identifier for the department of each kit Code Identify the Sales Kit with an alphanumeric code up to 10 characters in length Description An alphanumeric description up to 50 characters in length 1s use
40. 00 565 00 565 00 670188 367___ MARKERB COUGARTO Abc ___ Mark A Lot Marker Black___ 10 00 5100 00 5100 00 1 000 00 S060 56 00 670116 227 ss MARKERB TRAITOR Cinebridge Productions Mark A Lot Marker Black 10 00 52 00 5200 s2000 50 60 6 00 _670080 366 MARKERB MODERNFA ABC Studios Mark A Lot Marker Black 1 00 55 00 53 78 53 78 50 60 50 60 2 670080 365____ MARKERB MODERNFA ABC Studios _______ MarkALotMarker Blue_____ Srl srel soel 3120 amoo wooo MODERNA aca aa a aa sm 67008181 _ MISC0001 COUGARTO Abe i Miscltemi _ 1000 5100 00 5100 00 1 000 00 670188367 __ MISC0001 COUGARTO Abc_________________ MiscSales 100 00 510 00 510 00 1 000 00 670241 448___ MISCO001 REVENGE Newline Misc Sales 1 400 ssooo 550 00 200 00 a PE SEE ea Le ana EE EE ES Ii en 670250 111 ______ SCREWD FIGHTER Paramount Pictures ______ ScrewDriver2__________ 200 100 00 5100 00 5200 00 520 00 540 00 emtialar sHaRe RAOR One Produsser Sharps Back 1200 200 saan SAN M se 670116 227 SHARPIE TRAMTOR Cinebridge Productions Sharpies Red 1200 S210 5210 670150 353 _ SONY1 _ COUGARTO Abc ________ SonyProjector 100 5800 00 5720 00 720 00 1 000 00 1 000 00 roisilass JrAPEBCA MODERNFA ascu ea Tape 200 sooo s1000 320 00 sso oo 100 00 _670072 338 _ TAPEBL4 MODERNFA ABC Studios Digtal Bl
41. 02 07 930 00 Sid SSCS 930 00 meoo i SS 71 860 00 Report otals DEE IS EE E EZ Refund Adjustment This report will show all the Refund Adjustment Payments within the date range specified The report is separated by GL codes See the following example Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company AR Refund Adjustment Report Date Time 2006 06 10 3 45 33PM CreationDateRange 2006 06 10 Location LA 1010 10 FCB Checking ent Productiotode RefundAdjustment pent creat 1 2959 2005 12 28 40 000 00 Totals 40 000 00 1020 10 FCB Money Market ent Production ode RefundAdjustment HE 2959 ACPA 2005 12 28 40 000 00 Totas CT 40 000 00 Reporff otals 40 000 00 40 000 00 ETS Account Receivable O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cash Receipts Cash Receipt report will list the amount of received payment based on GL Account The total amount received for selected GL account and the report totals will be printed Leave GL Account blank to show all GL codes for the selected date ranges GL Account w OF X Cancel Example Rental Tracker Pro Cash Receipt Date Time 4 1 2012 10 43 03 PM Page 1 of 4 Date Range 1 1 2011 12 31 2011 GLAcct BANK RANE Bank Of Abed mae le pe Amount 2117 2011 ONELIFE One Life To Live 5310 00 a 0 00 2117 2011 ONELIFE One Life To Live 5310 00 5310 00 3432011 MORNGLORY Paramount Pictures Warner Bro
42. 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Category Description Cu Refresh Fe When complete click on Update and Exit or press F10 ANOTHER WAY From the Rental Order Entry Screen press the F3 button and a sidebar of the equipment will display te ca aan You can then drag items to an order Display Code Desch Searchin Code Desc DEPT1 Departme e DISTRO Distribution e GENI Generators e GLO Globes e GRIP Grip e GRIPTRE Grip Trucks Add SUBRENTAL On Rental Order Screen Select Subrental Pick List Er Subrental Goto Action from Subrental Menu Subrental Subrental Misc Subrental Pick List Subrental Records Subrental Purchase Order Enter quantities Enter Vendor and PO Click Update Order or press F3 to continue Vendor Pl editing or Click Update and Exit or press F10 to line item then Select Vendor and PO a update order and Exit Click Yes in message Update Order ETS Handling Orders O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc To edit Subrental records Select Subrental Records from Subrental Menu Subrental Gaa ads Hels Edit lines make sure to lock the lines Subrental Subrental Misc F9 Subrental Pick List Subrental Records Fil Subrental Purchase Order Update Totals Click DISPLAY TOTALS Button Make edits if a applicable Y Display Totals Enter SHIPPING CHARGES if apply ee PRES Discount Oo Actual 6 677 00 S
43. 4000 UBC Adapter This device makes the charging of multiple batteries easy and cost effective Simply snap the battery into the adapter and slide the adapter into the UBC charging station The charging station holds up to four adapters and recharges the battery in approximately two hours Part Number 21 32665 34 ES Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Belt Shoulder Holster This Velcro clasp holster comes with a durable nylon adjustable belt to secure the MC9000 G on the user s waist as well as an adjustable nylon shoulder strap Part Number 1 64896 01 How to Reboot Warm Boot A warm boot restarts the mobile computer by closing all running programs All data that was not saved will be lost Note Files that remain open during a warm boot may not be retained To perform a Warm Boot Hold down the Power button for approximately five seconds As soon as the mobile computer starts to perform a warm boot release the Power button Cold Boot A cold boot restarts the mobile computer and erases all users stored records and entries that were not saved in flash memory Application and Platform folders Never perform a cold boot unless a warm boot does not solve the problem Note Do not hold down any key button or the trigger other than the Power button during a reset Performing a cold boot restores formats preferences and other settings to the default settings Note Any data previously synchronized with a co
44. 5 Internal Notes and Customer Notes The options will move the cursor to customer notes or internal notes for line item By pressing F2 on these columns notes can be viewed and edited Refresh Original Discountable Status This option will reset the discountable flag from the default setting indicated on the equipment table setup Checking Equipment Availability for orders You can review availability of equipment by checking Check TIENNE Availability box Equipment items listed in red are not available fe brental Goto Action Help Availability of items can be checked on pull date or ship date of an Check Availabiity F7 Pl order CES Dean ARRI 120 POCKET To see the detail breakdown of the availability of equipment code highlight its code and press F6 System will open Equipment Availability Screen For more details refer to Equipment ARRI 125 POCKET PAR FR Availability Screen in Chapter 5 sab el Desc ARRI COMPACT 2500 HMI HE ARRI 2 5 4K ELECTRONIC When an item is not available in your store you can sub rent or substitute it See Subrental section and Substitute section in this chapter for more details LS Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Reviewing inventory items across an equipment code You can also see barcodes for selected equipment and orders even 1f they are out To see inventory records for selected equipment in list press F8 or click on Inventory Records
45. 6 22 2010 6282010 550000 _ __ sooo Modern Family 348 6222010 6282010 100 00 _ 100 00 Modern Family 380 6722 2010 628200 5100 00 _ __ ON Modern Family 355 6 25 2010 7 8 2010 1 340 00 68 00 CC 560 250 00 61 658 00 Modern Family 363 65 2010 7 1 2010 1 000 00 __ __ 1 000 00 AT Total S17 67500 58 802 00 17 000 00 74 00 76 750 00 116 44 170 184 56 Revenue Generated Reports The data used to reflect the revenue EEE LEE EE a generated is from confirmed invoices A breakdown of all types of revenue Creation Date From PON Format rentals sales loss etc will be lo hozam y Ps displayed with individual totals and C Detal report totals The summary report will Producton summarize all invoices from the chosen C Uploaded Invoices field above while the detail report Locatia y C Norrliploaded Inoices will list the individual invoices used to Cunency Al calculate the revenue generated You Esclude Credit may summarize the report with Parent Production Production Type Project Salesperson Customer Contact or Job Component Filter Options Creation Date Range To filter report to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date 1s entered system includes all invoices credits after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before
46. A E Shpono Cl Sales Stock Tree Drocourt AO Tax 20 34 i Shopng Method fWILLCALL 58 2480 ALCOHOL PREP PADS 2 Orderti 310992 Production MIPTUCKCRE CELESTE GALLERY NIP TUL re Sales Stock Tree In Sales Order screen Sales Stock tree is invisible by default it can be opened by clicking the Drag Drop item from Goto menu or by pressing F3 button In this tree a list of all sales stock 1tems being sold in the company s warehouse can be seen This list is arranged in three levels to show Departments Categories and Sales Stock Codes To add one item or more to the sales list drag items from Sales Stock Tree to Order List After dropping an item into the list cursor will stop on Ordered column The quantity can be entered or you can accept 1 by default Sales Stock Tree nodes can be shown by Codes description or both by user s choice There 1s a refresh button to update list for latest changes You can search this list by code or description To continue searching just press F2 after first search List will search from current position to the end Order List Items that are ordered will be shown in this section Here sales stock can be added by typing their own codes or selecting them from the drop down list in Stock column Fields which can be edited on a line item are the quantity list price actual price discount locked column taxable GL account the sort order and the internal and customer notes
47. Barcoded Out of Repair There are three ways for checking out Barcoded items from repair list 1 Select the check Barcoded out of repair option at the bottom of screen Color of Barcode field will be changed to yellow enter scan barcode that you wish to check out of repair 2 Double click on an item that you want to check out or highlight the row and press F7 Repair Information page will appear Select ChkOut Repair from Action menu or click Check Out item From Repair icon 3 Another way 1s to right click on 1tem row that you want to check out select Check Item Out of Repair System will ask for confirmation press Ok and enter the resolution description to check out item from the repair list Note After checking out an item from the repair items list the row of the checked out item will turn to green Note You also can cancel check out by right clicking on the item row and select cancel check out Check Noncoded into Repair To add Noncoded items into repair on the equipment column select the equipment code and enter in the quantity Note Noncoded items can be canceled from repair by using Cancel Checkin option from right click menu When selected program displays a dialog box and prompts for the quantity If the quantity is equal to quantity in repair the system will remove the line This is the same as entering in a 0 on the quantity column Check Noncoded Out of Repair Select Item that you want to check ou
48. Credit Memo GL Distribution report prints out a report of each invoice credit memo with a breakdown of each GL transaction for From Date that invoice The options are by date range and ToDate payment type Invoices to be uploaded Payment Type If checked uploaded invoices will be listed in the Invoices Io be Uniosded 7 report Location Currency wf OK X Cancel S Lit Save td Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Invoice and Credit Memo GL Distribution Date Time 2006 06 11 4 07 23Phi Page 1 of 3 Currency US T1 752 00 Mot Balanced TO OO 003 0705 5000 W 550 00 Boke sag Allow For DT ea i 550 00 ne 10 400 Allow ForDoubttul Prey F atr 100238 P004 02 07 LEUTO Commercial gt gt E003 06 16P004 02 08 91 016 00 81 016 00 1355 20 200 Fil Equip Miss DamBriepr MCT 27 336 00 4050 10 200 Lighting Equip ARRI T 50 660 00 Totas 91 052299 39 17 135 80 1 030 920 16 per Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc GL Distribution Grouped by GL Code The GL Distribution Grouped by GL Code report prints out a report of each GL account with the activity from each invoice for that account The options are by From Date date range GL range and payment type If your company To Date is multi location or multi currency you can also choose Location or Currency or both to filter report GL Code Range x Payment Type Location Currency
49. Draft attached to it program does not allow closing the order The closed order can be return to live by selecting Open Order Please note that the Open Order option is only available when the Order is closed The option for Force Close an Order is under the Record Menu When selected a message comes up and asks Are you sure If Yes program will close and mark the opened order to Stop All Billing even if there are rentals which have not been checked out or sales which have not shipped If there are any rentals which are still out or if a draft invoice is attached to the order RTPro does not allow closing the order TN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc A closed order can be restored to live by selecting Open Order Please note that the Open Order option is only available when the Order 1s closed Attachment List 1 This option allows files to be attached to an order An example would be a picture a signed agreement or perhaps a certificate of insurance document The Attachment List screen consists of three sections Scan File which allows you to attach files using scanner Browse File section which allows you to select a file to attach and the Attachment list that shows the attached files Attached files can be opened or deleted using right click menu There is allowing the option to drag a file to the attachment list Note When there is a document attachment program displays Attachment List icon as red Order
50. Drop Y Or X Coca P Her Return Shipment You can return shipment of Sales stock in this screen Please note that 1f shipment 1s returned the record of the shipment and the return 1s stored in the program If you do not want a record of the shipment and the return to be saved in the program you should cancel the shipment instead By returning shipments the return will come up on billing reports as a credit charge which can be given to the customer Also ifa restocking percentage 1s setup for the production and or sales stock item the restocking charges will reflect on billing reports as well Cancel Menu Cancel Shipment You can cancel shipping of an item here Simply enter the quantity you want to Cancel and press OK Please note that canceling a shipment removes any record of the item ever shipped If you want to keep the record of the shipment then you need to return the shipment instead of canceling it Cancel of shipment 1s allowed only 1f the order was not billed for Sales The cancel shipment will be noted on the exception file Cancel Return You can cancel Return shipment of Sales stock here Simply enter the quantity you want to Cancel its return and press OK Receive Transfer Menu These options will only be enable for multiple location clients and on orders marked as a Transfer Receive When Receive 1s selected program opens a small dialog and prompts for the quantity Simply enter the quantity you want to Receive
51. E A A die eds 281 RENTO INVENTO VO Ea MR ouai colin 282 Sales Inventor VOTO a AAA AA A IA dt ts it 282 VIeW ODUIONS ICONS A AA AAA it 283 Vertical BOF CASO DUDAS dd dd a iaa 283 HIS TOR ics AN on O A 285 troduction tTO ISO di ad tie 286 Restore PIOGUCEION TEO TUS CONY lol 286 Restore Quotes OF Orders om HITO a ia 286 RESTOLE INVOICES TOTS TO Vi A A A dd isa de 286 Move Production Orders Invoices and Quotes to History 287 ACCOUNT RECEIVABLE 0 00 iiaaiic estonien ane anne seensiensuannedevensdensconsaaicenss 289 Und rstandine the AR Menu la VOU Lali iia dra 290 PA MEA a 290 NEW POVIMENCE RER A EEEE la 290 ADDIY Payments to INVOICES Re nanas no oo 290 POYMEN ELSE AAA E ren eas einen ta RG een Dei de ere 291 CHANGING Pay Menta SAA amine wos A ne A aia tetas T nn 292 CREOLE Crea EMM Osa 293 credit Memo LI da ANA A AAA A nai in 293 REDOR Sa 293 Production Account INgUILY asada 293 Print statements OV PLOGUCTION sita adi ASA NA OAA 294 PrntStatements DY POrONTt NN aida 295 PAGING SUNNY Sn A ee Re ARGUS Et 296 AGING Detail by Producti n AA A ere tente tte seen 296 AJNE Det OV DOS A adas 297 Aging Detail DY BITING NAME cr he a I ala ne cn en iae 297 Payment Recevet BY DOVE sari teed nitrate esta lettre teen 298 POVIMCHNERCCCIVEO BY VD A tree retire aan 299 DAGDD ICT POVIMENES A A A aa 299 REFRANES A A A A ii 300 CASAR COLI ESE 301 Cash R cents Joumal SUMIMOTY Sid medicale AAA 301 Cash Receipts JOUTNG DE bol 302 Customers Sales SHMIN
52. EEE 63 BINE SCHEdUIE ES A Rd to a en oinau 63 Biling SCNEGUIC Templates nero Listen 64 Billing SCNCGUIC COURS A Ne de ler datant le tartes dates delete ea 64 MAO nn gm A Se ne uae ee et Ci ces 65 Move Order to ano tner Prod CHO aaa 65 Move Production to another Parent riein ani a a NE RESE ENNE ETAETA 65 MOVE TO HIS COU lt A NAN 65 MONIENA CIOSC 2 tala 66 FICE MAINTENANCE ete vs cole Ocaso due den wate ude ernun cas soins de eine 67 Introduction to File Maintenance ses Aid 68 INVENTORY MENU rae a A A il 68 locaton TODE EE E TE EN ROT TETE E OTO 68 PPE NTO E E E E E E N 69 Rental Category TOD AAA A AA A A a 69 Sdies Category TONE dales 70 Retired Reason TODO A A A A AE AAA AE AA A 70 Repair TYPE TADA a a Sa 70 IS TORIE nd a do CRT Be 0 A ee AA 70 PLEGUIDINCNE GIO GPa TAD E INR ic tas bates bal aac a 70 order PrOCESSIN SIV EUs AS 71 Producton AVE TOD Cn RER A A T et ere are de non 71 SHID M tThOQ LODE LES NE ARE Se RS ie ca ei etat ta ee 71 SHIPPING AQAresS TObDIe se need aid 71 PROTECTOR AAA A ES ES 71 JOD COMPONENTE TADE A dde 71 BAS ARM io 71 Pay TUDO TADOS A A RAN di a ture A tre e bas 71 Generale age TOUS AA A A de in 71 TOTO eii Lee ect ol 72 TOMS TOD Oi AAA A AAA A DA a ER a lla 73 CUERNO TODO cit tb i n 73 General Men odiado 73 MAC TIE e aca 73 A a a ee a 73 DENTS Men De E D bn din Oo taie Lite lie 74 Delete IOV WS EN pasta RER CR aio 74 INV ENTORY APP nd pavucscesdvesdesunss dvecesedevecesveecece
53. GELFRO020 GELFROd20 14 o FF This feature has the option to include the accessories automatically when ordering equipment and automatically checkout the accessories Adding Equipment to the Accessory List An equipment code that has accessories becomes Main Code and will be shown in bold letters on top of the Accessory List screen A list of equipment codes which are attachd to the Main Code as accessories will display on this page From the Equipment screen highlight the type of equipment that you wish to be the Main Code Access the Accessory List by hitting the F7 key or click on the View menu and select Accessory or click on the a Accessory List icon on the toolbar From the Rental Equipment Code Entry Screen the Accessory List is available from the View dropdown tab and its icon is on the toolbar To add equipment as an accessory from Accessory List screen click the plus sign In the Accessory Code column enter an equipment code or press the down arrow to access the Equipment Lookup and choose the equipment you wish to add or from the Record menu select Drag Drop feature F3 to add items in the list as accessories Note Users may preview all the accessories which are listed and separate them with their main Equipment code on the Accessory Records All screen To access this screen select Full Accessory Screen from View menu or hit F9 key Note In the Accessory List screen if Product number and Equipment code are not the s
54. H Account Recievable Module H _ Labor Module cm History Module Inactive Property Change Right Include Sub nodes will be used to check or un check the Overante All Security Setting ok Apply x aa os P Help Setting Access Rights for Users and Profiles To permit or prohibit a user right click on the user name through the User Setup Screen A pop up menu will appear and choose Set Rights In the opening screen you have options to EIN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Grant All Rights xl User will have complete access to all areas within RTPro Revoke All Rights User will have no security access in RTPro Select C Grant All Rights C Revoke All Rights Copy Rights From Another User Copy Rights from another User User will have Rights to have access like the user that is selected form the User Profile Lookup Copy All Rights and Settings From Another User Copy Rights From Profile Copy All Rights and Settings From Profile Copy all Rights Setting from another User Overwrite All Secunty Setting ia User will have not only the rights but also the settings of bois Select The UserProtile wy the user selected For example Minimum Days Per Week aff OK x Cancel T Help Copy Rights From Profile User will have rights to have access like the profile that is selected form the User Profile Lookup Copy All Rights and Setting From Profile User will have not only the ri
55. History Confirm Void Record Help Note You may be able to go to Invoice Screen by double clicking on the selected invoice from Invoice List screen Move Production Orders Invoices and Quotes to History For moving Orders Invoices and Quotes you should go to Administration Menu and select Move and then move to history To keep the program running fast certain groups of information like Productions Orders Invoices Repairs and Payments that are closed can be moved to history area Enter company location and the as of date then press Refresh button All items with their last activities will be listed Check mark Move To History Column for each item individually or press Include All to select all items and press Ok to move items to history Individual tables can be moved by clicking on the tab Production Order Invoice Repair or AR entering in the date and hitting refresh Records can be included in the move or excluded in the move to history E Move To History RTPro Demo Company E 307828 20445 BROWN ENTERTAINMENT INC 5 8 2007 75300 AM 5 10 2007 E 312356 21117 ICE PLANE TACE PLANET CANADA 8492007 10 20 00 AM E 313862 20460 TREEHOUSE NORTH PROCGUCTI N 3 4 2007 4 06 00 FM FF 319925 21150 MAD FILMS INC 113042007 8 45 00 At 1243 2007 320483 21378 FILMWERKS INTERMATIO MAL 12 12 2007 12 27 00 F E 321156 21378 FILMWERES INTERNATIONAL 12 2 2007 1 08 00 Ft ca 3124850 24972 NYLON PRODUCTIONS LTD 4 28 2008 1
56. If checked then the Sub Out Column will be printed on report sheet select each one you want to Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Current Inventory Status Date Time 3 27 2012 3 56 17 PM Page 1of5 Location LOSANGELES Equipment Description 1384PRICKL ricky 1385464VE Agave Order Processing Reports Quote Reservation Order Report This report will show a list of all orders in the AP T system You can filter this list by production Sort by e pull date range or location C Pull Date i Print Quotes Filter Options Ship Date f Print Reservations Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the Return Date E records on the report You can sort the report Order v Print Orders by Pull date Ship date Return date and Order number Production Print Quotes Checking this option will Pull Date Flange To Location print Quoted orders Print Reservations Checking this option will print reserved orders Print Orders Checking this option will print orders Production You can choose a specific production and get the report of all the types of orders for this production Leave this option blank to show the order types
57. In Repair double click on the In repair column Download Batch Scanner Physical Inventory Reports Click on the Physical Inventory drop down tab click on the Physical Inventory Reports These four reports can be useful tools both during and after the counting to help in reconciling the inventory List of Counted Items This report will display the Equipment Code equipment Description and the Quantity that was scanned or input into the system Detail column displays each Barcoded item that was entered as well as each non Barcoded transaction For example if you have posted quantities counted more than once including any negative entries they will all appear Note To show who entered the count as well as the date and the time of entry before printing the report checkmark Include User Name and Time for Counted Items box List of Missing Extra items For each type of equipment within the selected inventory range see PI Start Dialog Box earlier in this chapter RTPro adds the quantity counted to the quantities out on rent and in repair and subtracts them from the quantity owned This report will display the differences on any equipment types that have missing items or overages The Equipment Code Description and quantity of the difference will be displayed The detail column lists barcodes and serial numbers if applicable attached to the type of equipment that have not been counted Physical Inventory Rejection List If durin
58. Interval to Reconnect Lost BU Connection to Database Seconasy Location pO Time to save the log 21 O Num Of Days to keep History i Connection Setting Contains the list of requests sent by scanners Listen on Port Set the port of server which RF Server will use for connecting to scanners Timeout Seconds Represents the seconds that RF Server will wait for sending and receiving data from to scanners Re Query ms Represents the milliseconds that RF Server will wait to get a response from DB and if DB didn t send any responses in this period RF Server will send the request again Interval to Reconnect Lost IF connection with DB is lost RF Server will try to reconnect after this time repeatedly Log Transactions If this is checked RF Server will save all the transactions in a file Users can open the file with pressing the view button in the right Log Errors If this is checked RF Server will save all the errors in a file Users can open the file with pressing the view button in the right Max Trans Logs Set the maximum number of rows in the Transaction Log page Max Error Logs Set the maximum number of rows in the Error Log page Save Log to database If this is checked all the transactions will save to database Location Transaction logs will save in this table This table should exist in database Time to save the log Set a time to save the daily log to database on that time Number of day
59. Inventory Screen program shows detail screen and they are able to duplicate the stock item easily with same information but different StockNo Note This icon is disabled when user is Editing or Inserting Department If your shop 1s divided into departments based on physical layout or job duties the sales stock layout can be designed to match Several inventory reports such as Pull Sheet for an order can be sorted by department This would allow you to separate an order and divide the work among the appropriate staff If Sales Stock is assigned by department it must come from the Department Table To enter in a department type in the Department Code or click the drop down arrow to choose a department from the Department Lookup Category If you wish to provide a cost breakdown for the different groups of sales stock on a quote or an invoice use this Category to group the stock numbers For example 1f Category 1s used you could see a list of all gels and the sales cost of them followed by the cost of all of the batteries and their costs The two subtotals would be added together for the total cost of the order If equipment is assigned a category it must come from the Category Table Enter here by typing in the Category Code or by clicking the drop down arrow to choose a Category from the Sales Category Lookup Description Required field The description is a 50 character field which will accept most symbols letters and numbers Beca
60. Kits later in this chapter for more details In all cases if equipment has accessories system will ask the user 1f accessories should be included Printing Quote Quicklist PullList Click on the printer icon A list of reports will appear Click on the desired report There are many options available for each report For the Quote you can print with or without line item prices of discounts summary or detail showing subrental vendors and more Printing Quote Sheet Click on printer icon in the toolbar to print Quote sheet Here you can print rentals sales or both in summary or detail mode Quote sheet is also available from Report menu in Order Processing main screen Shortcuts are available from the right click menu When you click on equipment in order list Shortcuts are available from right click menu Add Accessory to this main item Accessory items can be added to a main equipment code on the order even if the item is not part of the accessory setup Edit Accessory Using this you can edit accessories of the main equipment code in the list Clicking on this item will open a list of all accessories of the main equipment and you can edit quantity and sort the order of them To remove one accessory in this list set 1ts quantity to zero Equipment Code Detail By selecting this option you can see Equipment detail for selected equipment Here you can edit or add new equipment codes For more details see Adding a New Equipment in Chapter
61. M CHAPO1 ChapmanLeonard565 el le dapat lr dl a Date 2006 06 17 DAMNCHRIS AMEX 67655465493 1222007 243243245 AllBanks 2006 12 01 100 000 00 2006 06 17 DAMNCHRIS Visa 3424324232 12 2 2007 3243243245 AllBanks 2006 12 01 100 000 00 200 000 00 COMEHOME CometoHomePlease savon Maiti is AO rl eee Re Date 2006 06 17 CINDYON Misa 9122121122 12 2 2006 1255357687 AllBanks 2005 12 03 10 000 00 2006 06 17 DAMNCHRIS Visa 2132145768 12 2 2007 2132332111 jAllBanks 2006 12 03 120 000 00 130 000 00 Rental Discount Report This report prints discounts applied to EEE eee productions It prints order number production price information and calculated discount You Production A may filter results to include discounts applied to i i Date Range To productions in specified range or a single production Filter Options Production If the Production is blank then wf OK X Cancel Let Save o the system will consider all productions Date Range Deposit creation date Include No Discount Orders By checking this box orders with no calculated discount will be included in the report Example ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Rental Discount Report Date Time 2006 06 189 21 254M Page 1 of 2 Orders Production JobTitle List Actual Discount Price Price E E e pao A
62. M Reservation L Pull Date Ship Date a i io Quote 2012 3 58 00 PM 24272207 2 24212012 Accounts P Order 22012 9 29 00 AM 2 21 4201 2 221201 2 Accounts F M Cancelled W201 2 5 37 00 PM 2420207 2 eb 2012 Accounts P 0 E Transfer 02011 47 00 At 1110 2011 11 14 2071 AccountsP O Closed AO oF a Akad 11 0 10 1 112929290171 Mamma ao D EE a oe Printing Grid Data In some grids there is an option to choose paper ARE ue Been 3 x orientation when printing In these grids before print system will prompt for Landscape or Portrait orientation Printing in a Landscape orientation may allow more Portrait columns to be printed You can see how many columns Orientation will print in each orientation at bottom of this screen ES Note you may print desired columns by moving them First 8 Columns will print to first positions of grid e OF x Cancel ra Help Exporting Grid Data Most of grids also can export data to Excel XML HTML and Text In this case all columns will export To export choose proper Menu item by right clicking on grid or clicking on main menu of screen There is another option available to copy grid data to clipboard as HTML EN Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Printing reports When the report function is selected a report setup will appear and systems default printer selected Users have the option to send the printout to the selected printer or preview the printout on th
63. O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Loop means to repeat the billing schedule as long as there are charges due for the billing period If value is Stop then no rental charges will calculate after the specified cycle Cycle A Billing Schedule Template see below is made of one or more billing periods called cycles and each cycle is assigned a number This field relates to the Billing Schedule Action Enter here the cycle in which the Loop or Stop Action will take effect Example Cycle 3 means after the third week the order would loop back to week three and continue to bill at 50 discount If 3 1s entered and the action was Stop the order should not invoice after the third week After the billing codes are created you will need to setup the actual billing schedule templates Move Move Order to another Production This option allows moving entire order to another production Only orders which do not have an invoice can move If an order is moved entire rental amp sales transactions will also move The system will prompt for order number and destination Production This function is helpful when orders accidentally are created under the wrong production Move Production to another Parent This option allows moving entire production to another parent Productions can move at any time Ifa production is moved all rental sales orders invoices deposits purchase orders and rental amp sales transactions also will move The sys
64. Open 1025 PROOO200 10 24 2007 22491 THE INCREDIBLE HULK JUL9C TORONTO Open 1026 MTM007500 10 25 2007 Open 1027 CHR 002200 10 25 2007 23438 TIME TRAVELER S WIFE TORONTO Open 1031 CHROO2200 10 26 2007 Open 1037 RAG001500 10 29 2007 Open 1042 PROO0 200 10 31 2007 23760 GREY GARDENS TORONTO Open 105 CHR002200 11 1 2006 20814 CHRYSLER NOV 1 PL 2 3 TORONTO Open 1054 CHAR002200 1145 2007 23933 SESSION TORONTO Open ET Browse Note When Unused legend in the toolbar is selected program opens a screen and shows only the records that are not used In this screen users are allowed to select multiple records and press Delete button to delete selecting records O Closed O Open ON a Print Pull List This report is what a company gives to the drivers to pickup the items ordered If Print Notes is checked program will include purchase order notes in the print out This report is accessible through the right click menu 194 Purchase Order O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Cost Sheet This report will print the vendor cost and customer price of sub rentals for the selected vendor PO based upon a date range This report will run across customers and orders This report 1s helpful to see 1f there is a profit for the sub rentals This report is accessible through the right click menu Subrental PO Detail ES Subrental PO Detail screen contains two grids The upper grid displays the equipment list that was subrented in this PO
65. Options Insurance Expires As of Date If a date is entered any insurance that expires on or before this date will be included in the report Blank Insurance Expires Dates Include Blank Dates Exclude Blank Dates Blank date only Productions with Activity After When a date is entered into this box the report is filtered to show only the productions with Creation Date after this given date Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report You can sort the report by Production Code Production Title Example DS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Insurance Expires Report Date Time 2006 06 1510 00 044M Page 1 of 1 Sorby Productiontode COMERS Title Date Compa Poli ro aS ERECOHED IE gt RR Allinsurancesinc Orders Attached to a Purchase Order Use this report to determine what orders have a purchase order assigned to them If a Production has given you the same purchase order number for more than one order all of the orders linked to that P O would display The report contains order number creation date the status of order and contact information Filter Options Production Select a production to limit report to show only purchase orders for that production Leave this option blank to show purchase orders from all productions PO If you enter a PO the report prints only for the single PO Leave this option blank to
66. Page 1 of 2 Location LA Production Production ithe Terms DueDate Aging Invoice Paid Balance Amount Amount CPU __ amp CPowerDietribution 100174 7005 08 27 QA ae wa O EA RE AE rene AO IR O E Jozephanderson Phone 833 595 2332 Fag 885 595 2334 Production Production itle Terms DueDate Aging Invoice Paid Balance Amount Amount COMEHOME Come to Home Please 100182 2003 08 27 Y 104 268 00000 90 044 26 COMEHOME Come to Home Please 10086 2003 08 27 e a0 208 00 59126226 00000 90 252 26 Reporfotals 502 515 66 1 020 001 501 495 66 Payment Received By Date The report will list all payments that are received within ELEMENT the date range The report separates payment by date and shows the production to which the payment has been Date Fiom 10422070 assigned The total amount of payments can be reviewed at the bottom of this report To 10 2 2011 Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Fayment Received By Date Report Date Time 2006 06 10 3 22 11 Ph Page 1 of 7 2001 12 31 Production Production itle CheckHo Amount Discount UnApplied ARTota jui SRE Received Amount ACDC A EP ae E 150 00 41000 00 15000 Mp 000 00 200 00 80 200 00 ai 1 200 00 000 81 S50 00 2006 06 07 hee pe A Received Amount CONCH ConceptLighting CHECK ga000 00 O O o o aooo aooo o 3 000 00 Report otals 04 170 00 3 069 00 5 412 00 95 571 00 E
67. Rental Prices Screen The Equipment Code Description Daily and Weekly Prices default over from the equipment records for each type of equipment on file These four fields cannot be edited from this screen New prices may be entered while working in the grid as described below or click the Detail icon A then press Edit icon MA to work in a detail screen mode Whichever method is used the prices will not update to the Equipment Table from this screen You must use the Rollover New Rental Prices feature see below Update Rental Prices Screen File Action Search View Record Increase All Help Code io Dai How Daily sey Weekly l Ma pe Dis Replace Lied Repl Repl las ES eisd Repl a st pe st Dai Inc Inc i Weekly Inc nc Price Repl Price Inc Inc Cost Repl Cost Inc Inc 50 00 100 00 m 1OXIOFOLDI 10X10 10 Faking Tent 4500 5000 500 TUO ss BOO 550 00 10 440 00 40 00 1OXSOCANOP 10X30 Canopy 210 00 300 00 90 00 4286 5250000 270000 520000 8 2 000 00 2200 00 200 00 10 11280 11 18000W HMI Globe 10 00 5000 7500 2500 50 100 00 New Daily In this column place the cursor on the equipment line to be changed Enter the New Daily rental price and press Enter to continue to the New Weekly rental price for this Equipment Code or use the down arrow to move to the next New Daily rental price No changes will be made and the Daily price will remain the same for those Equipment Codes that have no entry
68. Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Orders Expected To Return Report Date Time 2006 06 14 12 17 09PM ExpectedDateToReturn 2006 06 14 Location LA Name Date Rene rape rss oscar om Acepecy 500428 2004 06 02 2004 06 22 SS a A a SE NN PR ER TT MEL EEE ee ACPowerDistribution Y UAT 2002 41 24 RAS ACPowerDistribution soms 20 03 Om SCS SSCS Past due Orders Report This report prints a log of orders that are supposed to be FARES Sy gp x returned and are not and the return date 1s past by due by the Past Due Days The orders reflected on the report are Past Due Days 7 lt orders which do not have all items returned and the Procucton SN Return Date 1s past by the specified number of days Filter Options Past Days Due Number of days that orders are past I their return date w OK X Cancel C Last H Seve e Production Shows only the orders belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all productions Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Orders 7 Days Past Due Date Time 2006 06 14 12 56 16PM Page 1 of 1 Location LA ProductioWlame Order Creation Expected Contact Phone Date ease ot ie
69. Rentals ECS Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Checkout Sheet contract This report will print the checked out rental items and the shipped sales items A customized footer section can be printed at the end of the checkout sheet Footer can contain terms and conditions or perhaps signature lines To modify footer section refer to system setup section in Administration module This report has several options to print such as Rentals Only Sales Only or Rentals and Sales with No Prices Total Prices Only or All Prices Partial A partial checkout sheet can be printed over the particular date time intervals This comes in handy when the user is working with a large order which has add ons entered at various dates Only those items that are checked out between the specified beginning date time and ending date time will be printed Note as Exchange This checkbox indicates 1f the items checked out should be noted as exchange items The report title will change to Exchange Contract sheet and the layout of the columns printed on the report will be different When checking mark this option 1t goes to partial returns by default but you may change selecting items to print 1f desired Begin Date Time This 1s the beginning date and time for a partial checkout sheet End Date Time This 1s the ending date and time for a partial checkout sheet Print Subrental Vendor If sub rented items are checked out to the order this option w
70. Richardson Ord 2 Qut 0 Remain 14000 05 18K Alpha Lens Protector Circular Subrental Mole Richardson Ord 2 Out 0 Remain 2 PULL LIST FOOTER SECTION ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Batch Print Return List E Return List Report RTPro Demo 0 3 p xj There may be a time when several orders are expected to return and you need to print many Return lists You do not need to go into the orders individually to print out the Return Lists This function will print all of the Return Lists at once based on return date and order criteria that you specify Date inclusion 1s based on the Return Date on the Order Header Select the desired options and then click on the Next button that will send Begn Daie 10 1 2010 you to the regular Return List report screen See Return List EmdOse honam Report for more details Filter Options Production Date Range Prints the Return List for orders with the Fist Order ME Return Date in the given date range Last Onde Production You can choose a specific production and get the Return list report for this production You also can select Location multiple productions To do this click on list icon in front of Production and select each one you want to include in report Order Range Prints the Pull List for orders with the Order number in the given range You also can select multiple Orders To do this click on lis
71. S duct 20000 i 7 i Production Stat Date Time Location Ca Refresh F2 Ordertt End Date Time Start End Bilable Weekend dem o ele Ele E BOBTEST2 3 5 2009 8 00 00 4M 3 5 2009 9 30 00 AM 475094109000 Hourly 1h 30rn 20 00 425 00 EMPO3 3 6 2009 347 2009 131559000509 Day 1d 160 00 170 00 EMP03 3 5 2009 8 00 00 AM 3 5 2009 8 30 00 AM 4790101058 Day 30m 160 00 170 00 VICM 3 5 2009 8 00 00 AM 3 5 2009 8 30 00 AM 47390101058 Day 30m 160 00 170 00 BOBTEST2 345 2009 00 00AM 3 5 2009 8 30 00 AM 131590000515 Day 30m 160 00 170 00 117d 22h qe a E Start End Bilable Weekend E el some ose ue QE ou onu ne ET STD 3410 2009 8 00 00 AM 3410 2008 8 30 00 AM 367027109000 Hourly 30m 450 00 60 00 YARD 3 10 2009 00 00 AM 3 10 2009 8 30 00 AM 367097115000 Hourly 30m 40 00 50 00 YARD 3414 2009 8 00 00 AM 3414 2009 8 30 00 AM 131566000504 Day 30m 550 00 400 00 YARD 3415 2009 3416 2009 1156000616 Hourly 1d 440 00 50 00 YARD 3 16 2009 8 00 00 AM 3 16 2009 8 30 00 AM 131592000510 Dey 20m 550 00 400 00 d 8h de EI gt Browse Calculation of Billable Amount The billable amount can be calculated for the different ways consider the following examples ES Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc 10 11 i ia 14 i7 la 19 20 1 e 25 26 2 0 a1 Note For all examples please consider the following rates Hourly Dap Weekend Weekend Rate Rate Hourly Rate Dap R
72. Scan File which allows you to attach files using scanner Browse File section and Attachment list that shows the attached files Attached files can be opened or deleted using right click menu Note To attach files easier this screen allows using drag and dropping feature It also can be used to attach multiple files at once Note When there is a document attachment program displays Attachment List icon as red Production Pr Production Customer must be setup in order to create rental sales orders and performing billing In Production List you can see a list of all productions defined in application They may be active inactive or closed and their color will change based on legend above the screen pi Option to print mailing list is also available here Managing Production records Production records can be added by clicking on i icon To edit existing records you can double click on them or select record and click on icon If you want to delete a production record RTPro will only allow if there are no orders or transactions against the production I Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This is the Billing Schedule function RTPro is designed to create invoices for billable rental items on a weekly basis See Billing Schedule for more details If this production has a billing schedule a red box on right of screen will show that If there is a note for this production a red box will appear in right of this
73. Selection and Lookups Example DOS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Rental Inventory Value Report DateTime 2006 06 1810 06 37 4M Page 1 of 6 AsofDate 2006 06 18 Calculatedsing Replacement Price Location LA Currency US Dr A ree Value DEP FRESNELS os ARRICOMPACTAR AMI HEAD 71 60000 9362 0000 TAC 2500 HM HEAD 9201400 99667200 SC ni es Te if PAS Pe ARASIN 6K PAR HEAD eesst 988 000 00 GRP emee os DORA Y DOLLY PUSHBAR 2 sooo 920000 ee e O E IE 01 ReportTotal 52 026 452 77 Sales Inventory Value Report This report prints all sales EH Sales Inventory Value Report ol re ES inventory values for items on hand The option to include 0 00 Department cos A Stock will also list Stock s with Current Cost no sales inventory items on hand Ea only f Average Cost First Stocktt f Purchase Cost Last Stock As Of Date afer rele Include 0 00 Stocks Location poe Include In Transit Inventory D Exclude Non lnventory items Group Ey Department E Filter Options Y DK X Cancel E List py Save Department Shows only the stock belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the stock belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories As of Date You can choose today or any date in the past to get the value of your inventory for
74. Some of the fields have security logic and a user will need to be permitted in order to change Note To remove items from the list set the quantity ordered to zero Multiple Markup Setup There is ability to calculate multiple price rates for Sales Stock items On the sales Entry Screen there is an option to display list column with markups For example 10 markup 20 markup 30 40 a Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc When user clicks on the LI icon through the Sales Order Screen toolbar program shows a small text box with Add OK amp Cancel button Press Add button and type in the Markup percent values If OK is pressed program adds Markup columns to the list automatically For example in following image program adds 5 markup columns The markup amount column can be clicked on and the list prices will be calculated with the markup E Sales Order Screen ee as File Goto Action Help Po lou E BED EN S amp e Quantity Extended Markup o 10 Markup 20 Markup Profit a E 10 gt es E storage Bag C L 13 20 13 20 13 20 1 20 1 20 2 40 13 20 GELROLL123 Gel Rall Red 10 71 50 D 71 50 715 00 6 50 10 6 50 13 00 715 00 GLOVERUE Gloves Rubber Bla 1 550 5 50 5 50 0 50 10 0 50 1 00 5 50 HAMMER Hammer 2 33 00 D 33 00 66 00 3 00 10 3 00 6 00 66 00 LATERN Latern With Battery 1 550 5 50 5 50 0 50 10 0 50 1 00 5 50 MARKERBLUE Mark A Lot Marker
75. Subrental menu in Rental Order Screen When items are subrented as a kit the kit items will be shown in a light yellow color in All Subrental Records for this Order screen Understanding the pricing and updating features There are two types of prices in Subrental level One is the price that a Vendor charges the company and the other is the price that a company charges the customer If prices such as DPW Actual Price and Discount are changed in Rental Order Screen prices should be locked After locking an item and exiting the record an Update Subrental screen will appear This screen gives an opportunity for user to update the Subrental records all at once aw Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Update Subrental Items ATPro Demo Company Update Vendor Begin Date All Unlocked None Update Vendor End Date A Unlocked None Update Vendor Days Per Week Update Vendor Discounts Update Vendor List Pros Update Vendor Actual Price Customer Update Customer Begin Date Update Customer End Date If None is selected then the field that is marked as None will not be modified for any of the Subrental records regardless of locked or unlocked status of the record This will be useful for clients who do not want a certain field on the Subrental to be changed Locking Prices on Rental Order Screen vs Subrental Reco
76. TA Bree TSS PO Chimera EELER P TEW AEW Buy EN EE EN EE EE EE EN EB EN EIA O TORERADE memon portaeren A oem GOTHIC fore Pi RS KER We EIN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Inventory Report The purpose of this report 1s to get a listing of all the Barcoded and Noncoded items in your rental inventory There are two formats available to print Summary No Prices C Weekly Prices this report In Summary format the report displays C Detal Dady Piices F Dad Weekly Fricas the E Code Description and the total quantity of Barcoded and Noncoded items owned from each bapartment PT equipment code and rental pricing on daily weekly Category ss and or both basis if selected The Detail format Ecsomentfange r 3 will display the individual purchase information for sang Tof each item It prints one row for each Barcoded a item and grouping the Noncoded items by their i i A purchase date POH Filter Options ERA m Format Select layout of report between Vendo O Summary and Detail Location ti SY Summary If this format is selected for printing you will see a report of each type of equipment that you have selected and you can see how many Barcoded and Noncoded equipment you have In this case you have some other options to choose such as daily prices weekly prices etc Note You may choose to omit the printing of prices in this report by selec
77. The bottom gird 1s dedicated for Misc items User can add Shipping Fuel Loss and Damage and other non rental charges to the Subrental PO Subrental PO detail can be viewed by double clicking on a PO line or pressing on the icon in the toolbar menu This screen only shows records and cannot be edited Note User can add non rental charges to the Subrental PO in Misc grid at the bottom of Subrental PO Detail screen Note This screen is also accessible from right clicking on the menu after selecting Detail Information Subrental PO Out To use this screen click on a PO line then click on icon in the toolbar You will see the Detail of the transactions for the equipment that was subrented on this PO Returned equipment shows in white and items that not returned are shown in green Note You can also find this screen by selecting View Checkout Records under View dropdown list or by right clicking on the menu Subrental PO Totals 2 In this screen you can see estimated totals and amounts of a selected PO To view this page highlight a PO line and press the Display Totals icon in the toolbar This list can also be printed Subrental PO Totals RTPro Demo Company EA a xj File View Help Sal amp PO 105 Location Vendor CHA002200 CHRISTIE UTES TORONTO Production QUOTES Rental Misc Charges Tax Total Subrental PO Amount 1054 00 3500 00 30 00 41 714 00 subrental Customer Rental Estimated 31
78. The revenue amounts are based upon all the productions for the parent The calculations are from all the confirmed invoice charges for all the productions for the parent Also identified on the screen is the date of last activity for the parent Fill proper value for all other fields then press F10 or save button to save changes and exit Note Other available fields will default over from Parent to the Production screen which will be discussed in the following section in more detail Credit Hold When the checkbox is checked and when saving the Parent the program shows the following confirm message Credit Hold is checked This will check Credit Hold on all the Productions Continue if users select Yes program checkmarks Credit Hold for all productions that belong to that parent If users select NO program unchecks the Parent Credit Hold When a Parent is on Credit Hold user will not be able to add new Production to that Parent When the checkbox 1s unchecked and when saving the Parent program shows following confirm message Credit Hold is unchecked This will uncheck Credit Hold on all the Productions Continue If users select Yes program unchecks Credit Hold for all productions that belong to that parent Attachment List 1 This option allows files to be attached to an order for example a picture a signed agreement or perhaps a certificate of insurance document The Attachment List screen consists of three parts
79. ads 104 A O O ace st T E eat ata ena uaa O enema etd amiautaannds O A O A A 105 LABO Nm 106 BIETA REA IP TIRER 2 y Pr A dt to nt de ee bat Do de on D 106 REP et tice oe TE E T el aie os oe ic aad ad Gal eid wc a te 106 Redal MAIN dada ai 106 CECI PEON OUT TOUR CDN oa id e OS 106 PV SICA OVER ii do 106 Rental PAV SICON INVENTO tada 106 Start Physical INVENTORY PROCESS ES A 107 Physical Inventory Works een 107 Enter Noncoded Items TAO ea 108 DOWNIDAd BITACORA ASAS AS SAA ASS AAA ASA 109 Physical Inventory REPOS aaa earn tor a ag oo he the ae nts Me CU 109 Physical Inventory Review and Update Inventory Screen ss 110 End PAVSICAl INVENTION POS sima daa aaa 110 SALES PASCUA Vo 110 Rental Physical Inventory FUSTO VA AA tnt ent nsn 111 Update Presa 112 PNECFINCW Renta POS A T 112 Update Rental Prices Screens 112 A et dan ne A nn Un eres 113 Enter NCW Sales PCS A ee On NE 113 Update SAIS Prices SCT nac 113 Increase All by PErcentage cccscccsscccsscccssecensecsnscceuecceuseseuseceuseseuseseuecceuseseueesaeeseueeseueeseueeseueeseseeseaes 114 RONOVET NEW IRENEGI PRICES taa ir terne near eee en ee 114 ROMOVEr NewSales PCS o cs ee 115 ORDER PROCESSING an nd nes ee rene e ne en de and dati en late tic aNs l ann 117 Order Processing Module cinto 118 Understanding the Rental Tracker Hierarchy cccccsccssccsscceecceceeccecceeceeeeeeeeasceesceeuceeeeeeeeeeeeaaees 118 Order Processie creer ela 118 D finitons OF COMMON FUNC
80. all checked items you can also print Exchange Checkout Sheet instead of Checkout Sheet and items which are checked out in a specified date range There are other options regarding the appearance of the report These options are Print Subrental Vendor Print Kit Header Replacement Price and use billing schedule When printing the Exchange Checkout Sheet the layout of columns printed on report will be different Inventory Records This option will show a list of all the physical inventory for both barcodes or noncoded items in the system for the specific equipment To use this option first select an equipment code in the list then press F8 or select Inventory Records from view menu This screen displays information such as Location Status of equipment Current Order Current Production etc for each barcode or noncoded item 150 Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Filters You can filter list of items to show only remaining items to checkout or all remaining Subrental items in an order To do this select To Go Out or To Go out Subrental Only from Filter menu Rental Out Detail Screen This function displays all check out transactions of the order The color of the rows will be different based on type of items Barcoded Items will be shown in white Subrentals as green Noncoded as cyan and miscellaneous items as yellow You can filter this list to show only one type of item or show all of them You can access this screen t
81. and Current Weekly Contract Department Table This table could be designed to define warehouse departments The values for this table will never printout on customer reports These values are strictly used within the department to guide the user to make appropriate choices The table could be setup as the Main Category Examples would be Grip Distribution Generators Lighting Audio Video etc Department Table is available when clicking on its icon from the toolbar or selecting Department from Inventory dropdown list The Department Table consists of two fields Code and Description Note Users must be assigned access to EME ene eens y xi departments When entering a new department ere ee PT program asks to grant rights for this department CAMEBACAE ALEVE TON to the users If Yes a list of Permitted and Prohibited Users will appear in following screen You can then move the users to the permitted side Also this screen can be displayed using e icon from toolbar menu y OF x Cancel 7 Help Rental Category Table RTPro allows creating categories which can be linked to departments Equipment codes can then be attached to the rental categories Examples would be Globes Cables Televisions Gel Frames Ballast Projectors Lens etc The Rental Category table is editable To add and edit the table select Rental Category from Inventory menu This table is constructed from the following fields GL Account The
82. and dragging the cursor left to shorten or right to expand Columns can also be dragged to different positions on the screen To drag a column position the cursor on the column label hold down the left mouse button and drag the column to another position After customizing columns order and width the screen setting will be saved for the workstation Most of the listings cannot display all data on the screen There is possibly more data to the right of the screen To view additional data to the right of the screen click on the right arrow on the bottom of the screen or drag the square to the right Within several listings the first few columns of the grid that is displaying can be printed To print the grid click on the File menu at the top of the screen and then select print grid ae Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note Program allows user to change the size of rows on each grid TAT un and save the settings To do this position your mouse on the line split and drag it down This will increase the height of the rows OFICO Grid Colors RTPro allows the user with proper security rights to right click on any color in the legend section of the grid and reassign a new color to it Program will display the color selection dialog and let user visually select a desired color The assign colors on their workstations O Quote CT Order M Transfer Show All Ml Reservation Y Cancelled Closed po a or Setting
83. and press OK The sales items will be deducted from the originating location s sales inventory and be added to the destinations sales inventory Receive All This option will receive all the items from the originating location and add records to destination s location sales Inventory The items will be deducted from the originating location s sales inventory Cancel Receive When the Cancel Receive 1s selected program will open a dialog and prompt for the quantity Enter the quantity you want to cancel and press OK Program reduces the quantity from sales inventory from the destination location and restores the inventory to the originating locations sales inventory Cancel Receive All This will cancel receiving all items and delete records from Sales Inventory from the destination location and restore the items to the originating location Notes about Sales Transfer Orders If an order is marked as transfer Ship sales option works as Transfer and program transfers Sales stock between locations The destination location 1s set through the Order Header Screen If the shipment 1s canceled then the items will add back to the location s stock A sales transfer order is only closed if all the items are shipped and received When the items are received users cannot cancel the shipment from original location When an order is marked as transfer Drop Ship and Return Ship options are not available from the Sales Checkout Screen When ite
84. and the swap notes will be added to the end of it Restore items when Checkin is Canceled for Loss items If checked the system restores loss items from retired inventory when the loss checkin is canceled on Rental Checkin Screen If not checked the system doesn t let you cancel the checkin First you need to restore items from retired inventory then you may be able to cancel checkin Otherwise an error occurs and stops the process Print Customer Code and Production Title on Subrental Return List on pages 2 If checked the Customer Code and Production Title will be printed on Subrental Return List Subrental Tab PO Required for Subrentals PS Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This option will force the user to attach a PO to subrental records when ordered If not checked the subrentals can be ordered without a PO Update based upon below without prompting when changes are made If this item is checked Subrental will update based on selection of items in this page and there is no need for the user to confirm changes Refer to Subrental Update Section for more information There are two types of prices in Subrental level One is the price that a Vendor charges the company and the other is the price that a company charges the customer If a value on the rental order entry screen is changed suchas usage begin usage end days per week discount list price actual price should the subrental records change After locking an i
85. arranged in four levels to show Departments Main items Equipment and their Accessories To add one item or more to a rental list drag items from Equipment Tree to rental order list After dropping item into the list cursor will stop on Ordered column The quantity can be entered or you can accept 1 by default Equipment Tree node s can be shown by Codes Description or both by user s choice There is a refresh button to update the list for the latest changes You can search this list by Code or Description To continue searching just press F2 after first search List will search from current position to the end Note If equipment which has accessories is dragged from equipment tree to the list system will ask to add accessories If an accessory is dragged from the tree it will be added as a single item Rental Items Items that are ordered will be shown in this section Here equipment can be added by typing the codes or selecting them from the drop down list in the Equipment column Fields which can be edited on a line item are the quantity list price actual price discount locked column taxable daily weekly days per week GL account the sort order and the internal and customer notes Some of the fields have security logic and a user will need to be permitted in order to change Also if the equipment is set as a non discountable item in the equipment table setup the user will not be allowed to apply a discount to a
86. attachment list The locked column links the barcode permanently to the main barcode when items are checked in or out There is no substitution of the barcode it is always attached The locked barcode cannot be checked out by itself If an item is not locked then the item can be checked out outside of the main barcode attachment link To remove an item as an attachment highlight the item on the attachment list and press the delete icon History i To review the history transactions of a barcode click on the History icon In the Rental Inventory History screen a summary of each order repair ticket and other previous transactions of the selected barcode will display Revenue Generated Every time an order 1s invoiced the revenue generated by barcoded items is recorded Click on the Revenue Generated icon to check summary of the revenue generated by a barcode Displaying the Month To Date Year To Date and Cumulative summaries for the number of Days and Weeks Billed and the amount generated for specific barcode Print Barcode Labels d There are times when a barcode label is damaged or removed This option allows reprinting of the barcode label To reprint the barcode click on Barcode Printers icon Changing Barcoded Items Click the edit button to make corrections and changes to any of the fields for this barcode Status In the lower part of the Rental Inventory Entry Screen the status of the barcoded item is displayed
87. be entered or selected from the General Ledger Lookup CON Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note When a new Space schedule is added program brings the GL Account value from the System Setup Notes Area Additional notes can be typed here This could be the description of job that the space is dedicated for Note When the order is billed for the selected space schedule program shows the invoice number and its created date on the top right side of Space Scheduling Detail dialog box otherwise this information is invisible Labor Space Grid The screen shows Labor Space records against an Order or Production in two grids The top grid shows the Labor records and the bottom grid shows the Space records Labor Space Grid is accessible from Labor Space and Order Processing modules Labor Space Module When the user opens Labor Space Scheduling list from the Labor module there are filtering options available that will help user to display data The user could select a production order date range and location Order Processing Module When the user selects an order and then selects the labor and space menu the program shows the list of Labor Space for the selected order If the user selects a production and then selects this menu item program shows the list of Labor Space for the selected production M Oo tet Labor Space Scheduling List RTPro Demo Company File Search Action View Help MM AVY
88. be the best boy grip or gaffer The customer contact must exist on the customer contact table To select a customer contact click on the drop down list If the contact does not exist the contact can be added from the Contact list Ship Method The Ship Method validates against the Shipping Method table User can select ship method from the list Refer to Ship Method on File Maintenance chapter Return Method The Return Method validates against the Return Method table A return method can be selected from the drop down list Payment Type The type of payment that the invoice of an order should be paid The method of payment is used to filter information on various reports Payment Type field is used in the Billing and AR modules The payment type validates against Payment Type table Refer to Payment Type on File Maintenance chapter ia Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Tax Type Tax will calculate from the tax type s setup entered here The Tax Type validates against Tax table Bill Type The Bill Type dictates how the order will be billed A security check is performed when changing a bill type Regular Bill The order will bill from the default system billing schedule or if a billing schedule is setup for the specific production or order the system will bill according to it See Setting up a billing schedule section for details This order will appear on billing reports and it 1s considered in revenue amp estim
89. be warned A management report can also be run In the Production Detail Screen program allows user to enter multiple insurance records Required We _ Expiration Amount Compay Required M Expiration Amount Company Policytt Pe gee CG 3224201 4 1 500 000 00 Allstate L23644 PPIESSE Click on the icon to add a new Insurance record through the Insurance Detail dialog box Only the first record of the grid can be viewable in this screen To see the other records user can double click on the grid or click on the El icon and do add edit delete through the Insurance List Screen When checking for Insurance Expired Warning program warns 1f any of the insurances for that Production 1s expired Insurance Company EN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This is the name of the insurance company which provides an insurance policy and guarantees created production Expiration The insurance policy will expire on this date A date can be entered or selected from drop down calendar Amount This is the amount of the insurance policy or the deductible Policy This field is allocated for the insurance policy number Salesperson This person gets credit for orders in your company A revenue report is available by salesperson The salesperson will default over from the production to a new order It is a required field in Order Header if Salesperson is set in system setup Enter the Salesperson from the lookup table PO
90. between the two choices A Zoom Extent this will return the graph to its original layout after Zoom In or Zoom Out a a Zoom In Zoom Out EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ES Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Introduction to History To keep the program running fast certain group of HEN xj information like Productions Orders Invoices and Ele Help Payments are archived into the History section of the p ke program Records are moved to the History by running the Month End Close process from the Administration Module To access the records that are moved to the History you FF Order Processing need to select Order Processing Billing or Labor from the History Menu RTPro s user interface in these three sections is similar to the Order Processing Billing and Labor module in the live section of the program The only difference 1s that the background of the main screens is dark gray instead of light Labor gray and the data in the History section is not editable In order to edit data that is in History you first need to restore the data to the live area and edit it This will be discussed in the following sections Restore Production from History To restore a Production from the history section to the live area From the History module click on the Order Processing button select the production and go to the File View Setup j List History Record Help Production Entry Screen u
91. billing schedule is completed In the Stop Loop field enter the desired schedule action as Loop or Stop In the Cycle field enter the cycle in which the Loop or Stop Action will take effect Create Billing Schedule from Template To use a billing schedule from a template see Setting up Billing Schedules in Chapter 3 that has been created enter a billing code or use the drop down arrow to choose one from the Billing Schedule Lookup Then click on the Create Billing Schedule button The date fields will populate according to the order and template criteria while the rest of the fields will populate with the data from the template These fields can be edited and additional cycles can be added by clicking on the Add button If changes or additions are made be sure to check the Stop Loop and Cycle fields to see if they need to be adjusted Create Billing Schedule from Production If the production for this order has a billing schedule created for it it may be used on this order by clicking on this button see Functions Available in the Production Header Screen later in this chapter The date fields will populate according to the order and production template criteria while the rest of the fields will populate with the data from the template These fields can be edited and additional cycles can be added by clicking on the Add button If changes or additions are made be sure to check the Stop Loop and Cycle fields to see if they need to be a
92. can add contact from the contact listing Note You may also add or view customer contact through the Main menu Select Contact under View menu or press on its icon in the toolbar Credit Approved Checkmark this checkbox if production is credit approved If RTPro Accounts Receivable module is used credit approved will be used to determine if credit has expired or if the production is over their limit If the Accounts Receivable module is not used then there is no logic behind this field It would be strictly a reference and can display on a production listing Credit Thru Expiration date 1f credit approved Credit Limit Maximum credit this production can have unpaid Dollar amount of credit limit RTPro will check the available credit if the Accounts Receivable module is used RTPro takes into consideration the credit limit and deducts the unpaid invoices Credit Hold If credit is used check marking this option will hold credit across the production These productions will be shown in red within the production list Signed Terms amp Conditions This is a reference to use if the production company has a signed document on file Expected Wrap Date Production will wrap on this date This is useful for referencing date that a production should be close Terms The term indicates when the invoice should pay An example would be Net 15 Net 30 The terms validate against a table and can be entered in or selected from the table Th
93. can set the default values of these fields in the setup screen Then when adding new equipment code the default values come from System Setup For Example if Taxable is check marked while adding new equipment code the taxable box is checked by default Checkout Tab Quote Sheet Footer Default quote footer can be selected here The program will default over quote footer when printing the quote report If your shop is setup for multiple locations the footer can be setup at the location level Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that 1s selected in system setup Print Revision On Quote If checked Program prints the Revision under Date and Time on the top of the Quote sheet Pull List Footer Default pull list footer can be selected here The program will default over pull list footer when printing the pull list report If your shop is setup for multiple locations the next draft number can be setup at the location level ES Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Print Revision On Pull List If checked Program prints the Revision under Date and Time on the top of the Pull List report Checkout She
94. cancel their Check in Mass Check in Rental Checkin Information File Transaction Help orders gt M Customer EXPRO1 500022 7 500113 M Multiple Orders 500167 500301 Date 05 03 2006 y 7 sooseo Time 03 y 36 y Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 36 46 Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 33 28 In the Check in mode you can enter the Order to Check in across one order You can instead enter the Customer Code and Check in across all open orders for that customer You can also checkmark the Multiple Order box that displays the Multiple Orders Form and allows you to checkmark the orders you want to perform a Check in across If not all opened orders for a customer fit on one screen then you can click on the button with the down arrow and see additional orders Order The Order Number you want to work with sar Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Customer Leave the Order field empty and fill the Customer if you want to Check in across all or some orders for this customer Multiple Orders Check this box if you want to choose the orders for this customer Mass Checkin Noncoded Mass Noncoded Detail File Transaction Help File Transaction Help Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Vendor Checkin Checkin 8 Current Orde Last Equipment 00265 Cancel Checkin By Production E Quantity 1 Main 00005 Code 48003 Desc 29 HALF DOUBLE SCRIM Out verdo
95. caution when you merge two equipment codes together the code of first equipment will be x Cancel Help deleted and system will display the code of second equipment Always stay attentive when using this tool A record will be written to the exception file noting the equipment codes the user who performed the merge and the date and time Copy Accessories Within RTPro is a function to copy accessories from one xj equipment code to another To do this from Equipment Screen right click on a desired record and select Copy Accessories a window will appear and ask to specify the m code of equipment which you want to copy the accessories from into the selected equipment code Enter the code and press Ok Copy Accessories From x Cancel re Help Assign PI Equipment Group to Selected record s Within RTPro users are able to assign equipment s into gt xj physical inventory groups Equipment grouping can be used at the time of Physical Inventory To do this right click on desired equipment and select Assign PI Equipment Group to Selected record s feature A O window will appear and ask to specify the code of PI group which you want to assign the equipment into it Enter the code and press Ok A aK OF Cancel Hel Note Multiple equipment codes can be assigned into a PI XL g Help group code using Multiple Select feature through the Equipment Table screen Select Pl Equipment Group Location Qu
96. checkin by production parent or all a list of orders can be filtered and orders can be selected to be checked in against ill ABE Checkin By Production Select Orders A E File Action Search View Help L FAYS Show Only Orders with Item Out Include only Orders Pe ES e E Orders having this Equipment Project v Job Component Cal Production ela OrderNo Order Status Include Return Date ad Description Ship Date E Name Title Mett Lold Ca Refresh F2 Y Include All F3 33 Checkin Screen F10 AOS ABC Studios 343 Part Ret 6 28 2010 Modern Family Equip TestFor Transfers 6 22 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 345 Shipped 6 28 2010 Modern Family Equipment Test 3 6 22 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 348 Part Ship E 6 28 2010 Modern Family Cancel Checkin OfLoss 6 22 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 350 Par Ship L 6 26 2010 Modern Family TY 3 Restore Loss 6 22 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 60 Part Ret E 6 29 2010 Modern Family Canceling Loss Partial 6 23 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 332 Part Ret E 6 30 2010 Modern Family Rental sales shipping 6 17 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 363 Shipped E 7 1 2010 Modern Family Cancel Loss Test 6 25 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 339 PartRet E 10 27 2010 Modern Family Subrental 1 10 21 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 340 Shipped E 10 27 2010 Modern Family Subrental 2 10 21 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 110 Part Ret a 11 25 2010 Modern Family Camera Package 11 12 2010 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 123 PartRet E 2 2 2011 Modern Famil
97. considered the Normal rate instead for both selected days Report Labor Space Scheduling Report Scheduled working hours for a labor space can be printed out using this report There will be an option to either print Labor or Space Leave employee space blank to show all records CON Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CE Labor Space Scheduling Report RTPro Of Production A Date Begin Date End Select Labor Employee Space Occupation Sort By Date C Employes Include Billable Charges w Location s Save Options Date Range Filters report to the labor space s scheduled days of work between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print the entire labor space schedule that are created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print the entire labor space schedule that are created on or after the begin date Production Select the production to limit the report to only show labors spaces for this production Leave this option blank to show the result from all productions Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report You can sort the report by Date or Employee Space Include Billable Charges If checked program includes Billable Charges in Rate and Extended columns Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the records for the given locati
98. cries tare wee ae arte reas cod 33 Reset REBIS UNE arse Saeco En E 33 VIC WAVING A A tarde tnt nat craie Rare rte lens pan tet aie aria 33 HOME ii 34 COSTA S 56 an dinde le de titine nana A 34 Rental Tracker Inc Contact INfOrMation c ccc cccccccceccecceccescecceccuseuseeseeseuseuseeseuseuseeseeseuseeseeeeeseeseesensenses 34 WWW REN Fal TFACKER COM wait didas 34 Emallto Rental Tracker tant lita hela hit hd Re AA ie 34 BatchBarcoded SCG as e 34 SETTING UP RTPRO varada inn aaa 37 Administration Mod le iia A A dd 38 Te ia Se UU aarti causa o TI O da a a cue 38 SIS TONES CU a A A NE 38 COMPARADA ie E 38 DET AGILS TAD es eee da rd os 39 Next NUDE iaa ll o cn cial 42 EUDEN eaa a ailicn clic cide ile sud de sito le te lic sd rbd tele le 43 E AD des O II A 43 A A A E AA A IEA 45 RN E O Re E NCR A 45 DFAS o AEA AAE A E EA E 46 BINE Tabs a O o ON 47 VOICE Ta Dear to too oo ola a ec 47 INE ETE E T EE nn can ent ahi feast Nes eh E adiva ts lt a tves 3i0cad oAinaline 48 Labor Sac Ab RS a ie bee nues na eee Ne M nn tnt 49 ECU CS TADO aie ica pokes aap Re tete dal ete dde ete dent cela terne 49 TPONSIQUON TOD Cc cast AAA AA AR AA dites le Dites der A A is Dee 49 USCESCUUD ia AAA AAN AAA AAA Oeneeind d 49 SO CUTIE SCUD dd Da iia 52 A D ER E EAT E A 55 MASTOT oore E E E E EEE 55 POE A AAA AA A Ata 55 PG GU CON pe OPEP EE A aaa ene Re CD ales sams DER D ne 56 Venda ii ne de TE 61 CONOCE A NA A eme do Nid 62 SE O ES 0
99. date The usage end date is used for quoting if a customer keeps items out past the usage end date the billing charges are still calculated past the end usage date Week To save time Users can click on Week icon enter a value and based on number of weeks entered the usage date will be calculated Production This 1s the production code that the order belongs to Billing Name amp Address The Billing Name amp Address default over from the Billing Name amp Address on the Production level The Billing Name amp Address prints out on several customers reports such as Quote sheet Checkout sheet contract Check in sheet and Invoice Job Title Use this as a description for the order The Job Title makes it easier for a user to find a specific order The Job Title appears on several listings and customer reports Shipping Name amp Address Shipping Name amp Address can be typed or selected from drop down list The Shipping Name amp Address appears on customer reports and shipping labels Billing Contact The accounting contact should be entered in this field This field 1s defaulted over from the production that this order is relevant to Billing Contact Information This field may contain phone or fax numbers and any additional billing information This field 1s defaulted over from the production that this order 1s relevant to Customer Contact This person is responsible for the order Examples of the customer contact would
100. dialog boxes press plus button and fill the required fields You can do this from File Maintenance Module before adding rental equipment Items The Equipment Code and the General Ledger Account fields are the only required fields in the Equipment Code table Duplicate Current Item kik There is a toolbar button called Duplicate Current Item When this button is clicked program creates a new Equipment Code and carries all information from the previous Equipment Code that was selected on the screen This makes the entry of new equipment easier Note This icon is disabled when user is Editing or Inserting Department If your shop is divided into departments based on physical layout or job duties the equipment layout can be designed to match Many reports like Pull Sheet for an order can be sorted by the department This would allow you to separate an order and divide the work among the appropriate staff The Department also may specify a group of equipment for items see Start the Physical Inventory Process later in this chapter To assign a Department to equipment it must be select from Department table You can type Department Code or click drop down arrow to choose department code from Lookup list Category If you wish to provide a cost breakdown for the different groups of equipment on a quote or an invoice use the Category to group the equipment For example if Category used you could see a list of all the Electronics an
101. do this click on the list to include in report Repair location If you want to select the equipment currently in repair by the repair location enter in a repair location Location If you are using multi location features you can filter equipment in report by a specific location Currency If you are using multi currency features you can choose which currency to use for the replacement cost and repair cost Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company RepairReport Datel me 2006 06 13 34 0 PMf Location LA Currency US Equipment Description Barcode Qty Order Production User Date Ticket Reason Repair Repair In Out 56000 AOS TMPROY 200202 2 003 08 09 12 neie SR Sian ay oe 00121 JARRMZ5POCKETPARSPOTLENS 1001210002 1 500680 COMEHOMEZ TIE AE TL A EE mm Rss ue Subtotal 9147 00 CON Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Retired Inventory Report The purpose of this report is to get a FE Retired Inventory Report Ee list of inventory items that are poetas retired There are two formats Department A C Summary avallable to print this report The aaa 8 Detaj Summary format displays the Er quantity of each type of equipment ei Department that has been retired The Detail Range eae C Category format will display the individual Eco purchase information for each FetredFeason E e Barcoded item or group of ae o H F Date egi O ale a Noncoded items tha
102. e My Computer 3 Handheld PC Default Device Select a Windows CE Device H PC Ver 200 3 Handheld PC Default Device Handheld PC Emulation E Palm size PC Default Device 23 Palm size PC Emulation Ready NUM From an application developers point of view the Registry is the place where application specific state information is stored between executions Predictably the Windows CE Registry is a leaner version of its desktop cousin This means that you may want to re evaluate the kind and amount of data your application stores in the Registry The Remote Registry Viewer behaves in a fashion similar to 1ts desktop counterpart RegEdit Let us use it to take a closer look at the structure and content of the CE Registry For using this application all you need is to copy the executable file in a place in your hard disk and launch that Then add your device to the Remote Registry Editor and then browse the registry keys in left panel and view the contents in right panel Note You need Active sync installed on your pc before running the remote registry editor application Add RtproSL shortcut to start menu In root of Application on the scanner there is a file named ShellAppl_9000 Reg MC9000 platform use this file as start menu items You can modify this file and add RtproSL to this start menu Steps to Add Copy ShellAppl 9000 Reg from scanner to PC with ActiveSync Open the file with a simple text viewer applic
103. end date and ignores all records beyond that date Master Select Master to limit report to show only parents for selected Master Leave this option blank to show results for all Masters Note This option will change based on your report type selection from menu and it will be filtered for the same report type such as filter by master for report by Revenue Generated by master report Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Note You can include all records in report or select to print all invoices uploaded or non uploaded invoices Example EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Revenue Generated Report By Customer DateTime 10 10 2010 2 42 02 PM Location LOSANGELES Creation Date Range 1 2010 10 10 2010 Format Summary Location LOSANGELES Currency USD C Gare Customekame EA American Film Institute MIDDLE ABC MODERNFA C Studios TREASURE Dis The data used to reflect the revenue generated is from confirmed invoices An individual invoice totals for a selected production s and a report totals will be displayed Creation Date Range To filter report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date a
104. for all productions Pull Date Range To filter the report accurately specify the beginning and ending Pull date Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Quotes Reservations Orders Report DateTime 2006 06 14 124 05 00 PM Page 1 of 6 Sortby Pull Date pte _ cmt mue mue otto Meto PE Contact Date Date oe etho A O EE A PS ET CTS E e OO aa ES Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Orders Expected to Return Report This report reflects the orders that are expected to return EPIA Return Report RIRE IEA on or before a specific date The date that is referenced for the report is the Return Date which is stored on the As Of Date Order Header screen The report includes order number the date that the order is created and the expected return aces date Only orders with outstanding items will appear on this report Filter Options As Of Date A list of orders with Return Date on or before this given date Locabon Production Shows only the orders belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all productions Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example
105. from Go to menu Substituting Equipments This feature gives an ability to substitute equipment with another one Sometimes we have equipment which 1s not available during ordering Here if we had a substitution list containing similar equipment we can use it To see if equipment has a substitution list highlight equipment code and click the substitution icon If equipment has a substitution list it will show You can use this list to replace existing items in the order with other similar items For more information about substitution lists refer to Inventory Substitution List section in chapter 5 Create and using Kits A kit is a group of items which are linked together and given a kit name The kit can be added to an order and this can make ordering equipment easier An example of a kit 1s a 10 ton truck kit Camera XX Kit Rick Jones Kit Creating Kits You may create Kits in Rental Order Screen Creating Kits from Inventory module is also possible For more details see Rental Kit List in Chapter 5 A To use this feature create a dummy order and add equipment you want to include in Kit then press button complete kit details and save it Note Kit names should be unique in the system Note You can use quantity ordered or shipped to include items in a kit Adding kit to an order A For adding a kit to an order click on Copy From a Kit icon on Rental Order Screen Then select the kit and enter quantity Note
106. functionality consistencies CODES Through the system codes are always alphanumeric and can be up to 10 characters in length Codes should be significant when created The code is only for internal purposes and does not printout on any customer reports with the exception of the equipment code table DESCRIPTIONS Descriptions are always 30 characters in length The description prints on customer reports To add edit and delete records from a table refer to Common Functions Inventory Menu Location Table This table should contain the warehouse locations This table used for handling multi location warehouses The multiple location functionality allows segregating and reporting data and access across order vendors invoices equipment and more Each location operates in many ways separate from each location A revenue report is available to filter out the revenue generated by location Note By double clicking on each location or pressing edit button the Location Detail Screen will appear You will be able to edit an existing location that is already defined through the system Additional locations can only be added by RTPro staff The Location Table consists of Code Description Name Address Phone Fax Currency and other fields which are explained as follows Inactive When a Location is made Inactive program prompts All Pricing and Equipment StockNo Description for this Location will be erased Continue If user confirms the
107. get a listing of all Purchase Orders Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Orders Attached to PO Report Date Time 2006 06 1810 03 084M Page 1 of 4 rae ee aes Date Number EE oy 500085 0148936 P001 08 14 Partret CT ET VERBAL TZ o pp o ienn orbe anaes VEAL POLE pat Se goes VERBAL oroso Cose S EEE E SIT SSCS SC ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cost Sheet By Production The purpose of this report 1s to print the cost sheet for both sales and subrentals items across the entire CA Cost Sheet By Production production You can choose to print Subrentals Only C Subrentals Ordo i Curen Cos Subrentals for Current Weekly Cost Sales Only or Subrentals Cunent Weekly Cost Subrentals and Sales If you choose to print sold aos ony Average Cost items you have option to print Current Costs or bid area als Average cost Filter Options Production hd Production Select a production to see the cost Subrerkal Vendo z breakdown across the entire production Production Leave Blank for All Vendors field cannot be blank E DR ook Total Sub rental Vendor Select a vendor to print Pint PO equipment purchased from the specified vendor Example Rental Tracker 12481 Tejas Court Ranc
108. icon will bring up the location description Equipment Code 00070 Cty Dwn 5 Description ARRI COMPACT 6K HMI HEAD ARRI COMPACT BE HMI HEAD ADDI CODAT Ce URAIL UC 4 Use Multi currency If your company deals with multiple currencies then you should checkmark this box Please note that in the system setup user cannot select Multiple Currency 1f the multiple Location is not checked Use Multi currency per Location When check marked the locations can have multiple currencies Note This option is available if the Use Multi Location and the Use Multi Currency is check marked Use Multi Language This item will activate the translation of labels and column headers if it is checked Refer to Translation Table for more details Use Depreciation If the system should calculate the depreciation of inventory items this option should be check marked Use Ownership If your shop stores inventory as a consignment RTPro can track the inventory and revenue generated for the consignment owner Use city state zip By check marking this the city state and zip will be separated into 3 fields instead of one address line Use PO Location Prefix If you are using multi location feature checking this option will use first 2 character of location for the prefix of the next Purchase Order which will be added to the system Equipment Each checkbox acts as the default value for the checkbox in the equipment screen So users
109. in certain situations when there is a window between the Pull Date and the Ship Date in which the equipment might actually be available For example equipment pulled on a Friday for a Monday shipment but on Saturday one of the pieces is needed for an emergency If checking by Pull Date the item would not show it available for Saturday because it was pulled on Friday However 88 Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc checking by Ship Date the equipment would show available because it will not ship out until Monday It is possible the gear can be used on Saturday and be returned in time on Monday for next order Next Page Clicking the Next Page button will display the dates for the next nine weeks First Page If you have clicked Next Page several times clicking on First page will bring you back to the current date Previous Page If you have clicked the Next Page button clicking the Previous Page will take you one page back from the current position Qty Owned When user clicks on the Qty Owned value then program will display Rental Inventory Records for that equipment and for that location Qty in Repair When user clicks on the Qty in Repair value then the program will display Repair Header List with the tickets that have that equipment still in repair for that location listed in the grid Rental Availability Detail Screen Click on any date on the calendar to display the Rental Availability Detail Screen A summary of all
110. is recommended entering as much information as possible In addition to having the historical reference the information can serve as a sort for several screens grids and reports For example you may wish to run a report of all the items purchased from a particular vendor When adding like items from the same purchase you do not need to enter the same information for each barcode repeatedly During each session of additions the information that is entered into fields carries over from one barcode to the next until you change them Start a new session whenever an item you are entering has many differences to the last item To start a new session simply change the data or exit Add Rental Barcoded Items Screen and re enter ES Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc The Equipment Code Location and Vendor fields should be selected from tables It 1s possible to create and add new codes to these tables from this screen as items are adding It might be helpful to create all necessary codes from File Maintenance Module prior to adding rental equipment items Enter Serial box When this box is checked the system will prompt for the Serial number of the item after each barcode is entered Auto Assign Barcodes box RTPro can keep track of your barcode sequence and automatically assign the next available barcode Make sure you have entered the starting barcode number in the Next Barcode Number field in System Setup see System Setup in
111. is for countries that support double space tax rate Rental Tax on Tax If tax rate 2 should be applied after the rental tax amount from tax one has been added to the rental charges Sales Tax on Tax If tax rate 2 should applied after the sales tax amount from tax one added to the sale charges Tax1 Label amp Tax2 Label Some countries such as Canada have two types of taxes and specific naming for the taxes The naming of the tax label can be customized to your country tax type The tax labels appear on customer reports and management reports Examples of tax rates are Rental Salez Rate Ship Labor Space Rental Sales Ship Labor Spacel Rental Sales Rate Rate Rate Rate 2 Rate 2 Rate 2 Rate 2 Rate 2 TaxOnT au T axUnT ax Tal Label Taxe Label E E 5 5 5 4 4 7 7 7 E E D O 5 BB E GST 7 7 7 E GST PST Location If there is a location specified for tax type then 1t can be used only for users who have access to that location Inactive Im File Maintenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If a Tax Type is inactive 1t cannot be used on any new orders productions or invoices when editing the information The Tax Type lookups for data entry only shows active Tax Types Note Tax Type lookups for reports show all Tax Types regardless of the Inactive field Vendor Flag If this 1s checked the Tax code 1s used only for Purchase Order module Terms Table The term indicates when the invoice should
112. items and remaining ones All Returned Items Only print the returned items in the Check in sheet Partial Returns Select this item if you want to print the Check in sheet in a date time period CheckIn Sheet Returned and Remaring bens Al Returned tems SRE mee 7 Print Kit Heade _ Include Loss amp Damages Exit Mode RF 11 15 2011 13 11 56 Remaining Items Only print the Check in remained items in the Check in sheet Print Replacement Price Only Loss And Damage Only Only print the Loss items or Damaged ones in the Check in sheet Print Damage Description Only Other Information Note As Exchange Marks this item as an exchanged item Print Kit Header Determines whether or not to print the kit header in the Check in sheet Include Loss amp Damage Includes the Loss items and Damaged items in the report Separate By Order Separates the report for different orders Print Qty Out Print the checked out quantity for each record in the Check in sheet Current Week Contracts For description of this section refer to Current Week Contracts in checkout section Ship Sales You can ship Sales stock in this screen Upon a successful shipping program displays the message Success followed by the description of the stock If there is an error when shipping out this equipment program will display an error message in red In addition 1f Reorder Point for this stock is set in the Sal
113. layout RTPro has designed the program interface with the following ideas in mind ease of use graphical buttons and short cut keys In the following chapters each module s menu layout graphical buttons and short cut keys will be described in detail NN Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc RTPro Main Screen RTPro Demo Company y J2 iol xj File Options Edit wiew Help m Pa Pr Y El Ue Rental Tre Menu Buttons Administration File Maintenance Purchase Accounts LaborSpace Help Order Recemnwable Scheduling User U Location TORONTO Version 5 0 0 16 _ Copyright 1999 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Using the toolbar Each screen has a graphical toolbar of commonly used functions Below is a description of the Main Menu toolbar In the Main toolbar a few graphical icons allow quick access to a function mi The system will prompt for a barcode The barcode can be scanned or manually entered If the Barcode is found in inventory the Barcoded inventory screen will display Pa This button displays all Parent records in a listing PF This button displays all the Production records in a listing This button displays all the Vendor records in a listing A lt This button displays all the Contact records in a listing This will bring up an email program such as outlook If your workstation has an internet connection email to Rental Tracker could be sent easily Comm
114. list Within RTPro a revenue report is available to run against a parent company Production Code The production code is a 10 character code which should be significant to identify the production title Many reports and searching options throughout the program prompt for the production code Production Type Production type identifies the type of a production An example of a production type would be Feature Commercial TV etc The production type can be entered manually or selected from a drop down list To setup production types refer to the file maintenance section Revenue reports can be run against production types Location If company is multi location this field will appear It 1s the default location for orders that are created for this production To setup Location refer to the Location table in file maintenance section This is not a required field Note Location field is available if Use multi location feature is set in Setup Screen Production Title The production title is related to production code This title should indicate the name or description of the production Billing Name amp Billing Address Billing name should represent where the invoices will be sent This should be the production company The billing name will come over from the parent company but can be changed if different for the Production Im Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Phone This should be the phone number of the pr
115. lu REDPACKAG Red One Camera PA a 5775 90 776 90 32024380 100 775 90 775 90 CHIM Chimera Equipment Replacement Total i 1 pams Cost Value il 1 San san sos im an ma sesos EE HH E 6000 55 20 Chimers Lantern 19 77 220 9 36 523 5 0 15000 88 E00W 00W 200W BugLiteSpeedring s2 815 51 4207 00 61443 518025 313025 Description of Columns EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Qty Owned This is the average quantity owned within the date range specified Replacement Cost This is the Cost of the items The cost is the current market Replacement Cost which comes from the Equipment table Total Value This is the Qty Owned multiplied by the Replacement Cost Days Billed This is the total number of calendar days which were billed for the equipment for the date range specified Subrentals are also included in this report Invoices and Credit transactions are included in this If the invoice credit creation date is within the date range specified then the detail billed transactions is used for this column Weeks Billed The number of days billed divided by 7 Revenue Amount billed to the client within the date range specified Invoices and Credit transactions are included in this If the invoice credit creation date is within the date range specified then the detail billed transactions 1s used for this column Maintenance Cost If there is a repair ticket in the date range specified and rep
116. main equipment items in reports will show as bold Report Error Logs to Rental Tracker via Email 460 Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If you check this box the system will automatically send an Email to Rental Tracker Company and mention the errors occurred in program Save Access Violation Errors in Database If this box 1s checked the system will save Access Violation errors in database automatically It is recommended that this is checked Company Header Position This will set the position of the company header on printouts The Company may be left right align or center in page header Company may also choose not to print their logo and name on reports at all Use Department and Category for Add Rental Inventory Screen If checked when adding inventory the system will prompt and filter the equipment code selection by department and category Logo Printout Position inches This will set the position of Company logo when printing reports These values should be entered as inches and will use only 1f Company header position 1s not set to No Header Top Margin for page 2 of Customer Reports There is an option embedded in RTPro which allows users to define the top margin of customer reports after second page Billing Tab GL General Ledger Account Each of the charge buckets listed can be associated with a general GL Account Taxable ledger income account from the General Ledger Account table A pata 479000
117. mobile computers were designed using a Flash File System architecture that supports application persistence To survive a cold boot RTPro should be installed in the non volatile flash memory of the mobile computer Download Complete User Manual from http devzone symbol com resources Installing Applications_for_Persistence_v2 pdf We did the below steps to make RTPro persist on memory With doing these steps you don t need to reinstall the RTPro after a cold boot Remove unwanted files and folders Check the Application Startup folder in scanner and remove the Rtpro exe file if it exists there If Rtpro folder exists in the root of the scanner folders remove that completely ES Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Make RtproSL auto start Copy the RTProSL cpy and also the RTProSL run files to the Application folder of the scanner device Copy cold boot files to Application Copy the RTProSL ColdBoot cpy amp RTProSL ColdBoot reg to Application folder of the scanner device These files were created for automatically copying and installing the pre installation files after cold boot Copy preinstallation files Copy netcf all wce4 armv4 cab amp symbol all arm cab to Application folder of the scanner device These files are required to be installed before running RTPro Create RTPro Folder Create a new folder named RTProSL inside the Application folder of the scanner if not exists Copy Rtpro exe Copy the executable
118. need for a decimal point a 10 discount should enter as 10 The discount will default over to the Rental Order Entry Screen if rental items are marked as discountable in the equipment code s setup Sales Disc The sales discount is a percentage value There is no need for a decimal point a 10 discount should enter as 10 The discount will default over to the Sales Order Entry Screen Rental List Price Markup By entering any values Rental list prices will be marked up by percentage List prices will increase by this percentage Tax Type A tax type can be entered or selected from Tax Codes To setup the Tax Type refer to Tax entry screen in file maintenance menu When creating a new order the tax type value will default over to the order Billing Contact The accounting contact should be entered in this field The billing contact will default over to any new order which is created Billing Contact Information EN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This is a default value for contact information in billing contact information Information such as phone and fax numbers additional contact names can be entered here Customer Contact This is the responsible person for this production An example of the customer contact would be the best boy grip or gaffer The customer contact must exist on the customer contact table To select a customer contact click on the drop down list If the contact does not exist user
119. noted Subrental Days Rented This column looks at the rental checkout check in detail level for subrental items only The days are calculated against the checkout and check in date and the date range specified Subrental Revenue This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the extended amount of the invoice rental detail level which are subrented only Subrental Quantity Rented This column looks at the rental checkout check in detail level for subrental items only The quantity is calculated against the quantity of items for the date range specified Subrental Quantity Billed This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation 1s based upon the quantity of the invoice rental detail level Vendor Cost This is the amount it cost your company for the subrentals billed during the date range specified Subrental Profit This is the difference from the subrental revenue and the vendor cost Total Revenue This is the total of the revenue the subrental revenue ETS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Inventory Utilization Report This report will print the equipment utilization during the selected date D range Report is sorted by department Ge and under each department type of Category 4 Cort E equipment average quantity available i sa ue E quip gt average qu y gt y i Equipme
120. of kit header in the grid The system will prompt update the kit quantities If yes the kits line items will be updated Removing Kits To remove a kit click on Remove Kit from Action menu in Sales Order Screen ae Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Quote Sheet Click on printer icon in toolbar to print Quote sheet Here you can print rentals sales or both in summary or detail mode This sheet is also available from Report menu in Order Processing main screen Rental Check Out Process The checkout screen is divided into two sections Since Rental Tracker Pro is a multi user system more than one user can check out items at the same time The top section of screen displays all the equipment attached to the order and the bottom section displays checked out items from the current workstation This list is temporary and 1s cleared when exiting CS Rental Checkout Screen Demo Company Jj xj Eje yew Checkout Cancel Filter Hp Me dat SR EN SET ma 9 Le CREER HHH AARI COMPACT 575 HMI HEAD Es p ARR 5751000 ELECTRONIC BALLA 7 100030 00280 ARRAI SO 5751 00 HEAD FEEDER 00030 005650 COMPACT 57575 PAR BABY TE HA GQ PA 57010 57050 TENT STARE FORD AMLE HSC 10 Sama And O Ama 1 10 MIS Cou 10 Leg Hole Cisecior 4 A F Head Feade amd Uwerhead el SIEA 51009 A 20 OVERHEAD FRAME COMPLET un 2 E pa 51009 STI 20 20 FRAME TUBE 1 224 ROUND D oF TENT
121. on PI dropdown tab and click on Scanning Barcode Items In Shop or click on the Scanning Barcode Items In Shop icon in the toolbar The prompt will be in the green Barcode field Scan or type in each barcode number to count EUR Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If a barcode number of equipment is entered and it is not within the parameters of the inventory that have been specified see PI Start Dialog Box above a message will appear to indicate that This item does not belong to this physical inventory selection Note When a barcoded Physical Inventory that is checked into repair is counted program displays an error and also it doesn t mark it as counted User can review the error message in Rejection List report Cancel Scanned Barcode Item Er Barcodes outside of the physical inventory selection will not count However if an acceptable barcode is entered in error to cancel it click the PI dropdown tab and click Cancel Scanned Barcode Item or click on the Cancel Scanned Barcode Item icon in the toolbar The prompt will be in the red Barcode field Scan or type in each barcode number to cancel Note To enter comments about the barcode that has been counted click the View dropdown and click notes or click the note icon 1 Batch Download from the Scanner Gun EE To increase the physical inventory process RTPro is able to download batch barcodes which are stored in the scanner To do this select P
122. on the main xi screen Select the order Orderkt 25235 You should be on Order Processing Screen where it Production QUOTES says Currently Working on Order the specified order ordersteus Shipped should appear Expected Return 2 10 2012 Click on the Billing menu at the top of the screen Select Create New Invoice A screen will appear giving you options Usage Date 2 4 2012 2 10 2012 Last Billing This Billing 274 201 2 v 2 1 0 2012 bl r Create Invoice if total is 0 00 E Rebill Entire Sales Order Bill Type M Rentals M Loss M Restocking M Sales Y Damage MW Labor J Use Oty Ordered w Shipping M Space Create a Preview Create the Draft x Cancel Help 168 Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Last Billing Last Billing shows the last billing date range order was billed for This Billing This Billing shows the next billing date range the system shows as billable The dates can be adjusted The default is 7 days Create 0 Invoice If the charges for an order total 0 00 a 0 00 dollar invoice can be created for the billing period Rebill Entire Sales Order The system allows rebilling an order for a previous period The dates must be entered and the system will prompt Order already billed for this period Do you want to Re bill Bill Type Bill Type allows for selection of the types of charges that system should include in the bill At the bottom of the page is a
123. option will check in all Barcoded items It leaves subrentals miscellaneous and noncoded items intact Check in all excluding Barcoded This option will check in all noncoded subrentals and miscellaneous items Check in all items This option will allow check in all types of items Cancel Check in Cancel Check in Barcoded E Click on Cancel Barcoded icon in the toolbar or select it from Cancel menu The Barcode field at the bottom of the screen turns red Scan the barcode and the check in date will be canceled and remain out on the order a Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cancel Non Barcoded Sub Rented and Miscellaneous items To cancel non Barcoded items right click on item and select Cancel Checkin Non Barcoded To have mass cancel for noncoded subrented and misc items select Non Barcode from Cancel menu This will lead you to the Mass Checkin Noncoded screen Check the Cancel Checkin box and press F2 or click on the refresh button enter quantity of items you want to cancel In the same way miscellaneous and subrentals items can be canceled Loss and Damage Lists Loss List This list will show the items which have been checked in as a loss To see this list from Rental Check 1n Screen select Loss List under Loss Damage menu In the Loss List the Cost column 1s defaulted over from Replacement Price in Rental Equipment Entry Screen The cost can be modified Damage List A
124. optional accessories in this way can be helpful to see which accessories can be included with this equipment Auto Checkout If the accessories are Noncoded a quantity in this field is the quantity of accessories that automatically checks out when main code is checked out As you see this is a powerful feature and it is recommended to use with caution User always should check to see if auto included accessories are shipped with equipment since it may cause canceling items when accessories were not shipped with it It is recommended using this feature only in controlled situations when the accessories are always included with the main code Auto Checkin If the accessories are Noncoded a quantity in this field is the quantity of accessories that will automatically be checked in when its main code is checked in Again as auto checkout use this with caution It is recommended using this feature only in controlled situations when the accessories are always included with the main code Full Accessory Screen This screen displays all the accessory records for the main equipment Main equipments are designated by bold letters and separated by its accessories Here you also can add a new accessory to the main equipment For more details about accessories refer to Accessory List Substitution List O 2 The Substitution List allows you to maintain a list of possible substitutions for a type of equipment For example you may own different brands
125. order level a billing schedule can be added from the template Simply enter the code where prompted The date fields will populate according to the order and template criteria while the rest of the fields will populate with the data from the template These fields can be edited and additional cycles can be added by clicking on the add button However because the Stop Loop and Cycle fields cannot edit consideration should be given to how many additional cycles might affect the schedule Billing Schedule Codes If the billing module is used in RTPro there should be at least one billing schedule labeled DEFAULT This will be the billing schedule used for every order unless the order has a customized billing schedule The default schedule will bring up the orders to invoice every week if items are out Additional Codes can be defined to identify the different types of billing schedules used to create billing templates When billing schedule code is created the following fields are prompted the examples are from the above scenario Code This is the code which will identify the billing schedule Use a label of your choosing such as MONTHLY STUDENT or EMPLOYEE that will differentiate one type from another e g RTPRO Description This is the full description of the billing schedule Example RTPro Show Billing Schedule Action The field handles how to continue with billing an order Possible choices are Loop or Stop COS Setting up RTPro
126. os Soe ARRAI 575 1200 ELECTRONIC BALLA 10000700 000120 HHH ARAI COMPACT 575 HMI HEAD 100363 Barcoded Subeertal Barcoded SS Equipment 57060 TENT STAKES FORD AXLE A ld dati Bh On this screen items can be checked out by scanning or entering in barcodes Checked out records will be updated to the bottom section of the screen Information about the checked out items whether Barcoded or Noncoded will display next to the barcode prompt Note Bottom section of the list will sort items in the order the items are checked out and sort order cannot be changed Last checked out items will be set on the top of the sorted list Enable Double Scan Error Right click on the grid refresh button on top left side of grid There is an item that says Enable Double Scan Error this means if an item is already checked out don t show error Already Checked Out to Order message on the screen A double scan sound will be played Checkout Barcoded Items ES When items should be checked out as Barcoded select Barcoded option under Checkout menu or click on 1ts icon from the toolbar and a green highlighted field will show to prompt the user for a barcode Scan the barcode number If the barcode is valid it will be added to checkout items section A valid sound will be played Checkout Noncoded Items Using main list 14g Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Right click on equipment that you desire to check out as
127. pay An example would be Net 15 Net 30 The table consists of a code description Due Days Discount Days and Discount Pct Due Days This is the number of days that your customer has to pay for their invoices Discount Days Represent the number of days that your shop will honor a discount to the customer if the invoice is paid within the discount days Discount Pct This is the discount percent which will be given if the customer pays the invoice within the discount days Currency Table This table stores the different type of currencies The table contains a Code Description and Currency Position This table is available if the system is setup to use multi currencies See System Setup in chapter 2 for more information General Menu All options under utilities should be used under Rental Tracker Staff assistance Macro Table There are two fields on the macro setup table key and text Macros are used within the free form description field on the equipment code screen and the comments field on the inventory screen When a macro 1s typed in the Notes field the system will replace the macro with the substitute text of the macro Macros can be helpful to maintain consistency Examples of macros are Key Text WC With Cable NOC No Cable Included Anytime a user types in the key followed by a space on the notes field the system will replace with the text This helps with misspelling and inconsistencies on data entry Footer The
128. production or order Create Edit Salesperson record After clicking add or edit icons Contact Entry Screen will open The following fields are available Salesperson Code The Salesperson code is a maximum of 10 characters which should be meaningful to identify the Salesperson Some reports in the program use Sales Person code Salesperson Name This 1s name of the Sales Person Fax This field contains Fax number of Sales Person Notes A Note about this Sales Person can be entered Inactive If checked users will not be able to select inactive salesmans in lookups Billing Schedule RTPro is designed to create an invoice for billable rental items on a weekly basis Variations to standard weekly invoicing can be designed by setting up a billing schedule For example you may want to create one invoice per week or perhaps every fourth week with a 50 discount Use the billing schedule to define these billing periods so that certain reports and invoicing procedures will prompt billing periods for the order according to your schedule and amounts rather than the weekly default settings A Billing Schedule can be created from the order level However if a billing schedule is to be used on a regular basis a template can be designed so that a billing schedule may be quickly and easily selected for orders To do that you must first create a Billing Schedule Code and then create the template in Billing Schedule Setup Both of these are covere
129. result of Equipment OO Range report by Production and the range of equipment and Invoice Filter Options Production Equipment Range You can limit the range of a equipment displayed in this report by selecting the 1042 2011 beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Also multiple equipment can be 4 ance i selected To do this click on list icon in front of WOK XE El 113 Seve e Equipment Range and select each one you want to include in report Production Select production to limit the report result Leave this option blank to show report across all productions Invoice Date Range The report can be filtered using invoice date range Leave this blank to bring all invoices in the report Example I Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTPro Demo Company Rental Inventory Sold Report Date Time 34 22008 5 45 44 4M Page 1 of 5 Date Range 3A 22007 34 22008 Invoice 317 invoice Date 3 21 2007 3 26 00 Ph Production Codef2977 IMPULSE Code A r p e a e oe E Late gon Description Date Price A C EXT 50 ABDO 00002 CABOIDOTO A V ooo amors s Are ote E Fa 00 T Te ERELEDISTR i EGS TR ME EFI ABRES ki ALEDISTR TAPAS TEES EES 0002 1 D 20078 563 80 3 57337 EIN SI TE renos LE mm 954 AA A Woite 315661 Invoice Date 2008 1 33 00 PM Production C a ts a a al e eee Lean _
130. sales All other types of charges will be billable Default Production Type The Production Type is defaulted when a new production is created There is a user definable table for Production Types An example of a Production Type would be Feature Commercial or perhaps TV Refer to the Production Type Table for further details Default Daily Weekly The choices are Daily or Weekly The value will default over to the production header screen See Chapter 5 for more information about Daily amp Weekly Pricing The value will default from the production to the order The daily or weekly is used for equipment pricing Default Payment Type 390 Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc The Payment Type defaults in on the Production Header Screen There is a Pay Type table which can be maintained within the file maintenance module Refer to the Pay type section for further details Display Insurance Expired Warning On the Production Header screen there is an insurance expiration date When an order is created the system will warn the user if the insurance has expired The system will not stop the user from continuing it is just a warning To use this feature checkmark the box Keep non shipped rentals reserved until the order return date Checking this option will mark the unshipped equipment unavailable until the orders return date Capitalize First Letter of each Word By checking this item the application will automatically capi
131. saving by pressing the play buttons Use Beep Check this box to use the sound playing feature of RTPro in whole of the application Use Frequency With this option selected you can define the frequency and duration of Good beep and Bad beep yourself instead of using default beeps Duration The duration time milliseconds of playing Mode Batch 1 1 2009 00 02 29 the sound Frequency The frequency of beep Beeper Volume The volume of beep Note If you do not want to hear any of the sounds set the duration to zero Note Some combination of Frequency and Duration may cause your scanner to crash when working in some screens if so try other combinations or disable sound Port Setting In this page users can set the cradle connection Mie parameters for connecting scanners to the server via cradle Currently only COM port 1 and COM Port 2 supported Port Set the communication port number for connection ActiveSync This option should be selected if you are using ActiveSync to read batch data from scanner Otherwise select port 1f you are using COM port Serial cable to send batch data to RTPro Desktop Speed Represents the speed of connection Parity Set the parity bit of packets 6 Mode Batch 1172009 00 02 34 Stop Bits The number of stop bits for packets A Set the COM Port on the Scanner EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Use the Comm Settings window to se
132. scanners Listening means the socket 1s ready for sending and receiving data Server IP This is the IP address of the computer who is running the RF Server application This can help the user to ser the server IP inside the scanners application Server Port The connection between scanners and server will This can help the users to set the server IP inside the scanners application Active Connections Shows the number of wireless scanners connected to this server DB Connection Represents the status of connection between RF Serve and selected database Server Name This label shows the name of SQL Server which RF Server is connected to You can change SQL Server connection information inside Setting Page on Database Connection section Database Name Server will connect to this database to send data Provider The OLE DB provider name for connecting to database 220 Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Server Setting This is the setting page of RF Server In this page users can set the different parameters relevant to different sections of RF Server 24 RTPro Proxy Server Settings QU E j Database Connection Connection String Frovider SOLOLEDE 1 integrated Secunty SSPlPeraist Secur Server Settings Lag Listen on Port 1024 al M Log Transactions view L E Timeout Seconds 10 M Log Errors View Requery me 100 E Max Trans Loge 1000 y B blas Error Logs AGU Save Log to database
133. several production companies are working on the same project and you would like to know the revenue that is generated by the entire project Available is a Revenue Generated by Project Report The table contains of a Code Description and the Start Date of project This table is available from Order Processing dropdown list The Project is used in Order Header Screen and Invoice Header Screen Job Component Table The job component table stores codes for Jobs that your shop would like to track The table contains a Code and Description An example would be the Theatre Lighting Main Electrical Package You may find this table when pressing Job Component from Order Processing dropdown list This Code is used in Order Headers Screen Billing AR Menu Pay Type Table This table should store all the valid types of payments The table consists of a code and description Examples of payment types would be Cash Company Check COD and Credit Card When productions are entered into the system the payment type is prompted The payment type is rolled over from the production to the order header and to the invoice header General Ledger Table GL The General Ledger table stores the chart of accounts which enables you to track the revenue for each type of income The table consists of a code description and Mas90 Examples of General Ledger Accounts are Rentals Sales Tax Shipping Loss Damages etc To access this table press General CIN File Main
134. the download file the raw data will be helpful to Rental Tracker when researching the problem This option will erase the data on the scanner For information on other buttons see Common Functions EJ Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc 136 Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Administration Module RTPro has system values which allow you to tailor the system This feature allows you to customize your Checkin checkout sheet with your business information customize how rental values are calculated customize some features with the Checkin checkout process and define calculations for billing and invoicing This chapter will explain how to setup RTPro to fit your business Using the Management Menu toolbar fi h Pa Pr V 5 P E Below is a description of the Management Menu toolbar To access the management menu click on the Administration button from the Main Menu Security Setup System setup El r r There are several default settings which must be setup before using RTPro These system values are useful in tailoring the system to fit your specific business Please read this section completely before making or creating any new system changes System changes affect the way the entire system will perform Company Tab Company Name amp Company Address This is your shop s name and address The Company name and address will print in the header area on customer reports Company name and addr
135. the location is required Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on list icon in front of Equipment Range and select each one you want to include in report Example ETS Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Rental Inventory Reconciliation Report DateTime 10 10 2010 2 04 40 PM Page Tata Equipment Range 14000 Date Range 1 1 2010 10 10 2010 Location LOSANGELES 14000 15K Alpha Head Quantity Owned Baa Ta Quantity linia CPC 12 retro oan ron 4 aso R R R E i RS EL LE ame SP OA A fRetired ADMIN 100188 OT 45 ifRetired CINDYLA a3 ema 44 AfRetired CINDYLA f100008 OO CC fRetired JOMOVLA 100008 erre O 2 Noa 22 AE OO A ffransfer CINDYALL 1100002 6 25 2010LOSANGELES TORONTO 222 42 linea DD O Sfar ADM ar TOTS da me Ji From To Quanti AAA T A rans DE AE COSANGELES ORONO 27 gt Transfer JONDVALL PL EP lrononto A 35 AA 07 AAK Almbha Fracmnral l one Durrant Mirante Mhunna Rental Inventory Sold Report The purpose of this report is to print inventory items which are not returned by the customers and your company E Rental Inventory Sold Report RTPro E CAES charges these items as sales You can filter the
136. the report will group items in to the separate orders Include Loss and Damages If checked the report includes the loss and damages items Print Kit Header Checking this option will print header of kits 1f kits are added to rental Print Quantity Out Checking this option will print quantity of equipment currently out Print Current PO If checked program prints PO in the header area Include Vendor If it is checked a new column will be added to report called Vendor This option will be enabled only when Remaining Items is selected Print Replacement Prices Checking this item will print replacement prices for rented equipment Check in Sheet by Production This report is the same as Check in Sheet except that this sheet is for production and may contain all equipment from many orders Sales Return Sheet If you have some returned items from sales you can see them in this report You can choose to print All Prices Total Prices Only or No Prices You also may choose to print only equipment returned in a specified date range aB Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Value Sheet The report will list the value of the equipment ordered and you can select to print the Value Sheet by Replacement Cost or Replacement Price It is possible to sort this report by code or description of equipment Remaining Items Only If checked program prints only the items that are still out Include Sales If checked program inc
137. tie Estos Pots ee RE Send Data via Cradle In this method the stored data will send to the computer via a serial cable RS232 cable Please see port settings for more detail for sending Exit data You have to put the scanner on its cradle and make sure the cradle is connected to the computer and then press the button to start sending After sending the batch data RTPro gives you an option to remove the data from the scanner Mode Batch 5 2 2006 23 04 15 Clear Data Send Data via RF In this method the stored data will send to the computer via access point in wireless mode See RF settings for more detail After pressing the button RTPro will connect to the RF Server application and then send the stored data After sending the batch data RTPro will ask you to remove the data from the scanner or not Send Data Via To Existing Batch via RF If you want to send the stored data to an existing batch number in the database use this feature After pressing the button RTPro will get a batch number from user and then connect to the RF Server application to send the stored data All the data will be marked as that batch number in database After sending the batch data RTPro will ask you to remove the data from the scanner or not Clear Data With pressing this button you will clear the stored file and make it empty This feature 1s useful if you did something wrong and want to do your work again ES Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Trac
138. to Quantity Counted column will be added to the amounts in the Previously Counted Column The Add to Quantity Counted column is now empty and additional counts may be entered where necessary Difference RTPro will add up the quantity out on rent in repair and previously counted and subtract this figure from the quantity owned Any differences will be displayed in this column A negative figure means there are items missing while a positive figure means more items are accounted for than are owned As part of the inventory process shortages will be retired and overages will be added to inventory Because adjustments will apply to your inventory it is recommended that these differences are carefully reviewed Any quantities that appear unreasonable should be investigated prior to proceeding see the Physical Inventory Review Report and the Review and Update Inventory later in this chapter Out On Orders MOS Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This screen will list the quantity of the equipment which is out for different orders This screen also displays the date that this equipment was sent out and the expected return date To access Physical Inventory Out On Orders double click on the Qty Owned column In Repair This screen will show the quantity of the equipment which is currently in repair during the physical inventory The date checked into repair and expected date out will be displayed in the list To access Physical Inventory
139. to a specific project To select a project click on its drop down button The project will default over from the order if there is one order attached to the invoice A management report is available showing the revenue generated against a project Terms This is the terms for payment of the invoice The terms are relevant if the AR module is used If the AR module is not used the terms are strictly a reference Salesperson This person in your shop gets credit for the invoice The salesperson will default in from the order if the invoice has one order attached to it A management report 1s available showing the revenue generated against a salesperson Location Used if your RTPro is setup for multi location Upload Include This field determines whether the invoice should export out of RTPro This feature is available for exporting invoices to an accounting package such as SAP Mas90 ACC Pac Peachtree or QuickBooks To setup your RTPro system to export invoices contact Rental Tracker Support Production Type The purpose of this field is to categorize productions Production Type will default in from Order Header Screen If you change Production Type on the Invoice Screen the system will prompt Do you want to update the production type on all the orders attached to this invoice Tax Type li Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc The Tax Type is editable only for non order invoices The tax type will be used when calculati
140. to be on any specific record When the Quick Apply is performed RTPro starts applying the received payment to the invoices in the list starting from the first invoice It will move down the list and continue applying the payment until the entire payment amount has been applied or there are no more invoices left for the amount to apply to In the later case the payment will be marked as partially applied Clear All Amount Applied e If you want to rollback the application of the payment to the invoices click on Clear All Amount Applied icon Note This action will mark the invoices unpaid and the payment amount unapplied Search by invoices In payment screen users can search for an invoice to apply a payment to For this action users must click on Search by Invoice icon in the toolbar and enter in the invoice number in appeared box After entering the invoice number system will automatically change the payment screen according to search result Note In the Payment Screen when a new payment is added and the entire amount is not applied program adds 2 records for credit and debit in General Ledger Transaction table The GL Account of these records comes from Unapplied Credit GL Account and Unapplied Debit GL Account fields in the System Setup Refer to System Setup Payment List RTPro lets users manage all payments on payment list page For viewing this page select Payment List from Payment menu or hit 1ts icon on the t
141. to handle the negative adjustment If there is not enough purchases or positive adjustment quantities the record will not get FIFO d until there is arecord to deplete If there is not enough purchases or positive adjustment quantities the record will not get FIFO d until there is arecord to deplete At any point user will be able to research and see the details of how purchases were depleted FIFO The records in bold are records which increase the Physical inventory for a location Purchases Adjustments and Transfers into a location These records have a record number As the items are sold transferred out and lowered by an adjustment entry the record number will be noted on the entry Noted on the PI entry is what quantity has been sold Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Sales Inventory Transaction History File Search View Help r Z Ty W Ship O Drop O Adjustment Show All 2 Y y to E Fetun O Purchase OO Transfer Qty Transaction Transaction Sold cal StockNo Description RecNo Quantity GEL158 Gel Deep Orange 101 10 10 11 1 2010 Purchase LOSANGEI 10 10 10 30 2010 Purchase LOSANGEI When orders are billed there will be 2 entries added to the GL Distribution One will be for the Cost of Sales and the other will be for the Inventory A credit will be written to the Gl Inventory account and a debit will be written to the GL Cost of Sale account The GL Distribution Report Summary and Deta
142. tool to see if there is a profit for the sub rentals 203 Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ETS Purchase Order O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Introduction to Reports Module There are many reports available within the Reports Module The reports supply both reference and statistical information from all areas of the system to help keep you on top of your data It 1s also recommended that you review Display grid listings in Chapter 2 Throughout RTPro the data displayed on the various grid listings can be filtered and columns can be rearranged in order to provide you with a report of very specific information As a reminder to save time and paper you do not need to print a report each time you need information All RTPro reports can be previewed to the screen by clicking the Preview bullet from the Report Setup window This is very useful for quick lookups to check 1f a report has the information you need or to check various options and sorting capabilities To access the reports click on the Reports button on the main screen The various reports are divided into five sections each represented by a dropdown menu at the top of the Report Module Click the drop down tab to display the reports available in that section Click the report you wish to view or print Where options are available you may restrict the report to only the data or range of data you wish to review Leaving an option field blank will giv
143. up Users and Security Reset Registry This Option allows users to delete all local settings of RTPro that is saved in the registry For example the ordering of grid columns forms size and will set to default Note Use this with caution Your customizedsetting on you grids print options and screens will be reset to the RTPro default View Menu There are several options available such as accessing the barcode search screen the parent listing the production listing the contact listing and salesperson listing Accessing Barcode MI The barcode can be scanned or manually entered into the barcode prompt and the Rental Inventory Entry Screen will appear with the item details Grid Zoom There is an option in Main screen under View menu that allow users to select the grid Zoom size There are already some predefined sizes in the list that user can select each of them and then RTPro use this setting to zoom on grids EN Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc LA RTPro Main Screen RTI m Cu Jh 1 Barcode Pr Production V Vendor 11 18 2009 3 53 00 PM 38001004 Rentals OU 189211 ejuay Rentals Sales Pull Date 98001004 Rentals 11 18 2009 3 53 00 PM Help Menu Contents e Displays help on line You can choose this by pressing FI on main menu Rental Tracker Inc Contact Information The Rental Tracker address phone numbers and employee email addres
144. upper grid items that are currently out or not returned will be distinguished with a red color and items that are returned will be shown in a gray Kits will have a yellow background As you see in the above picture you can choose Check in type and Date Select the proper Check in type and date before starting each session of the Check in process TN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc The date showing at the top of the screen is the system date but if you should check in items date differs you can change it before continuing For example a truck arrived late on Friday night but the shop is not able to check in equipment physically until Monday morning Note This date is used on calculating bills and it needs to be carefully reviewed when changing Within RTPro Items can be checked in with a check in mode The types are Normal Loss Damage Transfer Swap Exchange or No Charge Normal When entering the Rental Check in Screen the system will check in items in Normal type by default It shows that items checked in are in good state and in the item is ready for the next rental Loss Items checked in as Loss means items have been returned but too damaged to be repairable For these items a Loss List can be viewed and edited The Loss list will be used to create an invoice for these items When checked in as a loss the item will be removed from stock and a retirement record will be created for it See Loss List late
145. version of RTPro to the Application RTProSL folder of the scanner Modify the wireless file Note After doing the above steps correctly cold boot the scanner to see if everything is ok Modifying Spectrum 24 file In this section we describe how to modify the spectrum24ds reg file for making the wireless settings memory persistence You need to do the below steps and modify the spectrum24ds reg file Upload spectrum24ds reg Copy the spectrum24ds reg file from the Platform folder of the scanner to the pc Modify spectrum24ds reg In the uploaded file replace the contents of the 2 below keys with the real values from registry read from Pocket PC Remote Registry Editor HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm NETWLANI1 Parms HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Comm NETWLANI Parms Tcplp Add New Key In uploaded file add the below key with contents read from Pocket PC Remote Registry Editor to the spectrum24ds reg HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE Symbol Technologies Inc Profiles Name of Access Point Download spectrum24ds reg Replace the modified file with the original one in Platform folder Note This file is one of the registry files of the scanner so be careful during modifying the file We propose to save a clean original copy of spectrum24ds reg in a separate place in your pc as backup am Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc How to Work With Remote Registry Editor 2 Windows CE Remote Registry Editor 18 x Begsuy Edit View Help ue a aja ajaja
146. 0 0 501 495 65 54 461 04 447 034 64 nr pe 652 00 652 00 Aging Detail by Production In this report users can see the aging of each production with details such as create date or due date As OF Date DM M Curent Filtering options are available to reduce the number of productions You can Production r M 0 30 select single or multiple productions F 3 i invoi Invoices fo eri IS Choose to see opening invoices closed p invoices or both Click on Include M 61 50 Unapplied Payments checkbox to put VEEP iS ll F Over 90 unapplied payments in the report If your company is multi location select a location While doing so you may observe a screen similar to the following w OK X Cancel Z List example Lacalion Note User can see all productions in detail if the production is not selected Note The report will not print the value of the columns if their Include checkbox is unchecked If a row has no value in any of the columns that are checked then that row will not be printed at all Example ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Aging Detailed By Production Report Date Time 2006 06 10 2 54 25PM Page 1 of 2 Location LA A AA AAA A Date Amount Amount DA gt JN E OO AAA A ACPYV01 AC Power Distribution m Phone 661 251 3245 Fax 661 251 3618 y o do Amount Amount 100174 2003 0
147. 0 00 800 00 Total 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 t Browse Multiple orders can be attached to an invoice draft preview To include an order on an invoice click on the Include checkbox or use the space bar A checkmark will appear Once orders are selected click on the Create the Draft button or select it from the Invoice Dropdown list to bill the orders The preview is just a snapshot of a bill and a preview cannot turn to a draft or invoice Note The detail of each selected Order can be seen by selecting Order Header Detail via the right click context menu Note In the Orders to Bill screen orders are distinguished by a white color and Repair Tickets by Yellow a Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc EX Invoice Screen m A A a TA Lo ak File View History Confirm Void Record Help 45383 cian amp Draft E 3 amp Date Created 3 25 2012 3 56 00 PM Created By CINDYLA Date Range 2 17 2011 3431 2012 Production COUGARTOWN Cougar Town Biling Name Abc POH Project Tems 30 v y Billing Address Salespersonl SALLY y Location LOSANGELES y Upload Include vV EE Billing C nt CINDY y Ming Lo Customer Contact City State mA INT n Production Type EPISODIC v Tax Type z Country He esti Credit for Invoicett Payment Checktt Bank Amount 185 Labor Maintenace 12 19 2011 12 19 2011 275 00 0 00 0 00 275 00 469 Subrental 204 11 6 2011 3 31 2012 42 600 00 0
148. 0 19 2003 04 19 AAA __ TEO roduction Shipping Address Terms Met 30 de Dam oke TAA Invoice Total 13 575 12 Invoices Attached to PO The Invoices Attached to PO report prints out all the invoices attached to a PO Purchase Order The Production and the PO number should be entered A single PO or multiple Purchase Orders can be specified This report is great for reporting the hard dollar amount applied towards a PO The report contains invoice PO Level numbers beginning and ending dates invoice amounts Invoice Header and order numbers C Invoice Onder There is an option for user to select the PO either from the Invoice Header or from the Invoice Order If Invoice Order is selected program will use the PO information on the Order level of the invoice and prints the report with the format below Invoice Invoice Invoice Invoice Begin End Amount Date Date If the Invoice Header is Selected Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Invoices Attached to PO Report Date Time 2006 06 11 4 03 11 Phi Production COMNCOl POR PO 115 100244 2006 05 01 2006 06 14 01 539 503 50 500949 Sub Total 539 605 60 TN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Invoice Credit Void Register To see the list of all Invoices Credits and Voids which are relevant to a single or multiple productions select this report under Reports dropdown list User can checkmark one or more checkboxes to filter invoi
149. 00 0 00 42 600 00 0 00 E 11 10 2011 3 26 2012 600 00 0 00 0 00 600 00 0 00 Ce TT Billable RIS E Rentals 11 22 3333 47 520 00 0 00 47 520 00 0 00 47 520 00 Sales 22 22 4444 275 00 0 00 275 00 0 00 275 00 5 Loss LD E 26 000 00 0 00 26 000 00 0 00 26 000 00 2 Damage LD E 450 00 0 00 450 00 0 00 450 00 Total 76 245 00 0 00 76 245 00 0 00 76 245 00 Upload Date Browse Payment Type CASH Job Component Upload Batch Editing the Rental Subtotal If invoice is a Draft unconfirmed invoice you can edit it from Invoice screen Click on the Edit Rental Subtotal and enter in an amount The system will roll the calculation back to the line item details To Add Charges To add a miscellaneous line click on the on the lower section of the screen A screen will appear prompting for the following Description This is a description of the charge GL Account If company is set to Use GL the GL Account is required To select a GL click on the drop down list Taxable If tax should be charged then check taxable Even if the charge is taxable production must be setup as taxable Subtotal Enter amount of charge The billable tax and total will automatically calculate Click OK to save Once totals are adjusted click on D button a lock reference will show above the summary section To edit totals after lock 1s set re click on D button lock reference will be removed
150. 00 ELECTRONIC BALLA Original Location Current Location CULVER Status In Stock Order 500880 Express Lighting Date 11 15 05 User Exit OK View Img Success Mode RF 5 2 2006 23 13 41 ES Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Add Barcode In this page users can add Barcoded items to their Rental Inventory This gibt lela option is available only in the RF mode You cannot add Barcoded items in the batch mode For adding a new Barcoded item just fill in the fields E9HWbment AAA and scan the barcode or enter the barcode and press the OK button to add is E If you want to add a serial then check the Enter Serial box This will o allow you to add a Barcoded item If adding is successful then the new mwo Mfg barcode will be added to your database Otherwise you will receive the Notes proper error message as to why the item cannot be added to the inventory enter a If you are adding multiple Barcoded items to the inventory the last Barcode Barcoded item added to the inventory will show in the Last BC section Exit OK Mode RF 5 2 2006 23 12 07 Send Batch Data When user finishes his work in the batch mode and wants to send the ERES ER ENT data to the database RTPro gives three different ways of sending the data stored in the scanner Send Data via Cradle Send Data via Cradle Send Data via RF Send Data via RF Send Data Via To Existing Batch via RF Sell Peta
151. 06 06 19 Location LA A Currency US EE ReportTotal 1713 00 215 505 32 Estimated Revenue Reports These reports provide projected revenue based upon the criteria entered To arrive at the revenue the report looks at what charges are currently due across orders You may summarize the report by parent production or production type Filter Options As of Date This date will be used to calculate out the charges CS Estimated Revenue Report By Parent RTPro As Ol Dale 10 2 2011 LES Extend to end of Weekly Cycle pact MN oto so Date Orb Production wl a Do not Bil Beyond Usage End Date Production Type xl Payment Type 7 Locator Currency Parent Select parent to limit report to show only productions for selected parent Leave this option blank to show results for all parents Production Select production to limit report to show only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show results for all productions Production Type Select production type to limit report to show only productions matching this production type Leave this option blank to show results for all production types Payment Type Select payment type to limit report to show only productions matching this payment type Leave this option blank to show results for all payment types Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified l
152. 08 00 60 30 1135 90 Invoice Flan 1 084 00 600 00 57 00 1 741 00 Actual Calculated Checkout In Rentals 31 318 00 1 572 30 32 990 90 Current Weekly PO 1590 00 34 50 1904 50 Production Invoice Total 42 00 34 200 Vendor Invoice Total 1 013 00 141 44 1 154 44 Vendor Invoice paid Amount 3953 00 Subrental PO Invoice A list of all vendor invoices that are attached to the PO can be viewed through this screen Also you can add new invoices or edit any existing record The Sub rental PO Invoice is available via the View menu in the Subrental PO Totals screen Subrental Po Invoice Detail 195 Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Through the Subrental Po Invoice Detail screen the details of each purchase order such as invoice number amount and description begin and end dates amount paid etc can be added There 1s a button in this screen which enables you to edit the subtotal To have access click on the Plus icon via Subrental PO Invoice Detail screen Subrental Po Invoice Detail RTPro Demo Company ZIG XI Vendor PAO001 200 PS PRODUCTION SERVICES TOR Invoice Payment Invoice 1223 Cycle ia al Disc Ame 55 00 Misc Amount 5 00 Descnption Date Range E 1 10 29 2007 10 23 2007 7 a Note If you need to rollback to your initial Subrental data select Delete existing detail records and copy from Subrental
153. 1 24 00 At FF 325095 20280 LUPER PRODUCTIONS INC 1 5 2009 2455 00 FM FF 325058 20280 LUPER PRODUCTIONS INC 1410 2009 9 43 00 AM se 325100 20284 MURNAGHAN BEAR ASSOCIATES 2 17 2008 12 04 00 Pr E 326076 20000 QUOTES 7 25 2009 1 30 00 Pr 317 2010 E 326068 20000 QUOTES 1029 2009 2 21 00 Pt z 326069 20000 QUOTES 104342009 22200 Pt 3417 2010 E 326090 20000 QUOTES 10 24 2009 2 22 00 Pt 3 17 2010 FF 326091 20000 QUOTES 1028 2009 2 23 00 Pt 3417 2010 a 326097 20000 QUOTES 11212009 6 00 00 Pt 3172010 E 326101 20278 IMPORTED ARTISTS 11212009 6 00 00 Pt 3 17 2010 Im History 2012 Rental Tracker Inc 288 History 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Understanding the AR menu layout In the Account Receivable module users can manage the payments received from customers and apply each payment to one or more invoices AR module also provides the information needed to tighten the control over customer s accounts This module may be used as a standalone module or interfaced with the General Ledger or Invoicing section Payment New Payment 0 RTPro s New Payment section allows users to add a new payment into the system To run this feature select New Payment from Payment menu or you can accomplish the task with a single click of a toolbar icon Definition of New Payment fields Production Select a production After selecting a valid production and pressing enter on this field the program retrieves all the invoic
154. 1 WAV 20 WAV CARTPro2005 Delphi2005 Outputss 1 Note The bigger the wav file the longer the user must wait before scanning the next barcode j of DK x Cancel P Help Camera Selection is For taking photos from your equipment you should setup a camera or imaging device To do this install your camera on the workstation and make sure it 1s working correctly then go to Camera Selection menu You should see a list of installed camera or imaging devices that are currently installed on your system Choose the one that you want to use and click Ok Photos can be linked to equipment sales items and repair tickets Barcode Printer Setup RTPro allows printing barcode and equipment code labels through the application The labels can be designed to suit your shop When designing the label consult Rental Tracker for details Scanner Setting In this screen choose your barcode reader from a predefined scanner list Select the scanner port xl Scanner Setup Screeen RIFro Demo Ti Th pl Scanner Model Eeybosid Wedge Scanner Com Pait audfists 57600 Pasty None Stop bd i i j L Email Setting You can use email setting to setup your name your email and your mail server This feature is used in the program when you want to send an email from it Download Batch Scanner The function is only available with batch download scanners which is programmed by Rent
155. 14000 iBKAlphaHead 81820000 512 000 00 3750 80 546 400 00 E GT Bates To E 6K 22 es PECERA roo iekAphatiesnelbens Pa mana aos 0 T p ar Lens W pao 51 200 00 12000 so 18K 12K Fresnel 29 5PcSorim Set W Bag ay 5450 00 so00 so 18K AlphaLensProtectonCircular PO 520 00 ooa O 1SIZFFPGBA ISKI2KFF Ps rgem Ballast ej 542000 51200000 20000 80 58 700 00 13812KPOWFE 18K 12106KPowerFeeder S 330000 30000 sul A8HMIDEGA _ 18KHMIDE Globe SO 5900 00 OO 80 5362500 pana a e o aoo IE 3K 12K 8K HMI 50 He PO OO 3740 00 145 00 160 31 450 00 Description of columns Quantity Own This is the current quantity owned for the location Revenue non subrentals This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the extended amount of the invoice rental detail level This column never includes subrentals Unit Purchase Price This is the unit replace price from the equipment table This is the price which would be charged to a client if the item is lost Replacement Days This is the replacement cost divided by the equipment daily rate Quantity Subrented This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the subrental quantity of the invoice rental detail level Subrental Revenue This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range
156. 200 65 00 5100 00 Si3000 5200 00 448 GELROLL17 REVENGE NewLine_____________________ GelRollDeep Lavender_____ 4 00 565 00 5125 00 5260 00 500 00 ______367 GELROLL17 COUGARTO Abe___________ GeRolI Deep Lavender 1 00 551 00 5100 00 51 00 100 00 _____ 448 GELROLL43 REVENGE _ New Line Ge Roll Pink 400 sssool si2500 5220 00 500 00 448 GELROLL43 REVENGE _ New Line Gel Roll Pink 10 00 555 00 5125 00 550 00 1 250 00 Cost of Sales Report Billed This report prints cost of sales for each product and its quantity for each order Ne De that is billed as well as the total cost of Department as sak ar Curent Cost sales for the selected criteria You can Category filter results of report by department Fics Stocktt Purchase Coat category and stock date of sale Last Stock A location and currency There 1s an option Begin Date Por for the user to select Current Cost or the Purchase Cost Current Cost comes from End Date 10 e a the Current value of the Cost column in Production the Sales Inventory Stock table And Veen Purchase Cost is calculated from the Currency Sales Inventory Transaction data Filter Options Department Shows only the stock belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the stock belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show it
157. 2392009 3540 00 6 7 30 2009 8 5 2009 252 00 When the CREATE button 1s pressed program automatically calculates the Quoted Rental Amount for created records Quoted Rental Amount Each cycle calculate out the quoted amount based upon the line items and those items that fall into each cycle In the above example all items fall into cycles 1 thru 4 Only 3 items falls into cycle 5 and only 2 item falls into cycle 6 Calculation of QuotedAmount for Cycle 5 line 2 7 35 1440 288 line 3 7 42 432 72 line 9 7 42 1080 180 SUM 540 00 Calculation of QuotedAmount for Cycle 6 line 3 7 42 432 72 line 9 7 42 1080 180 SUM 252 00 Quoted Tax Will be the tax calculation for the Quoted Rentals and Misc charges Note The user is allowed to edit the entries but program will not recalculate the Invoice Plan s begin end cycle or quoted amount It means if user change something he will be responsible for that Note There cannot be duplicates or gaps within the cycles It means user cannot delete Cycle 2 when there is Cycle 3 Hiatus If the user marks the cycle as Hiatus then program blanks out the Quoted Rental Amount Misc charges and Tax The actual amount Checkout Checkin for a hiatus week will be 0 00 Invoice Amount Comes from the Subrental PO Invoice Detail which matches the cycle This is the Calculated Amount that program shows in Subrental PO Invoice Detail Screen Please note that one or more Invoi
158. 27 2012 MISSION Mission Inn Ooo Ss IESO IS STEREO 3TIZ012 YESMAN Yes Man ls 5943700 SubTotal 35955214 E SubTotal 510 35 AR AR Account 10233 2 2712072 MI5510N Mission Inn ATTE TOTO 670234 372012 VESMAN Yes Man AAA ar SubTotals s9 56250 Totals Customers Sales Summary This report shows Sales Balance and Payments per EA Report RTPre production Options are available to filter the information Beton Curent Period Begin A Cunent Petiod End fi 0221 Payment Type Minimum Y TO Sales Amount la 00 Location Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Customers Sales Summary Report Date Ti me 2006 06 1808 20P M CurrentPeriod 2001 05 0 2006 08 10 Minimum TOSalesAmount 0 00 Location LA Balance Sales Payments Sale Payments Se 192 406 00 41922600 192 126 00 00 a E 0n mm et D epos 595 036 64 547287034 54728704 Is Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc AR Customer Balancing This report is a tool which is to be used to determine customer AR variances based upon the following formula Begin Aging as per begin date entered Begin Date the AR debits for the date range EndDate 3 the AR credits for the date range a Production R Customer Balancing RTPro Demo Cf i The total should equal the ending aging as per the ending date entered If different the account will be K X Cancel E List
159. 32 Renta de Screen E iaa 132 EQUIP EA E e dnde 133 Renta E MIS ee a it aaa 133 Rental Miscellaneous TEMAS SS SSA a 134 Summa ANCL OUGIS Sn a none melon ent 134 HOW to Order EQUIPO ida 134 Printing QUOTe OUICKIISE PUIILIS Ess a 135 Penn QUOTE See SA ARR RS nn nn nr nn ea nn 135 Shortcuts are available from the right click menu 135 Checking Equipment Availability for orders ss 135 Reviewing inventory items across an equipment code sise 136 SUBS titi EQUIPMENT 136 create NAUSEAS ES A AA A A net 136 Customized Rental Order SEN iia aida 136 cria MAS Ea a 137 PIECES CN ariadna iii 137 o nu tneN etienne bi dan ste nat 138 SUBTENU LENS nana arrasada dada daa 138 SUENE RECOV OS RSR RS Sr ARS A 139 Printing Subrental Purchase Order id di iii 139 SUDrent Equipment using PIK IST ai E 140 Review dli Subrentalsof an Order norte n ant A dd dc 140 Understanding the pricing and updating features ss 140 Locking Prices on Rental Order Screen vs Subrental Records Screen ooccoocncocncncncncncncnnncnnonononcnoncnononoss 141 Mass updating Subrental Record actos 142 SOC a E ee te 143 Sales QO Cl SCI CI eras RE E A M sis 143 o A OA 143 Order is A ENE EEE EEEE 143 Order Miscellaneous items aa AA ele tbe RA 144 o A EE M NE PE TE TE 144 nO 144 Sales Checkout Screen dd 145 SLOCKH De Fall SON Net Rene 147 LET ALMA ALUN selec D a E A ne A 147 Create and USING sales IES ss oran dame 147 Prine CIO USES NEED een entice dean an eenca e
160. 5 5 2 130 00 Billable Amount 5 330 00 e Taxable GL Account 1315xxXx000116 Dep Pod Davidson Tate Order 25411 For making the part of the movie El Create Date 10 5 2011 4 10 00 PM Revised Date 10 5 2011 4 10 00 PM Create By LU Revised By U Close Delete Order This field is required and can be entered or selected from the Order List Lookup Space This field is required and can be entered or selected from the Space Table lookup Start End Time The space start and end of working time can be set here All day event It means this space is dedicated for a customer for the entire day Color When adding a new schedule for the space this color will be used as a default color Note User can change the color manually while adding a new schedule Billable Select this option if the space schedule should be billed when the order is being billed Billable Type The type of billing that will be charged against an order should be selected here Rate This is the rate that program charges customers on the non weekend working days Week Rates Users can change the Rates amp Hours Days for weekday and weekend Billable Amount Explained at the end of this document Taxable If checked program charges the tax The tax type can be set from the Order level Note When a new Space schedule is added program default in the value of Taxable from the System Setup GL Account This field is required and can
161. 53 3 1 772010 shpped QUOTES QUOTES 3441772010 L 20000 25110 5 12 2010 Pat Ship QUOTES QUOTES 512 2010 E 0000 2920562342010 Pait Fat QUOTES QUOTES 62342010 Li 20000 25214 6 27 2010 Pat Ship QUOTES QUOTES 6 23 2010 Li 20000 25215 8 7 2010 Pat Ship QUOTES QUOTES 8722010 4 The Check in By Production There are options to bring up orders 1 Show Orders with Item Out By choosing this option user can see those orders that have items still out 2 Show All Orders Using this option will show all orders linked to the specific Parent Production 3 Filter by Project Job component or across order which have specific equipment code The order list can be filtered to the selection specified Check in By Production across Sales Orders A production may have several Sales orders Check in By Production for sales will list all Sales orders that are linked to the production This will help when returns are across several orders for the production Click on the Order Processing module select the production and click on the arrow close to Pr icon located on the header bar and select Sales This will open Check in By Production screen for the sales mode All sales order numbers that belong to the production will be listed Check mark Include box besides those orders you wish to include or click the Include All button 1f you want to select all orders By pressing F10 the Sales Return Screen will appear From this screen items
162. 8 27 2003 08 27 51 233 33 A Ei AJO 5123335 95123333 100191 002235 Pe 5 160 20 3 150 20 243 06 io E 35 24508 VYYOMEO1 Women s Professional Soccer Phone 619 692 981 2 Fax front Que one Remo erro eee ore eee or Te Date Amount Amount A sj mm ot pool es te gooo 190 00 Reporfotals 50251568 5501 995 68 501 495 68 Aging Detail by Date For separating aging by period ranges users can use 4 this report In this report user can see all production s details Select a location from the lookup table if your company is multi location The following report presents Due date Invoice amount Open balance etc Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Aging Detail By Date Report Date Time 2006 06 10 3 00 13PM Location LA Current re le e E Amount Amount Balance OO PCT 5828200 292 00 A ia ea 1 us Sn 100239 2004 02 07 Th Motion Picture Equipment 7500382 et 30 ee 7 0 i Yo 1 E o 652 00 a Reporfotals 502 515 66 1020 00 501 495 65 Aging Detail by Billing Name This report separates invoices by billing name and PEER EN shows each billing name in a separate table Here in this report users can see exact aging of an invoice and its terms See the following figure ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Aging Detailed By Billing Name Report Date Time 2006 06 10 3 05 17 3PM
163. 80 LUPER PRODUCTIONS INC 1 5 2009 2 55 00 PM 325058 20080 LUPER PRODUCTIONS INC 1 10 2008 9 43 00 AM 326100 20284 MURMAGHAN BEAR amp ASSOCIATES 2 17 2008 12 04 00 Pt 326076 20000 QUOTES 7 25 2008 1 30 00 PM 3 17 2010 38068 20000 QUOTES 10 23 2009 2 21 00 Pt 325063 20000 QUOTES 104232009 22200 Ft 7 2010 326090 20000 QUOTES 10 28 2008 22200 Pt 3 17 2010 326051 20000 QUOTES 10 23 2009 2 23 00 Pt 3 17 2010 325097 20000 QUOTES 1142142009 E0000 Ft 17 2010 326101 20278 IMPORTED ARTISTS 1142142009 6 00 00 Pt 3 17 2010 edent _tvensoat Vox _ Corea F r er Fr o er F F FF e fr O F F Month End Close This option will update the system setup Last Month End Close Date Once updated certain transactions could no longer be back dated prior to the date Transactions such as Invoice creation AR payments checkouts and checkins CIN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Introduction to File Maintenance In order to begin entering data into RTPro validation description tables must be setup in advance It 1s essential that these tables be setup because they will be used for validation on many information screens It 1s better that the descriptions be meaningful to you and your customers In addition the tables can be used to provide a guideline for data entry staff Below 1s the File Maintenance Menu and toolbar These visual icons are a shortcut to some of the tables Table and
164. 91 07049 iv pull down list is available This is the GL account that will be E m used unless the GL Account has specified at a different level such as at the equipment code level or sales stock number level Misc Rentals E Taxable Misc Sales 4 The taxable indicator specifies if the charge bucket should have xs E taxes added to the calculation The tax indicator will be used if E ig the tax indicator is not at a different level such as the rental order areas entry screen or sales order entry screen Labor fasso p Please Note If tax indicated on a charge bucket the tax rate pace M must be setup for individual productions Shipping Use General Ledger a If the Accounts Receivable or General Ledger 1s used then Restocking EU i checkmark this indicator Use General Ledger for Cost of Goods If checked program keeps track of the Cost of Goods sold GL Account Default Include on the Order to Bill screen If you check this box each order which has billable charges will be included by default in Order to Bill screen Require Billing Schedule on Orders When you check this box you must first define a Billing Schedule for an order and then you can make a bill for it otherwise an error message will appear to the user that the order has no Billing Schedule and invoice cannot be created Default Terms There is a drop down selection from the Terms table The terms will default over to the product
165. A 10728201 4 10242011fPurchase _ CINDYLA 10242011 WBSE548 Sd A 1072472011 Purchase _ CINDYLA 10242011 WBSF 545______ MOLE A 10 24 2011 Purchase CNDVLA 10242011 WBSF 546 OLE A 10 24 2011 Purchase _ CINDYLA 10242011 ______ WBSF 546 OLE A 126 2014 Purchase ADMIN 126201 A 126 20 Purchase ADMIN e e T CSCS A 126720 Purchase ADMIN 128200 d A 12200 Purchase ADMIN 1262001 S A 12282011 TransferOut ADMIN 12282001 oo S A 1272672011 Transferin ADMIN 12282001 O oo LA 12282011 TransferOut ADMIN 1228200 fi A 12728720 Transfenn ADMIN 1228200 fie RRE EE a a ae a a as o PA A EAS AAA AE A A A 55 a el AAA AS A E p a a AAA a 71201 7 201 7 201 7 201 24 ae fee EE a 1 12 27 2010 EA as lA MESES 33 LL A 37 4 42 EE 44 100432 O 9 Sales Inventory Change Report The report will show sales transactions which affect the EEE sales inventory owned Listed will be the purchased include Stock WIR No CI sales and inventory transfers Filter Options Denainent Department Shows only the stock belonging to this as Department Leave this blank to show items from all First Stock x departments Last Stock l Begin Date End Date hoz Category Shows only the stock belonging to this Ca
166. Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Transaction Log In this page you can see all the transactions that occurred between scanners and RF Server Every request from scanners and response from DB shows here ra RTPro RF Server Server Wew Help mess tii oe le Server Connections Transaction Log Error Log Histo RFLogmLl HINA GelDlateTime GetProduction 25416 Checkout oncoded 25416 500500 1 011 2142 GetProduction 2541 6 Repall ypeRecondz CheckinNoncoded 45416 20000 500500 2 1 U 1 CheckinNoncoded 25416 20000 500500 1 1 U 1 AFLognU FERRER SE GetDate Time GetProduction 2541 6 CheckoulNoncoded 25416 5600600 2 11 1142142 GetProduction 25416 RepaiT ypeRecords CheckhinMoncoded 25416 20000 600600 1 1 U1 il Success Security List 20111 21 12 26 Success 20000 Enot Cant Checkout more than Ordered Success 20000 SUCCESE Enor Cannot checkin mote than Noncoded qua SUCCESS Success Security List 200101 20 12528 success 20000 Success Success 20000 SUCCESS SUCCESE Request Contains the list of requests sent by scanners Response Shows a list of responses that DB sent for each request Each response is relevant to the request in the same row Error Log Tab If database generates an error and causes the application to stop working you can check this tab to find out the problem and solve that F
167. Blended Day Rate Since there can be different day rates charged to customers a blended day rate is calculated This is the Total Revenue Quantity Weeks Billed the List Price Maintenance Cost If there is a repair ticket in the date range specified and repair cost is entered in for the equipment the equipment is be calculated on the report Net Revenue This is the Revenue the Maintenance Cost Utilization Days Rented Days Owned Days in Repair Rental Inventory Statistics Summary This report will breakout the ERSTE ii de x revenue generated by production E and equipment code for a date FA it Production I a range recess BeginDate Category ErdDabs 10 2 2011 Exclude Items vith 0 00 Revere Location gt Currency There are 3 different reports By Production This will pull data from the invoice level If the invoice or credit creation date is within the date range specified then it is included in the report The data will be gathered from the invoice rental detail level The report separates out the report by production and breaks out by equipment code By Equipment amp Production This will pull data from the invoice level If the invoice or credit creation date is within the date range specified then it 1s included in the report The data will be gathered from the invoice rental detail level This report separates out by Equipment code and br
168. BsSelup Calendar rew Eie Charges CheckinByProd 7 CheckOullnNoncoded Pepi Io Checkout oncoded dd Contact Total Records Beep Settings Z Sas RTPro can play sounds when scanning barcodes These sounds indicate 1f a barcode scan 1s good or bad Each workstation can customize its own sound Currently 20 different sounds are installed in with RTPro User can preview these sounds and choose the desired sound EN Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc On the Beep Setting Screen the current settings REA xj can be previewed The current sound number appears in the sound selection area when entering this Screen To preview the current beep select z Program Event System Events 8 Good Beep your desired beep and press M selected sound E p Error Events will play 0 Bad Beep 88 Item is in stock Note You can browse to assign the related sound l Already checked in to this order file to each one of error events Click Ok button to Item not out on this order apply new selected sounds ltem is retired Restore it before canceling chec Barcode is retired The sound uses standard windows WAV files If 48 Barcode is not on file you are familiar with WAV files you can set Y Barcode already scanned S f Barcode is out on OrderH application to play your own wav files instead of Ai doomed a ld Lal standard ones You can save your WAV file into RTPro wav folder replacing one of current files ee named
169. Deseri tel 1 Pie SCRIMOS25 et HT yas SCRMS FULL SINGLE 29 SCRM0335 O001 aaora 49 68 4 16293 1972 251 72 rr fe FULL Dou E 3400002 om MER HMI FRES PACKAGE SU JPMFI00180000 2 ces IR PAR WE LENS LM peal emrexnonty AR HMILEGI95 FeaLENSES 72K PAR SWF LENS LM FeaLeotssqoony f of serr seta AMILEOZ00 JAMILENSES BAX PARFELENS LIM AMILEOZO0 0001 gt 134044 4 045 32 HMLEUZ1S _JHMLENSES SAAK PAR LENS CASE IM HMILED215 0001 _ 5 51537 1 546 17 nvolce Total 26 94249929 i b47 25 Report Total F0 706 75 62 885 53 Purchase Year Summar POs Across a Project The purpose of this report is to print all the purchase orders across a project Filter Option Project It is a required field and should have a value Subrental Return List The subrental return list 1s intended to be given to a worker who would receive or check in equipment which has been subrented across the criteria selected The report will list the equipment according to sub rented quantity the quantity of sub out and sub in items and quantity of sub items that are still out and also a column embedded in the report for the worker to write how many items returned Filter Options Complete List Complete List will print a full list of equipment whether they are returned or not Remaining Only Remaining only will print the remaining items th
170. E 10 066 0 56 6 50 0 06 10 0 06 0 12 6 50 Order Miscellaneous Items RTPro allows the user to order for miscellaneous sales items these items can be added in order misc items section There 1s not any saved code in database for miscellaneous items A miscellaneous item should be used sparingly This is an item sold that does not have a stock code to identify the item To add a miscellaneous item enter Description Quantity and Price Also other information such as Vendor Markup and Taxable can be set for each item To add additional miscellaneous lines press the down arrow key after the last miscellaneous entry Summary and Totals This section can be opened by clicking on Display Totals button Some order header information like discount shipping method and shipping charges etc can be edited By pressing Truck button shipping charges screen will appear and 1t 1s possible to add or edit shipping charges It 1s not necessary to refresh totals or to use the recalculate button upon opening 1t will be refreshed By pressing Edit Total Actual the main Total price can be edited After editing total 1t will lock and a lock icon will appear in front of Edit Total Actual To unlock totals click on lock icon Note System automatically calculates the discount and applies to the line items to match the bottom line total Pick List Er Use this option to add equipment to an order This sc
171. EPLLOG EXE file was not renamed to REPLLOGO EXE If renamed click on the file select the Rename option and change back the name to REPLLOG EXE RTPro program on the scanner renames this file upon entering into the program so the RTPro desktop can communicate with ES Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc the scanner directly and without using the Active Synch Upon exiting the program RTPro renames the file back tot REPLLOG EXE If the program was exited abnormally it is possible that the file was not renamed back properly In these situations entering to the RTPro on the scanner and exiting it will correct the issue Not able to download the data in the scanner to the RTPro desktop Check the scanner situation Make sure the scanner 1s completely set on its cradle Synchronize with desktop computer Exit the RTPro on scanner and make sure you can synchronize with desktop computer RF Server is running If you use the Send Data via RF make sure the RF Server application is running on the desktop computer Not able to connect make a wireless connection on the scanner taskbar Click the Spectrum24 icon and follow below steps Can the scanner ping the access point Check the Spectrum 24 status by selecting the Status from the menu and see 1f you have signal Is WLAN Exists Select Find WLANs In addition see if your access point is available in the list If it does not exist make sure the scanner is not too far from the access
172. ES SCOCERSE onto SRETFREEBERS Paren ei e A Se RIS 0 SSSR D ZA tee OU 500508 Women Protessionaboce WOMEN SSOCCERSES omen rofessionaBocc BRET FREEBERG Order 00t d8 4007 08 13 RO EE EE TE CE EE Invoice Log Report This report will list Invoice Credit Void If an invoice is created from more than one order only the first order from the Invoice header summary screen will display If there is more than one order the first order will print followed by However the total price displayed includes all orders on the invoice Options EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Invoice Creation Date Range Filters the report to the invoices created between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print all the invoices created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print all the invoices created on or after the begin date Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Invoice Log Report Date Time 2006 06 17 12 51 12PM Page 1 of 1 ET dE DateRange roads 07103 07203 S 58 00 am aa ae estacas ojo BS Production Log Report This report prints an alphabetical listing of productions HPA Pix It prints the expected wrap date contact information and creation date You can filter the results by create date Creation Date From range or parent You may also include productions that To 10 2 2011 are moved to history Filter Options Produ
173. Ea 51000 100 0 ROSCO 158 900 10 00 10 00 Each 565 00 650 0 1 0 00 1000 10 00 Each 10 00 100 0 ROSCO 24 10 00 13 00 Roll 56500 845 0 At aa AA A 7 as a r AA Fan ar An mar AA Sales Backorder Report This report lists the quantities of the sales inventory that are ordered by productions and are not shipped yet Ex Sales Back Order Report RTPro De ol nel When you receive a shipment from your vendor run this So By report to see if there are any sales items that were StockNo All Back Orders ordered but cannot be shipped due to the items not being C Didelo C Back Orders To Ship available at the time Options Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report You can sort the report by Stock No Order No All Back Orders Back Orders to Ship If you select All Back Orders the report will list any item that is not shipped regardless of having it available to ship or not When you select Back Orders to Ship the report prints only the back orders that are not available to ship Production You can choose a specific production and get the report of all the backorders for this production Leave this option blank to show backorders for all productions Stock You can choose a specific stock and print the report for this stock only Leave this option blank to show backorders for all stock s in the inventory Location If you use multi location fea
174. Enter New Date to change the date prior to posting the information to the order you can enter in the new date The date will be A used when posting the records to the order x Cancel Help Upload from File This should be used with assistance from Rental Tracker This will allow a file to be imported into the batch download screen The file format must be in the format supplied by Rental Tracker Email Downloaded File to Tech Support This should be used with assistance from Rental Tracker a8 pr e 2 x e Download From Scanner Function imports barcode information from batch scanner to RTPro If there 1s a previous batch downloaded in the system the system will prompt to overwrite it If previously imported data was processed before answer yes The scanner must be connected either through a cable or placed in a base cradle On the scanner follow the function keys to download For the PDT6800 and PDT3100 scanners from Symbol Technologies Inc the function key is FS On the CS100 From Symbol Technologies Inc there is no function key once the cable is connected the information is available for download The records on the scanner will displayed on the screen and validated This button Re validates records displayed on the screen This option will post the records to the system that are not in red Provides a report of the records displayed on the screen This button displays records in a raw form If there is a problem with
175. Enter the user code in here to get the login history for this specific user or leave this option blank to show login history for all users Date Range Filters the report to the logins that occurred between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print all the logins occurred on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print all the logins occurred on or after the begin date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the logins for the given location Leave this option blank to show logins across all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company User Login History Date Time 2006 06 189 54 444M Page 1 of 59 LoginDateRange 2006 06 18 mene Cs o EL G o o DCE DanenNGve peca Pg ADMIN Insurance Expires Report Use this report to determine the insurance status for PATA each production On the Production Information ee JS Screen Rental Tracker stores insurance information This report lists the insurance information for each Blank Insurance Expres Dates include Blank Dates production including the expiration date insurance Productions With Activity Alter company and policy number Depending on the criteria chosen you can use this report to determine Scat by those productions that have no insurance information f Production Code on file or those with policies that have expired C Production Tale Filter
176. Filter Help Security must be permitted to use this option Sparen Mon Barcoded Dialog ES Non Barcoded Single F4 Mon Barcoded List En Add Checkout Moncoded F Batch Barcode Checkout All If partially pulling Non Coded Subrental or Miscellaneous Equipment click on No Barcode ed icon for Non coded Subrental and Misc items E Checkmark Sub rent or Miscellaneous if applicable Click Refresh or press F2 Checkout individual items and enter quantity by line Click Update Order F3 or Update and Exit F10 to post quantities 3 Update Exit F10 ANOTHER WAY Position grid cursor on appropriate line press F4 Input Box x system will prompt for the quantity Enter the quantity to Checkout 367 Handling Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Checking In Single Orders Multiple Orders From Main Screen Run Order Processing Module Order Processing Enter Order number or select it from list Order Checking In Single Order Click on Or button in front of In Etes From report menu select Return List report Print Reports Help return list a Quote Sheet Pull List Checkout Sheet Contract Current Week Contract Exchange Sheet Swap Sheet Return List Checkin Sheet Checkin Sheet by Production Sales Return Sheet Fill Actual Check in Date Missing Rentals Help Apr 50134 PM y a If the RETURN LIST is Comple
177. GL account for the category will default to an equipment code record when an equipment code record is added to the system The GL account determines what revenue bucket for rental charges should go for this particular category GL Account field can be selected from the General Ledger Lookup table Sort Order You may want equipment to printout in a certain order on customer reports The sort order allows for this The equipment would printout in the Rental Category sort order Print Subtotal If you want to separate the total of each category on customer reports you should check this box CS File Maintenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Department This field links the rental category to a specific department This is handy for a user when equipment is being ordered The user will be able to filter equipment codes by department and rental category A department link is required if using the drag and drop feature in order the rental order processing Sales Category Table The sales category table helps identify the grouping of sales items An example would be globes gels tools The Sales Category Entry Screen is an editable screen To access this page select Rental Category from Inventory menu GL Account The GL account for this category will default to the Sales Inventory Detail Screen when a Category is selected The GL account determines what revenue bucket for sales charges should go to for this particular category GL Account fiel
178. Header Fields Currency If your company is a setup for multi currency you will see this field When a currency is selected the pricing for the rental and sales rates will default in for that currency Lock If checked order will be locked and editing or ordering of equipment and sales will not be allowed Order Type The order type can be a Quote Reservation confirmed Order or Cancelled There is logic behind the order type Quote Order 7 This allows for providing a customer with the quoted price without a commitment Ship Date Barcodes and noncoded items cannot be checked out and Sales items cannot be shipped Usage Beg Order O Quotes do not affect the availability figures in any place in the system however from the Order Processing Rental Order Entry Screen the user can see how the specific quote would affect the availability Note Quotes are not available for billing Reservation This allows for reserving equipment Equipment and Sales Stock Items can be ordered but cannot be checked out and Sales items cannot be shipped Equipment availability is affected Reservations cannot be billed Order This is a confirmed order Equipment can be ordered and checked out and Sales items can be shipped Equipment availability is affected An Order can be billed Cancelled Quotes and Reservations can be cancelled and if the order type is Order it can be cancelled only if there is not checkouts or billing against the ord
179. ION Sit data 118 Steps to add a New Quote Reservation Order cccccccccceeeccceecccucecsceececuecsccecsueecscseessseecsuseessnesens 120 Functions Available From Order Processing nit nn nana en aient 121 Under th File Menu nrrainn TaT TEATA meer de ie 121 VIEURBOICOQRS A A RA AA OE AA 121 VIC WIN ONCE A AA A di 121 RENTO PVCU EY enne A na 121 DOWNIOGG DATOS CONCE inner A ts tates tin todos 121 ESO ROO CFS DUO ecos 121 SUDrental Purchase Order LISTING 0 AAA AAA N 123 Order Processing Activities Order Menu ses 124 Duplicatine Current OIR aaa 124 Delete Ode 124 Rental amd Sales Order Screens taaan 124 Order TOtAlSCT BM seen arteries ere ea ee ree 124 Browsing Order REVISION HIStory ara ria Ann ADIOS NOMINA yon Nan viOs dat N Dada 124 BUTS TO LE ASUS 0 RIN A 124 Move ORCC OIG uti 124 Checkin outprocesses Process Men E A AE A AAA eee 125 Lapo Space Seneca e ES 125 Bl AN A de aide et dense de te Pete eee anne nan ne ann diese tiens 125 BHO MONS Sayeed alesse ose A ne E 125 Order Header 126 Order 22 0 LE LA SO CEE 126 Additional Functions Available for the Order Header Screen 126 Order Header Blast ii na an en al eo es 127 WOVE to Restore TOn AIS LOVE ASE CA AE REA e nn 130 Move Order to a different Production ccsscccsscccnsecssccnssccnssccnssccnssscnsscensscenessensssenassensssenassenaseesans 131 Order Bile SCM SCC uc A A A AAA AT ee ne A IAE 131 Ataca Men LIS CaM in Tee en a de er er Ma eo na 132 RENO ARANA 1
180. JOKERFGL 600 Joker Bug Frosted Glass Beaker 4 1 E 0 00 de GRIF Grip HMIS00SEC 800W HMI S E Globe 4 1 5 00 MN 5 00 80 00 T aa 18000 11 Sml Video Pro Plus Bank 8125 4 1 0000 F iol 2000 1 440 00 amp 14000 18K Alpha He 18000 22 800 Joker Bug Video Pro Speedring 4 1 50 00 D 50 00 800 00 14000 01 220 F B 18000 33 575 Arri Comp s00W J B VP Speedring 4 1 20 00 F 20 00 320 00 14000 02 18K Alpha 18000 55 30 Chimera Lantern 4 1 500 FP 5 00 80 00 14000 03 18K Alpha amp 14000 04 18K 12K F 18000 66 600 400 200 BugLite Speedring 4 1 500 D 5 00 80 00 amp 14000 05 18K Alpha JOKERRC 800W Joker Road Case 4 1 5 00 F 5 00 80 00 7 kh 14000 06 18K Alpha 1812FFPGBA 18K121 A siarowreniK e wiscCode Descipion Orderea Days Fer week ListPrice Disc Locked Acuel Pace Extended Tax gt amp 4160 11 6K 12K Be gt MISCO00t Table 1 1 100 00 E 100 00 400 00 T 44160 22 3 Ft 1004 4220 11 120004 H kh 44220 44 50ft HMI E 44220 88 12000W B x 4220 99 3 FT 6K41 s i w 4 For current totals click on Display Totals button Y Display Totals HMD HMI Order 381 Warner Bros USD Equipment Tree In Rental Order screen Equipment Tree is invisible by default 1t can be opened by clicking on the Drag Drop item from Action menu or F3 button In this tree a list of all rental equipment in the company s warehouses can be seen This list is
181. Kit Code Specify a single kit or leave blank to show all kits Department Kits can be linked to department Kits can be filtered by a single department Location A kit can be linked to a location Kits can be filtered by a single location Currency If multi currency used the pricing will reflect the currency prices Sales Pick List This report shows a list of all sales items in the shop This report can be printed and given to customers in a condensed format with 2 columns They can mark items Paper Se Letter 8142 by 11 inches in this list and order items they want The report can be filtered to show department or location es Sales Pick List Note There is a checkmark in Sales records named Print on Sales Pick List Only checked items will print in this list Filter Options Department Shows only the item belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only Example DON Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc RTI Studios Page 1 of1 Sales Pick List 10 10 10 Customer Name Pickup Date Number TEHMIDEGE a BK HMI DE Globe AAA SONY _BonyProjector OT ARA ra CETROU 2s Red ESTAN SeiRol Yelow SSS eros a AN a 1 Y MIN EE Goes Glove Cowhide Waiting
182. L code across a date range and payment type fonte or E Filtering options are by date range GL range lick Production production payment type and journal type If your company is using multi location and multi currency From Date OO features you can choose location and currency to filter To Date A the report GL Code Range El Production Payment Type ve Journal Type Both r Include Unapphed Payments Location F Currency E Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company GL Distribution Detail Report Date Time 2006 06 12121 609PM Page 1 of 2 Location LA Currency US Invoice Invoice Production Journal Payment Debit Credit Date Title Ho Amount Amount 1000 20 BENT Checking 100188 2003 08 27 23324 PAT 2932 20 00 A SubTotals P2000 4300 10SubLeaseRevenue 100182 2003 08 27 Conceptliqetimea Cd Ys pp S g200 100238 2004 02 07 Commercial a oo 100240 2004 02 07 UnitedRentale YO Ys o 000 SubTotals 3200 Total 40 020 00 1 056 176 65 188 Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Upload Report The Upload report gives various options to print the EAEMTENTEME al P x invoices which have been exported out of RTPro the p i Group By invoices which have not been exported out of RTPro Uploaded Invoice amp Job Type that are marked to be exported and the invoices that Motliploaded C Credi are marked not to be exported out of RTPro You ca
183. LA Vendor ACTIO1 Action Grip Page 1 of 4 Invoice 100187 Billing Period 2003 03 04 2003 09 01 Invoice Total 292 94 Equip Description Orders Actual Code Price 29 DIFFUSION B i o A APA agns 29 DIFFUSION BAG S0030 Sales Summary By Month The Sales Summary by Month report prints out the Invoice 1002 A amp MBProductionsServices Tota Report ota Rs ales Summary By Month RTPro Dema sales summary of each production based on separate months It gives the total value over a full 12 month calendar year Select Production and enter the Year to Production ee review the summary Year 2011 EU Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTPro Demo Company Sales Summary By Month Date Time 11 19 2007 2 27 35 PM Page 1 of 1 Produccion ACPO lt 131 323 58 or Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ECS Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Purchase Order Module In this module you can keep track of the Purchase Orders your company issues to your vendors for purchasing or sub renting equipment You can create subrental purchase orders from the Purchase Order Mondule or the Order Processing module To gain access to this module from main screen of application click on the Purchase Order button Subrentals Subrental Purchase Orders POE FT This section is for handling Purchase Orders that are issued for subrenting r
184. LA ICOMEHO Woseptnderson SOAP EES ones La CONCOT CooperstowrHallO Fame 500880 2003 08 28 2003 06 30 2003 06 30 LA COMEHO Poseptnderson SY 2083 07 26 2003 07 31 2003 07 31 Current Subrental Report This report lists all subrental items Teese that are currently out on orders In addition to equipment and order information this report will list Vendor information for each type of equipment sub rented Filter Options Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report You can sort the report by Equipment Order Production Vendor Production Shows only the Sub rentals belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show Sub rentals from all productions Vendor Select Subrental Vendor or leave it blank to print Sub rentals from all vendors for selected PO Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the Sub rentals on the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show Sub rentals from all locations ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company CurrentSubrentalReport Date Ti me 2006 06 1210 13 5 Md Sorty By Equipment Location LA
185. N Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Payment Received By Type In this report the payments that are separated by payment type check or cash within a particular date range See example below Date From 10 2 2010 To 10 2 2011 rane Ve MN Location C Payment Received By Payment Type Ref IES Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Payment Received By Payment Type Report Date Time 2006 06 10 3 26 33PM Reference Received Applied Amount ESPN E e as ASA 2204 09 05 12 00 122 00 F110 00 10 00 Totas 125 607 00 8729300 Reference Received Applied Amount ONCO1 onceptLighting 2006 06 07 3 000 00 3 000 00 po 2006 06 10 HA A ONCOT oncepiLightina 2006 06 10 36 620 00 36 620 00 Totals 9 620 00 9620 00 135 227 00 139 24600 7 Unapplied Payments The report list payments which have not been applied The report is separated by productions fonce SN To Date 1072 2011 Example ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company AR Unapplied Payments Date Time 2006 06 10 3 40 12PM ACDCO1 pee Mail uses iii Type Received 2904 2001 12 31 150 00 _____ 2915 2003 08 07 CREDIT 12 007 30 A _ 2916 2003 07 30 Check 213456 225 00 387 00 Payment P nt Reference Amount Applied Discount Unapplied Received 2526 2004 02 07 CR s00 o T 930 00 2004
186. Noncoded select Checkout Non Barcoded and enter the quantity to checkout If an item can be checked out as Noncoded it will update and be added to the bottom list Note Another way to check out Nonbarcoded items is by using the Main List Select an item then from the Checkout menu select Non Barcoded Single or press F4 You can setup RTPro to show ordered quantity as default value in Input Box See Administration Setup Checkout Options for details Using Non Barcoded Dialog box From Checkout menu select Non Barcoded Dialog or press F3 The Mass Non Barcoded Checkout Screen will open and show the selected non coded item Cursor will focus on quantity Enter quantity to checkout and press Enter This dialog will browse items to the end and after checking out each item it will show the next item in the list If you check Miscellaneous or Subrental you will see all Subrental and miscellaneous items too Mass Checkout Noncoded items Click on mass mode button or select Non Barcoded List from Checkout menu or press F5 The Mass Check out Noncoded screen will open adjust filter if you want to see a partial list of items If you want to see Subrental and misc items click their boxes Press F2 to refresh list Now you will see a list of all items that are not checked out yet including items partially checked out Enter checkout quantities in the QTY column or press Include All button to set q
187. ONNE ere anale rente au ans eo bi bo ti tin ondes 303 AF CUSCOMEr BOINA liada SA AAA AA AAA A RAS 304 LABOR SPACE SCHEDULING cia eke eee nea 305 TDI Menard 306 EMPIOVee Table at ia 306 OECUDOTION PAD E oa 306 PACE TODO ies 307 DOUCE LD DE TAD E ne ne ane in ert en I oca 307 A A Ste US AS Se se 307 Employee Sche dtl DAA AAA AAA nids tee diodes 307 space SENIOR A A isa tatin let tte ie it ie dt stat 311 LADO Space Grid ARE tenants etant 313 Calculation of BINGDIC AMOUNT AAA A A A A rates Wi vba ls Oa 313 Calculation of Billable Amount using Force Use option 316 REPOS ee din a oc aan T nn D ou 316 Labor Space Scene UNO REDON AS AE AAA ends on 316 Eabor Space COn tE Repo iu tabs 317 BARCODE SCANNERS osa dia EN 319 RTP O RE SERVER il Er te ee wiiea ta net En OU RTL RES ESS SR A EME 320 UE OU LE S 1 2 a TO ETT 320 SOP VCE SOUS NS ia 321 Star NE SOU SE ED TT 321 SOP TC EVEN AS ANA 322 COMVECION SANA AE AAA EA AA A Ss 322 Tansa UONI OO td A ata teat A A A A A A ue 323 Eror Log TADA A AAA SARA A A A diac lR Gata aes 323 L O SE EL 324 VIEN MINES ias ss E E nier ti ee tte des 324 MT2000 Series nn AA ne AD eo de le D Een ME ne Re ed ren 324 OVERVIEW dd 324 Troubleshooting MT2000 Scanners ii 324 WIG30007 ION SiN ta tea dan dti dt des 328 ONA A A EEEN A EE RS PR POPUP Oy CE N EE ETE ee 328 RF SEUNG EE A E A OAOA RONA DRA 328 OUN S U O EER E T E a 329 POIS UDO A EE EE EEA T E 329 Date Mine SCT Nat 330 RF LOQUD is SAA AAA AAA 331
188. ORD Qty Owned 10 Qty5 Dec 9 Dec 21 Order 25013 QUOTES 200200 SUPER TROUPER GLADIATOR GEL FOAME HU DE 3 Oty Dene 0 15 AVION FICA PRODUCTIONS INC Oya Dec 15 Dec 26 Orderi25016 AVION FILM PRODUCTIONS INC ACCES0005 2K BARNDOOR Qty Owned 10 Gity 6 Nov 23 2008 Nov 23 Onder 24986 QUOTES eal 4 Browse Program shows the indicator for each day to indicate if enough quantity 1s available on each day or not Green Available Red Short and Grey 0 available E4 Gantt Chart For Equipment Scheduling aloa y Equipment af Start D Customer End Da Oct 10 2011 Aao Oct17 2011 MO TU El TH AR SAMS MO TL WE TH 12843 20 200 LG SPARE GLO Qty Apr 24 2011 Sep 7 Order 271871 SUBCUOF Qt Jun 21 2011 Sep 47 Order 275195 50 50 0 2 Hul 25 2011 Oct 16 Ordert2 7 531 TEMP 166 Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Billing Module There are two types of invoices that are creatable through billing module One type of invoice is against orders The second type of invoice is an invoice not attached to an order This type of invoice is used for miscellaneous charges In Billing Module you can track which orders need to be billed for rental extended rentals sales loss damages shipping restocking space and labor RTPro offers reports which help manage the billable charges Understanding the Billing Menu layout The Bill
189. Only Rentals and Sales or Sub Rentals by Vendor Each type of report has its own options You may also change the order and grouping of items by Department or Equipment Code This option is not available when printing Subrental by vendor report It 1s also possible to print a complete list or just the remaining items that are not shipped Department A department can be selected and if selected the report will print for the specified department Print Scanner Readable Information This option will print the barcode which is equivalent to the equipment code The purpose of printing barcodes for the equipment types is that checkouts can be performed across non Barcoded items using the batch barcode scanning method Print a new page for each Department Checking this item will print each department in the separate pages Print Subrental Internal Notes Checking this item will print Subrental Internal Notes This option is only available if Subrental by Vendor is selected Print Subrental Customer Notes Checking this item will print Customer Notes This option is only available if Subrental by Vendor is selected Print Weight Print weight will print weight of each equipment and also print the total calculated weight in the report This option is available when printing Rentals or Rentals and Sales Print Cases Only Checking this item will print case numbers which are specified in the equipment setup table This option is available when printing
190. PEO OCC nn ia 256 SuDrental RE TUU aaa 256 Weekly Subrental PO Forecast Report 257 Sales PRO REDOT SERRE NT es diese dti delire diese 258 Stats Cal REPOSAN AR te 259 Rental INVENTOLY Statistics Detal seems A AAA AA AA AAA 259 Rental Inventory Statistics Detail Format 2 260 Rental inventory Statistics SUIMIMONY a a ea ia a s etes aiii 261 Equipment REVENU REDON aoaia iia 263 Rentalinventory UTNIZO TON REDON Ei iaa 265 Projected Equipment utilization ANALYSIS c cccseccosscovscensccnseusconscousscesseucnescnesenascessccnscousscesseecness 266 SHDIENTEG Statistics Repor ESS ere nel E wore ete end rentre ratio idee 268 Subrental Equipment Revenue Billed 4 269 Sales Inventory STOTESOS DECORA a 270 Sales Inventory Statistics Summary Report 271 ESTINOLCO Revenue Reposteria 272 Revenue Generated Reports sii A AAA A NE 273 Revenue Report By Selected Production 274 No Charge versus Actual Charges Report ss 274 OWDEr REVENUE A aaa 275 Barcoded Equipment utilization Report by POH occooccccccccnnccnnocononononnnnonononononaronnrnnnrnnncnonononinoss 276 REDGIN LOSS Of FOV CIC eranan Aaa Hh AA CEE AS ES IAS 277 Stats ICO ADS ne nc le D Die Cane di 278 INVENTO Value DV COTE GOTY Anh rarement 278 Inventory Value by Depari meh esse a 278 Orders DYRE Al RATE A A pans cda 279 BURN A 279 Order OV SION A cian 280 checkout Quan a A AAA AAA AD A BA Matin Ris a al ont 280 Revenue Gen erat a A
191. Physical Inventory Rental Physical Inventory Histor 8 Rental Physical Inventory History Record ra e gt File Search View Help SYY amp M Missing MI Overage Show Al Note 14000 02 20 Add 20 Noncoded ltems this is a pi notesssss sd 1800022 A eee eee eee eee Y 18000 33 13 2 6 5 8 5 Retire 5 Barcoded Items Y 18000 55 20 19 1 19 1 Retire 1 Barcoded Items M 14000 82 7 3 59 13 69 13 Retire 13 Barcoded ltems this is a Pl note Update Prices There are times when global price increases are needed across the equipment code and sales stock table RTPro allows increasing prices globally instead of going one by one and editing each record The update prices process gives a template of the equipment codes and allows editing prices by increasing by a percentage for the daily week replacement cost and replacement price rates The prices can be round to the nearest dollar Individual equipment codes can be adjusted The changes do not take effect immediately and the prices can be rolled over when desired For example you may be planning a price change to take effect on July 1 to coincide with the release of a new catalogue You may prepare input and review the pricing during April May and June On July 1 with the press of a button the new prices can roll into system Quotes done on July 1 and after would use the new prices Enter New Rental Prices Click on the Update Prices drop down tab and select Enter New Rental Prices Update
192. Pro is the speed and ease of scanning a barcode Barcodes are a very important part of RTPro A barcode identifies you and your property A barcode can have your company name equipment code description perhaps your shop s phone number Finding the right barcode for your business is essential for security durability and integration with RTPro A barcode should be permanent If a barcode can be removed you have the potential of losing your item Next a barcode should be durable Barcodes should last through cleanings weather conditions heat and normal wear and tear A good barcode should be durable for proper reads by scanning guns Finally a barcode is essential to the integration of RTPro With the proper barcode scanning items in and out will be very easy If a barcode fails then it should NOT be entered manually For a rental business manually entering in a barcode is unacceptable Therefore selection of the proper barcode is essential to a seamless integration with RTPro software RTPro has included many state of the art features such as imaging field lookups flexible billing schedules and robust screen designs We have spent countless hours developing a powerful system to handle your rental businesses We are proud of our designed system and we would like your feedback Your feedback will help improve our system in the future as we revolutionize the rental industry with RTPro Thank you for your support Understanding the Main Menu
193. RTPro has a security module to block people from gaining access to specific sections of the program that they are not authorized to perform 1 e changing the weekly rental rate of an inventory item This section will detail how to adjust user security Im Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CE Security Setup Screen RTPro Demo Company Oj xj File View Help 2 sd Oe Main Page Controls Administration Module Maintenance Module Inventory Module Order Processing Module l Order l Process E Checkout Rental E Checkin Rental Mass Checkout Checkin Moncoded li El Sales z Labor Space Scheduling 2 Labor Space Grid Billing E Reports Bill Type Change Right i Order Type Change Right z Add Edit Biling Schedule E Checkin Types E Listing Insurance Expire Supervisor Order Total Setup User Access for Checkout Rental Permitted Users INVENTORY JANDERSON JEILODEAU JCHAIS TIAN JEARPUS JWSL5H KARGUETA KCAPOBIANC GILEERT A eee ee eee ELYNCH EMACEINNON MANAGEMENT MOOYLE MFORD MGREEN MEREENCAL MGREENHAL MGREENREG MGREENTOR Prohibited Users CAFT ANAS CHARDING LAZAFRUS EXPENDABLE TMAR TIN roe Y A Kerry Leger Deokre Lazarus There are several layers of security checks To view the details of the security tree click on the within a listed module The tree will expand Ifa sign 1s listed there are more security lines under the heading
194. Required If a purchase order is required for orders attached to the production then this box should be check marked When an order has been created a warning will display if a PO is required Management reports are also available to indicate orders with no purchase order Restocking If you shop is charging customers a restocking fee this field keeps a percentage of the price that customer will be charged when returning this item There is also a restocking percentage on the customer level The customer level will over write the percentage at the system setup level Managing Department This is a managing department code based on a defined department code A managing department is the department which is responsible for the Production Daily Weekly When rentals are ordered they will be calculated on a daily or weekly rate When creating a new order the value will default over to the order Upload Include This field is a default value for export of invoices and determines whether the invoice of this production should export This feature is available for exporting invoices to ACCPack and Quick Books To setup your RTPro system to export invoices refer to the Use Upload in Invoice tab of setup Days per Week This is the number of days that user will charge for a week The days per week will default over to Order Header and Rental Order Entry Screen Rental Disc The rental discount is a percentage value There is no
195. Restocking When sales items are returned there 1s an option to charge a restocking fee Enter here the percentage of the sales price to charge as a restocking fee This will default over when a new sales stock code 1s created Require Serial for Barcoded items For Items with a value more than You may wish to require serial numbers for Barcoded items of a certain value Check this box and enter the value here When adding inventory this value will compare against the Price field of the equipment type for the items added If the amount in Price field is larger the serial number will be required Warning for Credit Limit A credit limit can be specified on the production level When invoices are created the system will warn if the credit limit has been met If using RTPro AR this can be used If not RTPro does not know if payments are received so it will only check against invoices and not payments received Credit Warning Checkpoints e Checkout first item in a session If credit limit is reached the system will warn user while checking out the first item in Rental Checkout Screen e Exiting Rental Entry Screen If checked while exiting from Rental Entry Screen the warning message displays the credit limit is reached and shows the customer s balance and the amount over the balance e Printing Quote If checked when printing Quote Sheet the system will warn user that credit limit is reached but it doesn t stop the generation of the re
196. Reun MPA e eo 163 VOIES RN A ETT 164 COSTS COL A A AA AA 164 SMN EOS Still dd cita 164 DIVING A 6 0 RP RE iaa at 164 PEN RO Rte et D at ee DE el Un 164 SUNENA PO PUN ISE RE NS RSR tabs eee du ie cet ue 165 Order ACTIVITY DY Production anim O aa AAA A A A oat th wba eae a 165 Gante CHG Jor Open Orders 2d seen tent 165 Gantt Chart for Equipment Availability ss 165 A nd onde N eee nel cite 167 BINE TV NO CIN a CN Le en een tete tn id Gin 168 Understanding the Billing Mendayouts tt da 168 Setting Up the Biling Schedul issus td 168 Ihe Billing Process EXO ale Annaa ni dba 168 Billing an Order from the Order Processing Module 168 D finition OF INVOICE flelds 5 ir tii 170 Billing Orders rom tne Billing MOGUL C e dada 171 Creare NOT Ola Orel ous td tod a 171 EqIting the Rental SUDCOL al ne nn iii 173 Printinge an IANOlCe DR nn nono oo on oO 173 CEE a Non Order IVO Eron nu tonne ose dns ou 174 QUICK SENEN TODO nb tte a Le casa 174 Options Avallable IN INVOICe SET aaa 174 A TR Gao eT 174 VIEW MEN Usa NAAA OS 175 HRON MENU es AAA AAA AAA A A ae AA 175 CONTI AVION Udo 175 VOI MENU sor aeran AAA ee ele ie let et 175 EXPORT VOICE nn ne en nn scie en ais ce das ian 176 R Dill this INVOICE daa att 176 A A O O O 177 Pe VS EMIS TIES acts lt A E 177 Baten invoca 178 A US ts daddies a ld nade janice naa deiau eae damenddpinweeaessmawonents 179 BUNS R DORES ara a tdi nette cute Dot ee ane attain tween nn ce
197. S On ee 997 25 _ 5 203 50 soonss an Diego Sint See 47 59 725 00 355 544 25 aa ees 7375 00 9161 33175 6 Tax Liability Report Rental Sales Rate Break Down A report listing the taxes collected are broken down by the Rental and Sales Rate The information on this report is E E Formal PO Level gathered from the confirmed invoices It can be filtered oe DRE Re Summary fs Invoice Header based on the criteria entered This report contains rental and sales tax information It also prints a total amount of 2 Detal BE Invoice Onder taxes whether rentals or sales Begin Date PA Options End Date 104272011 Format Summary prints one summary line for each tax Tax Type type Detail prints one row for each invoice Location Date Range Filters the report to the invoices created a ny f x between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print all the invoices created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print all the invoices created on or after the begin date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can also select prices that use the different currencies to print Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Tax Liability Report Date Ti
198. S Duplicate Selected Orders 38000026 2172 Print Selected Orders 5 38000025 227151 Move Selected Orders To History A 98000024 22840 Print Grid Crag i 98000023 22840 save Grid to p PM 98000022 22840 Pi 38000021 23431 E Please note that program only moves Closed orders to History that can be moved Program doesn t display error for the ones that it can t move To see the detail reason why each order can t be moved to history you need to attempt the Move To History from Order Header Screen of each individual order After the Orders are moved to History the list is refreshed and the orders that are moved won t show on Order Listing screen of live orders Subrental Purchase Order Listing This item shows all Purchase orders for Subrental You can filter this list by PO Production Vendor and Location To include subrental POs with closed status in the list select Include Closed checkbox The total amount of listed POs will be shown at the bottom of the screen C Subrental PO List RTPro Demo Company ERE y A ioj x Ele Search View Help hall g a gt vo amp RE Te of ro vemo Pose Photon tie am pooo saw ixoim P 202091 MAL TO 123 00 Open SPS 10001 ACE 001 511 00 2 23 2006 Open 5P510002 ACE ON 123 00 8 23 2001 Closed SP510003 ACEON ARIE 311 00 11 16 2004 Closed LA 5P510004 Ca T 00 1 75 2005 Open gt Browse Subrental Purchase Order Total 2 You can see t
199. SNS SNS ee a 366 Checking In Single Orders Multiple Orders ss 368 CHECKING IRSE OF OGM rabais a D NI OR ES 368 Checking in Multiple Orders across a Production Vs 369 LOG IN OUT SUSPEND Logging into RTProSL Suspending System Exiting RTProSL Chapter Introduction to the System RTPro is a complete inventory tracking system that allows you to track barcoded and non barcoded rental inventory items print quotes print rental contracts print check in sheets create and print invoices and track your accounts receivables RTPro also has a Sales Module Purchase Order Module and Labor and Space Scheduling Module RTPro is coded with Delphi 2005 The database 1s Microsoft SQL Server 2000 2005 or 2008 This guide describes how to use RTPro and shows how to use its features to begin tracking your inventory It is recommended that you review this User s Guide before using RTPro System Requirements RTPro is a multi user system that runs on Windows platforms RTPro works on Windows 2000 XP Vista Windows 7 Client workstation Hardware Intel Penttum dual core processor 1 80GHz or equivalent 1GB of RAM 20 GB hard drive Operating System 2000 XP Vista Windows 7 XP recommended Sound Card with speakers used for audible confirmations during Checkin checkout process Server Hardware Requirements Hardware Intel Quad Core Xeon processor with 4GB of RAM and RAID 5 Operating Syst
200. SOCKET RING 97 SOCKET TO MOGUL BASE ADA 5 TOTA LIGHT RING 19 JEM BALL TUNGSTEN FKT 19 JEM BALL HMI ADAPTER Ri 22 JEM BALL TUNGSTEN FEAT 22 JEM BALL HHI ADAPTER Fi AT JEM BALL HMI ADAPTER R 1 D rCaM SPEED RING CHRAUOO0S MAR TIN MAC 50 PLUS MOST CHRONO 0 MARTIN MAC 500 MOVING HE CHRAUOOTS MARTIN MAC 2000 MOVING H CHRALIONZS HLE S CYBERUGHT 54 LITHO CHRCOOODS ETC EXPRESSION 3 800 6001 CHRCO ON 5 JANOS HOG 500 CL CHACOO02S MA LIGHTING MA LIGHT 2000 Report Setup x Selected Printer Microsoft Office Document Image VYvriter OR Cancel eport Destination Printer f Preview Format Rave Snapshot File MC plion Supress Titles amp Headers F Duplex Copies e colate 10 x Enter Equipment Code rs Code Description CHIRIOSZO 30 JEM BALL TUNGSTEN FIXTI CHIFIOSS5 ARRI PEPPER SPEED RING CHRALIOO2O MARTIN MAC 600 NT MOVING CHRCOOOIOETC INSIGHT 2 512CH CL gt Jleacooozo ma LIGHTING GRAND MA 4000 Equipments Column Settings E F Code El F Descaption TT Department Category F Invenio af OF x Carcel El a0 Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Report List Report list is an option for most of the report screen that displays a list of all items in a grid before attempting to print report sheet Main Menu Options Under each of the menus there are several funct
201. Sales ca 136 00 0 00 136 00 6 90 142 80 Total 1 006 00 0 00 1 006 00 6 80 1012 80 x Upload Batchtt Upload Date You can edit bottom line total or single individual lines To edit a bottom line total click on the Edit Fiental Subtotal Button Enter in an amount The system will spin through all the detail rental line items and discount proportionally To edit individual line items Double click on the order number RENTAL ONLY Double click on the charge you wish to change ES Billing Orders O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Browse Payment Type CASH Job Component po Description GL Account Taxsble Order Bilable Discount Subtotal Tax Total 4 g O A list of the detail line items will display Edit line items To remove a line enter in 0 on the quantity and press the down arrow Line item will remove If adjustments are made to a line item click on the lock column to save the line item changes VERIFY GL click on the GL button Confirming a Draft Once all edits have been made the invoice can be confirmed Select the Confirm at the top of the screen Select Confirm the Invoice Confirm Void Record Help Confirm the Invoice F9 Change Invoice Date A new invoice number will be assigned to the draft Printing the invoice Click on the printer icon at the top of the Invoice Screen CE Print Invoice Detail RTPro Demo Company Invoice Summary r Print Rent
202. Video Pro Plus Bank 81 8000 11 8000 22 8000 33 575 Arri Comp 800W J B VP 8000 33 575 Arri Comp 800W J B VP 8000 33 575 Arri Comp 800W J B VP 8000 33 575 Arri Comp 800W J B VP 5 5 100021 9 20 2006 s32500 LOSS 11 9 2009 detroyed beyond repair______ COLDCAS 322 325 00 100020 9 20 2006 325 00 2 22 2010 ltmissod____ COLDCAS 322 325 00 44322 6 21 2008 11 1 2010 itemis soldon order86 I 100638 10 2412011 1 000 00 STOLEN 10 24 2011 1 000 00 100030 9 28 2006 LOSS g20 2011fest em a 100035 9 29 2006 100 00 LOSS 4 23 2008 destoyedit____k k HAUNTIN 243 5100 00 100039 9 29 2006 PI 9 22 2011 Retired through the Physical Inve J J 100040 292006 PI 9 22 2011 Retired through the Physicalinve J 100041 9 29 2006 PI 9 22 2011 Retired through the Physicalinve J 100042 9 29 2006 Pl 9 22 2011 Retired through the Physical inve J 100043 9 29 2006 PI 9 22 2011 Retired through the Physicalinve J 100068 9 29 2006 Pl 9 22 2011 Retired through the Physicalinve 00083 9 29 2006 120 00 STOLEN 6 23 2008 Loss On Order 250test 512000 1 mors A E AA _ gt gt ee ee 1 990 00 8000 33 75 Arri Comp 800W J B VP 8000 33 8000 55 8000 66 8000 66 Sales Kit Report This report will print out the Sales Kits A sales kit is a group of expendable items which are packaged together Filter Options
203. When selected the selected record in PO List screen will be set as Current Please note that there can only be one PO for the order marked as current When a new PO is created on the Order Header it should be marked as current by default therefore most recent added PO will be automatically set as current If user deletes current PO program automatically selects next recent PO as current Billing status Billing status shows the status of billing for current order The different billing statuses are Billed Not Billed or Partial Billed Order status An explanation of each order status is given below Empty Rental and Sales items have not been ordered or checked out shipped No transactions across the order have happened Not Ship Rentals and or Sales have been ordered but not shipped Part Ship Rental and or Sales have been ordered and partially checked out shipped Shipped Rentals and or Sales have been ordered and completely checked out shipped Part Ret Rental and or Sales have been ordered and checked out shipped Rental items are partially returned Returned Rental and or Sales are ordered and sales are shipped Rentals are completely returned Schedule There is only a labor or space schedule attached to the order Closed The order is closed All items have been shipped returned and billed There are no pending charges for the order There is some useful information at the bottom of the Order Header scr
204. a 25147 2001 M 25148 2001 M 25149 2001 ES Handling Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CON Handling Orders O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Appendix Logging into RTProSL Double click the RTPro desktop icon Enter your User Name and Password Click OK or press Enter Database Login User Mame Password Suspending System Suspending RTProSL ALWAYS END YOUR SESSION To end your session but keep RTProSL active Exit all windows until you return to the Main Menu Click the Lock icon in Exit module Exiting RTProSL Return to Main Menu Click Exit icon and at prompt click Yes Confirm AS xj y Exit Rental Tracker Pro ID Log In Out Suspend 2012 Rental Tracker Inc
205. a barcode label which is a barcode translation of the equipment code for the equipment codes listed HINT You can filter a range of equipment and print a barcode list for them Image Screen An image can be attached to an equipment code RTPro works with any camera which uses a twain device driver In order to use the image feature of RTPro the image option and image path must be setup in system setup Refer to the Use Images section There are a few ways to attach an image to an equipment code No matter what option 1s used you must be in the edit mode to attach an image One way to attach is once in the edit mode press the F5 function key The camera software will enable The camera software 1s software outside of the RTPro system Be sure to install the camera software which comes with your camera Once the camera software is launched there should be a capture function Select the capture button and acquire the image The image will show on the equipment code screen Save the record by selecting the post icon or pressing F10 Another way 1s select the image menu at the top of the Rental Equipment Entry Screen Next select the take picture The camera software will enable If images are stored on diskette CD or other storage locations Select take picture from file from image menu of Rental Equipment Entry Screen Locate the file and press ok The image will show on the equipment code screen Save the record by selecting the post icon or
206. a pj le my eq 80 000 000 AA ED 6 D a a u 70 000 000 APM IE 120 el a ie om 13 5 wes 60 000 000 DL RE D 2 5 50 000 000 pa te 3 APOT AUGO FebO7 tend por Sales Inventory Value This report shows the value of any equipment in your sales inventory during any particular period You may choose to see rental value by Month Year or by Quarter You can filter the result by Department Category Stock Date range and Location EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Sales Inventory Value By Month e File Customize Help He SBoae SSG b oG 400 000 2 380 000 360 000 340 000 47 320 000 4 300 000 280 000 260 000 240 000 Jf e 220 000 3 3 200 000 180 000 160 000 Jf 140 000 120 000 100 000 f 80 000 Ff 60 000 40 000 20 000 f om E April Augii Feb11 janti jung ots weit See mic Jun11 Mar11 May11 Oct11 View Options Icons After you have selected a graph from the library you may adjust the layout of the graph using the icons on the tool bar Click on the icon to view the selected design ae Pie Chart I Vertical Bar Chart El Show 2 Dimensional 3D Show 3 Dimensional Vertical Bar Chart Options When viewing a graph using the Vertical Bar Chart you may adjust the layout using one of these options E Show the Graph Orthogonal or Perspective this icon will toggle
207. a rTProrF server TES Server View Help role TENER Lan Server Connections Transaction Log Error Lag History Error This is text of the error is generated by SQL Server Time Represents the time the error occurred EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc History Tab This page contains the history of the Transaction Log page When the number of lines in the Transaction Log page reaches to 500 the old transactions will move from Transaction Log page to this page lnix Server View Help Bjo ojojo ABER EP Server Connections Transaction Log Error Log History Request Request Contains the history list of requests sent by scanners Response Shows a history list of responses that DB sent for each request Each response is relevant to request in same row View Menu There are two sub menus under the view menu Delete Transactions Logs This deletes the records in the Transaction Log page Delete Error Logs This deletes records in the Error Log page MT2000 Series Overview The MT2090 scanner is wireless scanner which allows a distance of 50 to 100 ft away from the workstation Cradle base for this scanner is connected to the PC running RTPro via a USB cable Troubleshooting MT2000 Scanners If the scanned item does not appear on the RTPro screen do as follow 1 Pair the scanner by scanning the barcode that is on top of the scanner base cradle 2 Ifitis still not working yo
208. addition to providing total summary counts for each of the fields the specific barcodes and serial numbers are displayed The order numbers will display for all items out on rent and the items that are in repair The entry transactions for each non Barcoded entry also will be displayed The barcode numbers for missing items will also be displayed ONLY Print Equipment with a Difference EU Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Regardless of whether a summary or detailed version of report is being used see below check this box if you only wish to see a list of the equipment that have counts over or under the quantity owned Physical Inventory Review and Update Inventory Screen This screen summarizes the activity of the inventory for all the types of equipment within the selected range see PI Start Dialog Box earlier in this chapter This screen will display the Equipment codes Description and quantities owned out orders in repair counted and Missing Barcoded quantity If there is a quantity in the difference column the Comments column will display the resolution For example if there is a difference of one the comment will say Retire 1 Barcoded Item Using the various Physical Inventory Reports see above as references the differences and their comments can be reviewed From the Review and Update screen you may click on any of the quantities and see the details of the items Update The left hand column of the PI Review an
209. aily 0 00 Weekly 0 00 00005200200 JARRI 1248K HEADd i i 00285 ARRI 25 125 HEAD FEEDER Rental Kit Report The Rental Kit report will print the items associated with a kit along with pricing X Rental Kit Report RTPro Dema Ca Select Filter Options C Print Daly Price Daily Price Prints a column showing Daily Prices E Print Weekly Price Weekly Price Prints a column showing Weekly Prices Print Daly and Weekly Price Daily and Weekly Price Prints both Daily and Weekly Prices Kit Code o Kit code You can use this option to print the report for Department only one Kit Leave this option blank to print all Kits in the cian system arge O v Ok X Cancel O Lit Save Department Shows only the kits belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports of equipment that exist there This is specifically important if the locations are using different currency hence different prices for the equipment Example ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Rental Kit Report Date Time 10 10 2010 1 22 46 PM Page 1 of 1 LOCATIONKI Location Kit Price Price 180004 HMI Globe Ooa IC AN 18000 22 800WJoker Bug Video Pro Speedring Ooi IE 0 i DZ 590000 SCS
210. air cost is entered in for the equipment the equipment is be calculated on the report Net Revenue This is the Revenue the Maintenance Cost Rental Inventory Statistics Detail Format 2 This is another format of Rental Inventory Statistics Detail Report Filter Options CE Rental Inventory Detail Statistics Re ort E Pix Depatmemt A Category Department Select department to limit report to show only items for this Department Leave this option blank to Equipment El show result for all departments Range Category Select category to limit report to show only Aided Begin Date items for this category Leave this option blank to show Biled End Date 10 2 21 x result for all categories S Location Equipment Range You can limit the range of AAA equipment displayed in report by selecting begin and Es ending equipment Leave these fields blank to show all equipment Date Range To filter the report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can sel
211. al Line ltem Prices J Invoice Detail lv Print Rental Discount r Do not print 0 00 items Sie Seva Lines ce PF Pint Des Re week F mnt Sales Line then Prices m Print Days eek F Print Sales Discount MW Footer INVOICE TORO y Print Line ltem Customer Notes Select the desired option and click on Ok A printer menu will appear Send to the printer 359 Billing Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ES Billing Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Appendix Create a Quote Reservation or Order Create Order From Main Menu select Order Processing Module Order Processing Click on after Production Scroll down to desired Production Production Double click on the Production code to select it If production does not exist create new one Click on Add New Order Button Answer Yes to message Do you want to add a new Order ni Complete following fields Er mar sou EN Dates v x 500952 B 5 Job title order name Currency MO Lock Order Type Order y Location La y Quote Date 8006 06 25 Pull Date 280 6 06 25 1 y Ship Date jenos 06 25 v RetumDate o wl Bill Typ e Checkin Datel y Usage Beg 206 06 25 y Usage End amp w Production PRODCODE Job Title le Daily Weekly Billing Name Bseph Anderson Shipping Name je Days per Week Billing Address Shipping Address gt City State Zip City State Zip e je Country Shipping Country
212. al Notes When it is checked Print Subrantal intemal Motes r program prints the Sub rental Internal Notes Print DPW Pont Das ieeks Print Single Order Info When it is checked the order information will print out This will include the production name title and order description w OK X Cancel C List Save Example Lal RTI Studios TBE er M 12481 Tejas Court Rancho Cucamonga CA 91739 666 595 3041 Fax 666 595 6042 Purchase Order PO 12 PO Date 12 27 2007 Contact Notes Vendor PARAMOUNT Paramount Pictures Address Phone Customer HAUNTING Haunting In Oregon Billing Name Cinebridge Productions Shipping Name shipping name Job Tithe Subrentals ee EAS Date Date Weeks Price K Alpha Head 222007 26200 0 80 6 00 2 320 00 3 072 00 221 I 12FFPGBA 18K12K FF Powergem Balas EE seco 854 00 221 18 12 KPOWFE 18KM2KI6K Power Feed aereo ae 0 80 em Sf AA eee ae a mo os D EE RS 7 14000 02 Se AbhaFresnelLens KEAN 282008 080 oo afi KAAN as A 3 12270007 _2iei2008 0 80 E00l 31 sesool 5360 00 E IS AU A EC EL ES Weekly Rental 5740 00 Subtotal 54 440 00 Tax 566 60 Tax 399 60 WeeklyTotal 5606 60 Total 4 539 60 Rental In Transit Report This report displays transfer orders where the receiving EAT tl P x location has not check in the items yet The report contains Sending and Receiving Location Order Sending Location DRE number Shippi
213. al Tracker Inc The batch function allows importing data from batch scanner to a workstation The feature comes in handy when rental items are located away from the shop and computer The items can scan using a batch scanner and then the information can be downloaded to the workstation later See Batch Barcoded Screen for more information nn Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Users Currently in RTPro To see who 1s currently using RTPro click the option and listed will be all the users logged into RTPro This could be helpful when performing a backup as all users must be out of RT Pro in order to backup your RTPro files Options Menu Select Language RTPro is flexible to use different languages You can select a language code which is defined in RTPro from the lookup table Select Location If your company 1s setup for multi location user location can be selected from the lookup table Edit Menu Change Password The system will prompt for the current password a new password and to retype the new password The change will then take effect If a password is forgotten then a user with access to the user setup must reset the password To reset the password select the user click on edit and type a new temporary password The user should then enter into RTPro with the temporary password and change their password The Passwords are encrypted and not even Rental Tracker Staff will know your password Refer to Chapter 3 Setting
214. all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Group by Department You can group report results by department using this check box Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Sales Inventory Detail Statistics Report Date Time 2005 06 19 3 27 17 PM Page 1 of 15 DateRange 2006 06 19 GroupBWepartment Yes Location LA Currency US DEPT1 Department AAA ed lel A a esp Amount Amount A Amount DA0002 PALMI 5000 2070 00 50 2 700 2 070 00 OM 000 s5000 2 070 00 ee ee ee Se Amount Amount Amount SET e p parmos fare Torak ELECTRON om paom AE e a a Sree Sears 7a Reportiotal 474200 20 636 125 001 133 68018 ooo 46075 0F20 504 444 82 Sales Inventory Statistics Summary Report With a choice of displaying by Production or by Stock this report will display quantity and amount of Parent a gt Fist Stockt inventory items sold for each Stock Production Last Stock number Department BegnDae gt Filter Options Categor End Date 10 2 2011 Parent Select parent to limit report to show only productions for selected parent Leave this option blank to show results for all parents Production Selec
215. am calculates the billable amount for the four following Bill Type like following a Hourly Weekend ETS Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 29 2009 3 29 2009 08 00 04 30 8h Hourly 25 8h 30m 25 AM PM 30m 212 50 Note For Hourly bill type program calculates the total hours that an employee should work on a weekend multiply by Weekend Hourly Rate b Day Weekend Type Rate 3 29 2009 3 29 2009 08 00 04 30 ete A ee Note For Day bill type program will not consider hours even if they are selected It just calculates One day of working multiply by Weekend Day Rate c All day event with Bill Type Day Weekend Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 29 2009 3 29 2009 Se o 170 1d 170 170 Note Program calculates All day event similar to Day bill type d All day event with Bill Type Hourly Weekend Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 29 2009 3 29 2009 alt 7 Hourly 25 6h 25 150 6h d Note For All day event with Hourly bill type program multiply employee working time that is set through the Employee Detail screen by Weekend Hourly Rate 3 Imagine your employee sho
216. ame cell color will be changed into gray Note Product is the middle level in inventory Each Main Equipment can have many products and each product can have many types of equipment as its accessory This allows for 2nd level accessories Daily and Weekly prices These prices default from that equipment code s record However you may change the price if you wish for the equipment to rent at a different price when it works as an accessory than 1t does when it goes out as a main code For example the equipment may rent for 5 00 per day when it goes out by itself but is included in the price of the main code when it works as an accessory so in the Accessory List enter a price of 0 00 in the Daily field Auto Include a Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc The quantity entered in this field is the quantity of this accessory that will automatically be ordered when its main code it ordered With this feature when ordering simply enter the quantity of the main code and the corresponding quantity of accessories will automatically be included If on a particular order you do not need the accessories or you need more than the auto quantity you may adjust this quantity in order entry You may also have equipment accessories that sometimes are option and not included with main code By leaving the auto include column empty the item will not be automatically included but will be displayed on pick list under the main code Showing list of
217. and ignore the rental items Rentals and Sales Print both the rental items and sale items in quote sheet Other Information Line Item Prices Prints the price for items in each line Prints Discount Prints the discount price in report Quote Sheet 0 Rentals Only Rentals Only Current Weekly Prici 5 Summary O Sales Only Detail Rentals and Sales customized MiLine Item Prices Print Kit Header 7 Print Discount C Use Billing Sch C Print Total Replacement Price vi Print Subrental Vendor V Print Weekly Rental Exit DE Mode RF 11 15 2011 13 12 48 Prints Total Replacement Price Prints the total replacement price in quote sheet Prints Subrental Vendor Prints Subrental vendor in quote sheet Prints Weekly Rental Prints the weekly rental rate in quote sheet Prints Kit Header Prints the kit header in quote sheet Use Billing Schedule Check this to use the billing schedule in quote sheet ETS Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Physical Inventory Physical Inventory Barcoded Physical Inventory Noncoded File Transaction Help File Transaction Help Order Order Barcoded Last Equipment 00005 Last Quantity 4 Barcodes ooo quntiy Td Exit OK Exit OK Success 100A 220V F BATES TO Success ARRI 12 18K HEADd M CAMLOK Mode RF 5 3 2006 02 51 02 Mode RF 5 3 2006 02 55 52 As you know taking a physical inventory of al
218. and Cancelled Quote A quote order is a way of giving a customer pricing for equipment Equipment will not be reserved if the order is a Quote A Quote cannot have items checked out or checked in and it cannot be billed Reservation Reservation order reserves equipment A reservation cannot have items checked out or checked in and it cannot be billed Order Confirmed order reserves equipment and allows equipment to be checked out and checked in and it can be billed Default Billable Type When a new order created the billable type will default in from the specified default value This field dictates how billing will be handled for the order The possible values Regular Bill No Charge or No Further Bill No Charge Sales Stop All Billing Hold and Stop Sales Regular Bill is an Order that will be billed for charges based on the billing schedule and rental or sales activity Regular bill 1s the recommended default No Charge is an order which will never have an invoice created No Further Bill is an order that will have no further rental invoices created No Charge Sales the order will not bill for Sales charges All other charge will still be billable Stop All Billing the order will not bill for any charges Rentals Sales Restocking Loss Damages Labor Space or Shipping Hold ahold order will not come up for billing until it is take off hold Stop Sales the order will not continue to bill for any further
219. and then click on the check in PA Note When a Pull list or check in sheet reports are printed for parent Program separates the report for each production within that parent It will not print out one report for all the items of that parent CE Checkin By Parent Select Orders RTPro Demo Company i E Oj x File Action Search View Help MN savy amp Show Only Orders wih them Out Include only Orders el Show All Orders having this Equipment Ca Refresh F2 e Include All F31 L Checkin Screen F10 Project bal Job Component gt Ship Date F 24993 11 24 2008 Retum Date Onder Status 11 24 2008 Patet e 24994 11 24 2008 11 24 2008 Pat Ret E 24995 11 24 2008 11 24 2008 Shipped le 24996 11 24 2008 11 24 2008 Part Ship 24997 11 24 2008 11 24 2008 Part Ret Browse Check in Across Multiple All Orders All RTPro allows selecting multiple orders for check in This option is available across all orders To begin the multi order Check in process click on Order Processing module and press All icon located on the header bar When All icon is pressed Check in All screen will come up with some filtering criteria such as Job Component and or Project and or equipment code In this screen filtering orders 1s optional If filtered then the orders with items out based upon the filter criteria will be displayed Note If filtering is used in Check in All scr
220. antity By using this button from the toolbar menu the quantity of any equipment code can be seen in each location of the company This option is only available 1f your company is setup for multi location fa Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Accessory List a If a type of equipment is normally ordered and shipped with accessories or other types of equipment it can be linked together through the Accessory List Any type of equipment can be linked with another type of equipment Use this feature for equipment that you wish to have included together on the order screen and on numerous reports The accessories will appear indented under the main code on screens and 1 pon File Search View Record Help D 5 lt auto incite Equipment ARR Equipment HMIFI0005 127186 HMI FRES PACKAGE CHCE HMIFI0305 HMIF10305 12 186 HMI FRES HEAD Ji E 1 C HMILA0005 HMILA000s5 18K HMI FRESMEL LAMP 1 1 2 o C HMILA0010 HMILA0010 12 HMI FRESMEL LAMP 0 3 oF MAGBA0030 hMAGBADNSO 12K HMI BALLAST 0 4 o C MAGBADOOS MAGB40005 12 18K HMI BALLAST 1 1 5 o C HMLACOOS Ht LAC 5 12 18 HMI BALLAST FEEDER CABLE 1 1 6 or HMIHE 0010 HMIHE 0010 12 BK EXT So 2 2 7 ol C SORIMODOS SCRAIMODOS 1 1 8 7 C SCRIMOD0S SCAIMOS40 SCRIMS FULL DOUBLE 29 2 g C SCRIMOOOS SERIMOG35 1 10 C SCRIMOOS SERIMOS30 1 11 C SCRIMOOOS SCRIMO325 1 12 E GELFRO0OS GELFRO00OS 13 o FF
221. ar using Roll Up checkbox if they are increased Update Rental Prices Increase 23 Daily Price Increase 2 11 11 M Roll UF to the nearest dollar Weekly Price Increase 2 0 00 M Roll UP to the nearest dollar Replacement Lost Increase 10 00 M Roll UP to the nearest dollar Replacement Price Price Increase 10 00 Roll UP to the nearest dollar eee Enter New Sales Prices Click on the Update Prices drop down tab and select Enter New Sales Prices Update Sales Prices Screen In this screen the Stock Description Cost and Prices default over from the sales inventory for each Stock Number on file These four fields cannot be edited from this screen Note New prices may be entered while working in the grid as described below or click the Detail icon then press the Edit icon M to work in a detail screen mode Whichever method is used the prices will not be updated to the Sales Inventory from this screen You must use the Rollover New Sales Prices feature see below There are several ways to update the Sales prices New Cost In this column enter the New Cost and press Enter to continue to the New Price for this Stock Or use the down arrow to move to the next New Cost No changes will be made and the Cost will remain the same for those Stock s that have no entry in the New Cost column eae Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cost Inc When a New Cost 1s entered this column will reflect the increase f
222. arcode Scanners RTPro System supports many types of barcode scanners Some of these scanners have ability to work in RF mode Radio Frequency These scanners need an application to provide connectivity with the RTPro System This application is named RTPro RF Server To access system database you need to run this server and connect scanners to it RTPro RF Server 5 x Server view Help ej ojejo ERS Plan Server Connections Transaction Log Error Log History Server Status Running Socket Status Listening Server P 100 100 100 1 DB Connection Connected Database Name ttprosl 1024 Provider SOLOLEDE 1 Server Port Active Connections 0 RTPro RF Server is a medium desktop application for making a connection between wireless scanners and RTPro database With this application users can control the events occurring in scanners and manage them If this is the first time that you are using this application and you need help for running the RF Server please refer to the setting section and follow the instructions Server Tab In the main page you can see some useful information about the running status of the application With this information users can manage and solve the problem faster and easily Server Status Showing the Running text with green color represents the server is running without any problem Socket Status Status of this section represents the status of socket which sends and receives data to from
223. arcode manually in this field and press exit A the OK button or easily scan with scanner trigger button Success ARRI 575 1200 ELECTRONIC BALLA ORD 131 OUT 0 REM 131 Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 27 30 E Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Another section in this page is designed for checking out the ERE Ma ietd ne 27 Subrental Barcoded items Since Subrental Barcoded items are not Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Barcoded Subrental Barcoded kept in the program you need to provide Vendor Code and Equipment Code for the Barcoded item You can also checkmark the Serial No box and enter the serial number of the Subrental Barcoded item After scanning a Barcoded item to check out Vendor program displays a success message followed by the equipment Equipment description It also displays the following quantities for the Serial mo equipment you just checked out Barcode Po ORD Shows the number of items ordered for this equipment OUT Shows the number of items checked out for this equipment ett ox REM Shows the number of items remained to be checked out Vendor Represents the name of the vendor that you sub rent this Pr OUT 4 REM 2 item from Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 31 02 Equipment The equipment code of the sub rented item Serial Entering this field is optional so if you have the serial number of this item you can fill it in here Barcode This box will show the scanne
224. are in the parent screen and the ellipse is pressed a list of all the parents will appear If you are in the production screen the production listing will appear Inactive A record can be inactive To make a record inactive click on the Inactive box and a check mark will appear Only certain areas have the inactive icon On the production screen if the inactive is check marked there cannot be orders added to the production and certain functions will not be allowed The system will notify the user if the unavailable option is selected The message will read Production has been marked inactive please see management An example of using the Inactive status 1s when you need to talk to someone working on the production perhaps you need an additional PO or need the correct billing address To mark a record as active Click on the edit icon click on the inactive box and the check mark will be removed and then save the record ES This 1s the notes icon When selected an unlimited notes area will appear Notes can be added to the record If notes are attached to a record a notes icon will appear on the bottom right hand corner of the screen To view notes for a record click on notes icon on the upper section of the screen a The printer icon will print out an RTPro report If the printer icon 1s available there is a specific report available relating to the screen For example the printer icon in checkout screen will print a check
225. artment Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Location If you use multi location features you have an option to select one of your locations and see the reports of equipment that exist there This 1s specifically important 1f the locations are using different currency hence different prices for the equipment Currency If you are using multi currency features you can select a currency Example ETS Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Accessory List Report Date Time 10 10 2010 12 35 21 PM Page 1 of 2 Include Price Price 3 po OSa 81 300 00 AAA ha Head 4000 01 4000 02 8000 44160 11 D Ci SK Magnetic Mole Ballast a IEA E B i B i 3 5 hi 220 11 Way Bar Do i Scrim Bag NA e BB220 55 Shutter 2 O A Narrow Lens Assy 12K Par Half Scrim Single 29 Half Double Scrim Moledisc Frame gt F11 Diving Board CE IE 800 Joker Bug 4 Pc Lens Set i ll i Accessory Used Report Ei Accessory Used Report RTPro Jeme This report prints a list of accessories with their main codes The report displays the Equipment Code Description a
226. as ica a eA eae ee 91 AG INONCOG CO ems ad 91 ANS CaSO roo 93 EQUIB MEN ERenta HITOY std AAA AAA tonnes tan tien n 93 A tare tis ges hak hae r a aaraa vs rsa bats gn a es 93 Sales Inven OIV ser dires dantussntr dattes antuna sde dre A timed et nt Sert ei 93 Adding a New Type OF Sales SUOCK iii nemaente non diner 93 Merge SOU a 96 a o o nc nd O DI 96 Sales REDOT ni emo oies 96 Mendo rata Oo 96 A A O ON 97 Cost ot Goods bosic FIFO First a FISE OUT a a ar to es CO cate COS co 97 Sales Inventory TIANSOCTIONS da etes id ee eee ea 99 Unprocessed Sales TAVGNSUCHIONS ER a alain 100 SS MESES E AAA AA AA A 100 A TE 101 Sales AVANDIA AAA AA A AA AA AN E lt E A 101 A A NN 101 Sales Availability Detail Screen oocooocccnocnccncnnconnnonnnononnnnnnnnnnnnononnononnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnrnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 101 A A OR ELO 101 Retired Mendes ses a sada in et yas eisai ease eae 101 Kere NAVI CUI OIV ncaa tasers ace a aceasta ese eo ue de uote tion tien 101 Retire Barcoded emana aio a OO ie 102 Restore Barcode ems ES 102 Retire NONCOde des as 102 Restore Noncoded Sas 102 PESTO eara OO 102 O E E E hele bce E T 102 oO 103 R DOIF TICKET US AS A A AAA AA 103 Adde A NEW Tica 103 EIA ME e e ie 103 CHECK IMiBarcoded into RDA LR RL dedicaban dada 104 Check Bar coded Out Ol RE UI id A oo xs sale ET an soles A asian va AAA AER v6 08 AA AA ass DR RADA A anes 104 CHECK Noncoded into Replace aaa 104 Check Noncoded Out DARA aa 104 Repara Susi
227. ases the Quantity of Noncoded item Changing Noncoded Items Keep in mind those records for Non Barcoded items are kept in groups from the sessions in which they were added When you make changes to the Noncoded record that change applies to all items in the group To find the item number for a group of Noncoded equipment go to the Rental Inventory Screen see Inventory Items in this chapter The noncoded items are indicated in the noncoded column They are assigned a group number that consists of the equipment code number and in parenthesis the number of the group For example the first 10 items for equipment code 12345 would appear as 12345 0001 if later an additional 10 were added the second 10 items would appear as 12345 0002 and so on To view or change information for a group of Noncoded items enter this number as the barcode number in the Rental Inventory Entry Screen As noncoded items are sent into repair of retired the group quantity will decrease If items are checked out of repair or restored a new group code will be assigned xxxx You can make corrections and changes to any of the fields for this group see the Adding Noncoded Items above for more details on the fields The other features of the Rental Inventory Screen Status Image Attachments History and Revenue Generated do not apply Rental Availability Bi From the Rental availability Screen the availability of equipment for each selected location can be checked F
228. at are not returned Print the sort order by department or by equipment code This option will group and sort equipment by Equipment Code or Department ES Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Vendor Select Subrental Vendor or leave it blank to print Sub rentals from all vendors for selected criteria PO In this box the subrental PO can be entered The report will print only the items purchased with this PO Leave the PO blank to get the report of 1tems purchased across all POs Project Shows only the orders linked to this given project Leave this option blank to show orders linked to all projects Department A department can be selected and if selected the report will print for the specified department Rental Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on list icon in front of Equipment Range and select each one you want to include in report Consolidate Noncoded Items across Orders When this option is selected the program combines all Noncoded items with the same equipment code into one line on the report If it is not checked then the report prints a separate line for each order that has this equ
229. at you need to create the Quote in the RTPro desktop first Also note that the Order Status of it should be Quote Scanner does not allow items to be added to a Reservation or Orders Just enter the equipment with the proper quantity and press the OK button Program also allows you to scan the Barcoded item in the Equip Code box and enter the quantity and press the OK button After you are done adding all the items to the Quote you can print the quote sheet by pressing the Print Quote button Order The Order number for the Quote Last Equipment The Equipment Code of last item added to this Quote Rentals Quote Screen Order F 20017318 lt 20000 gt Last Equipment Equip Coda Quantity Exit Ok Print Quote Mode RF 11 15 2011 13 12 40 Equip Code The equipment code of the item that you want to add to this quote Quantity The Quantity of the item that you want to add to this quote Quote Sheet This page contains some features for printing the quote sheet This 1s the same report that you can print from the desktop version of RTPro and it is added for convenience to the scanner program This report saves the selections you have made and defaults them for the next time you print it Rentals Only Only print the rental items in quote sheet and ignore the sale items Rentals Only Current Weekly Price Only print the rental items but with weekly price Sales Price Only print the sale items in quote sheet
230. ate 0 00 160 00 25 00 170 00 1 Imagine your employee should go to work on 26 of March Program calculates the billable amount for the four following Bill Type like the following a Hourly Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Typ Rate 3 26 2009 3 26 2009 08 00 02 30 6h Hourly 20 6h 30m 20 AM PM 30m 130 Note For Hourly bill type program calculates the total hours that an employee should work multiply by Hourly Rate b Day Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 26 2009 3 26 2009 08 00 02 30 6h Day 160 1d 160 160 AM PM 30m Note For Day bill type program will not consider hours even if they are selected It just calculates One day of working multiply by Day Rate c All day event with Bill Type Day yp Rate Type Note Program calculates All day event similar to Day bill type d All day event with Bill Type Hourly Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 26 2009 3 26 2009 ET ane ld Hourly 20 Th 20 140 7h d Note For All day event with Hourly bill type program multiply employee working time that is set through the Employee Detail screen by Hourly Rate 2 Imagine your employee should go to work on 29 of March Weekend Progr
231. ated revenue reports No Charge The order will not bill An order with a no charge will not appear on any billing reports estimated revenue or revenue reports No Further Bill When an order is marked No Further Bill the rental billing stops The order will not appear on billing reports or estimated revenue reports for rentals The system will continue to calculate charges for sales loss and damages No Charge Sales Sales items will not be charged against the order All other charges will still be calculated Stop All Billing When Bill Type is set to Stop All Billing then no further billing charges will be calculated for the order There will be no charges for Rentals Sales Loss Damages or Shipping Restocking Labor or Space once the order 1s marked as Stop All Billing Hold When an order is marked on hold the order will not appear on the Orders to Bill screens and reports The order is temporarily suspended from billing until the order is taken off of hold When taken off hold the order will come up for billing based upon the last time billed Stop Sales When an order is marked as Stop Sales any further sales charges will not be calculated NOTE The bill type is used in the RTPro logic when closing out orders When the bill type is changed a record will be written to the exception file noting the change the date and who did the change Salesperson This is a person in your shop that gets credit for the ord
232. ation like Notepad Add below lines at the end of the file HKEY CURRENT USER Software Symbol SymShell Programs Prog5 Used to add additional programs to the start menu Same functionality as the program launcher values Name Application RTProSL RtproSL exe Description RtproSL Copy and replace modified file from pc to original location in the scanner Application folder Cold boot scanner for the new settings to take effect ES Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Appendix General Questions Why should automate Automation 1s one of the most productivity investments a company can make Automation can help with repetitive tasks as well as automate many manual tasks As a potential customer for automation they are many systems available for data collection Barcodes are used widely as the main solution for data collection It is used on many commercial products and used for identification 1 e food products clothing and vehicles This solution has proven to be simple efficient and reliable for data collection How much will automation cost The costs of automation based on the following factors software hardware implementation and labor The most common savings in automated data collection is in labor costs Although the initial time to place barcodes on individual items and enter into the system may take up labor time the end result is you will be saving time The overall time to write up ord
233. aunders 500083 2003 02 182 0m0 rr E9ESRES E Commercial 500266 2003 02 160 Dana Eudaly Se commercial oo Dana Eudally O S commercial 500281 2003 02 18 Dana Pude commercial OR 0 0 Pana ada ET Checkout Check in Quantity Report This report will print the quantity of items that are checked in out based on the criteria entered System manager can E Checkout Checkin Quantity Report f CIE 1 use this report to detect the amount of activity in the Parent ae warehouse s Filter Options Parent Select the parent to limit the report to only SEL zj productions for this selected parent Leave this option To 10 2 2011 blank to show purchase productions from all parents Location Pe Production Select the production to limit the report to only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show all productions Date Range Filters the Checkout Check in transactions performed between the given date range If begin date is blank it will include all the transactions performed on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will include all the transactions performed on or after the begin date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Checkout Checkin Quantity Report Date Time 2006 06 159 41 524M Page
234. ave this option blank to show Subrental from all vendors 12 Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Current Rentals Report Date Ti me 2006 06 179 44 1 14h Page 1 of 1 Sort By Equipment Format Summary Location LA ES Job Title Production Title Return Date E D 500085 Cooperstown SE51 ESPN ESPN 2001 08 13 pO0020 MeDonald ERP ROT iohthng 2001 07 23 p i i I A al 500199 WUSAChapelHill Job Date8 2 01 FREEO1 FreedomiWVeekendAloftt 2003 01 24 500128 SoccerGameChicago JOHNO1 JohnsonBurnettProductions 2001 11 27 500023 MLBAIIStarGameSE 30 LEUCO4 2001 07 12 Rental Tracker Pro Current Rentals Report Date Time 3 27 2012 5 52 17 PM Page 1 of 12 Sort By Production Format Detail AMERFILM American Film Institute t eee ee ee eee ee ee Date Vendor Price 1 LOSANGE 14000 18K Alpha Head S 4a ________ 000567 9 28 2011 10 3 2011 320 00 OSANGE 14000 01 220V F Bates To M Camlock 18K 427 9 28 2011 wao GE 42 9 28 2011 10 3 2011 GE 9 28 2011 10 3 2011 GE 14000 04 9 28 2011 10 3 2071 9 28 2011 10 3 2011 1 011 00 3 DER a de QISIS 60 0 G G PO P PO G Cd G PO y E O ES a E 48HMIDEGB 18K HMI DE Gl
235. beginning and partial match anywhere Name The field to search should be First X Cancel selected Fields Use the dropdown arrow choose which field to search First Finds the first occurrence in the database matching the search characters Shortcut key F4 Next To find the next occurrence listed in the database matching the search characters Shortcut key F3 Incremental search is also an option by using the F2 shortcut key At the top of some RTPro screens 1s a search prompt A search entry can be entered in the box and RTPro will search for the record within the displayed data An example of the feature within the production listing data displayed is all the productions If the user was searching for a specific production the user can type in the production and the system will position the record pointer to the match if a match is found P Help Button Clicking this button will bring up the application help about the current screen 15 Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc O Preview D Credit Some Listings have a legend O Draft Show Al You can click on colored buttons to filter the list or click on Show All to clear filter These listings showing records in colors that represents their status in legend Ft Close Button Clicking this button will save changed data and close screen Shortcut ALT F4 al Pin Button If the Pin 1s pushed that means after user presses OK to print the report pro
236. box should be left unchecked Print Serial When this box is checked all serial numbers for this equipment code when checked out to an order will be printed on the Checkout Sheet and Check in Sheets Inventory There 1s a check box in this screen which is called Inventory if not checked user can define a rental equipment code as non inventory equipment Such equipment is equipment that program does not keep track of the quantity of them in the system So there are no Rental inventory and no Retired records for such non inventory equipment codes Changing an Equipment Record On the Equipment Screen Click on the equipment record you wish to change Then click the edit button or double click on equipment record you wish to change and then click the edit button on the Rental Equipment Entry Screen Edit the values and save the record Functions available by right clicking on equipment code line Inventory Items When users want to see all rental inventory items that belong to an equipment code through the Equipment Screen pick up a desired equipment code and select Inventory Items under Inventory menu or simply press the F8 button Another option is available by right clicking on the menu then Rental Inventory Screen will appear and display all rental items related to this equipment code Note Double clicking on any records in Rental Inventory Screen will open the Rental Inventory Entry Screen Refer to Rental Inventory later in th
237. by the same in the system which are identical In other words when you have two types of stock numbers which are the same you may merge them a together Stock to Merge with Note Please use caution when you merge two Stock numbers together the number of first stock will be deleted and system will x Cancel Help display the number of second stock Transaction History This feature will keep all the sales transactions for a stock number and displays them on the Sales Inventory Transaction History screen Within this screen users will observe the Transaction Date Transaction Type Quantity Location and other useful information The type of transaction can be shown by different colors To access in Sales Inventory Screen highlight a desired Stock No then from View menu select Transaction History or click on its icon in the toolbar EX Sales Inventory Transaction History File Search View Help po E Ship O Drop O Adjustment Show All 3 Y a e Qe E Fetum O Purchase O Transfer Transaction StockNo Description RecNo Type Location PO Cost GEL158 Gel Deep Orange 101 0 9 23 2011 Purchase LOSANGEI121212 100 00 Transaction Ca GEL158 Gel Deep Orange 90 50 506 7 2011 Purchase LOSANGEI12345799 65 00 GEL158 Gel Deep Orange 73 10 10 11 1 2010 Purchase LOSANGEI 65 00 10 10 10 30 2010 Purchase LOSANGEI Sales Reports El From the Sales Inventory Screen a list of all the Sales Invento
238. c Using RTPro Manual RTPro includes a user manual to help you learn RTPro Like many other software products there may be a learning curve with understanding the software However knowing the software and what it can do could quickly enable you to use it effectively Contacting Support Email is the preferred way to report issues and ask a question You can also contact us from 8 00 am to 5 00 pm Pacific Standard Time at our toll free number 888 595 8041 ext 1 to talk to our support staff If you have a sample report or a screen shot of the program that needs to be sent to us the suggested way is to attach it to an email If that is not possible then send it via fax Our toll free fax is 888 595 8042 What s unique about RTPro software RTPro 1s an inventory tracking system designed for the entertainment rental industry We have designed the program with the following ideas ease of use graphical buttons and short cut keys In addition we have a list of robust features exclusively for RTPro Ease of Use You can use RTPro with both mouse control and short cut keys Graphical Buttons RTPro has graphic icons to correspond to the operation to perform The point and click method is consistent throughout the program In the Main Menu screen each button is labeled with a graphic icon and the corresponding text label A floating label 1s displayed when the cursor is placed on top of the icon Short cut Keys RTPro has pre define
239. cal Inventory process in order to print this report This report is helpful when doing spot checks on your inventory on the shelf The purpose of it 1s to give to an employee to go count what is on the shelf Filter Options Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports of equipment that exist there Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Print Scanner Readable Information This checkbox specifies whether to print a scanner readable barcode label for each equipment code or not This is helpful if the users are going to scan the equipment code and enter in a quantity on a scanner This can then be used to perform a physical inventory Note You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on the list select each one you want to include in report Example PIN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Rental Inventory Work Sheet Date Time 2006 06 13 3 17 11 PM Page 1 of 76 Location LA el Mir ee ea Oe ee On Counted DE
240. calculate the entire total of the invoice and display the result at the bottom of the screen Note You may remove orders from an unconfirmed invoice by selecting Remove Order from this Invoice via the right click context menu Summary Section Summary Charge breakdown area Displayed is a summary of all the charges for the invoice You can add miscellaneous charges to invoice To add a miscellaneous charge click on the icon A blank line will appear You can enter description of charge GL account 1f line is taxable and the billable amount After altering charge area click on calculator button El ris will recalculate all the charges Totals will lock when adjustments are applied to summary section Click on the lock D icon to lock in the totals To unlock totals click on lock icon The system will ask for confirmation 1f you press Yes system will recalculate charges from orders attached to invoice Note You may add or change information in Summary area if the invoice is a Preview or Draft A draft must be confirmed to be an invoice Click on Confirm at the top of the screen It will create a new invoice with a new number assigned to it Once an invoice is confirmed totals cannot be edited Billing Orders from the Billing Module Create Invoice from Orders Click on Create menu at the top of the Billing Module screen Select Create Invoice from Orders or click on its toolbar icon The Orders to Bill s
241. can be marked as returned Canceling of returned items is also available from the Sales Return Screen CE Checkin By Production Select Orders RTPro Demo Company loj x File Action Search wiew Help MEM a y gt f Show Only Orders with Item Out Include only Orders Poy ue having this Stack Ca Refresh F2 w Include All Fs 53 Checkin Screen F10 Show All Orders Project Job Component 25018 12 22 2005 1222 2006 Hot S hip 29020 1 2222008 12222006 Shipped 20021 12 22 2008 1222222008 Part 5 hip 20022 124252008 122252008 Shipped Kee Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Check in By Parent Pal RTPro allows checking in items across a Parent company In order to check in items across a Parent a Parent must first be selected To select a parent click on next to the parent prompt at the bottom of the Order Processing screen Next click on the PA in the check in section on top of order processing list of all the orders that have items out for the parent will appear Check mark Include box besides those orders you wish to include or click the Include All button 1f you want to select all outstanding orders across the parent By pressing F10 or select Checkin Screen the Rental Check in Screen will appear from this screen items can be checked in as described earlier in this chapter Note To proceed to the check in across the parent you can also choose an order for the parent
242. ce credit void in the report sheet Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company InvoiceRegister Defi me 2006 06 41 4 04 35 PM Currency US Production CONCO4 nvoice Status Invoice Order Invaice Production Payment Sales Discount Taxes Others Total Date DateRange Title pe 100182 2003 08 27 500294 1120 0 8 27 03 Oooo ET A EE BBD 910425 100244 2006 06 11 500949 03 01 006 10 06 A 0118 555 680 00 17 076 90 539 603 60 pOSB S42 00 FOE AO 11 181 26 630 64 66 Invoice List by Production The Invoice List by Production report prints out a list of invoices across a single or multiple productions for a specific date range with price breakdown of each invoice number You may separate such report by job component Production _ Ei when check marking the checkbox If your company 1s Date From Po multi location or multi currency you can also choose To TS Location Currency or both to filter the report Location TE Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Invoice List By Production Report DateTime 2006 06 11 4 06 11 PM Page 1 of 1 Production CONCH Currency US CONCI Concept Lighting Cooperstown Hall Of Fame Date 100182 2003 08 27 So BB TE 11 181 26 97 044 26 1002441 2006 06 11 Ego O AE Totals Tots 5636545300 107640 11 151 26 630 647 66 Invoice and Credit Memo GL Distribution The Invoice and
243. ces can belong to same Cycle Paid Amount Comes from the Subrental PO Invoice Detail which matches the cycle Date Paid Comes from the latest Processed Date on the Subrental PO Invoice Detail which matches the cycle Customer Invoice This will let the user to know if the Customer is already billed on a confirmed Invoice in RTPro and whether the Vendor should be paid When user double clicks on the Customer Invoice program will send the user to the Invoice Screen for the invoice displayed in the Customer Invoice column JT Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Inventory Inventory Purchase Orders This section is used to handle Purchase Orders that are issued for purchasing new Rental and Sales inventory User will have ability to enter Purchase Orders for Equipment and Sales items When the inventory 1s received user can post the inventory items against the PO To gain access this section click on the Inventory Purchase Order icon in the toolbar or select it under the Inventory drop down menu Inventory Purchase Order Screen In this screen you can see a list of all inventory Purchase Orders Press Refresh button to see inventory PO s or filter this list by PO Vendor Description Date range or Location if Multi Location feature 1s used in the Setup Screen then hit the F2 key to see a list of the filtered PO s Also Closed POs can be included in the list using Include Closed checkbox in the filtering ar
244. cess message and cancel Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt checking out Similar to the checkout page program displays the Barcoded Subrental Barcoded following quantities ORD Shows the number of items ordered for this equipment OUT Shows the number of items checked out for this equipment REM Shows the number of items remained to be checked out Barcode This box will show the scanned barcode In addition you can type the barcode manually in this field and press the OK button or easily scan it with scanner trigger button me Success Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 19 29 Another section in this page is designed for canceling the Subrental Eds has ur Etre barcoded items Enter the barcode for the Subrental item After a successful scan program will show the following information Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Subrental Barcoded ORD Shows the number of items ordered for this equipment OUT Shows the number of items checked out for this equipment en DO REM Shows the number of items remained to be checked out serialo Barcode This box will show the scanned barcode In addition you parcode can type the barcode manually in this field and press the OK button or easily scan it with scanner trigger button ent ok Exit SUCCESS Mode RE 5 3 2006 03 19 29 Cancel Checkout Noncoded This page is designed for canceling the checked out Noncoded items if Ec celia e you want to cancel them for any rea
245. ch one you want to include in report Include Misc Items If checked program includes MISC items into the report Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print the value of the inventory for that currency only Example EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Cost of Sales Shipped Report Date Time 3 28 2012 10 07 47 PM Page 2 of 2 Order Production Productionmiame Description Quantity Purchase Extended Extended UnitCost Cost Price GELROLL12 MODERNFA ABC Studios Gel Roll Yellow 1 00 112 50 112 5 427IGELROLL12 AMERFILM American Film institute Gel Roll Yellow 2 00 125 00 5250 00 335 GELROLL12 MODERNFA ABC Studios Gel Roll Green y 112 50 2 250 00 380 GELROLL12 MODERNFA ABC Studios Gel Roll Green 5 00 s2350 5625 00 380 GELROLL17 MODERNFA ABC Studios Gel Roll Deep Lavender 400 51 00 125 00 204 00 500 00 351 GELROLL17 COUGARTO Abc Gel Roll Deep Lavender 10 00 51 00 100 00 510 00 1 000 00 ______367 GELROLL17 COUGARTO Abc____________ Ge RolI Deep Lavender 7 00 551 00 100 00 357 00 700 00 448 GELROLL17 REVENGE NewLine___________________ GelRollDeep Lavender_______ 10 00 65 00 5125 00 650 00 1 250 00 ____3E GELROLL17 COUGARTO Abo Ge Roll Deep Lavender_______ __
246. check in This will be repeated until the user presses Close or the program reaches the end of the list Note If the check in mode is set to Damage and the Put all items in one ticket is checked the program will put all items that are checked in as damaged onto one repair ticket The checkbox is visible only when the check in type is Damage Mass Checkin Noncoded items Click on mass mode button or select Non Barcoded List from Check in menu or press F5 This will lead you to the Mass Checkin Noncoded screen Adjust filter 1f you want to see a partial list of items If you want to see Subrental and misc items click their boxes Press F2 to refresh the list Now you will see a list of all items that are not checked Enter quantities to Check in or press Include All to set quantities to check in equal to quantity out Press F3 to update order and continue or press F10 to update and exit Note To have mass cancel for noncoded subrented and misc items select Non Barcode from Cancel menu This will lead you to the Mass Checkin Noncoded screen After filtering press F2 or click on the refresh button enter quantity of items you want to cancel In the same way miscellaneous items can be canceled Checkin All Use this option and it will allow the user to check in all items without confirmation for each item You can check in all items with one of the three available options Check in all Barcoded items only This
247. checking this box Subrental information will include in report Sort By You may sort report results with Department Category or Equipment Example Rental Tracker Pro Rental Inventory Utilization Report Date Time 4 1 20126 49 04PM Page 1 of 5 Date Range 1 1 2010 411 2012 AV Audio Video Avg Gty Days Days Subrent Days In subrent Owned Awail Reni Days Re Repair s Bill SOO0LUMENS s000 umersProedor Tae Po feat Pampas Pal sso caf o i poo poo ETA per penenie pp m ne ee A O CEE O E 6000 a8 EST IIS IIS IE RI ee E O E E CE IS 51 000 090 00 90 A botar 4724 2750 27249 ar 288 81 01 70 s14464000 70 sanson 5405 00 144 040 00 Description of columns Average Quantity Owned This is the average quantity owned within the date range specified The reason why it is average is items could have been purchase mid way in the date range an item could have been retired mid way EIN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Days Available This is the number of rental days the average quantity owned was available during the date range Days Rented This column looks at the rental checkout check in detail level The days are calculated against the checkout and check in date and the date range specified This column never includes subrentals Subrental Days Rented This column looks at the rental checkout check in detail level for subrental items only The days are calculated against the checkout an
248. ck on the edit mode scroll through the images for the barcode and right click on the image to set as the default Select Set this image as default When clicking on the printer icon on the top of the screen program prints the first four images for that barcode List of Rental Inventory Items Tn this list a filtered list of inventory items in the inventory can be seen ES Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Y Click filter icon choose your desired filter and press ok A filtered list of inventory items will show After this if you click on List icon you will see the same list To clear filter press clear button on filter screen Double click on items in list to view details Also the list of rental inventory items is accessible by selecting List under view menu Convert to Barcoded RTPro allows user to convert noncoded items to barcoded items without having to retire them first This way the Purchase Amount Vendor PO and other information are preserved In the Rental Inventory Screen users can right click on a Non coded item and select Convert to Barcoded The menu option is available only for Non coded items Program will display the Add Rental Barcoded Items screen and copy all the fields from the noncoded record It will then set the Quantity To Add box to the Quantity of the noncoded item and waits for user to press the ENTER key When user enters a barcode program adds the barcoded item and then decre
249. cked grid total for all currency columns will be updated CE Confirm Drafts RTPro Demo Company O x File Search wiew Help O Draft O Invoice Production 20000 w Include All Refresh F2 39 Confirma Drafts Location TORONTO Ej g Print Drafts Ch Print Invoices hi DraftH a Production Invoice Invoice Fental Confirm lnvoicett Mae oan Tithe Begin Date End Date oe 129251 20000 QUOTES 100P ae FeO 9 2722070 9 28 00 PM 129210 20000 QUOTES 6192010 6 19 2010 4 34 00 PM 116 93 e 129191 20000 QUOTES 84122070 16122010 5 70 00 PH 116 93 CI de Browee Listing Menu From the Billing menu there is a listing option There are options to view all invoices drafts previews voids and credits Print Selected Invoices Besides Print Range of Invoices user can now select multiple invoices from the Invoice List Screen and print the selected invoices Users can select multiple invoices by holding the Ctrl key and pressing on each invoice Or by selecting an invoice and then holding the Shift key and selecting another invoice to select all invoices between of 2 invoices Ctrl A can be used to select all invoices on the Invoice List screen and then right click anywhere on the grid and select Print Selected Invoices Note When printing program includes Invoice Preview Draft and Credits that are among the selected records and exclude Voids from the printing MN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker I
250. coded In this screen user can Check in a Noncoded item If you are Ei Checking in a sub rented item then checkmark the Order 60017754 lt 35647 gt Subrental box You can then limit the Check in to a Last Equipment specific vendor by entering the Vendor code If item is Mt Quantity damaged and requires repair then checkmark the Subrental damaged box and enter the Damage Description in the aement box below it Upon a successful Check in the program displays the message Success followed by the equipment description If there is an error when checking in this equipment program will display an error message in red Order The Order number you are working with Last Equipment The equipment code for last checked in equipment Mode RF 111152011 13 11 35 Last Quantity The Quantity of last checked in equipment Subrental Check this box if you want to Check in a sub rented item After check marking this box you can fill in the Vendor code Equipment The Equipment code of the item that you want to Check in Quantity The Quantity of this equipment code that you want to Check in Damaged If the returned item from your customer is damaged then checkmark this box Fill in a brief description of the damage 336 Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cancel Check in Barcoded If you mistakenly Check in a barcode item to an order do not worry this page helps you to cancel the Check
251. creen will appear giving you several available options which are as follows Production The Production field is a required field and must be filled in As of Date The As of Date reflects on a specific date that orders are due to bill Location TN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Location is used if your RTPro is setup for multi location Extend to end of Weekly Cycle It means if the As of Date falls within a billing cycle date then bump the orders ending date to the end of the cycle Do not Bill beyond as of Date It means the system will stop the billing on the As of Date Exclude Holds If you don t want to create an invoice for hold orders checkmark Exclude Holds Bill type It allows for selection of the types of charges the system should include in the bill When selecting Rentals the system will look for all the rental items for the order which were out during the billing range The Use Qty Ordered ignores the rental check in out and creates the invoice for the quantities that were ordered Once the options are selected click on the Refresh button A list of all the orders for the production which are due a bill for the criteria selected will display on the grid 4 Orders to Bill al i jane File Search View Invoice Help YSS Dis amp mee Production COUGARTOWN 48 f Date Lite Refresh F2 e Extend to end of Weekly Cycle M Rentals M Loss M Rest
252. ction Creation Date Range Filters the report to the productions created between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print all the productions created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print all the productions created on or after the begin date Parent Select the parent to limit the report to only productions for this selected parent Leave this option blank to show purchase productions from all parents Include History If checked it will print both live and history productions History productions are the productions that moved to the History section of the program Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Production Log Report Date Time 2006 06 17 1 00 42PM CreationDateRange 2006 06 17 A yarn Code unis WrapDate Contact POT E eel theese es p001 07 20 PMD Somer SONEHOM Come To Home 2 poos 0 27 e CONCOT _ ConceptLighting Poor i SSCS ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Deposit Log Report The purpose of this report 1s to print a list of security deposits Security deposits are pulled from the production Filter the deposit report per production or by the particular date interval Filter Options Production If the Production is blank then the system will consider all productions Date Range Deposit creation date Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Blanket Deposit Log Report Date Time 2006 06 12 55 3
253. d There are shortcuts keys F3 amp F4 shortcuts For more details see Rental Order Screen and Sales Order Screen later in this chapter Order Total Screen It gives a snapshot of the rental sales and shipping replace price and cost This feature is accessible from Order menu of Order Processing Screen Shown on the Total Screen are also the shipping charge and labor and space totals Browsing Order Revision History Within RTPro is the ability to save revisions when the rental order entry is altered To save revisions refer to the Save revision in Administration system setup section If your system 1s set to store revisions then you can review revisions By clicking on the Order Revision History option a list of revisions will be displayed then select a revision to view A revision cannot be rolled back This feature 1s accessible from Order menu of Order Processing Screen Note Revisions will be saved in PDF format Update Status This option refreshes the status of an order Many factors affect this characteristic status such as when items are ordered shipped billed The system updates the status of an order automatically when activity happens However if status is not refreshed you can use this option Move Order to Live This option can restore an order from history Orders in history are not visible in the Order Processing Screen and are only available from History Screen which can be seen from History Menu pa Order Process
254. d Update Inventory screen is the Update column A check mark in the box indicates that this Equipment will update 1 e the resolution indicated in the Comments column will be implemented If you do not wish to have the system automatically update an equipment type click on the box to remove the check Adjustments can be made by hand with the Rental Inventory and Retirement functions see earlier in this chapter Update Inventory Before continuing with the update inventory process be sure the actions which will be taken for each equipment code is reviewed once the update process is started 1t cannot be canceled From the PI Review and Update Inventory screen there are three ways to update the inventory 1 Push the F3 key 2 Click on the Action dropdown key and click on Update Inventory 3 Click on the Update Inventory button in the lower part of the screen The Confirm window will appear The No button will take you back to the PI Review and Update Inventory screen for further review The Yes button will prompt a second Confirm screen again reminding you that the process cannot stop after it is started Click Yes to continue the update End Physical Inventory Process After the UPDATE inventory is done the physical inventory process should be ended At any time before the update inventory process the physical inventory session can be ended All selection criteria and any counts that have been entered will be erased as tho
255. d barcode In addition you can type the barcode manually in this field and press the OK button or easily scan it with scanner trigger button Checkout Noncoded In this screen user can checkout a Noncoded item If you check in a L gale peer sub rented item then checkmark the Subrental box You can then limit the Check in to a specific vendor by entering the Vendor code Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Upon a successful checkout program displays the message Success aa er gt a followed by the equipment description If there is an error when Mi subrental Sd checking out this equipment program will display an error message In Equipment IS red quently SS Order The Order number you are working with Last Equipment The equipment code of last checked out item Last Quantity The Quantity of last checked out equipment Subrental Check this box if you want to checkout a Subrental item e A OT LEnS 7 POCKET PAR After check marking this box you can fill in the Vendor code Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 24 58 Equipment The Equipment code of the item that you want to checkout Quantity The Quantity of this equipment code that you want to checkout EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cancel Checkout Barcoded If you mistakenly check out a barcode item to an order do not worry Ej pente this page will help you to cancel the checkout operation It is simple Just scan that barcode again to get the suc
256. d below using the following example for an order that has a first week rental totaling 1000 00 For the RTPro Show the order will bill as follows Week 1 will be billed at full price 1000 00 Week 2 will be billed at a 25 discount 750 00 Week 3 will be billed at a 50 discount 500 00 All subsequent weeks are also billed at 50 until the order returns CN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Billing Schedule Templates Creating a template In order to create a Billing Schedule Template Billing jg ping Schedule Se LEMA Schedule Codes should be created first ss code D Cyde Weeks Discount Percenage y OF x Cancel Code Use the dropdown arrow to choose a code from the Billing Schedule Code table Weeks This is the number of weeks that will be billed for the cycle Discount Percentage This is the discount percentage to apply to the specified cycle If a discount should apply to a rental or charges enter discount here The discount will apply when billing the order The discount does not affect the Rental Order Entry Screen Cycle This is billing cycle period There can be no gaps within the cycle numbers for a given billing schedule Start at one and add one for each cycle necessary In the following example the Code RTPRO should add three times Code Weeks Discount Percentage Cycle RTPRO 1 l RTPRO I 25 2 RTPRO I 50 3 At both the production level and
257. d bill those orders that are part of the weeks billing criteria Billing a Single Order Select Order Processing from Main module Enter an order number or click on after Order Ordertt Select the order number and double click Biling Reports Help Listing of all Invoices Create Mew Invoice In the Order Processing Screen click Create New Invoice under Billing EN Billing Orders O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Bill this Order RTPro Demo Company x Ordertt 29235 Production QUOTES Order Status Shipped Expected Return 4 40 2017 Usage Date 2 4 2012 210 2012 Last Billing This Billing 24 4 2012 211 072012 Create Invoice if total E 40 007 E F ebill Entire Sales Order Bill Type M Rentals MW Loss M Restocking e Sales e Damage e Labor MW Use Qty Ordered MW Space Create a Preview Create the Draft x Cancel Y Help Select billing criteria Bill Type Rentals Sales Loss Damage Use Qty Ordered Click on Create the Draft Multiple Order Invoicing Bulk Billing From Main menu click on Billing Module Click on Create Invoice from Orders or its icon Create Listing Batch Reports Help 1 Create Invoice From Orders Create Mon Order Invoice Credit an Invoice Rebill this Invoice Confirm Drafts Enter Job or Select it for the list Production DD SE In Orders to Bill screen select criteria and click Refresh the List sor Billi
258. d can be selected from the General Ledger Lookup table Sort Order This number affects on sales output sheets and sorts the list by the order that you enter for example in sales checkout sheet Print Subtotal If you want to separate total of each category and view it in sales quote sheet you can check this box Department This field shows the department of sales items Department field can be selected from the Department Lookup table A department link 1s required if using the drag and drop feature in order the rental order processing GL Cost Of Goods The default values for GL Inventory and GL Cost Of Goods should be entered here Retired Reason Table This table contains retired reasons As inventory gets retired the user may associate a retired item to a specific reason Examples of retired reasons would be Missing Destroyed beyond repair or Parted Out Repair Type Table This table contains the repair types As items get damaged and go into repair the user may associate the item to a repair type Examples of repair types would be Scheduled Maintenance Burnt out In house Owner Table This table contains a list of owners having equipment tracked in your warehouse The Owner selection is available from Inventory entry screen An owner is an individual or company that houses their inventory in your company and your company rents it out on consignment PI Equipment Group Table This table contains a list of physical inventory g
259. d check in date and the date range specified Days in Repair This is the quantity of days items were in repair based upon the date range Utilization This is the Days Rented divided by Days Owned Days in Repair Days Billed If the invoice Credit creation date is within the date range the invoice rental detail level will be calculated If the invoice rental detail item is Daily the days billed days weeks the quantity Revenue This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the extended amount of the invoice rental detail level This column never includes subrentals Subrental Days Billed If the invoice Credit creation date is within the date range the invoice rental detail level will be calculated The item must be subrented Ifthe invoice rental detail item is Daily the days billed days weeks the quantity Subrental Revenue This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the extended amount of the invoice rental detail level which are subrented only Subrental Cost This is the amount it cost your company for the subrentals billed during the date range specified Net Revenue This is the revenue minus the subrental revenue subrental cost Projected Equipment utilization analysis E Projected Equipment Utilization Analysis RTPro Demo Company ELE The pu
260. d ee SE LCI Rental Unit O B J A Epl A pa E Provide package and installation setup RENTALS Rental 1 30 000 00 30 000 00 Provide power distribution to trailers inwestlot quad RENTALS Rental 1 6 000 00 6 000 00 Provide cables for audio equipment RENTALS Rental 1 600 00 900 00 Generator cost RENTALS Rental 600 00 1 200 00 L a Sales Balance 0 00 Rental Balance 574 00 Sales SubTotal 0 00 Rental SubTotal 38 574 00 Sales Shipping 0 00 Rental Shipping 100 00 Sales Tax 0 00 Rental Tax 3 469 11 Total 42 143 11 4 Browse Order 491 Customer JACKJILL Ati Studios Grid Multi Select By using this feature users can switch to multi select mode You can apply rental discount and changing the Days Per Week for multiple records Select multiple records and press Apply Multiple Discount or Apply Multiple DPW from the Grid Multi Select icon in the toolbar After clicking on the multi select mode go to 1 line item you want to change hold the ctrl key and click on the line The line will highlight proceed and click on additional lines Once the items are highlighted click on the multi select icon drop down and select your option Pick List Screen You may add equipment to an order using pick list to increase adding speed To open the Pick List screen click on its icon in the toolbar or press F4 nn 8 Rental Entry Pick List File Actio
261. d short cut keys to get to the most common used functions This has been developed to increase efficiency as well to help users who are not savvy with a Windows interface Barcode validation It gives the ability to validate the prefix of barcodes used to improve misreads from hardware i e Barcode scanners User definable Billing Schedules Create multiple billing schedules and save them as templates Apply different billing schedules to different orders This gives you a flexible billing schedule based on different circumstances or deals Customizable System Setup your system based on default values or customize your system System setup allows you to modify printed values on customer documents such as invoices checkout sheets and reports Modify system values throughout the system to fit your specific business needs Customizable Screens Within RTPro many screens display data in a grid listing All grid listings can modify per workstation Columns on the grid can be expanded or shrunk dragged and dropped The design of the grid listing will be saved per workstation This 1s great for designing listings which are appropriate for each user s job description Security Security can be set on a profile level and linked to users User s security can also be set at an individual user level Security gates are at module many functions and field levels Examples of security would be adding customers editing and deleting records canceling i
262. d the rental cost of them followed by the cost of all the Cables and their rental cost The m Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc two subtotals would add together for the total cost of the order As with the Department you may also conduct your physical inventory counts by Category see Start the Physical Inventory Process later in this chapter If equipment is associated with a Category you may type Category code or choose it from Rental Category Lookup list by clicking drop down arrow Equipment Code This is a required field and should be unique and up to 10 alphanumeric characters This Equipment Code identifies each type of equipment in system and used as the first sort order for many of the screens grid listings and reports in application Much thought should be considered when designing the equipment code table Before beginning to input rental equipment it is recommended you review your shop s price catalogue inventory list or similar report and equipment codes assigned to all types of equipment in inventory This way you can assure most of the equipment in inventory will be assigned a code and will aide in grouping same items together Grouping similar types together is useful to quickly finding the desired code when conducting a search for review or input whether on a report or a screen For example you may give all of the lighting equipment a code range between 20000 and 30000 while all of camera equipment is given numb
263. d to title the Kit As several kits may be similar it is suggested that the description be used is a way to tell one kit from another Save Price EU Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc When clicking on Save Price then the pricing associated to the line items of the kit will be used when the kit is ordered If the Save Price is not checked the pricing from the Stock table will be used for the pricing Location If your company is setup as multi location you can specify a kit to a specific location The kit will only be accessible for users with access to the location Sort Order By choosing different numbers in Sort Order field within Sales Order Screen sales kits will stand across the order list respectively Sales Kit Detail To add or make changes to the list of stocks that makes up a Sales Kit double click on the Sales Kit Code This will take you to the Sales Kit Detail screen From this grid you can add delete and edit the Stock Codes you want to use to make up the package Note Stock items can be added into Kit detail list using Drag amp Drop feature Press F3 button to open Sales Stock Tree Note For larger kits it is easier to add a kit from Sales Order Screen in Order Processing module rather than Sales Kit Detail Screen You may create a dummy order and add items to it and save it as a Sales kit Sales Availability Sales Availability checks the available quantity on hand as well as current and
264. data from the right click menu Note When a new Invoice is created program automatically brings in the next Cycle Subrental Po Invoice Plan An Invoice Plan allows you to setup the projected cost of each subrental week a vendor will be charging your shop This helps with forecasting and accruing cost When the user selects Invoice Plan on the Subrental Po List screen using right click menu Subrental PO Invoice Plan screen will show up The user will be able to add the Invoice Plan manually into the system or to have RTPro create the invoice plan using Create button When clicking on the a screen will come up to allow adding an invoice plan cycle If there is an invoice plan program checks Invoice Plan column in Subrental PO List screen Note At the time the End Usage Date for an Order is increased and the order has Subrental and the POs have Invoice Plan then program adds additional lines to the PO Invoice Plan to cover the entire usage date period CREATE button When the invoice plan is created it creates weekly cycles 7 days each for the period of the entire range of the subrental vendor dates For the below example the line item have vendor dates ranging from 06 25 09 08 05 09 So there would be 6 cycles Note If the order header has a billing schedule program prompts Default in the invoice plan cycles from Orders Billing Schedule If Yes then program makes the Cycles and dates to be equal to the billing schedule cyc
265. de This field 1s required and must be unique across all spaces Description Space description can be entered here Space Type This is the type of space and can be entered or selected from the table Studio would be an example of space type Notes Additional notes can be written here Hourly Rate This is the hourly rate the space will receive Day Rate This is the day rate the space will receive Weekend Hourly Rate This is the weekend hourly rate the space will receive Weekend Day Rate This is the weekend day rate the space will receive Color When adding a new schedule for a space this color will be used as default color Note User can change the color manually while adding a new schedule Location If your company using multi location features then location can be selected here Space Type Table This 1s a list of all the different space types The table consists of Code and Description This table is used to determine the type of space on space scheduling screen Scheduling Employee Scheduling Through the Labor Scheduling screen employee time scheduling can be entered in against an order Select Employee Scheduling under Scheduling menu from Labor Space module or press scheduling icon in the Order Processing Screen toolbar As soon as users select either Labor or Space calendar screen will be opened Calendar starts at Quote Date Note If this screen is selected form Labor Space module program displays the
266. default color Note User can change the color manually while adding a new schedule Billable Select this option if the labor schedule should be billed when the order is being billed Billable Type The type of billing that will be charged against an order should be selected here Occupation Labors occupation can be selected from the table Rate This is the rate that program charges customers on the non weekend working days Week Rates Users can change the Rates amp Hours Days for weekday and weekend Billable Amount Explained at the end of this document Taxable If checked program charges the tax The tax type can be set from the Order level Note When a new Labor schedule is added program default in the value of Taxable from the System Setup GL Account This field is required for the clients that are using Account Receivable module embedded inside RTPro It can be entered or selected from the General Ledger Lookup Note When a new Labor schedule is added program brings the GL Account value from the System Setup Notes Area Additional notes can be typed here This could be the description of job that employee should be done or whatever you want Note When the order is billed for the selected employee schedule program shows the invoice number and its created date on the top right side of the Labor Scheduling Detail dialog box otherwise this information is invisible Filtering area This section contains some fil
267. djusted Note If you intend to select a cycle from the list as next billing schedule cycle select the desired cycle and right click choose Mark this Cycle as the Next Cycle to Bill ig Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note Users should never leave the Stop Loop blank If for a specified Cycle billing should stop then you need to set the Stop Loop to Stop In this case you can leave the Cycle blank otherwise you need to set the Stop Loop to Loop In this case you need to fill in the value of Cycle If you set the Stop Loop to Loop and Cycle to 1 it means that after the last Cycle is billed program goes loops back to cycle 1 Attachment List 1 This option allows files to be attached to an order for example a picture a signed agreement or perhaps a certificate of insurance document The Attachment List screen consists of three parts Scan File which allows you to attach files using scanner Browse File section and Attachment list that shows the attached files Attached files can be opened or deleted using right click menu Note To attach files easier this screen allows using drag and dropping feature It also can be used to attach multiple files at once Note When there is a document attachment program displays Attachment List icon as red Note This screen is also accessible through the Production Entry Screen Attachment List RTPro Demo Company Order 530541 Attachment List A Scan File
268. dor s barcodes history of the subrental barcodes can be viewed Subrental barcoded items can be filtered by entering criteria Note Returned items are shown in white and Not Returned as green Add Noncoded Items a For some types of equipment it may not be practical or physically possible to attach a barcode to each piece Enter these items as non Barcoded items Valuable inventory information can still be maintained including location and purchase information for each group of Noncoded items The Availability Order Processing Repair and Retirement features will still track the status of non Barcoded items The biggest difference between Barcoded and non Barcoded items is that with Barcoded items the status of each individual item can be tracked With non Barcoded items the status can be tracked but items cannot be distinguished from each other since there is no specific identification number for each noncoded item To add non Barcoded items from the Inventory Menu select the Rental menu and select Add Non Barcoded Items or click on the Add Non Barcoded Items icon You will come to the Add Rental Non Barcoded Items screen o Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc NOTES BEFORE STARTING Although the only required field is the Equipment Code field it is recommended to enter as much information as possible In addition to having the historical reference the information can serve as a sort for several screens grids and re
269. e Biling Contact Customer Contact y Bill Cont Info Name Job Title Phone Fax Ship Method Return Method o y Payment Type Tax Type Bill Type NO Charge y Salesperson y Daily Weekly Days Per Week 1 Terms N30 y Production Type REST Project o z Job Component je y Customer Notes Inventory e y Print Notes Y Transfer to 0 24 Insert Created 2006 06 25 10 37 27 EM By uU Revised Order Status Empty Billing Status NotBilled Last Invoicett Last Billed Range 1 Last Billed Amount Save Order by clicking on z button CON Handling Orders O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Create New Production From Main Menu select Order Processing Module Order Processing Click on button in front of Pr to create new arent Production production Pr 4 2 O On production screen fill Production Code Billing Name and Production Type Production Title Prod lon Description Billing Hame Jageph An y Production Type FEST Shipping Hame Save Record by clicking on y button Order Equipment Click on R in Or Section for Rent or S for Sales In Rental Order Screen Click on the pick list icon Select a Category and Click on Refresh button or press F2 key You may choose department and Department equipment ranges too Equipment Y Enter quantities Click on F3 Update Order Repeat this process again for other categories ES Handling Orders O
270. e 206 Savine Printer SOUT SS annee nr tds e te ada as cds anda needa 206 e A 206 PEREBO FCO e LOAD Sia dd A iia 206 Crystal Repor S AAA AA AA AAA AAA AAA Sarna eae 206 HAV ETITORY RE DOM rasa 207 ACCESS OIV VISE REDOUTE A retarde E dodo editor 207 ACCESO SCG REO Eta 208 A pies SR SR RC ni de di die 209 Rental EQUIDMENT PICS E Re net ete tain een 210 Renta INVENCOLY REDON me bread ta aaa 212 RENTAL ANVENTOLYVOUE REDONNER c 213 Inventory Work See a manne M lotir desdites etre aie 214 Current ln RDA Repo ne nains ter don mi noie 215 Repa REDO einer hide idee AAA ete tnt re tes net 216 Retred INVENTORES NN tn a 217 Sales KIT REDON sn near a AA Arde 218 A tne eee Cree 218 SES REOMO SP REDON ER A Dern death res des nee es oie setuid anise ia dE ne ten 219 SOLOS BackKOrder RED OM rare ane ae dent 220 SUIS ON FIO REDON Ent td tn De oi Ces m0 Can 221 Sales Inventory MANS ACUO e a Sand den den area eee ee 222 Curent INVENTON das aaa 223 order Process NE REDON S ne RE RS hey na Nat 224 Quote Reservation Order REDON rien TEA 224 Orders Expected to Return REDON ris te tou ones 225 Pastaue Orders REDON oa 225 Oaer SAUS ReDO renta Oo CAD RES 226 EGC SIDING US REDON 1d eee entend non dada A 227 LOTE REUS REDOT erase adult cde antigo io 228 BATEO PRIN CPUW ISE AAA A AA AAA AE AAA AA AA AA 229 BOTE PFIO REU L dto 231 BOTE PING CUOCC SREE aia aida 231 BATEN Checkout MEA AR A AAA AAA AAA 232 CURE Renta REDO En bonne caen aes ss avo aie ino a 232 Curr
271. e Restore Non Barcoded Items screen The system will prompt for the equipment code location and quantity of the restore Note Another way is to bring up the retired history list and right click on a selected noncoded item Select the option to restore History ME JE By clicking on History icon Rental Inventory History screen will appear On this screen the Order number Production Date Out Date In and other information about the retired Barcoded item can be seen On the top of the page the Barcocde number and Equipment code is observable List View Retired Inventory screen will cover equipment that has been retired By pressing Refresh button at the top right side of screen all the retired equipment can be seen as a list You can filter this list to see the desired retired equipment E Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note Right clicking on any records in this list the Barcoded or Non coded items can be restored to the live area by selecting Restore option Repairs Sometimes you need to send some of your rental equipment for repair For managing this task you can go to Repair section In this part the system will let users add a new ticket and insert equipment that must go for repair to 1t Any equipment that you want to send for repair must be in a ticket Repair Ticket List For viewing all tickets and the information of them click on Refresh button or press F2 There are some filtering criteria to filt
272. e Vendor code or use the dropdown arrow and choose a vendor from the Vendor Lookup for this transaction ES Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc PO Enter the Purchase Order number for this transaction Notes Any additional information concerning this transaction may be entered here Create Date The system will default the date as you enter transactions or you may override by entering a date or using the drop down calendar Created By The person who logged into RTPro will be defaulted to this field As with other locations throughout the program the Created By is for reference and cannot override Location This field represents the place of each sales item Price The Price field is the list price of the product Note Press F3 or click on Update button to confirm data and the system will post the records to the database The screen will not close out and additional entries can be continued to be entered Note Pressing F10 key or clicking Update and Exit will save data and close the screen Unprocessed Sales Transactions Within RTPro the system can be setup to allow shipping more sales items then owned However RTPro performs FIFO First in first out logic to deplete inventory from purchases adjustments and incoming transfers The unprocessed sales transactions is a list of items which cannot be FIFO s out because not enough 1s owned These records should be reviewed before any monthend closing process is done If
273. e grid Work Days Only If working days are selected for an employee through the employee detail screen by checking this option program displays the working days in the grid with lighter color Work Time Only If working time is set for an employee through the employee detail screen by checking this option program displays the work time period for only the working days with lighter color Time As Clock If checked program changes numeric times to the clock symbol Year All Day Events Only Program displays those schedules that are marked as All day event in the Labor Space Scheduling Detail dialog box Misc Default View The default view for labor Space scheduling screen can be set here Users can select to see this screen by day week month time grid and year Labor Space Navigator W i This option will be helpful when we have more than one labor space in the grid By pressing or program can fit fewer or more labors spaces in the grid Find this option at the bottom of Labor Space Scheduling screen Time Ruler Adjustment ES Labor Space Scheduling 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Users can adjust the time interval within labor space scheduling grid Right click on the Time Ruler on the left side of the grid and select one of the menu items 7 3 a 60 Minutes M 30 Minutes 15 Minutes O ig Minutes 5 6 Minutes 5 Minutes Note Time Ruler is only available when 1Day vi
274. e maintenance section Enter in a location only if the parent is limited to a specific location Note Location field is available if Use multi location feature is set in Setup Screen Production Type This 1s the default production type when adding new productions to this parent Choose the type of production from Lookup table Parent Name This is the name of the parent company This field is required Parent Address These fields are the default address when adding a new production to this parent Phone Enter phone number of the parent company here Fax Enter fax number of the parent company here Email Enter email address to contacting the parent company here Shipping Name and Address These fields are the default shipment name and address when adding new production to this parent AR combined EN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Only applies if the Accounts Receivable module is used If statements are to print across a parent and not necessarily a production then the box should be checked Signed Terms amp Conditions This is a reference to use if the parent company has a signed document on file Notes Es Any additional notes can be added to the parent If parent has notes on file then a red box will appear on right of screen showing there is a note The parent screen displays additional information Information displayed is the Month to Date Revenue Year to Date Revenue and Cumulative Revenue
275. e report of items purchased across all POs MWO If Major Work Order number is used for purchasing equipment type the number directly in this field in order to filter the report Vendor To see the items that are purchased from the particular vendor select a vendor from lookup the table Leave this blank to show items purchased from all vendors Location If you use multi location features the inventory can be filtered to the specific location aa Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Rental Inventory Report Date Time 2006 06 139 59 524M Format Summar Description Quantity Quantity Barcoded Noncoded Wok a A A _ _ eB o Qe E ARRI 575 1200 ELECTRONIC BALLAD 00225 ARRI 125W ELECTRONIC BALLAST AAA A 00230 ARRI125 200 DC ELECTRONIC BALLAST 1 gt 0 00250 JARI 2500 MAGNETIC BALLAST w 0 Rental Inventory out Report This Report lists all the items that are out on orders as of a particular date Barcoded items CE Rental Inventory Out Report e As Of Date fio 2011 are itemized and Noncoded items are Ordes By summarized In addition to order information Department A Pre the Purchase Date and Purchase Price are also Category displayed Equpment l e ode Filter Options Range Department Shows only the equipment ae belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments
276. e screen The Setup option allows selecting a different printer if your shop is setup with multiple sharable printers User can specify number of copies and 1f the copies should be collated or duplex Not all printers will handle the collating feature Note Within RTPro when previewing a report select Send the Report button the program automatically opens a dialog and asks for the attachment PDF name From the PO Module when emailing the Inventory PO or Subrental PO the program defaults the attachment file name with the PO and Subrental PO The user can still modify the attachment name if needed Entering A Code On the various screens through the application the system will ask the user to enter a specific code For example Customer Code Equipment Code Sales Stock Code Tax Code etc The code can be entered or selected from the drop down Multiple Selections In many cases in RTPro you may select multiple records The Select List screen is divided into two sections Left window displays stored records in RTPro and the right one displays selected records Use gt button to select a record and gt gt button to select all records For easier selection drag and drop feature can be used for both sides Note On the Multiple Selection lookups user can select certain additional columns to add to the displayed columns To access the list right click anywhere on the grid and select Column Settings 0 PORCELAIN
277. e terms default over when a new invoice is created To setup Terms refer to Terms list in file maintenance menu Note At the bottom of the production entry screen the creation date created by last revised date last revised by and the last activity date is noted The last activity date is updated when a new order is created and when invoices are created Current PO Users can enter in a PO in this field This PO will default over to new orders Production Contact Screen This screen will list the contact information of persons who are responsible for the production Select the screen under Setup List menu from Production Entry Screen Attachment List 1 This option allows files to be attached to an order for example a picture a signed agreement or perhaps a certificate of insurance document The Attachment List screen consists of three parts Scan File which allows you to attach files using scanner Browse File section and Attachment list that shows the attached files Attached files can be opened or deleted using right click menu Note To attach files easier this screen allows using drag and dropping feature It also can be used to attach multiple files at once Note This screen is also accessible through the Order Header Screen Note When there is a document attachment program displays Attachment List icon as red CIS Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Vendor V Vendor 1s the person or company that items are pu
278. e when a quote is printed in Detail Using this option will print sales prices of each item but if it is not selected the sales line item prices will not be printed Print Sales Discount Check marking will print the sales discounts calculated on the quote Print Total Replacement Price This option will print total replacement price for rented equipment Print Shipping Charges If the box is checked program includes the Shipping information on the report sheet The checkbox will be enabled only when Rentals Only Current Weekly Price 1s selected Print Subrental Vendor If the quote has subrentals checking this option will print the vendor Print Weekly Rental Checking this will print the calculated weekly total on report Print Kit Header Checking this option will print header of kits 1f kits were added to rental Use Billing Schedule Checking this option prints billing schedule calculations if a billing schedule is attached to the order Do not print 0 00 items If checked program will not print items with Extended Price equal to zero Print Days Weeks If checked program prints the value of days weeks for rentals in printout sheet Pull List Pull list is intended to be given to the worker who will pull the equipment for the order This report will list equipment according to ordered quantity the quantity of pulled equipments and the remaining items that need to be pulled You can choose to print Rental Only Sales
279. e you information for all the choices available in that field Following is a brief synopsis of the available reports Saving Printer Settings Printers and settings can be saved for each report separately To do this click on the PJ button caption of the report options dialog You can see this button in each report menu After saving the printer s settings the report will print to the destination printer the report setup screen will not be prompted At any point you may disable enable the report setup screen File Menu Print Barcode Labels You can print Barcode labels from the file menu Enter the barcode number and number of prints you want for each barcode You also can choose a range of barcodes to print by selecting the Range tab at top of the Barcode label print screen and enter the desired range and count of each barcode to print Note If the Fixed Barcode Size is checked then the program will print barcodes with leading zeros after the prefix For example 1f the Prefix is 40 and barcode size is fixed with size 8 and user is printing from 200 to 205 then the program will print 40000200 40000201 40000202 40000203 40000204 40000205 barcodes Crystal Reports There is an option in the system that can run reports on crystal reports With this feature you can customize your reports Each report can have a designated if the report file is registered and crystal report is installed on the user s computer then a customi
280. ea When it is checked program will bring the closed records to the list C Inventory Purchase Order Screen RTPro Demo Company File Search Wew Record Help i O Complete Show Al E A Y al Y Le O Mot Complete pa Dae y Description Location Wendor nange Include Closed M Create By gt Ca Refresh F2 Note Double clicking on the desired purchase order will display a list of items ordered in this PO through the Inventory Purchase Order Detail screen Note If the values of the Ordered Received and Posted columns are all the same a yellow color shows the PO is complete Duplicate an Inventory PO There is ability in the Inventory PO listing right click menu that allows user to duplicate an Inventory PO When this option is used program duplicates the Po header Rental Sales and Misc sections ose Description EAU ES Duplicate an Inventory PO Print Grid Colts Save Grid to d teset Grid Settings to Default Note The quantity received quantity posted and Approved by will not be duplicated Adding new Inventory purchase Order To add a new inventory purchase order click on a button in Inventory Purchase Order Screen In the opened screen fill in the purchase order information and click on x button to save it Inventory Purchase Order Detail z a When you double click on a PO through the Inventory Purchase Order Scr
281. eaks out by each production By Equipment amp Order This report is an estimate of revenue It does not pull from billing It pulls from the rental order entry level If the usage begin date on the order header is within the date range specified then it is included in the report This report separates out by Equipment code and breaks out each order El Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Filter Options Parent Select parent to limit report to show only productions for selected parent Leave this option blank to show results for all parents Production Select production to limit report to show only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show results for all productions Department Select department to limit report to show only items for this department Leave this option blank to show results for all departments Category Select category to limit report to show only items for this category Leave this option blank to show results for all categories Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Date Range To filter report results to show only record
282. ecking this item will print the Subrental Internal Notes a Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Kit Header If kits are added to rental items checking this option will print header of kits Exchange Sheet When exchange items exist in the rental list Exchange sheet report will print the description of exchanged items like the Old Barcode and the new one after exchanging Here an option is available to print the report over the particular date time intervals Swap Sheet A Swap Sheet report will print the description of swapped items A swap is when a customer is supposed to return barcoded item for a specific order and returns a barcode of the same equipment code on another order The user can swap the barcodes so the system switches the barcodes between the orders so the return can happen An option is available to print the swaps over the particular date time intervals Return List The return list is intended to be given to a worker who would receive or check in returned equipment for an order The report will list the equipment according to sub rented quantity the quantity of checked out and checked in items and quantity of items that are still out and also a column embedded in the report for the worker to write how many items returned You have an option to choose to print Rentals or Sub rentals by vendor Rentals excluding subrentals If selected program excludes subrental records from the rentals while print
283. ect Inventory Records See Inventory Items and Rental Inventory Screen earlier in this chapter Note The Rental Availability Screen can also be accessed from Rental Order Screen see Chapter 6 Rental Order Screen Show Other Locations If it is checked the program shows the rental availability on a floating display for all locations if system is setup for multiple locations If it 1s not checked program only calculates and shows the availability of items for current location Calendar When the equipment code is entered the calendar immediately populates with the quantity of items available for each day of the next nine weeks This figure represents the total number of items owned minus the number of items reserved ordered but not shipped and shipped but not returned see Chapter Six Order Types Red negative numbers indicates shortages Note Items on quotes are not calculated into the displayed figure except when checking availability from the quote However they summarized on the Rental Availability Detail Screen see below Pull Date Ship Date Button The figures displayed for each day of the calendar can be based on either the date the equipment was or scheduled to be pulled for an order or the date it was or scheduled to be shipped At the bottom of the calendar radio buttons will read Pull Date or Ship Date Displayed is the mode the calendar 1s in Clicking on this button will toggle between the two This can be useful
284. ect the currency to print values for it Example Rental Tracker Pro Rental Inventory Detail Statistics Report Date Time 3 20 20121 11 06PM Page 1 of 7 Date Range 1 1 2010 4390 2012 Equip Description pl Replac Extended RentalDay TotalDays GHty Wks ListPrice Fan mien pose Net res Code Cost ReplacCost Available CheckOut Billed PerUnit Revenue coro ra arar re seas pa DI O AE 2 000 009 EEE eee NE JC hop O O A RS seo ae a A ig2GOTHG GatiePlasirence 10100 stoo oo 810 100 00 Breo 2 28a 1000 513 63 513 88 a IS a O IL 3364 100 00 5 364 15 23986 585 2881 s1000 Si06 00000 saoo sisp0000 133 am es pp A OT B EEE idly Pear Cactu 81 15 5100 00 5611537 50148 1677 51 St000 51 827 40 53 58 51827 40 3 34 SHEAGAVE agave 2800 510000 526000 2080 21 sl 51000 Se sao steama 05 KAlpl 86 49612 000 0061 037 853 6 65448 12955 718 5320 00 5260 20795 5113 528 000 00 5232207 95 18 93 MT 200V F Bates To M Camlock 24 02 100 auf 32 402 44 18869 32440 1028 10 00 EE 00 30 D0 318 00 171 92 Description of columns ENS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Average Quantity Owned This is the average quantity owned within the date range specified The reason why it 1s average is items could have been purchase mid way in the date range an item could have been retired mid way Replacement Cost This is the unit cost of the equipment item The cost
285. ed list price in a vendor s catalogue Alternatively maintain your own pricing system by marking up the cost This price will default to the quote to calculate charges for the customer Measure DS Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Enter a value here for products that are selling by a measure e g each dozen pound etc Taxable Check this box if sales tax should charge when this product 1s being sold If checkmarked as taxable the tax rate will calculate based upon the setup on the order Restocking Check this box if a restocking fee will be charged if the product is returned Restocking If your shop s transaction rule is based on charging customers a restocking fee this field keeps a percentage of the price that customer will be charged when returning this item The restocking can also be setup at the customer level Weight Enter the weight of the stock item On the Value Sheet RTPro calculates the weight of all of the items and provides the total weight of the order Inventory Check this box if this is a tangible product that you wish to track its quantities For a product that has no inventory such as Labor Charges leave the box blank Quantity on Hand The quantity of the product that the system currently shows in stock will be displayed here Reorder Point Because of such factors as minimum purchase requirements delivery time and activity for a product you may want to keep a certain quantity on the she
286. ed from one location to another then the current location will change Purchase Date The system date is defaulted but it can be overridden by entering a date or using the calendar dropdown When the actual purchase date is unknown the date may be left blank Purchase Amount Enter the dollar amount used to purchase this equipment Purchase Order Number PO Enter the purchase order number used to purchase this item MWO Major Work Order is the number that is used for purchasing this equipment Vendor Enter the Vendor Code or use the drop down arrow and choose a Vendor from the Vendor Lookup screen for the vendor from whom the item was purchased Manufacturer Enter the name of the company that manufactured the item Warranty If this item has a warranty enter warranty here CS Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Warranty Date If this item has a warranty enter warranty expire date here Model Enter any information about the model number or the description here Storage Location This is information about where this item will be stored in store e g Shelf box and warehouse section Owner The owner is a company or individual which houses their inventory in your warehouse It is a consignment owner RTPro will track the usage and revenue against the owner Select the owner of equipment from Owner Lookup table To use the Owner feature refer to System Setup section Comments Use this note area to record any usefu
287. eekly price of 1 200 00 that is the price the customer would be charged whether he rented the equipment for one day or seven days Replacement Cost Rental Tracker allows you to keep the current prices of each equipment type This 1s not the price of any individual piece of equipment that has been purchased but rather the price that it would cost to replace the equipment if it had to be replaced today The Replacement Cost field is the current market purchase price Replacement Price The Replacement Price field is essentially the list price of the equipment This information might come from the suggested list price in a vendor s catalogue Alternatively maintain your own pricing system by marking up the replacement cost This is the default price you would charge a customer if the item is lost Many reports and functions are using replacement cost and price although it 1s not required to maintain their values By entering and maintaining this information you can save time by not having to look up the prices each time they are needed For example RTPro uses the Replacement Price to determine the value of an order a useful tool for determining insurance needs or when a piece of equipment is missing from an order an invoice can be generated using the Replacement Price If your company is multi location or multi currency you you will see a list of prices for each location and prices for the Daily Weekly Replacement cost and Replacement Pr
288. een the Inventory Purchase Order Detail screen will open There are several fields which can be entered for the specific Inventory PO The screen also contains three grids the above grid is for ordering the Rental items in the ES Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc middle 1s dedicated for Sales items and the bottom grid 1s used for Misc items To add equipment to a PO enter the code or select by clicking on the drop down enter the quantity to order list price discount and the GL account To add sales items add the stock or select by clicking on the drop down enter in the quantity list price discount and the GL account An inventory PO cannot be added into the system with blank Vendor Program does not allow the Vendor for an Inventory PO record to be changed 1f there are any invoices or any items are received or posted for that PO Note When users press the Company Address button program automatically fills in the Shipping information based on the Location selected on lookup If the company is not multi location program brings the information from system setup If the Shipping Address already has value program asks Do you want to modify the shipping information and if user selects Yes then the address will be replaced When Production Address is pressed program opens a lookup to select the Address to be copied to the Shipping Address CE Inventory Purchase Order Detail RTPro Demo Company
289. een This information includes order creation date user create by the order revised date user who revised the order status billing status last invoice last billing dates and last invoice billed amount Move to Restore from History It is possible to move an order to history This type of order will not be shown in active order list To move order to history select Move to history from History menu through the Order Header screen If an order is in history the order can be restored This option is only available from the History module In some cases it is impossible to move an order to history For example Within an order some items are still out and not returned yet The order is not completely billed ES Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note If you insist on moving a not billed order to History from Order Header Screen set Bill Type to Stop All Billing Move Order to a different Production You can move an order to a different production This may be useful if you have created an order in a wrong production This function is helpful when you have duplicated an existing order and need to move it to a new production To move an order in Order Header Screen click on Move Order to a different Production from Move menu Order Billing Schedule This is the Billing Schedule function RTPro is designed to create an invoice for billable rental items on a weekly basis Variations to standard weekly i
290. een then the top grid on the Rental Check in Screen will be populated Note The batch download option is not available from the Rental Check in Screen In Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc B x File Action Search Yiew Help L saves ee f Show Only Orders with tem Out Include only Orders C Show Al Orders having this Equipment Ca Refresh F2 of Include All F3 fate Checkin Screen F10 Project Job Component E 3465 12 14 2006 642 2008 Part Ret Main Grip Pkg E 3300 1142312006 6 22005 Palit het Studio Ltg Package M 4164 12 13 2006 123144005 Shipped 4 EIND FLO E 4166 12 13 2006 11 2006 Shipped 420 MIZAR O 4167 12 13 2006 1223142008 Shipped GRIP STANDS F 4281 12 18 2008 6 2 2008 Shipped Costruction Bags Duration a 4873 1 16 2007 12 23 2008 Shpped 1K BAMBINO S E 5418 232007 7 10 2008 Shioped STAGE ROLLOVER 5432 1 31 2007 7 10 2008 Shioped MAIN Le STAGE G E 5433 1 31 2007 7 10 2008 Shpped MAIN Lx STAGE H E 7291 11 1 2007 12 31 2008 Shpped 4 Generators 1700 AMP 8091 11 10 2006 1 13 2008 Shioped FKG TRE 122 TEMPLATE COPY ONLY E 9003 5 4 2007 7 11 2008 PaitRet MAIN Lx TRUCK PACKAGE 10735 6 12 2007 7 11 2008 Shipped MAIN Lx CONSTRUCTION POWER 42 ae Order Processing Reports These reports are available from Report menu of Order Processing Screen Quick List This report will list all the equipment ordered for the selected order Quote She
291. ek Enter changes and click Ok All highlighted rows will update Note Users can unlock lock the vendor side and unlock lock the customer side Note If Use Vendor Defaults is checked when the Vendor is changed the value of Vendor Daily Weekly Vendor Discount Vendor DPW fields are copied from the selected vendor w Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Sales Order Sales Order Screen Within the Sales Order Screen sales stock items can be ordered prices can be edited and reviewed and a quote can be printed The Sales Order Screen 1s divided into 4 sections 1 Sales Stock Tree 2 Sales Items Order List 3 Sales Miscellaneous Items 4 Summary and Totals Ble Goto Heb Po sd ut gt OG Pa Qe OP Semen Cole Cee E ES ESE Seuche Code C Dex Socks Description Ordered 0154 08 DRUGS HEDROCORTISOME CREAM 20 E A Man Sales h __ jects BANDAGE CONFORM Sed WS an Soles Mera a ALCOHOL PROOU rice wichita iat eel nae Haci 100 k 1537 ALCOMO 305167 MEEDLES 31 x 1 1 2 kt PIDOCAALC 4750 SURGICAL MASI LOOPS kt 2300070514 55 AMAT ALCOHOL PREP PADS MED STERI nm 3608 ALCOHON h 3628 ALCOHO 55 20MB DO ALI k 504325 ALOOF k 5643098 ALC BAG BAGS VARIO BANDAGE ALL BA BETADINE BETAD 1000 AMP ACL 1000 3 GGENERATOR CAMERA CAR UMIT 247 TYPE 2 BETADINE 160 a ari
292. el items that have been checked out To cancel Barcoded items right click on them in upper list and select cancel checkout or select Cancel Barcoded from Cancel menu then scan or enter the barcode The cancel barcode prompt is highlighted in red at the bottom of screen Cancel Other Non Barcoded Sub Rented and Miscellaneous items To cancel non Barcoded items right click on item and choose Cancel Checkout Non Barcoded or select Non Barcode from Cancel menu to have mass cancel non Barcoded items in a list To cancel Subrented items select Non Barcoded from Cancel menu and check mark Subrental and press F2 or click on the Refresh button then enter quantity of items you want to cancel In the same way miscellaneous items can be canceled Other Important Checkout functions Changing Shipment Date of items 3 23 2012 ee By default the system uses the current system date to checkout items This date will mark items as out and customer will be billed based on this date Sometimes you may want to ship items later because you are waiting for other items to be checked out In such situations before beginning checkout process change checkout date at toolbar to the date that 1tems will ship Printing Checkout Sheet a A This icon prints Rental Checkout Contract Sheet In this report you can print Rentals Sales or both with no prices totals or all prices You can choose to print only checked out items in this section instead of
293. el of the scanner on the Date and Time settings Note After RF Login and if Sync Date Time with Server in RF Setting is checked program sync Date Time with RF Server automatically RF Setting In this page users can set the different connection parameters for connecting the scanner to RF Server M Use RF Scanner program has the ability to connect to a primary or Serveri Addr 10 10 10 10 1024 a secondary RF server With this feature 1f the first RF Server Addr server is not on line then the program will try to connect E le to the secondary RF server Sand Receive Timeout Sec Use RF Check this box if you want to use the Wireless features of RTPro Server1 Address The IP address of the computer that is running RF Server Application and scanner should connect to that Send Receive Timeout 23 Sac Auto hide Taskbar Server Port The communication between scanner and a RF Server will be established via this port The same port Mode Batch 1 172009 00 02 16 number should be set in RF Server application too Server2 Address The IP address of the second computer that is running RF Server Application and scanner should connect to that Note If scanner could not connect to first server try this second one Server2 Port The communication between scanner and RF Server will be established via this port The same port number should be set
294. elect Checkout Screen under Goto menu or simply press F7 See Checkout Process later in this chapter View Menu Sales Transaction Screen This screen will keep the sales transaction for the order Each type of transaction is separated by different a color Checkout Menu Ship Sales Sales stock can be shipped using Ship option Mass Checkout Screen This screen will help to checkout mass items which are ordered through the Sales Order Screen Select a desired stock number and click on Mass Ship from Checkout menu The screen will show the stock number and the quantity that should be shipped Enter in the quantity and press Enter After you have pressed Enter the next non shipped sales item will be displayed The last shipped stock number and the shipped quantity will display at the bottom of the screen Ship All The system can checkout all of them without choosing them one by one To ship all ordered items select ship all from the checkout menu Another way is to press the 22 from the Sales Order Entry screen the system will ask for a confirmation message Select Yes to ship all ordered items Drop Ship MN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc At times items may not be shipped from your warehouse but instead CEE x will be shipped to the customer directly from the vendor This is a drop shipment When drop shipping enter in the vendor and the D Vendo Quantity lo Select Vendor and Quantity to
295. em Windows 2000 2003 Server 2008 Server SQL Server Microsoft SQL Server 2000 2005 2008 Standard or Enterprise Edition Server Disk Space Requirements On average RTPro database requires about 1GB disk space to start with and it grows about 0 5GB each year If you are storing images of your equipment then you need to allocate an additional 1GB for images to the initial disk space If you use the Revision feature of RTPro you need to allocate another 1GB to the initial disk space If you have a training or test database on the same server then double the amount of disk space given above Call us at 888 595 8041 ext 1 1f you need further analysis of your system and disk requirements Installing and starting RTPro software Before installing RTPro make sure that you meet the system requirements listed in System requirements RTPro will perform the installation on the workstations via a remote connection RTPro will perform installation of the database via a remote connection Resources for learning RTPro software Use these resources to learn about RTPro quickly RTPro Help RTPro help is available on line when RTPro is running Click on the Help icon from the Main Menu to gain access to all the available topics for RTPro This could help with questions basic or advanced as the first source when you are looking for help with RTPro You can also press F1 key to access the help fie Introduction 2012 Rental Tracker In
296. ems from all categories Date Range Use these dates to filter results using the sell date of products You can leave each of these dates blank to include all from start or to the end Stock Range You can limit the range of stock displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending stock Leave these blank to show all stock You also can select multiple stock numbers To do this click on list icon in front of First Stock number and select each one you want to include in report Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print the value of the inventory for that currency only Example E Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Cost of Sales Billed Report Date Time 3 28 2012 10 09 04 PM Page 2 of 2 ee ee el AH A ee eee ee Price Pree ES DN E 670241 448 GELROLL REVENGE NewLline_______________ Gel Roll Pink 670241 448 __ GELROLL REVENGE Newline el Ral Bak 00 siae onf 5195 0 750 00 ses 00 osson 670208 380_____ GELROLL MODERNFA ABC Studios Gel Roll Pink 400 5125 00 5125 00 5500 00 S65 00 260 00 6702351185 MANTRT COUGARTO Jane Mamtenance Labor 200 310000 310000 520000 ses ool 3130 00 _670235 185 MAINTRT COUGARTO Abc____________________ Maintenance Labor_____ 1 00 575 00 57500 575
297. en a large amount of equipment exist in list which listing all of them may slowdown the application After applying appropriate filter press F2 or Refresh Button Sales Menu Sales Inventory mn Inventories of expendable supplies parts equipment held for resale or other items that are sold rather than rented are maintained in Sales For each type of sales inventory Sales Stock Number must be created From the Inventory Menu click on the Sales drop down and select Sales Inventory or click on the Sales Inventory icon in the toolbar This will take you to the Sales Inventory Screen where you may add edit or delete records for each of the sales types of inventory There are several filtering options in this page such as Department Category Stock Number and Description Adding a New Type of Sales Stock A Stock number is a unique number for each type of sales item in your shop The stock number can be up to a 10 character alphanumeric code Throughout the application the stock numbers are used as the primary sort order for many of the screens grid listings and reports Much thought should be considered when designing the stock numbers as this will aid in searching and identifying items in the system It is recommended that before you begin inputting sales inventory a current price catalogue inventory list or similar report be reviewed and Rental Tracker Stock Numbers be assigned to all types of sales items in inventory This method a
298. en will appear Batch Invoice Screen RTPro Demo Company Wik li loj x Ele Search Wew Help NS 2 9 29 Bio mer As of Date 12 27 2008 m ExchadeHolde PRIME M Loss 7 Restocking 11 1 Create Dratts 8 3 Confim rats 5 Stop Batch Production i Sales Damage G 2 Print Dr 2 Print Drafts E 4 Pink Invoices Dratt Order DR Invoice RES ACTES Job Tite In E screen choose as of date select a production 1f billing a single production and 1f you don t want to create invoice for hold orders checkmark Exclude Holds Choose the bill types to include in the calculations Press the Create Drafts button You will see a list of all created drafts Next the draft can be printed for review but this is not required If you wish to print drafts click Print Drafts The next step will be confirming the drafts into invoices Click on the Confirm Drafts box for each draft you wish to confirm into an invoice The Invoices can be printed Click on the Print Invoices button Once done the batch lie Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc will need to be stopped Click on the Stop Batch button Any drafts that are not confirmed into an invoice will be deleted Batch Invoice Print This option will print Invoices for the selected RIP LE production You can choose to print all the Print Option invoices listed in Batch Invoice Screen with Boi tapes ayes ics summary or Detail Y
299. ension of Label can be adjusted here Driving Direction This feature will open MapQuest com site for driving directions Subrental PO This report is the subrental PO which is issued for the sdubrentals There are various options The PO and Vendor are required Other options such as printing the Weekly Rental or Order header information are a coupld of the options EE Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Subrental PO Pull List This report would be a report that would be given to the drivers to pickup the items ordered PO The Po lookup shows only the POs used on the current Order Please note that selecting the PO is mandatory here Vendor The vendor lookup shows only the Vendors used on the current Order Select a vendor code Print Notes If it checked program will include purchase order notes in the print out Order Activity by Production This report lists all Checkout Check in Sales activity across a single Production It is useful for combining activities of a production with multiple orders into a single report To access this report user must first select a Production at the bottom of the Order Processing Screen Gantt chart for Open Orders A Gantt chart is a graphical representation of the duration of tasks against the progression of time A Gantt chart 1s a useful report for monitoring the orders progress of a production or series of productions This chart also facilitates to observe the activiti
300. ent Rentals Report Format 2 iia 233 CUNEN SUDEN TARADO ad 234 Scheduled SUbrentOl REDON terre a bind ete 235 PUTAS CON Clearer rie AAN da lee a DSc ot NO A 236 Rental ln TRANS TE REPON aid ais toes asses RS aia 236 Sales Transit Reports A AAA E Ale dore ete Mic uit 237 SOS OO SUMEN nds tes A ae ed me elite ie 237 Management Reports att A in 0 droit leon nan tn en die dt donne 238 Order Log Reports tan A A tete titles estate 238 INVOICE LOG REDON ns lets tee AAA AAA AAA RA tea 238 Production LOG REDON RSS a tr ta casita lath exces leh O AOA 239 DEDOSIE LOG ROO OIE a Se ee So 240 Rental Discount ReDo aeeie n im henri Le 240 Tax Liability Report Rental Sales Rate Break Down 241 Tax Liability Report Tax1 Tax2 Rate Break Down VV 242 Orders WIEN NOPUIChOSE OF CM roren onr T is 242 Ch ckout Check in Quantity ROO a idas 243 EXC OTON RC TRS Te an au le mee cor nay 244 USEF LOGIN TAS CONV screech stent tastiest chase de ion A ou ou de 245 INSUFAN CO EXPIFOS RED OLE cic ote RS EE dada 245 Orders Attached toa Purchase ONG Picasa cited 246 COSE SHECE BY PIOQUCEIONS usa dd taa 247 Rental Inventory Value REPO A E A es tie ia HSS 248 Sales Inventory Valle Repita 249 Rental Inventory Change REPORTA E oa ee 250 Sales Inventor Change REPO NAAA 251 GOST OF Sales Report IND cil 252 COSTOSOS Report BING ER TR ei 253 Inventory RECONCHIATION are Eds DS Dati dede io 254 Rentar Vento Sold Repol SES tices sik boat saan tay ions E E T 255 POS ACTOS O
301. ental orders Subrental Purchase Orders List screen In this screen you can observe a list of all subrental PO s After selecting Sub rental PO via Subrentals menu you will see a blank screen with several filtering options on top portion of the screen Filter the list by PO number Production Vendor or if your office 1s multi location on Location then press the F2 key You can see a list of closed PO s In the PO list you can mark PO as closed or open by right clicking on them and choosing Close PO or Open PO Here you can add a new purchase order or edit any existing record The Usage Begin and Usage End date for the first order on the PO will show on the Order Usage Begin Date and Order Usage End Date columns Double clicking on the order number in First Order column will send the user to the Order Processing Screen and program makes the order as Currently Working Order Note Closed PO s are distinguished with a gray color in this list Note If any of the PO is used in subrentals deleting PO is not possible ee zio E Subrental PO List RTPro Demo Company File Search View Action Help t a R 8 52 79120 Co seu Pa Production Vendo Location TORONTO Incude Closed M Ca Refresh F2 e e me ren CEE 1412 460007 200 6162010 E QUOTES TORONTO Open 1006 PSp001200 10 19 2007 1022 CIM011200 10 24 2007 23820 MASTERCARD OCTOBER 25 2 TORONTO
302. entire employee time schedule If this screen is selected form Order Processing Screen it can be filtered to display Active Displays only those records that are related to the selected order Other Orders Displays all records that are related to other orders with read only format Billed Displays only those records that are invoiced 307 Labor Space Scheduling 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Show All Displays all available records gu 30 go 30 10 30 Active 9 00am 10 00am Order 100147 Other Orders Billed Toolbar Buttons ET Dap Wy eek Month Time Grid ml Tear 1 Day This will bring all information that is set for a day of the calendar 7Week This will bring all information that is set for a week 31Month This will bring all information that is set for a month Time Grid This will bring all information that is set for a month and displays data hour by hour Year This will bring all information that is set for a year The scheduling screen consists of three parts 1 Setting area 2 Labor information area 3 Filtering area Setting area T Setting area contains six parts these parts are described as follows 1 Day All Day Events In Content Area If All day event is used for a labor space schedule by checking this option program displays the status of the record in the content area otherwise it shows all day events separately on the top of
303. entory again RTPro can restore the item from retirement along with its original information To restore a retired Barcoded item set the screen into editing mode click on the Action dropdown tab and select Restore Barcoded Items or click on the Restore Barcoded Items icon The system will prompt you to enter the barcode number of the item to restore Retire Noncoded Items i Click on the Action dropdown tab and select Retire Non Barcoded Items or click on the Retire Non Barcoded Items icon You will come to the Retire Non Barcoded Items screen Because unique records are not kept for non Barcoded items RTPro retires a quantity from the oldest group of non Barcoded items within a specified equipment code The Retired Non Barcoded Items screen will ask you for an Equipment Code Location and the quantity of non Barcoded items to be retired You must also enter a reason from the Retired Reason table see File Maintenance Chapter Like Barcoded items any comments about the retired Non barcoded items could be written in Retired Comments field If the information is correct press OK The system will confirm how many items have been retired When you click OK you will return to the Retired Inventory Screen Repeat the procedure 1f more non Barcoded items are to be retired Restore Noncoded Items Click on the Action dropdown tab and select Restore Non Barcoded Items or click on the Restore Non Barcoded Items icon You will come to th
304. er Location The location field can distinguish the ownership of the order The location field will be prompted if the multi location feature is set in System Setup To set this feature refer to the System Setup section in the Administration Module If setup for multi location this field is required It is the location the order belongs to To enter a location type in the location code or select the location from the drop down list Ts Quote Date This 1s the Quote creation date The default date is the system date Pull Date Pull date reflects the date that equipment is to be pulled out of inventory The default date is the system date ar Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Ship Date Ship date reflects the date that equipment will be shipped out of the warehouse The default is the pull date Return Date Return date reflects the date that equipment is expected to be returned to the warehouse The default date is blank This is a required field Week To save time Users can click on Week icon enter in the number of weeks and based on number of weeks and RTPro will calculate the return date Check in Date Check in Date is expected date that equipment will be checked in Usage Begin Date The Usage Begin date reflects the beginning of billing date This date will default over from the ship date Usage End Date The Usage End date reflects the expected end billing date This date will default over from the return
305. er The Salesperson will default over from the order to the invoice A revenue report by salesperson is available If the Require Salesperson on Order Header in System Setup 1s used this field will be required and user must select it to be able to save the order Daily Weekly When rentals are ordered they are calculated on a daily or weekly rate When selecting Daily Weekly the Rental Entry Screen will default over with the rental rate of the daily weekly price from the equipment table setup The Daily and Weekly can be changed for each item on the Rental Entry Screen Days per Week This is the number of days that the customer will be charged for a week The Days per Week will default over to the Rental Entry Screen Terms The Terms indicate the interval of payment that the invoice should be paid An example would be Net 15 Net 30 Terms are validated against the Terms table Production Type This field identifies the production type You can type the code or select it from list Project The purpose of this field 1s to link an order to a Project A project can span across orders which 1s linked to different productions An example of a Project would be the Winter Olympics If there is several production companies with orders for the Winter Olympics by designating the Winter Olympics as the Project all orders can be linked to this Project This would enable you to see all of the orders related to the Winter Olym
306. er tickets in this page The Repair Ticket List will only list those items that match the filtering criteria For filtering you must select one or more of these options and click on refresh button or press F2 You can use the Location Production Ticket Lock Status and Bill Status Order Create Date Begin End and Barcode fields for the filtering process When a user selects equipment program shows the Tickets containing this equipment Adding a new Ticket For adding a new Ticket after clicking on Add icon on Repair Ticket List you will be directed to the Repair Ticket Screen In this page the ticket information should be filled and after saving the ticket items can be inserted to this ticket Editing a Ticket For editing a ticket you must select the ticket on Repair Ticket List and click on Edit icon or double click on that ticket Fields can then be edited Ticket header contains this information Ticket Create Date This header information displays the creation date and the time for a ticket Location If the multi location feature is used you can select one of your locations for your ticket Repair PO Here you should enter the purchase order for this ticket If a purchase order is issued for the repair ticket enter it in here Authorized By Enter the name or click on drop down arrow and choose the one whom this ticket is authorized by The list of authorized persons comes from the salesperson table Produc
307. ers checkout item check in items and track and research items will be greatly reduced Automation provides greater accuracy and reporting of equipment utilization Software system A computerized system is used to track items with the use of barcodes or asset tags Hardware The equipment is used to input identification information into the software system Hardware includes scanning equipment bar code label printers labels and other asset tags Implementation Costs Costs of installing and training a new organization on automation Implementation costs include workflow analysis training and installation This phase is critical in implementing a successful data collection system Labor This is the initial investment in your organization to learn the new workflow process to increase efficiency in your business What is the Rate of Return on my investment To begin to estimate the rate of return on your investment you must first calculate the current cost of the tasks you plan to automate Then estimate the cost of the tasks under the proposed system Determine these numbers per year Next get an estimate on the costs of automation and subtract that from the cost of current tasks you plan to automate From here you can get the rate of return on your investment This 1s a high level cost justification and should analyze thoroughly to get an accurate cost justification Remember some costs based on this analysis could justify as sof
308. ers in range of 30001 to 40000 Alternatively all of the Microphones may have codes starting with the letter M It is not so important how group types together but once ranges are established layout 1s consistent and they can be maintained For example an Acme 2000 Watt Widget might group with all of the Acme equipment or it may easily be found with all of the other 2000 Watt Widgets It does not matter so much which way as it does to pick one layout method and stick with it It 1s also recommended that you leave gaps between Equipment Codes so there will be room to add new equipment codes within ranges Description This field is required and is the description of equipment The description can be up to 50 characters of all acceptable letters numbers and most symbols Because the equipment can also be searched by description great attention should also be given to being consistent with the description For example the Acme 2000 Watt Widget would be found with all of the other Acme equipment in which the description began with the word Acme However by changing the description to Widget Acme 2000 Watt it would be found with all of the other equipment types that began with the word Widget As with the Equipment Codes it does not matter so much which way as it does to pick one layout method and stick with it It 1s recommended when entering the descriptions to be consistent with upper and lower cases punc
309. es After duplicating Orders program will then display a grid to show Old Order number s New Order number s and Messages Users can click on a grid cell to go to the Order Header Screen of that Order E Duplicated Orders RTI ia Fie Search View Help MMMM a Y gt 2 o Old Order New Order 398000030 38001000 Order ts duplicated successfully 98000029 9001001 Order ts duplicated successfully 3980000 3800100 1 rental and 4 sales item s were not duplicated to the new order Message Print Selected Orders After selecting multiple orders user can right click anywhere on the grid and select Print Selected Orders from the menu then select any of the available reports _ Poo al Order Print Selected Orders Pull List Move Selected Orders To History Quote Sheet Contract Print Grid Ctl s Save Grid to Return List C C C Reset Grid Settings to Default gaini ns Rentals 148 ANT EAN PRA Conte 1 Program will then prints the chosen report for all the selected Orders Each individual report will be printed separately Multiple orders will not combine in one report using this method TN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Move Selected Orders To History In the Order Listing after user selects one or more orders and rights clicks on the grid user can select Move Selected Orders to History or Restore Selected Orders from History dd Sales 1 27 2010 2 36 00 PM PR ns PRE
310. es reservations and orders sales orders rental checkout subrentals and rental Check in This module allows the user to create parent production contact and order records When entering into the Order Processing Module the Order Processing Screen will appear Understanding the Rental Tracker Hierarchy Rental Tracker Pro operates on a three tiered hierarchy The first level of the hierarchy is the Parent Level The next level is the Production Level The third level is the Order Level Each parent company can have several productions Each production by itself can have several orders ABCD Studios Modern Family Production Order 12345 Order 87656 Order 98777 Order 36455 Description Description Description Description BackYard Scene Stage 11 Truck Package Lighting Package The Parent level is optional while the Production and Order levels are required The Parent level allows the user revenue generated by a parent company There is a fourth level which is optional This level is the Contact level and it is linked to Orders A contact is a person such as a best boy gaffer or lead man responsible for the rental items Orders can be retrieved across a contact There is the ability to look at all the orders the contact has been linked to A report of the revenue generated from a contact is also available Order Processing Screen Definitions of Common Functions Pa 4 You can edit Parents
311. es Stock table program may display a warning message that you need or order additional quantities for this stock item Order The Order number you are working with Last Stock The stock number of last shipped item Last Quantity The number of last shipped stock Stock The stock number of item that you want to ship Quantity The number of items that you want to ship with the entered code Fie Transaction Help Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Last Stock PALMSTOCK1 Last Quantity 2 i Stock Quantity Warning Reorder Point is Reached Please Order at least 6 of PALMSTOCK1 Mode RF 5 3 2006 02 53 47 ES Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Cancel Shipment You can cancel shipping of an item here Simply enter the Stock EsES Number and the quantity you want to Cancel and press OK Please note that canceling a shipment removes any record of the item ever Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt shipped If you want to keep the record of the shipment then you Last Stock PALMSTOCK2 need to return the shipment instead of canceling it If you are Est Quantity 2 canceling multiple stock the Last Stock shows the last stock that you successfully canceled the shipment for stock Order The Order Number you want to cancel the Sales Shipment Se Last Stock The stock number of last canceled item Last Quantity The quantity of last canceled stock et OK Stock The stock number of t
312. es of a parent Gantt chart is divided into two panels Left panel will show the specification of orders and right one will illustrate the graphical process based on time duration On this figure users can define a certain time period to see pulling periods Orders Quotes and Reservations if they are checked mark by user to view After observation full detail of Gantt report can be printed on a sheet Gantt Chart For Open Orders ry one File Search Help BE A gt Pulling Period Reservation wv Y a O Quote Order Parent v Start Date 3 26 2012 M Orders Location i M Quotes Production End Date 4 26 2012 Y 7 Reservations Refresh F2 PullDate Cal OrderNo Production Job Title Location Loss Not Enough Owned LOSA 193 COUGAR Main Package 13 26 2012 1 499 MISSION Main Package LOSA 3 22 2012 8 189 MIDDLE Main Package LOSA 3 7 2012 4 5 18 HAUNTING Billing Schedule LOSA 2 17 2012 2 500 CLASH2 Cable Package LOSA 3 24 2012 8 192 JACKJILL LOSA 3 24 2012 2 501 NEWLINE Grip LOSA 3 24 2012 amp d Mar 26 2012 Apr 02 2012 Apr 09 2012 a 7 MOI TU WE TH FR SA SU MOI TU wE TH FR SA SU MO TU WE TH FR SA SU Note Double clicking on each row will bring up the Order Header Screen that belongs to selected row and the detail of the order can be reviewed Gantt Chart for Equipment Availability Th
313. es stock belonging to Category this Department Leave this blank to show the stock from First Stock BS all departments Last Stock gt Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Chasis Date Bai a Category Create Date End l Li First Last Stock Choose stock numbers to show transactions for them You also can select multiple stock Location Currency x numbers To do this click on the list icon and select each one you want to include in the report Y DK X Cancel lit save w Create Date Begin End Select a date range to use for reporting This will only include transactions that happened between these dates in report Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only Currency If you are using multi currency features you can select currency values to show for the replacement cost and price Example EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Sales Inventory Transaction Report Date Time 3 27 2012 2 53 16 PM Page 1 of 1 Order By Description Date Interval 1 1 2011 3 27 2012 Stock Description saction saction Quantity Purchase SRE Create ss By ZOOLUMENS 2100 Lumens Projector urch 00 sto0o0 27102012 olapan 7 A EC Rain CASEI Case gt 11 28 2014 Purchase 5 00 5100 00 MOLE 11 28 2011 CINDYLA EE
314. es that are not fully paid in a listing If you do not see any records listed 1t indicates that this production does not have any unpaid invoices at this time Payment Date This is the date that the payment is applied to the system By default this date is the system date However you can change the date Let us say that you received a payment on Friday but you are too busy to apply it on Friday and on Monday morning you want to post the payment with Friday s date In this case you will backdate the Payment Date Note 1f you make a mistake in entering this date and apply the payment to invoices system does not allow you to change the date In this case you need to void the payment and enter a new payment Payment Type By default the system allows for various types of payment options You may select to add additional types of payment options in the lookup table For example Check or Cash Check No If the payment is made by check personal check or company check enter the check in this box GL Account Select a GL Account for Cash Received from General Ledger Lookup table This value automatically is inserted from the Default Payment GL from the system setup screen RTPro does not allow a single payment to distribute into more than one Payment GL Location If your company is multi location from Location Lookup table select the location where the payment is received Received Enter in the amount of the payment Notes He
315. ess will appear on the Quote Sheet Checkout Contract Sheet Quick List Pull List Return List Checkin Sheet Remaining Items Report Value Sheet Cost Sheet and the Invoice documents If your shop uses multiple location feature in RTPro the Company name and address can be setup at the location level The Phone and Fax Numbers This is your shop s phone and fax These fields will also print on the customer reports If your shop uses multiple location feature in RTPro the phone and fax can be setup at the location level Web Address If your company has a web address this field is allocated for your website The web address will also print on the customer reports Company Code Company code is a unique code for each company and is used by Rental Tracker to identify a customer Year Start and Month Start These dates are used for reports which reflect MTD YTD revenue and for the Sales summary report Last Month End Close This field is used to close out the last month so that records are locked in prior to the date entered No AR payments certain checkout checkin inventory additions cannot be back dated to a closed month Inventory cannot be added with a date prior to the last month end close Also Sale items cannot be shipped prior to the last month end close Password Expires in Days You can use this field to configure duration of a user login passwords expiration If you set it to zero your users password never expires Use Image C
316. essed from this module as well as the repair and retired management There is also a table for sales stock numbers and screens to add sales stock to inventory and check sales availability Finally you can conduct a physical inventory and update your prices with features from this module Rental Menu Equipment Table This table contains all the types of equipment your shop rents Equipment codes should be created for all the rental inventory equipment your company rents From the Rental menu select Equipment Table or click on the Equipment Table icon This will open Equipment Screen where you may add edit or delete records for any type of equipment in inventory To show a range of equipment in Equipment screen the listing can be filtered according to different levels such as Department Category Equipment Code etc This will be useful when a large amount of equipment exist in list which listing all of them may slowdown the application After applying appropriate filter press F2 or Refresh Button Through this screen equipment can be added or edited Rental Equipment Entry To add new equipment from the Equipment Screen click on the icon in the toolbar section then Rental Equipment Entry Screen will appear The definition of any equipment can be edited in this screen Note Value for General Ledger Account Department and Category fields should select from existing values Also new codes can be added to these tables From their
317. et Quote Sheet will print the rentals sales or both This report has several options to print such as Rentals Only Rentals Only Current Weekly Price Sales Only or Rentals and Sales and summary or detail A customized footer section can be printed at the end of the quote sheet To modify the footer section refer to the Administration system setup section Summary or Detail Summary will not print out the equipment line items instead 1t will just print out a totals recap Detail will print out the equipment line items Billing Schedule When selected program allows user to print the Billing Schedule Cycle Breakdown It 1s enabled only 1f there is a Billing Schedule record for an Order When Billing Schedule is selected all other user selection options will be disabled except the Quote Footer If the report 1s opened from the Reports Module Batch Mode then Billing Schedule option is always enabled Customized Output When this option is selected the customized rental order will print on the Rental Quote report Print Rental Line Item Prices This option 1s available when a quote 1s printed in Detail Using this option will print rental prices of each item but if it is not selected the rental line item prices will not be printed Print Rental Discount Check marking will print the rental discounts calculated on the quote Print Sales Line Item Prices MN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This option is availabl
318. et Footer Default checkout sheet footer can be selected here The program will default over checkout sheet footer when printing the checkout sheet Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Print Revision On Checkout Sheet If checked Program prints the Revision under Date and Time on the top of the Checkout sheet Separate Checkout Sheet by Department When this option is used the checkout sheets will separate items by the department Checkout Contact Required on Production When this option is marked in system setup checkout contact will be required when a new production 1s added The checkout contact is the customer contact that s responsible for the equipment The checkout contact will be printed on the various customer reports Checkout Contact Required on Order When this is checked checkout contact will be required when a new order is added The checkout contact is the customer contact that s responsible for the equipment Project Required on Order Header Screen By checking this option all orders must have a Project defined This option will force user to enter Project value before saving order header Default Quantity Ordered From Checkout Quantity If items could be checked out even if they were not ordered this option can be used to update the quantities ordered
319. ew is used Labor information area In this section users can add new schedules for the Labors against an order Select New Labor Schedule from right click menu The following screen appears CE Labor Scheduling Detail RTPro Demo Company a OI xj Invoice Order 25411 32618698 Employee vice victor Mendez 10 5 7011 Start time 10 5 2011 os 00 AM All day event o End time 10 8 2011 iso 4 Color EN W Billable Billable Type Hourly Hours 75h 30m Occupation TECH Technician Original Rate Hours Days Billable Weekday 20 00 20 00 64 1 280 00 Weekend 25 00 25 00 F 1 5 787 50 Billable Amount 1 567 50 e Taxable GL Account 1315xxx000505 Dep_Ppd Bob Deprado For setting up the system El Create Date 10 5 2011 4 07 00 PM Revised Date 10 5 2011 4 09 00 PM Create By LU Revised By U Close Delete Order This field is required and can be entered or selected from the Order List Lookup Employee This field is required and can be entered or selected from the Employee Table lookup ETS Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Start End Time The labor start and end of working time can be set here AIT day event It means an employee works for the entire day for a customer Working hours will be calculated based on the working hours that are defined in the Employee Detail screen Color When adding a new schedule for a labor this color will be used as a
320. formation by parent company The output should look something like the example Statement Date ozo As Of Date 10 2 2011 Parent Example RTI Studios Tarh er REN 12481 Tejas Court Statement Rancho Cucamonga CA 91739 10 10 2010 600 59 5 1 Page 1 Disney Studios 500 Buena Vista Buena Vista Ca 91233 USA DISNEY Transaction Amount Balance Forward 2 7 2010 Invoice 670070 4 11 2010 Invoice 670079 6 17 2010 Invoice 670063 6 17 2010 Invoice 670064 6 17 2010 Invoice 670068 6 21 2010 Invoice 670072 E 6 21 2010 Payment CHECK 800 0 980 681 49 6 21 2010 Payment CHECK 4350 0 5980331 49 6 28 2010 Payment CHECK 1 000 0 979 331 49 7 6 2010 Invoice 670080 4 950 65 9684 282 14 10 8 2010 Invoice 6700564 25 154 05 1 009 436 19 10 8 2010 Invoice 670086 61 42 1 009 497 61 10 8 2010 Payment CREDIT 409 46 51 009 088 15 Current 1 30 Days 31 60 Days 61 90 Days Over 90 Days Amount Past Due Past Due Past Due Past Due Due 6 000 19 9 18 1 1249 1 009 966 15 ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Aging Summary This report lets you view the aging of all production PRATS del accounts The Aging Summary report shows outstanding balances arranged by production and sees divided into time periods The report shows the aging Production between some predefined ranges such as 1 30 31 60 Fima 61 90 and more than 90 days overdue You can choose
321. frenster 200 sto oof frvasaorr jones CESSER fomebag EETL a pon asa ECO ee Rot ACO urch 40001 36500 123444 60 2011 ADMIN sco eera fan E rehas ju ooo seso E EE DYALL GELROLLS3 Gel Roll Pink _ EE adusien J 100 esoo 221 LA GELROLL123 Gel Rol Red 10 2011 9 Adustment_ 4 00 seso j ionerom sion YALL GELROLL123 Gel Roll Red djustmen 10 00 SE O0 ar env urch 10001 SSO00 MOLE TCS 82077 CINDYLA AGA __ Storage Bag FPT urchi 4001 S11 00JCINELEAS 11 28 2011 CINDYLA Baca Storage Bac djustment 1 00 511 00 11 28 2011 CINDYLA BAGC Storage Bag Cc 11 28 2011 1 Trans 4001 51200 11 28 2011 1 CINDYLA Report Totals 349 00 522 780 00 Current Inventory Status This report shows the current status of inventory items You can filter the results to show the items in a specified department and category Department x Filter Options Category Department Shows only the inventory belonging Equipment to this Department Leave this blank to show the Range items from all departments Category Shows only the inventory belonging to this Category Location Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Note You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on the list include in report Print Subrental Out
322. from the Sales Entry Screen wa uy ty Billed Mode Pulls the data from Invoices and Credits Last Stock gt Filters on Creation Date of Invoice Uses Extended Price Begin Date gt on the Invoice Detail Screen Excludes Restocking tr NA charges Department If selected report will print for the tee specified department Sean boner r Category Shows only the stocks belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Stock Range You can limit the range of stock displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending stock Leave these blank to show all stocks Date Range Displays the detail of changes between this specified date ranges Production Select production to limit the report result Leave this option blank to show report across all productions Rental Tracker Pro Sales Profit Report Date Time 3 30 2012 11 51 49 AM Page 1 of 1 Amount 1475BROMEL Bromeliads Guzmania 700 00 510 00 514 00 140 00 10 00 363 20 632 00 Ch eBa Heeh eee too 308 00 3337 AI E E RS 1 LL tooo 55 50 o 100 00 POP SOP 3550 100 00 z0 520000 3520000 100 00 Total Report Total 341 550 57 16 037 90 542351267 13035 Description of Columns Quantity If running the report by shipped the quantity is the shipped within the date range If running by billed the quantity is the quantity billed for the invoice creation date range Extended Price This i
323. from the invoice Use calculator El to recalculate invoice totals Note If your company use AR module when adding charges to the invoice selection of Rentals Sales is required Printing an Invoice Draft From the invoice header screen there are several printout options available Click on the printer icon The print options are Invoice Summary This is a single page printout which recaps the invoice This report shows the total amount of orders with miscellaneous item if they exist Invoice Detail MN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This will print the backup detail showing the equipment for each order on the invoice which made up the charges The backup document is a print out of the rental sales loss damage charges which supports the order summary section The backup does not consider any adjustments made to the summary charge area Do not print 0 00 items If checked program will not print items with Extended Price equal to zero Print Rental line item Prices If checked it will print out the rental line item prices on the backup detail Print Rental Discount This option will print out a rental discount if applicable Print Sales line item Prices If checked it will print out the sales line item prices on the backup detail Print Sales Discount This option will print out a sales discount if applicable Print Line Item Customer Notes When this option is checked program prints the rental Customer Notes or sales Custo
324. g the physical inventory process an item that has been scanned or entered gives an error the record is stored in the rejection list The rejection list can be printed and is helpful when doing research This report contains some columns such as Barcode UserID Transaction Date and the comments column that shows the rejection error acquired during the physical inventory process Physical Inventory Review Report This report will display the overall picture of your physical inventory For all of the types of equipment within the selected range see PI Start Dialog Box earlier in this chapter this report will display the Equipment code Description and Quantity Owned The current figures for quantities out on orders Missing Barcoded In Repair and Count will display as well as subtracted from the quantity owned to provide the Difference A negative figure means there are items missing while a positive figure means more items are accounted for than are owned As part of the inventory process shortages will be retired and overages will add to inventory Because adjustments will apply to your inventory 1t 1s recommended these differences are carefully reviewed Any quantities that appear unreasonable should be investigated prior to proceeding see Review and Update Inventory later in this chapter Summary Checking this box will only show the quantities for each of the fields Detail For detailed information about each count check this box In
325. ghts but also the settings of the profile selected Overwrite All Security Settings User s security setting will be overwritten by one of the above selected options Select the User Profile This is used when you have sleect to Copy Rights from another user or profile If this is check marked and a selected user profile is selected all the users security setting will be overwritten with the selected user profiles settings Merge User At times user are double entered into the system because aa X of a mistake There 1s the option to merge Users so that there are no duplicates Also RTPro does not allow users User to Merge with to be deleted RTPro only allows setting a user to inactive If you want to completely delete a user from the ws system you can use Merge user to merge old users into an existing user This method will delete the old user To do this right click on the user you wish to get rid of select Merge User select the user you want to merge to A record will be written to the exception file noting the merge date and time and the user who did it x Cancel T Help Note Please pay attention when you merge two Users once merged the first user code will be deleted and all the historical information will be transferred to the user selected Use caution when using this tool as there is no reversal after the merge Security Setup a Security is very important in protecting confidential information Therefore
326. gram will not close the Report screen and user can modify one of the selections and run the report again ps user can do a partial search of the Name or Description by clicking ifying glass icon A search prompt will display This 1s partial search red in and the records matching the partial search will apprear Contact Lookup JERRYCONA Jerry Conan ROBERTSTRRobert Strong va Save Button Allow users to save reports to PDF directly from Report dialog User can also right click on the Save button and save the report printout in DOC XLS and TXT formats w OK X Cancel E h ma eee _ _ qe O Multiple Instances The RTProSL allows users to launch more than one instances of 1t at the same time This ability helps users who want to work with the different part of the application at the same time Common Shortcuts User can click on any of these speed buttons while in any part of the program and go directly to relevant screen This ability of RTPro helps user to quickly access screens of the application To bring up a list of the common shortcuts press Ctrl F1 anywhere in the application The following will appear There are times when the screens may be positioned awkwardly perhaps dragged off the screen to a second monitor If you are having trouble with the RTPro screen display there is a hot key CTRL 0 If IH Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc you press the CTRL key and 0 and the same t
327. group can be selected RTPro will include all equipments that assigned to this group in PI process When a group 1s selected other filtering selection will be cleared out Physical Inventory Worksheet After you have selected the criteria for the physical inventory per the dialog box above printing a Physical Inventory Worksheet can be a useful tool in the counting process The worksheet is a list of equipment types to count It 1s the best way to tally non Barcoded items but can also be used as a checks and balances for the Barcoded equipment The amount counted by hand can compare to the quantities scanned The worksheet lists whether the equipment type 1s Barcoded only the Equipment Code and Description The Quantity Counted and the Notes columns left are blank so that staff may enter the amount counted and any comments needed about the count To print the worksheet click on the Physical Inventory tab and click on Rental Physical Inventory then select Physical Inventory Worksheet Print Scanner Readable Information This is an option to print a barcode of the Equipment Code on the Physical Inventory Worksheet Report Rather than enter the Equipment Code by hand where necessary this would allow the code to scan for input To activate put a checkmark in this box by clicking on it Double Space When selected an extra blank row will print for each row Scanning Barcoded Items in Shop Es In the Physical Inventory Screen click
328. group of check boxes for the different types of bills When selecting Rentals the system will look for all the rental items for the order which were out during the billing range The Use Qty Ordered ignores the rental check in out and creates the invoice for the quantities that were ordered The other checkboxes will look for the related charges Note For the Sales items Restocking will allow users to bill for restocking When this box is not checked program will ignore the restocking charge when calculating the bill If there is a restocking percentage at the customer level that restocking percentage will be used instead of the restocking percentage which is set on the stock item level Note Transfer orders are not billable Create a Preview Preview is not an actual invoice but 1s a snapshot of what the billing is based on options selected A preview cannot turn into an invoice draft and does not affect the status of orders It is simply a tool to look at what the invoice will look like before creating the actual invoice Create the Draft Before creating an Invoice it must first be a draft of invoice The draft can be confirmed to an invoice Select Confirm the Invoice under Confirm menu or press F9 through the Invoice Draft screen A message will appear to note that this invoice will be confirmed and cannot be changed Select Yes to turn draft into the confirmed invoice The Invoice Screen looks like as fol
329. gs 595 6042 Pull List Rentals Date 10 10 2010 Time 1 44 13 PM Order 374 Page 1 Order 374 Job Title Subrental 2 Customer COLDCASE CBS Studios Cold Case 10 Billing Address CBS Studios Shipping 11122 Pico Blvd Los Angeles CA 90010 Phone Fax Ship Date 9 13 2010 Return Date 9 26 2010 Usage Period 9 13 2010 9 26 2010 Customer Contact Debbie Jacobs 416 333 5656 Currency USD Terms Net 30 Bill Type Regular Bill Salesperson Sally Ship Method Payment Type Cash P O Return Method Department HMI HMI Lighting Equipment Description Total Total Total Ord Pull Rem 14000 16K Alpha Head 1 Subrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Out 0 Remain 1 1812FFPGBA 18K12K FF Powergem Ballast subrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Qut 0 Remain 7 18K 12K 6K Power Feeder Subrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Out 0 Remain 220V F Bates To MM Camlock 18K 12K 6K Subrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Out 0 Remain 14000 02 18K Alpha Fresnel Lens Subrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Out 0 Remain 1 14000 03 18K Alpha Clear Lens W Rim Subrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Out 0 Remain 7 14000 04 18K 12K Fresnel 29 5Pc Scrim Set W Bag ubrental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Gut 0 Remain 1 18HMIDEGE 16K H Globe ubrenta Richardson Ord 1 Qut 0 Remain 14000 05 18K Alpha Lens Protector Circular brental Mole Richardson Ord 1 Qut 0 Remain HEADEXT18 18K 12K_6K HMI 50 Head Ext brental Mole
330. h no Discount Print both the Pmt ents Venda actual price and extended price and not the list price Exit OK Mode EF 111152011 13 12 11 Date Information Partial With checking this item you can print a partial report for a date range Other Information Print Internal Notes Print the Internal Notes in the Description column Print Customer Notes Print the Customer Notes in the Description column Print Subrental Vendor Print the Subrental Vendor column Print Kit Header Print the header of the Kit in the report EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Copies Set the number of the copies you want to print from this report Checkin Barcoded In this page you can check in Barcoded items that are Eta returned on the order Just scan the items by pressing the trigger button or the yellow scan button on the keyboard On the status section of this page you will see the number of items checked in on this order for this equipment code Order The Order Number you are working with In addition you will see the Customer Code for this order in lt gt block Barcode This box shows the scanned barcodes In addition you can type the barcode manually in this field and press the OK button or easily scan with scanner trigger button Damaged If the returned item from your customer is MoaeRF 11 MIS OITTTS th28 damaged check this box Fill in the damage description in the box below it Check in Non
331. he calculated amounts of each purchase order Right click on a desired record and choose Display Totals from the menu or click on its icon in the toolbar Subrental PO Invoice This screen will list all vendor invoices that are attached to a subrental PO The total amount of attached invoices will be shown at the bottom of the screen Subrental PO Invoice screen is available via Subrental PO Totals Checkout Records 22 To see checked out subrental equipment attached to a PO use this screen Checkout records are described in detail Returned items are shown as white and not returned as green Subrental Purchase Order Listing To see the detail of a purchase order double click on a desired record or choose Detail Information from right click menu MN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Order Processing Activities Order Menu Add Edit View Orders These features will be described later in this chapter in detail Refer to Order Header Screen for more details Duplicating Current Order Using this feature you can duplicate a current order and copy all items that are ordered or shipped in it You can access this feature from Order Menu of the Order Processing screen The copy options are available You can choose to include all rental items sale items or both Selecting Use Quantity Ordered will order the exact quantity of ordered items from current order to duplicated one whereas selecting Use Quan
332. he item that you want to cancel its Success PALSSTOCK 2 shipping for Quantity The quantity of stock that you want to cancel its lt q Sts SHE shipping for Return Sales You can return shipment of Sales stock in this screen Please note EEES that if shipment is returned the record of the shipment and the return is stored in the program If you do not want a record of the shipment Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt and the return to be saved in the program you should Cancel the LastStock PALMSTOCK1 shipment instead Cancel of shipment is allowed only if the order b 8t Quantity 2 was not billed for Sales Upon a successful return of the stock program displays the message Success followed by the description Stck i of the stock If there is an error when returning the shipped item Suantity fs program will display an error message in red Order The Order number you are working with Last Stock The stock number of last returned item ow Last Quantity The Quantity of last returned stock Success PALSSTOCK1 Stock The stock number of the item that you want to return Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 04 47 Quantity The Quantity of the items that you want to return Print Checkout Sheet For description of this section refer to Refer to Print Checkout Sheet in checkout section ES Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Quote Scanner program allows you to add items to a Quote Please note th
333. he rental invoice detail for the date range selected Ifthe begin date of the billing falls within the date range the item will be considered RTPro will take the entire billing range for the item Total Revenue This column looks at the invoice level If the invoice credit is within the date range then the calculation is based upon the extended amount of the invoice rental detail level This column never includes subrentals Blended Day Rate Is Total Revenue Total Days Billed x Unit List Price If the total revenue is 0 00 and the list price gt 0 00 then make the blended day rate 0 00 otherwise 1f list price is blank or 0 00 then blended day rate should be blank Qty in Demand Total of items of this Equipment Code that are out and projected out by Quantity in Kits on Projection Date exclude quotes reservations cancelled If an item s return is past due as of the run date the item is considered out forever If an item has not been shipped as of today and the ship date has past the item will not be considered Quantity Short Over Is Quantity Own Quantity in Demand Unit Purchase Price Is from the Equipment table The unit purchase price will only print if there is a quantity short Extended Purchase Price for Qty Short The unit purchase price will only print if there is a quantity short Projected Weekkly Extended Subrental Cost Is average of Subrental List Price of the Equipment from Invoice Detail analyzed for date
334. he vendor charges your shop and the prices that your shop charges customers for sub rentals After selecting all records and quantities select a vendor and pick a PO or create a new one on the bottom of the screen The PO is only required if setup specifies PO for subrentals required Then press F3 or click on Update Order button to confirm data System posts the data to database but the pick list will not be closed and subrenting items from other vendors can be continued Note Pressing F10 key or clicking Update and Exit will save Subrentals and close the screen Note In the Subrental Pick list the accessory items are noted in gray and indented Once the items are posted back to the order the accessory items will show indented but will not be gray Field Definition Max Qty to Sub This column reflects the maximum quantity that can be subrented Vendor DPW Days Per Week is the number of days that vendor charges company in any week Vendor List Price This is the vendor s price list Vendor Actual Price Actual price is List price which is calculated after discount Vendor Extended Price Extended price is the final calculated price that should be paid to vendor Note All Purchase Orders currently created for production are listed in drop down To create a new PO click on Add button in vendor purchase order lookup dialog Review all Subrentals of an Order To review all subrental items press F11 or select Subrental Records from
335. heck this box if image will be used RTPro supports imaging An image can be linked to an equipment code sales stock item or repair ticket RTPro is compatible with most TWAIN compliant scanners and digital cameras Image Path ES Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If imaging is used the directory path where the images will be stored should be entered Image save Quality 1 100 When saving images each image takes disk space There is an image compression feature which can be set The compression recommended is 50 The setting can be adjusted to suit your needs The lower compression percentage the higher image quality Save Revisions Within RTPro is the ability to save revisions made to the Rental Order Entry Screen RTPro will save the quote from the Rental Order Entry screen when a change is made to a quantity price discount additional entry Revision Path This is a directory path where the revisions are stored if Save Revisions is checked If your company is setup for multi location the revision path can be set at the location level Defaults Tab The default values help speed up the data entry process A default value populates a field on an entry screen The values once populated on an entry screen can be overwritten and changed Default Order Type When a new order 1s created the order type will default in from the specified default value The possible values are Quote Reservation Confirmed Order
336. hipping Li Curra ES Handling Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print the quote Click on G button to print Quote Sheet Ship on nR pj a a cE Quote Sheet RTPro Demo Company A O PIX Select C Rentals Only f Summary C Rentals Only Curent Weekly Price Detail C Sales Only f Billing Schedule f Customized Output Print Total Replacement Price Labor Print Rental Line Item Prices 4 Print Subrental Vendor m Print Rental Discount Wo Fint weekly Rental m Print Sales Line ltem Prices e Print Kit Header mi Print Sales Discount M Use Billing Schedule E E F Print Shipping Eharges mi Space Do not print 0 00 iteme Fr Print Days Per Week lv Footer QUOTE DEFAUL Print Daus seek Iv Currency CON y OK Save X Cancel Print Pull List Exit order entry screen In Order Processing Reports Hel Module from report menu select Pull List report j Print pull list Give Pull List to floor staff Quick List Quote Sheet Pull List Checkout Sheet Contract Current Week Contract Checking out Items From Main Screen Run Order Processing Module Order Processing Enter Order number or select it from list Click on R button in front of Out ing Reports Help ETS Handling Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Fill Actual Checkout Date 5 3 5 2012 5 09 00 PM If Pull list is complete use Checkout all User Checkout Cancel
337. his must be check marked if this 1s an active employee Billable Rates The job s billable rate should be entered here Hourly Day Input 1f the employee gets paid hourly or day Occupation This is the employee s occupation classification and can be entered or selected from the table Technician would be an example of employee s occupation Color When adding a new schedule for an employee this color will be used as default color Note User can change the color manually while adding a new schedule Internal Whether the Employee is internal or external Working Days and Time Employee working days time can be adjusted at the bottom of Employee Detail screen Note When an employee added to the system working days time will default over from the System Setup Occupation Table This is a list of all the employees occupations The table consists of Code Description Hourly Rate Date Rate Weekend Hourly Rate and Weekend Day Rate Hourly Rate This is the hourly rate the employee will receive Day Rate This 1s the day rate the employee will receive Weekend Hourly Rate This is the weekend hourly rate the employee will receive ETS Labor Space Scheduling 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Weekend Day Rate This 1s the weekend day rate the employee will receive Space Table This screen allows the user to input the space information such as space code description space type etc Space Detail field descriptions Co
338. his option right click on items in the sales order list and choose Stock Detail Screen or press Shift F8 the Sales Inventory Detail Screen will appear Grid Multi Select By using this feature users can switch to multi select mode You can apply sales discount to multiple records Select the desired records and then press Apply Multiple Discount from the Grid Multi Select icon in the toolbar On multiple line selection section there is an option to apply multiple markup percentage Markup percent can be applied to the selected rows Create and using sales kits A kit is a group of items which are linked together and given a kit name The kit can be added to an order and this can make ordering stocks easier Creating Kits You may create Kits in Sales Order Screen Creating Kits from Inventory module is also possible For more details see Sales Kit List in Chapter 5 To use this feature create a dummy order and add stocks you want to include in Kit then press 1 button complete kit details and save it Note Kit names should be unique in the system Note You can use quantity ordered or shipped to include items in a kit Adding kit to an order 30 For adding a kit to an order click on Copy From a Kit icon on Sales Order Screen Then select the kit and enter quantity Note In the Sales Order Screen kits are showing in light yellow background and kit header s description in bold Note You may edit the quantity
339. ho Cucamonga CA 91739 668 595 6041 Fax 888 595 6042 Cost Sheet Date 3 27 2012 Time 11 02 23 PM Page 1 of 1 ga MEDICAL INTEGRATION Order Multiple Production REVENGE New Line Reveni Billing Address New Line Shipping Phone Equipment Description endor Total ME Cost Fri rice Alp 2 Paskal Li WESF 526 526 EE 00 CR four trace Pop 2 anf ma el so _fsrweres 18K HMI D E Globe Tapa Totals 211 00 3250000 Weekly Vendor Cost 405 50 Weekly Customer Price 31 250 00 am Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Inventory Value Report This report prints a value of all CX Rental Inventory Yalue Report RTPro Demo Company rental inventory items on file It mere will print total quantity and total C epariment D Replacement Price alue for each included type of hrs E YP Category Y of Replacement Cost equipment AsOfDate 10 2 2011 Purchase Amount Filter Options AAA Department Shows only the Equipment E l R p B equipment belonging to this Te a ae Department Leave this blank to Location pi show items from all departments pi Fa ete Mittal Cott ele Currency Eschede Hordnvertons tems Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories As of Date You can choose today or any date in the past to get the value of your inventory for i
340. hrough the Rental Checkout Screen using its toolbar icon or select Detail Transaction Record from View menu Some Common Error Message may you get Checking out Items Barcode not on file If an item is scanned that does not exist on file the system will send out a bad beep and display Barcode not on file Do you wish to add it If you choose yes the system will go to the Inventory Entry Screen and allow adding the inventory item The system will return to the checkout screen The item will be checked out to the order There is a security checkpoint on the adding of inventory items This barcode already checked out to the order Barcoded items cannot be checked out to the same order more than once Press Ctrl Z to exit from the error message There is a double scan setting which can be enabled If enabled the message will not come up and instead a unique beep will play Invalid Barcode Not a Valid Prefix The prefix of barcode labels can be set in system setup If a scanned barcode does not match prefix Scanning will not be accepted This item is out on order XXXXX Do you want to check it in on the older order When you attempt to check out an item and item is not checked in from previous order you get this error and prompt If you answer yes the item will be checked in from old order and checked out to new one The Check in date on the old order will be the system s current date Check In Process Rental Tracker Pro offers o
341. hysical Inventory option inside the scanner application and scan barcodes in the offline mode Then put the scanner on the cradle and send batch data to the program and finally post the data For more details refer to chapter 2 Batch Barcoded screen Enter Noncoded Items that are In Stock To enter the non Barcoded items that are counted click the Physical Inventory dropdown tab and in the Rental Physical Inventory menu select Enter Non Barcoded Items that are in Stock Physical Inventory Noncoded data Entry Screen will appear Physical Inventory Noncoded Data Entry Screen Equipment types that are not classified as Barcoded only and are within the specified ranges during physical inventory selection See PI Start Dialog Box above will appear on The Physical Inventory Noncoded Data Entry screen For each type of equipment to be counted the Equipment code and Description as well as the current quantities of items Owned Out on Orders In Repair Previously Counted and Difference will display Add to Quantity Counted In this column enter the quantity of items that have been counted A negative quantity may be entered to correct amounts that are added in error Post Records After the counted quantities are entered they must post in one of three ways 1 Push the F3 button 2 Click on the Post Records button near the bottom of the screen 3 Click on the Action drop down tab and click on Post Records The amounts in the Add
342. ice This list shows available currency and location codes You can click to open list in full screen mode Note Users are able to select multiple records and select Apply amounts to multiple records option from right click menu then type in new amounts on opened boxes and apply to selected records or all records Daily Eee Replace Cost Update y Selected af Update All 3 Cancel Weekly Replace Price Enter new amounts or leave blank for no change BSD J 422 00 1 200 00 7 245 00 11 500 00 Apply amounts to multiple records A gl 1 STAR Print Grid Ctrl G Gave Grid tn b GL Account The default value of this field will come from Category table for this equipment Otherwise enter the GL Account code by typing account code or selecting it from General Ledger Lookup screen by clicking drop down arrow Although the same GL Income account may be used on all equipment codes this feature allows the rental income to divide among groups of equipment For example all equipment codes belonging to a particular department or category could have its own code while a range of codes belonging to a different department or category could have a different code Thus the rental income posted to the GL would be broken down accordingly Loss GL Account The default value of this field will come from the Setup screen 1f it is chosen from the Loss GL Account in Billing tab Otherwise enter the GL Account code by typing accou
343. icking on a row item will send the user to the Inventory Purchase Order Detail screen for iat PO cs Inventory PO Detail Search RTPro Demo Company File Search View Record Help r r Equipment Misc Description a PO Begin Date Location nn J Vendor PO End Ca Refresh F2 i 5 ef DMX ROTATOR CONTROLLER We F 074001 2 1 3 2009 DMM ROTATOR CONTROLLER Ww F 074007 200 1 3 2009 DMX ROTATOR CONTROLLER Ww F 179002200 4 25 2010 DMX ROTATOR CONTROLLER W F 119002200 DMX ROTATOR CONTROLLER W F 119002200 DMM ROTATOR CONTROLLER W7 F 173002200 DM ROTATOR CONTROLLER WY F 460001200 8 25 2010 Reports Billed Sub rental Report The purpose of this report is to show the invoices that are created and billed for subrentals Report information comes from the Subrental Po Invoice and Sub rental Po Invoice Detail screens Production Van r Options Lies Production Select production to limit report to POR show only invoices for this production Leave this po i Invoice Create Begin Date option blank to show results for all productions E Invoice Create End Date Vendor Select Subrental Vendor or leave it blank to print invoices from all vendors for Forma selected PO e Summary Detail PO You can filter the report to show invoices for the specific PO number or leave it blank to show all ETS Purchase Order 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Subre
344. ied date ranges If a begin date is entered then the program summarizes all the changes prior to the begin date and prints only one row specifying the Initial Quantity Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location Example ES Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CHIM CHIM 18000 11 Sml Video Pro Plus Bank 8125 nsaction Pare CreateDate Date Type 1 1 2010 Initial Qy 010 Retire___ CINDYLA 1 11 1 2010 Retire__ ADMIN 11 1 2010 2 2010 Purchase_ ADMIN 11 12 2010 Purchase ADMIN 11 12 2010 Purchase CINDYLA 12 27 2010 Purchase CINDYLA 12 27 2010 D C Y Des Vendor O y AA o a Purchase CINDYLA 12 27 2010 a y A A AAA a 24 2 23 S 21818 ISIS z 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 G O fn fn Dl bl aah bl nb ao oh bl bl dl anh ack ack ack aah eh ah aah ad o SSS RRE REERRAREEE E Ao me te Be b gt EE A ER SIS N S BOOS OS OS ajaj jajajajaj aja 00020 S 2 00426 00427 4788 4788 a 24 25 2 27 abl ab Nels Oo ad ab a ab 120 120 1201 LO522 00433 N N Es LO522 LO522 LO522 LO522 LO522 LO522 LO522 1272712010 1272712010 Purchase CND Purchase CINDY EA A EM8r20 Purchase ADMIN 18201 A 5820 Purchase ADMIN 1820 SCS A 5820 Purchase ADMIN 1820 SC A 1072407 Retire _ JONDVL
345. il have options to Include Cost of Goods Sales Inventory Transactions p Adjustments to the sales inventory are made in the Sales Inventory Transactions Screen When inventory items are acquired this is where they are added into stock From this screen you can also adjust previous entries purchase or transfer items Click on the Sales dropdown tab and select Sales Inventory Transactions or click on its icon from toolbar menu Note If a company is multi location when selecting Sales Inventory Transactions system will ask to enter the location that applies Stock No Enter the Stock number or use the drop down arrow to select one from the Sales Stock Lookup screen Transaction Type Specify the transaction type as an Adjustment or Purchase Enter the type or use the dropdown arrow to select one Transaction Date It is possible to select a transaction date from a date menu in this box Quantity Enter the quantity for this transaction Use sign to indicate negative quantities for example when adjusting a previous entry Cost This figure is the actual cost of this transaction which may be different from the cost you have on file for this Stock Number in Sales Inventory With each transaction this cost will factor into the Average Cost which 1s kept for each Stock Number Note Within system setup is the option to update the sales stock table cost with the cost entered in on the sales transactions screen Vendor Enter th
346. ill ask to check out this equipment as Barcoded item only Checking out items as subrentals is always allowed and the barcoded only will not apply Discountable Enabling discountable box will allow users to enter discounts on an order or invoice for this type of equipment There might be some types of equipment that you do not wish to discount Leaving this box blank will automatically lock this item on an order so that any discounts applied to the order will not apply to this equipment code Taxable Check this box if sales tax on rentals should calculate on orders and invoices for this equipment code Tax will be calculated at the rate of the Tax Type that is entered on the Order Header Screen or Invoice Screen Sellable D Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If checked program allows selling the rental inventory item When the user checkmarks the Sellable field then program prompts user This equipment should be added to the Sales Stock table Continue if user clicks on Yes then the Sales Inventory Detail Screen comes up and the rental inventory item can be added into the sales inventory list Print Barcode When this box 1s checked all barcode numbers for this equipment code will printout on checkout and check in sheets Print on Equipment Pick List The equipment pick list is a document you can print and give to a customer which displays a list of equipment they can choose to rent If you check this box this equip
347. ill print the vendor of subrented equipment Print Kit Header If kits are added to rental items checking mark this option will print header of kits Print Replacement Price Checking this will print the replacement price for rented equipment in the report Use Billing Schedule If a schedule is defined for billing this function will print the billing schedule calculation in the report Print Shipping Charges If checked program prints the shipping charges for either rentals or sales Print Delivery Notes If checked program prints Order Header delivery notes on the printout sheet Print Days Weeks If checked program prints the value of days weeks for rentals in printout sheet Print Qty Ordered If checked program prints ordered quantity for rentals in Qty Ord column Print Qty To Go Out If checked program prints the quantity of rental items that are ready to go out Current Week Contract This report will print contract for the current week Options are available to print prices in this report such as No Prices Total Prices Only Line Item Prices with No Discount and All Prices A partial report for the certain range of the date and time can be printed Other options are Print Subrental Customer Notes Checking this item will print Subrental Customer Notes Print Subrental Vendor If sub rented items are checked out to the order this option will print the vendor of subrented equipment Print Subrental Internal Notes Ch
348. ime the record is saved and all the 3 grids will be filled with data When purchased items are received they can be added to the Po invoice through this screen When all items are received completely program highlights the completed purchase order in yellow Note You can use Receive All button to fill in the Qty Received column for all rows in both grids to the maximum value Inventory PO Invoice Received RTPro Demo Company il BE OI x File View Help O Completed Show Al APA S dE Remained Packing Shp nvnice 146E Note wf DK Invoice Date 10 11 2011 Nono ca Equipment LES Inventory PO Rental Transaction This screen can be opened through the Inventory PO Invoice Received or by double clicking on the ordered Equipment in the upper grid of Inventory Purchase Order Detail screen This screen displays the rental transaction for the selected purchase order such as received quantity invoice number and the date of transaction Here you can add received equipment to inventory If you are adding equipment to the rental inventory system will prompt for Noncoded properties if this equipment can be added as Noncoded to the inventory Note When RUE button on the toolbar is clicked program will prompt All Noncoded items received will be posted to inventory Continue If Yes then received items will be added to Rental inventory Inventory PO Sales Transaction This screen can be opened through the
349. ime the screen display will position to the top left of the EMT x monitor W vendor Ctrl F 3 ae Contact Ctrl 4 32 Equipment Ctrl F5 ss Sales Avail Ctrl FE 5 Repair Ltrl F 7 Retired Ltrl F4 E Order Proc Ctrl F9 Billing Ctri F 10 Rent Avail Ctrl F1 1 LE MN Barcode Ctrl F12 Gantt Equipment lt F21 Using the on line help RTPro includes an on line help that is useful in answering many common questions on how to perform a specific function as well as context sensitive help that can explain field values On line help can be accessed from any screen by pressing F1 In addition from the Main Menu you can click on the Help Button to access the on line help The on line help is broken down into two main windows The first window is the Main window and positioned on the left hand side The Main window contains help topics and used to navigate throughout the help system The secondary window is a smaller window and positioned on the right hand side The secondary window contains procedures and instructions This on line help system is similar to the Windows help system You can bring up the Help Topics window and search for help topics through books as well as the index This on line help is a valuable resource for getting answers to many of your questions Im Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc RTPro Setlighting Audio Video EME E re ae Hide Back Print Options
350. in RF Server application too Wireless Reconnect Timeout Scanner will wait this time to connect to the server Send Receive Timeout Represents the command sending and receiving time out Means the scanner generates error if could not send or receive the command in proper time Batch Send Receive Timeout This is the amount of time in second that scanner wait for sending each part of data to server using Send Batch Data via RF method We recommend default value of 25 but EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc if your company usually using large batches 300 records every time we recommend higher value for this field Sync Date Time with Server If this box is checked program sync Date Time with RF Server automatically Auto hide Taskbar Checking this box will hide Windows taskbar when RTPro is run If you check or uncheck this field exit RTPro completely and launch it again for new setting to take effect Note All fields in this page should have value so if you are running RF Server in just one pc you can set the server2 and the port2 the same as server and port Sound Setting For helping people that are using a scanner to realize if NERO gst their commands are successful or not RTPro has the ability of playing Good beep and Bad beep to avoid users to look on the scanner after sending any command Therefore users can select different beeps for good result or bad In addition they can hear the sound before
351. in operation It 1s simple Just scan that barcode again to get the success message and cancel the Check in Barcode This box shows the scanned barcode In addition you can type the barcode manually in this field and press the OK button or easily scan it with scanner trigger button Cancel Checkin Noncoded You can cancel the Check in for a non Barcoded item in this screen All you need to enter is the Equipment code and quantity you want to cancel If you are canceling the Check in of a sub rental item checkmark the Subrental box then enter the Vendor in the box next to it Order The Order number that you are canceling the Check in for Last Equipment The equipment code of last canceled equipment Last Quantity The quantity of last canceled equipment Subrental Check this if you want to cancel the Check in of a sub rented item After checking this box you can enter the Vendor code in the adjacent box Cancel Checkin Barcoded File Transaction Help Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Barcoded Barcode Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 46 47 Cancel Checkin Noncoded File Transaction Help Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Last Equipment 85200 Last Quantity 2 M Subrental RS Td Exit OK Success TRACTOR W SINGLE GENERATOR Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 44 24 Equipment The equipment code of the item that you want to cancel the Check in operation Quantity The quantity of items that you want to
352. in the New Daily column Daily Inc When a New Daily rental price 1s entered this column will reflect the increase from the old Daily rental price to the New Daily rental price Daily Inc percentage CN Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc When a New Daily Price is entered a number in this column is the percentage of increase between the old Daily rental price and new Daily rental price New Weekly In this column enter the New Weekly rental price Use the down arrow to move to the next New Weekly rental price Use Enter to jump to the next New Daily rental price No changes will be made and the Weekly price will remain the same for those Equipment Codes that have no entry in the New Weekly column Weekly Inc When a new Weekly Price is entered this column will reflect the increase from the old Weekly Price to the new Weekly Price Weekly Inc percentage When a new Weekly Price is entered a number in this column is the percentage of increase between the old Weekly Price and new Weekly Price Increase All Prices To increase all daily weekly prices by the same percentage use this option The number that you enter in Update Rental Prices Increase dialog box is the percent that will be added to the daily weekly price of all equipment codes There is the option to roll up to the nearest dollar Note To decrease all daily prices negative numbers can be entered Program can round up the value of the prices to the nearest doll
353. ing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Check in out processes Process Menu Features in this menu will open screens for checkout and check in processes For more details refer to Check in out processes later in this chapter Checkout Rentals This menu item opens the Rental Checkout Screen You can also get into the Rental Checkout Screen by pressing F5 on Order Processing Screen Checkout Sales This menu item opens the Sales Checkout Screen Items can be shipped and Returned to the selected order This screen is also accessible by pressing F6 on Order Processing Screen Checkin Rentals In Order Processing Screen items can be checked in across a production F8 an order F7 or by parent company There is also the ability to check in items across all orders Change Checkout Date This function allows the user to alter the rental check out date time in an order This function is helpful when items are checked out by mistake on the wrong date or time The system will prompt for the previous date and time and the new date and time Change Check in Date This function allows the user to alter the rental Check in date time in an order This function is helpful when items are checked in by mistake on the wrong date or time The system will prompt for the previous date and time and the new date and time Labor Space Scheduling This function allows accessing the labor and space scheduling module Labor and space scheduling can be attached t
354. ing Menu is designed similarly to the Order Processing Menu Invoices can be filtered by a parent production or across invoices There are many reports available Setting Up the Billing Schedule RTPro is designed to create an invoice for billable rental items on a weekly basis However variations to standard weekly invoicing can be designed by setting up a billing schedule For example you may wish to invoice an order every other week or perhaps every fourth week invoiced with a 50 discount Use the billing schedule to define the billing periods so that reports and invoicing procedures will calculate billing periods for the order according to schedule cycles defined and the amounts defined rather than the weekly default settings A Billing Schedule can be customized for an order or production see Order Header in Chapter 6 However if a billing schedule is used on a regular basis a template can be designed so that a billing schedule may quickly and easily be created for additional orders To do that you must first create a Billing Schedule Code and then create the template in Billing Schedule Setup see Setting up Schedules in Chapter 3 The Billing Process Explained Billing an order There are two ways to bill an order One way 1s through the Order Processing This allows for a single order invoice The other way is through the Billing Module Billing an Order from the Order Processing Module Click on Order Processing Module button
355. ing the report Complete List Complete List will print a full list of equipment whether they are returned or not Remaining Only Remaining only will print the remaining items that are not returned Print the sort order by department or by equipment code This option will group and sort equipment by Equipment Code or Department and it will be accessible when selecting Rentals Print Scanner Readable Information This option will print the barcode which is equivalent to the equipment code The purpose of printing barcodes for the equipment types is that check in can be performed across non Barcoded items using the batch barcode scanning method Department A department can be selected and if selected the report will print for the specified department Print a new page for each Department Checking this item will print each department in the separate pages Print Subrental Internal Notes Checking this item will print Subrental Internal Notes This option is only available if Subrental by Vendor is selected Print Subrental Customer Notes Checking this item will print Subrental Customer Notes This option is only available if Subrental by Vendor is selected Consolidate Noncoded Items across Orders When this option is selected the program combines all Noncoded items with the same equipment code into one line on the report If 1t is not checked then the report prints a separate line for each order that has this equipment out Do Not P
356. inguished by a noncoded column indicator To access this screen from the Inventory Menu click the Rental dropdown tab and select Rental Inventory or click the Rental Inventory Screen icon Attachment List This feature is designed for those situations when every time a particular barcoded item is sent out one or more other specific barcoded items will go with 1t For example a rolling rack or case may have a dozen modules attached to 1t Both the rack and the modules are barcoded items The modules will automatically be checked out when the main barcode for the rolling rack 1s checked out It will save you time by checking out one rack to an order instead of scanning 12 modules Noncoded items can also be setup as attachments From the Rental Inventory Entry Screen enter the barcode number for the item you want other barcoded items to attach to it above ex the rack by Clicking Attachment List icon To enter the barcodes to attach click on the first line under the attachment column and enter the barcode number you are attaching above ex the modules Press the down arrow or enter to go to the next line When there are barcodes on the list click on the last one and press down arrow or enter to get a blank line EN Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc To enter in noncode attachment item click on the last line and press down arrow or enter enter or select the equipment code and enter in a quantity There is a locked column on the
357. int as Production SE Before you continue some filtering criteria are available such as production location or currency Unbilled Location fw Repair Tickets report sheet contains ticket number the _ creation date of repair ticket and other useful information You may find this report under Reports menu Currency Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Unbilled Repair Tickets Report DateTime 2006 06 11 1 59 19PM Page 1 of 1 Currency US Y 2003 03 16 JEXPROT 200301 e nee RC O 2006 0214 COMERON Come ToHome 2 SLIT 4140 00 C e e 2006 02 15 TMPROA aaa Picture Equipment 50092 A 629 93 Fane TERE 785 05 180 Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Range of Invoices This option allows for printing invoices in a batch fie ee range Production Code x Production Code e First inoice You can specify single or multiple productions To nein O select multiple productions use its icon in front of the has 2 f Payment Type production code field A range of productions can Creste Date Begin e be selected thru the Select List This list can display oe as rT productions by codes descriptions or both Sinker F Pinces FF This report can be filtered by using an invoice range or Detal Poo an invoice creates date There are options available to General Ledger FO print Summary Detail and General Ledger and other Pint Rertal Line hem Prices E di LE
358. ints a list of orders based on the criteria entered It prints information such as Production and Contact information for the each order The report s Include Orders in Hitoy result can be filtered by create date range production or Creation Date From as location You may also include orders that are moved to To i 0 1 2011 history Product Pe Filter Options a Location Include Orders in History If checked it will print both live and history orders History orders are the orders that were moved to the History section of the program WOK X Cancel Chit seve w Order Creation Date Range Filters the report to the orders created between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print all the orders created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print all the orders created on or after the begin date Production Select the production to limit the report to only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show Sub rentals from all productions Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Order Log Report DateTime 2006 06 1712 45 FM CreationDateRange 2006 06 17 ei tone ge een Hame Number ed pe Date RetOste pobe Order 4007 07 20001 07 26 oo A ELO Menelao ON
359. ion header See Terms definition later in this chapter Invoice Tab Invoice Footer Um Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Default invoice footer can be selected here The program will default over invoice footer when printing the invoice report Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Invoice Label The term Invoice can be changed to suit your company s need The label will use throughout the system For example some shops may use the term Invoice Support Document or Support Document Print Date Time and Create By on the Invoice Header When invoices print if this box 1s checked Date Time and Create By will print on the invoice header Print Logo On Invoice If checked program prints the logo of your company on the Invoice printout Print Address On Invoice If checked program prints the address of your company on the Invoice printout Use Upload RTPro has an invoice export function which can be customized to export data If your shop is interested in using the invoice export contact Rental Tracker to review the options available Upload Next Batch Number This is the batch number used when uploading All invoices uploaded in one session will mark with this batch no This batch no will increment automatically for each upload Upload p
360. ion header screen click ii icon Functions Available From Order Processing Under the File Menu View Barcode This option allows the user to search a barcode When the barcode is entered or scanned the inventory screen will appear This function is helpful for giving a customer a price for an item or to check the status of an item You can click on this item in File menu or Press Ctrl B A hot key Ctrl F12 will bring up the barcode search from any screen View Noncode This option is used when a Noncoded item is returned and user does not know what order it belongs to Enter in the Equipment code you are searching against and press the Refresh button then you will see a list of all orders and can select an order from the list and proceed with the Check in process To access this option you can select its menu item under File menu or press CTRL N Rental Availability From the Rental availability Screen the availability of equipment for each location can be checked For more details refer to Inventory chapter Download Batch Scanner This option allows downloading barcodes and noncoded items from a batch barcode scanner For more details see Download Batch Scanner Note The File menu also displays the last 10 orders that have been worked on from the workstation The display was added to help users keep track of the orders recently worked on List of Orders by type All orders can be shown in a list This list can be filtered by ty
361. ions File Menu Database Utilities Import Export Import Data records can be exported from RTPro or Imported to This should only be used with RTPro Assistance Contact Rental Tracker for more details Export For exporting data of tables highlight table name in available tables list and Click gt button The table name will appear under Tables to Update Repeat process for each table to be included in the export To include all the tables click on the gt gt and all the tables will be listed under the Tables to Update area You also can remove tables from Tables to update list by clicking lt or lt lt buttons The tables can be sent to one file or RTPro can create one file per table Choose location and file name to save exported SQL file to The default file 1s Rtpro SQL and it will be saved in RTPro folder in Client By clicking Start Scripting button application will create SQL file and export table data A status bar indicates the progress of the export Click on the Close button to exit CE Import Export Screen RTPro Demo Company File Help i PExpat Import Leg Available Tables Tables to Update j Access l Files to Generate AR Create one File ArT uri ry Creat Ar antmo O Create one File per able Attachment gt AVLog ICARTP102005Delphi2005 Dutputk BatchBC BeCodes pb Stait Scripting BS rder j BsProd View Details
362. ipment Note If the order is marked as an inventory transfer order subrenting items is not allowed Note Users can unlock lock the vendor side and unlock lock the customer side under Action menu Vendor Purchase Order Purchase Order can be selected from Vendor Purchase Order Lookup or a new PO can be added To add a new PO click on the drop down and click on the add button Enter in a new PO number or the system can be setup to automatically assign the next PO number Subrent Misc items TE Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Miscellaneous items can be subrented too To subrental a miscellaneous item press F9 or click on Subrental Misc item from Subrental Menu The Subrented column on the Rental Order Entry Screen in miscellaneous section represents the quantity of subrented items Note If the subrental pricing differs from the Rental Order Entry equipment pricing the extended price on the rental order entry screen will be noted in yellow Note Subrented items cannot be more than ordered quantity Subrental Records To show all subrental records which belong to an order press F11 or click on the Subrental Records in Subrental menu a list of all subrental records will appear In this screen subrented items can be edited and deleted From the subrentals records screen vendor pricing charged to your shop can be altered and pricing you are charging to your client can be edited Whenever the vendor fields or the c
363. ipment out The noncoded will not be consolidated 1f they are attached within a package or kit Weekly Subrental PO Forecast Report The purpose of this report is to show what is expected from the vendor to charge your company for subrentals This includes both subrentals equipment and Production Pe miscellaneous items The report reflects items which are Venda m currently out The report is not based upon quantities ordered POH Filter Options Begin Date 10 2 2011 Production Select production to limit the report result End Date 10 2 2012 Leave this option blank to show report across all productions Vendor Select Subrental Vendor or leave it blank to print Sub rentals from all vendors for selected criteria PO In this box the subrental PO can be entered Leave the PO blank to get the report of items purchased across all POs Date Range Use these dates to filter results by the activity dates The dates cannot be past date Only current and future date Location Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Sales Profit Report The purpose of this report is to print the profit and profit for the Sales Inventory Filter Options Shipped Mode Pulls from Order level and filters on the Ship date and uses Quantity Shipped in the given date range Actual price
364. is Gantt chart is used for monitoring the availability of equipment which is ordered based on time duration The result can be filtered by Equipment Production Date range and Location Through the screen program displays Orders as yellow Reservations as green Quotes as blue and 1f Pull Date lt Ship Date then program shows those dates with Grey color For example if an order has pull date of 01 01 and ship date of 01 03 and return of 01 08 then 2 days will be grey and 6 days of yellow Note The quantity owned is for the locations the user has access to If the Location is blank and the user has location access then the program will show the orders against the users current location access that is noted on the main RTPro screen Note Users can select multiple equipment codes and production TE Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note Double clicking on a row will bring up the Order Header Screen Note The Gantt screen is accessible from all screens using ALT F2 Note The Gantt Chart show items that their return date is passed and the item that still not returned as Red Gantt Chart For Equipment Scheduling RTPro Demo Company OI x File Search Help E J A Orders D Reservations F Vv s 3 E Ele O Quotes Equipment fe MW Start Date 12 8 2008 Location TORONTO Production End Date 12 30 2008 Dec 08 2008 MO TU WE TH FR sa SU 100100 DMX ROTATOR CONTROLLER W POWER C
365. is chapter 800 Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Convert to Barcoded RTPro allows user to convert noncoded items to barcoded items without having to retire them first This way the Purchase Amount Vendor PO and other information are preserved In the Rental Inventory Screen users can right click on a Non coded item and select Convert to Barcoded The menu option is available only for Non coded items Program will display the Add Rental Barcoded Items screen and copy all the fields from the noncoded record It will then set the Quantity To Add box to the Quantity of the noncoded item and waits for user to press the ENTER key When user enters a barcode program adds the barcoded item and then decreases the Quantity of Noncoded item Print Customized Scanner Readable Label for this Equipment Code This option prints the barcode label for selected equipment To access from Equipment Screen right click on a desired equipment code that you want to print a scanner readable label for and select Print Customized Scanner Readable Label for this Equipment Code The system will prompt for the quantity to print of the label Merge Equipment RTPro is able to merge equipment codes together This x function is helpful when you define codes in the system which is identical In other words when you have two types of equipment codes which are the same you may merge them m i together Equipment to Merge with Note Please use with
366. is not required Contact Code The Contact code is a 10 character code which should be meaningful to identify the Contact name Many reports and searching options throughout the program prompt for the Contact code Contact Name This is brief description or name of contact Contact Name and Address These fields contain address information of contact Phone Cell Fax This field contains phone cell fax number of contact Notes Enter a Brief Note about this contact here Merge Contact 620 Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc A function is available to merge different contacts together FRERE x This function is helpful when you have duplicate contacts with same information in RTPro Contact to Merge with Note Please pay attention when you merge two contacts once merged the first contact code will be deleted and all the historical information will be transferred to the contact selected Use caution when using this tool as there is non reversal after the merge OK x Cancel 7 Help Salesperson Sales Person is a person who is responsible for the orders and invoices in your company In List you can see all Salespersons Managing Salesperson records Sales Person records can add by clicking on 5 icon To edit Existing records you can double click on them or select record and click on icon If you want to delete a Sales Person record RTPro will not allow 1f the salesperson 1s linked to any parent
367. is the current market Replacement Cost which comes from the Equipment table Extended Replacement Cost This is the Qty Owned multiplied by the Replacement Cost Rental Days Available This is the number of rental days the average quantity owned was available during the date range Total Days Checked Out This is the total number of calendar days items were checked out during the date range Quantity Weeks Billed If the invoice was created within the date range specified then the calculation is at the Invoice Rental detail level It is the days billed divided by 7 There is no prorating If the report is being run for the month of January and the invoice was billed in January then the Invoice Rental detail level is included The Invoice Rental level detail could be for several months All months would then be included in the weeks billed List Price Per Unit This is the unit replace price from the equipment table This is the price which would be charged to a client if the item 1s lost Total Revenue If the invoice was created within the date range specified then the Invoice Rental detail level is calculated This is the extended amount for the line item There is no prorating If the report is being run for the month of January and the invoice was billed in January then the Invoice Rental detail level is included The Invoice Rental level detail could be for several months All months would then be included in the revenue billed
368. ision 0002 ADMIN 3 23 2012 5 04 25 AM Order Salesperson SALLY Parent Warner Bros DUEDATE Ins Exp Date Due Date Contact Debbie Jacobs Production Parent Production Contact OrderH EES As you see in this image some functions of this section are included in the toolbar You can add parent records or production records here If you have selected a parent or production you can add new orders too For editing or browsing orders you may filter them by parent production or contact described earlier in this chapter After selecting an order you can see its brief information in the center box You can also click on any text to view or edit the details of each section such as parent contact production or order header details Note If an order has Order Notes Parent Notes or Production Notes a red box will appear in right section of Order Processing Screen If you click on the box you can see and edit the notes Some of these boxes are just alert e g Insurance Expired RTPro has ability to save order quote reservation revisions When an order is changed such as the days per week discounts usage dates or pricing of any sort the revision will be saved Saving the revisions is an option that can be activated in the System Setup For more details about this option refer to System Setup Saving Revisions If the save revision option is activated you can see the last revision in this screen You wi
369. isplays the Ist week price current week price and the ordered shipped prices broken up by subtotal tax and totals Shipping Charges The charge amount of shipping for both sales and rentals can be added through this screen Note In the Shipping Charges screen GL Account is required if Use GL is check marked through the System Setup Display Multiple Currency Prices BY pressing Display Multiple Currency Prices icon a small window will open at the bottom of Rental Order Screen to show the total rental charges of equipment in the order based on the currencies that are defined in the system Note In this window the selected currency for an order will be shown in a yellow color How to Order Equipment There are many ways to order equipment 1 In the top section of the Rental Order Entry Screen position on a blank line and enter an equipment code in equipment column and enter in a quantity lun Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc 2 The user can also select an equipment code from a list by pressing Alt Down Arrow when equipment column is highlighted 3 The user can use the drag and drop items from the tree list to the rental items area Select the Action and then Drag and drop or choose the F3 key 4 Add equipment from the pick list This is the T icon For more details on the pick list see Pick List Screen later in this chapter It is possible to add kits to rental list See Create and using
370. it Stock Range You can limit the range of stock displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending stock Leave these blank to show all stock You also can select multiple stock numbers To do this click on list icon in front of First Stock number and select each one you want to include in report Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print the value of the inventory for that currency only Current Cost If the Current Cost is selected the Current Cost from the sales stock table will be multiplied by the quantity on hand to reflect the value of inventory Average Cost If the Average Cost is selected the average cost calculated from the purchases will be used to multiply by the quantity on hand to reflect the value of inventory Purchase Amount If the Purchase Amount is selected the Inventory Purchase Amount will be multiplied by the quantity on hand to reflect the value of inventory Group by Department You can group the report results by department using this check box 249 Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Exclude Non Inventory items If the Exclude Non Inventory Items is checked program will not display Non Inventory items in the Multiple Selection and Lookups Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Sales Inventory Value Report Date Time
371. it F10 4 Browse Ordertt 481 Production JACKJILL Rti Studios a37 Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Pick list can be filtered by Department Category Equipment Code or Description Press F2 key or Click on Refresh button after selecting the fields to filter Equipment list will be displayed The items that are shown in black color are main items and gray ones are accessories for main item To add equipment to order enter quantity in Qty column When ordering a main item accessories can automatically be included You may setup the system to add them automatically by checking Auto Include Accessory option on the bottom of the pick list If the accessory quantities are not automatically included the user may manually enter in the quantities Once quantities are added click on Update Order button or press F3 function key The equipment ordered will add to order Press F10 or click on Update and Exit button to update order and close screen Note In the Rental Entry Pick list the accessory items are noted in gray and indented Once the items are posted back to the order the accessory items will show indented but will not be gray Note Users are able to modify the Actual Daily amp Actual Weekly amounts The program brings data from these two columns to the Rental Order Entry Screen This 1s only available when user is not using the REMOTE view Note Users are able to enter in customer and internal notes The pr
372. ity By Month 4 ar 4 or Pe Aa e ai i lt a on ne E E LA LT Revenue Generated Like the Revenue Generated Reports the data used to reflect the revenue generated is from confirmed invoices Generated by Month Generated by Quarter Generated by Year Example r Revenue Generated By Quarter File Customize Help melbESAJES Revenue Generated By Quarter i x 11 000 000 4 10 000 000 9 000 000 ff 54 000 000 D linfa 7 000 000 PA ON 26 000 000 e JA Es 000 000 f i EES F E 4 000 000 f Jus p 3 000 000 ol 3 nes 2 000 000 LR Prete TER 1 000 000 fes e 2 mm 3 ee es E Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Inventory Value This report shows the value of any equipment in your inventory during any particular period You Spey may choose to see rental value by Month Year Department DE or by Quarter You can filter the result by pro sf By Month Department Category Equipment Date range Eau By Quarter and Location Al A Example E4 Rental Inventory Yalue By Month File Customize Help E H DE20Ec H 60 Rental inventory Value By Month 90 000 000 a 5 LM May07 76 099 955 417 f M Oci07 76 039 955 417 E Sep07 76 039 955 417 amp 40 000 000 lr 30 000 000 4 20 000 000 10 000 000 of bard 3 ert E
373. ker Inc Overview Extremely Rugged Design b Withstands multiple 6 ft drops Multiple Scanning and to concrete Imaging Options gt IP 64 sealing rating to protect Allows short or long range against water and dust scanning of 1D bar codes optional imager supports 2D symbologies Field Replaceable Keyboard 43 and 53 position modular keyboard for maximum versatility Display nn P Large bright monochrome or color 3 8 inch 1 4 VGA display for improved ease of use and accuracy Power t Removable rechargeable battery pack for a longer life between charges Operating Systems H Choose to run Embedded Microsoft Windows CE NET Windows Mobile or terminal i emulation for legacy applications Handle Ergonomically designed to reduce operator fatigue increasing overall productivity Optional Accessories Single Slot Serial USB Cradle This cradle enables serial or USB communication between the MC9000 G and a host PC The cradle also charges the terminal with a 1700 mAh standard battery and a 1700 mAh standard spare battery stored in the cradle LEDs will indicate when the spare battery and terminal are fully charged Part Number CRD9000 1000S Four Slot Spare Battery Chargers This cradle charges four MC9000 G batteries simultaneously in approximately two hours Ideal for customers who communicate wirelessly but who need a cradle for battery charging only Part Number SAC9000
374. ker Inc Print Statements by Production In this report users can select single or multiple productions to see the statement of transactions Select the Statement Date and the As Of Date from the system Statement Date 02 2010 calendar To include the order information and unapplied payment As Of Date 104242011 hd in the report click their checkboxes su postin D You may see a result that looks like the following table F Include Order Information I Include Unapplied Payments Footer z OK X Cancel C List Save Example RTI Studios TASEA HEN 12481 Tejas Court Statement Rancho Cucamonga CA 91739 10 10 2010 888 595 8041 Page 1 ABC Studios 2222 Burbank Blvd Burbank CA 91111 MODERNFAM Modern Famil Date Transaction Amount Balance 1 11 2010 Balance Forward 6 17 2010 Invoice 670063 6 17 2010 Invoice 670064 6 17 2010 Invoice 670068 6 21 2010 Invoice 670072 6 21 2010 Payment CHECK 111 6 21 2010 Payment CHECK 33333 6 28 2010 Payment CHECK 7 6 2010 Invoice 670080 10 8 2010 Invoice 670084 10 8 2010 Invoice 670086 10 8 2010 Payment CREDIT 30 215 66 Current 1 30 Days 31 60 Days 61 90 Days Over 90 Days Amount Past Due Past Due Past Due Past Due Due 25 215 47 O 6 000 19 1 000 00 30 215 66 AR Footer goes here ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Statements by Parent This report will print the statements grouping in
375. l Begin Date UT revenue In report _ End Date 10 2 2011 Filter Options Include Credits Check this box to Subrental Vendor include credit records in report result Local rr Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in report by selecting begin and ending equipment Leave these fields blank to show all equipment Include Credis FF Date Range To filter report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Format You can include all records in report or select to print all invoices uploaded or non uploaded INVOICES Example ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Subrental Equipment Revenue Report Date Time 10 10 20 102 37 32PM Page 1 of 1 Date Range 1 1 2010 10 10 2010 Location LOSANGELES Currency USD Code Dwn non Sub Price gs 5 bal 1151DOGEAR Dog EaredFenoe OY o So DE on af or Green Slat Park Bench E RS 5200 00 0 00 E E
376. l Kit List or press its toolbar button L This screen could be filtered by Department Location or both to see the available rental kits If you leave these fields blank and press Refresh F2 button all rental kits in the inventory will be listed Note In the Rental Kit List screen rental kits can be added edited or deleted Double clicking on any record s row in this page will open the Rental Kit Detail screen and the content of each rental kit can be reviewed Refer to Rental Kit Detail Code DS Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Identify the Rental Kit with an alphanumeric code up to 10 characters in length Description The kit description can be alphanumeric and up to 50 characters in length to title the Kit As several kits may be similar it is suggested that the description used is a way to tell one kit from another Descriptions should be something that can be easy to find and recognized by all members of the staff Save Price It 1s possible to charge a different rental price for a type of equipment when it used in a package as opposed to its regular rental price Pricing adjustments can be made to either Daily or Weekly prices of the equipment codes used in the Rental Kit Check the Save Price box to save the pricing structure of the Kit Department This field is the department identifier for the kit Location If your company 1s setup as multi location the location identifies if a kit 1s only used and accessible f
377. l Stock Numbers this feature allows the sales income to divide among groups of inventory For example all Stock Numbers belonging to a particular department or category could have its own code while a range of numbers belonging to a different department or category could have a different code Thus the sales income posted to the GL would be broken down accordingly GL Cost of Sale When an invoice is created the Cost of Goods Sold account will be debited per the account assigned to this field Enter in the GL Cost of Sale field by typing in the account code or using the drop down arrow to choose an account from the General Ledger Lookup screen ES Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc GL Inventory When an invoice is created the Inventory GL account will be credited per the account assigned to this field Enter in the GL Inventory field by typing in the account code or using the drop down arrow to choose an account from the General Ledger Lookup screen Notes In this section enter information to the Stock Number that may be of help as a point of easy reference or operational instruction Suggestions include manufacturer or vendor information such as phone numbers or part numbers acceptable substitutions or historical information Adding Image Refer to the image screen section in this chapter Merge Stock RTPro can merge different Stock numbers together This function ERE xj is helpful when you have defined different codes
378. l be considered in the report As of Date The As of Date is the date the system will use to look across the orders for charges Other filter fields are production project sales person and location Note Location is available if your system is setup as multi location Refer to Multi Location option in Administration System Setup Extended to the end of the Weekly Cycle It means 1f the As of Date falls within a billing cycle then the orders ending date will be bumped to the end of the cycle Do not Bill beyond as of Date It means the system will stop the billing on the As of Date MN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Do not Bill Beyond Usage End Date It means the system will not bill beyond the Usage End Date of the order Group by Job Component This option can be used to group a report by the Job Components Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Orders To Bill Report Date Time 2006 06 12 46 57 hl As Of Date 2006 06 11 Charge Type RentalsBalesLossDbamage Production CONCOd ConcepLightingC ooperstownH allo ame A a cane 5200 00000 22 05 SE 712 48 5 muy AAA AA aa a 06 CTI sr 9 2 a En IS E ee CustomerTotals graeme E Job ComponentTotals as a DS NES DS Reportfotals 241 035 00 24600 7240 0 32719 22 267 345 17 Unbilled Repair Tickets This report represents the repair tickets that have not been billed and that have charges In this report only billable tickets will pr
379. l filter to show remaining items which are not checked in yet Select View Missing Rentals from Missing Rentals menu Retire All Missing Rentals When it is determined that the items remaining out on an order will not come back they can be checked in and retired in one easy step The missing items will be marked as Loss see the Loss Type earlier in this chapter and added to the Loss List Missing items can be billed as you invoice Loss items but an invoice can also be created from the Missing Rental Screen as part of the process To execute this procedure click on the Missing Rentals drop down tab and select Retire All Missing Rentals The Missing Rental screen will ask for a reason and offer the option to create an invoice Click OK to complete the process Note Retired Reason can be selected from a lookup table Rental In Detail Screen This function displays Check in transactions of the order The color of the rows will be different based on type of items Barcoded Items will be shown in white Subrentals as green Noncoded as cyan and miscellaneous items as yellow You can filter this list to show only one type of item or show all of them You can access this screen through the Rental Check in Screen using its toolbar icon or select Detail Transaction Record from View menu Check in By Production Check in By Production across Rental Orders A production may have different Rental orders Check in By Produc
380. l information about this item Remember that the information that is entered when adding the barcodes carries over from one barcode to the next until changed Thus if the comments apply to all of the items added enter them before starting If not be sure to edit the comments before moving on to the next lot or leave the comments area blank and input the information later on the individual barcode s to which the comment applies Quantity to Add Enter the number of items to add in this batch If using the Auto Assign Barcodes feature see above this is the number of new barcodes that will be created and added to system If you are inputting the barcodes the system will stop you when you have reached the Quantity to add Serial No If the Enter Serial box see above has been checked when each barcode has added the system will force users to add the serial number for each barcode Barcode When Auto Assign Barcodes feature is not used scan the barcode or enter the barcode number in Barcode field Rental Barcoded Items Added in This Session This box displays the rental barcodes when they are added to inventory at that moment Barcode Printer Setup RTPro allows printing barcode and equipment code labels through the application The labels can be designed to suit your shop When designing the label consult Rental Tracker for details View Barcoded Subrental History If subrentals are checked out with barcodes by using the ven
381. l of your rental assets can be a challenge even in the best of circumstances This feature of the program will give you the ability to increase the physical inventory speed Note At anytime during the process the physical inventory session can be ended All selection criteria and any counts that were entered will erase as though the process never started The Physical Inventory reports for this session will not be available Please see End Physical Inventory Process later in this chapter for more details You can take physical inventory for both Barcoded items and Noncoded ones as shown in the pictures Physical Inventory Barcoded Information Barcode The barcode that you want to count in this physical inventory Last Equipment The code of last equipment added to this physical inventory Last Quantity The number of the last taken equipment Equipment The equipment code of the item that you want to count in physical inventory Quantity The number of items that you want to count in physical inventory for the above equipment View Barcode This page gives the ability of viewing the detail of all Barcoded inventory Mii items This screen is available only in the RF mode In addition the picture of the equipment is visible to show for wireless users For viewing Barcode c000000 i Serial sr121581700 the Image user must click on the View Image button and see the Image Equipment 00215 in a separate screen ARRI 5751 12
382. language you may add a new entry into the table Refer to Translation Table for more details Translation Table Within RTPro screen labels can be changed This feature allows for customizing words or phrases to make them more significant to your shop An example of changing a screen name would be changing the label Production to Customer Translation changes affect screen labels and reports On opening this screen if Multi language option is enabled a dialog box will ask to choose a language to customize otherwise default translation table will open To change a screen label Click on the The Translation Setup Screen will appear Enter in the original label name This original label name should be spelled exactly as seen on the screen Enter in the translation name Checkmark Partial Match if you like system to change any occurrence of the word in any phrases For example if you like the word Production change to Customer in Production Type checkmark partial match and put the translation for Production as Customer If partial match is not selected then Production Type will not change Note Screen icons that are defined as an abbreviation can also be changed Note Translation is case sensitive and user should care about case of words User Setup fi RTPro is a multi user system and user login IDs can be created This will give you a control on what features and functions an individual can perfo
383. lay in red Over Counted quantity is higher than Quantity On Hand The line will display in green Match Counted quantity is equal with Quantity On Hand The line will display in white i Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc You have some options to filtering the sales items such as Location Department Category and Stock Range You can define your filtering criteria by these options and then click on Start Sales PI button to see the result 8 Sales Physical Inventory Screen s o o mice File Search View Help Pe O Match M Short c A Y amp Al Over Show All Location LOSANGELES Stocktt Y 4 Update Inventory Department v Pange 2 Print Worksheet E 5 Stop Sales PI Category az 3 Edit Quantity Quantity Quantity On Hand Counted Ditierence Stock Description 12WHMIGLOB 14000 12000 W GS HMI Globe 18K Alpha Head m 18000 11 18HMIDEGB 2100LUMENS Sml Video Pro Plus Bank 8125 18K HMI D E Globe 0 0 2100 Lumens Projector 0 0 gt ARCLITEX 7 Xenon Are Light 7000 Storage Bag B Storage Bag C Case 1 Arnwse The steps to perform the sales physical inventory are as follows 1 Start Sales Pl When you click on this button all sales items in stock with their expected quantity will show on the screen 2 Print Worksheet a This button will print the sales physical inventory grid 3 Edit Quantity When clicking on this b
384. layout including the user date and time use the standard RTPro notes screen From the View dropdown at the top of the screen click on notes or click on the Notes icon Mult Location Gte Owr If company set up to use multi location the function a list next to the Location Qty Note section will appear and display quantity of this item per location CALGARY 7 If RTPro is set up to Use Images an image can be added for equipment i i HALIFA 3 Users can take a picture of equipment and attach it to Rental Equipment REGINA 4 Entry Screen TORONTO E Use the Image menu or right click on Image position top right of VANCOUVER 3 screen Refer to Image Screen section later in this chapter for more WINNIPEG 1 details Total 30 Default settings On the lower right hand side of the Rental Equipment Entry Screen there are a series of default settings that have influence on different levels of the system for each Equipment Code Accessory Item Check this box if this equipment code can be used as an accessory item for another equipment Barcoded Only If this box is checked all inventory items added to this equipment code must be Barcoded For the most accurate availability and inventory control it is not recommended having both Barcoded and Noncoded inventory items under the same equipment code If this box 1s checked Noncoded items will not be allowed to be added from this equipment code As well during the check out process system w
385. lect the CPanel Examplo communications settings Double tap on Ctl Panel icon double tap Comm Settings The Comm Settings window appears Note On MC3000 scanners double tap on Otl double tap on Ctl Panel icon In CtlPanel Example select Comm Settings With Port highlighted use the left and right arrow buttons to select the appropriate communication setting Comm port selection values are USB default setting Seriall 115200 Seriall 57600 mn e Seriall 38400 or v gt lt cancel Tap OK to return to the Control Panel window Start gt Gr y Note When sending batch data via port user should make sure the scanner default communication method is Serial Note After cold boot the scanner will reset the communication port to its default value Date Time Setting Use the RTPro Date Time Setting window to set the date HA and time for the mobile computer RTPro has the ability to synchronize the date and time of the scanner with the date and time of the PC running RF Server if Sync Date Time with Server is checked in RF Setting Form Date ji llis 2011 Time 10 l Le ETS Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc RF Login After selecting the RF Mode on the first screen of the program is the login to the program User should use the same user id and password that they use on the RTPro desktop application If you get an error that says Cannot co
386. les This only applies 1f there is one order attached to the PO If more than one Order and if the order has no billing schedule program will not prompt any Masa ix All Subrental Records for this Order RTI Studios File Action Search View Help TA 9 79 10 00LF1325 DOLFNZS F11 4WayLowLevelHead 87777 1 MOLE 2 6 25 2008 1 22 2009 Dak 15 00 E 108 00 EN aT TACOCART TACOCART Taco Cat ana 4 MOLE 2 6 25 2009 8 5 2008 E 10 00 900 10 432 00 GENBODA GENBODA Generator BOQA Towable Plant 87777 1 MOLE 26 25 2008 7 22 2009 Dah P 40000 4 50000 10 36 000 00 GENBODA CABCAMSO CableCamok P7777 2 MOLE 2 6 25 2008 1 22 2003 Daly F 600 3540 10 SEM GE MB CABDISIN1 Diduda Rod arri 2 MOLE Zev f 22 200 Dab le 10 00 AO 10 44 00 GENS GENGRDCAB Ground Cable Package 87777 1 MOLE 26 25 2008 7 22 2008 Daly W 440 00 35 00 10 288 00 GENS004 HAMMER Haine 87777 1 MOLE 26 25 2008 7 22 2008 Dal M 32 00 23 90 10 230 40 GENBODA GENTZODAMP 1200Amp CLIZ36 87777 1IMOLE 2 6 5 2008 6 5 2009 Dady F sowo 000 10 1 080 00 196 Purchase Order O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CS Subrental PO Invoice Plan RTPro Demo Company Es Ek 0 x File Search View Record Help JE vo Quoted Actual Amount i a aoa Eiaa At anane Doe 1 6 25 2009 7 2008 3 554 20 2 74272009 7 9 2003 3 754 20 3 7 9 2009 411542009 39 754 20 4 7 16 2009 742272009 9 754 20 5 7 23 2009 2
387. lf always Enter the quantity here for the point this product should be reordered When the quantity on hand falls below this level the Stock Number will show up on the Sales Reorder Report to prompt you to order more Reorder Quantity When restocking this Item this quantity should be ordered As with the Reorder Point minimum purchase requirements delivery time and activity for a product may dictate the quantity to reorder Vendor If this product is normally purchased from the same vendor enter it here Type the Vendor Code or use the drop down arrow and choose a vendor from the Vendor Lookup screen If this product is frequently purchased from multiple sources use the Notes section to enter other Vendors Vendor Part No If the vendor listed in the Vendor field uses a part number for this product enter it here Like the Vendor field above additional part numbers can be added in the Notes section Manufacturer Enter the manufacturer of this product Manufacturer Part No Enter the manufacturer s part number GL Income Sales income to post to general ledger derived from the general ledger income account assigned to each equipment code If the Category field is used the GL Income code will default from the Category field Otherwise enter in the GL Income field by typing in the account code or using the drop down arrow to choose an account from the General Ledger Lookup screen Although the same GL Income account may be used on al
388. line Note To remove items from list set their quantity to zero Note If No Charge column is checked then program will set Rental Discount Percentage to 100 Rental Locked to and Rental Actual Price to 0 and Rental Extended to 0 Note If No Charge column is checked program prints Discount Actual Price columns as blank and the word No Charge in the Extended column for the Quote Sheet Checkout Sheet Current Week Contract and Invoice Detail reports Note If you remove or change equipment that has accessories the system will ask the user if the accessories should be updated if yes the accessories will be removed from the order as well Note The program allows you to type on the quantity for the 2nd level accessory items in the Rental Order Screen and in both pick list methods ONLY if Allow Modify 2 Level Accessory is checked in LS Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc System Setup Please note that if the quantity changed to Zero then the accessory line will be removed from the rental list Rental Miscellaneous Items Miscellaneous Rental Items can be added to an order These are items which a rental equipment code does not exist To add a miscellaneous item enter Description Quantity and Price Also other information such as Discount Replacement Price and Taxable can be set for each item To add additional miscellaneous lines press the down arrow key after the last miscellaneous entry Miscellaneous lines sho
389. ll display To select a range of records click on one row then hold down the SHIFT and click on the ending line The block will highlight To select rows that are not in order click on the first row hold CTRL key and click on other rows Each selected row will highlight When clicking on a line make sure you clicked on the record in the grid section not the left gray column Ce all Subrental Records for this Order RTPro Demo Company File Action Search view Help a Avec M ey HMIFI0005 12 18K HMI FRES PACKAGE CMC HMIFI0G0S HMIFIO305 12 18K HMI FRES HEAD HMILADOOS 18K HMI FRESNEL LAMP HMIFIDOOS MAGBAGDOS 12 18 HMI BALLAST HMIFI0005 HMIACONIS 12 18K HMI BALLAST FEEDER CABLE mee HMIFIDOOS HMIHEODIO 12 18K HEAD EXT 50 119002200 HMIFI0005 SCRIMOOOS 29 SCRIM SET 119002200 HMIFIOOOS SCRIMO325 SCRIMS 1 2 SINGLE 29 118002200 HMIFIDOOS SCRIMO330 SCRIMS 1 2 DOUBLE 29 119002200 HMIFI0005 SCRIMO335 SCRIMS FULL SINGLE 29 119002200 HMIFIDODS SCRIMO340 SCRIMS FULL DOUBLE 29 4 Browse Ordertt 25214 Production 20000 QUOTES Subrental Defaults RTPro Demo Company Customer Usage BeginDate Customer UsageEndDate Customer DailyAWeekly Customer DaysPerWeek Customer Discount Lock Unlock Vendor el I Use Vendor Defaults POR x Vendor Usage Begin Date Vendo Usage End Date Vendor Daiy Weekh Vendor Days Perweek Vendor Discount Lode r Un
390. ll items checked in as Damage will display in Damage List To see this list select Damage List from Loss amp Damage menu In Damage List the Cost column is defaulted over from Replacement Price in Rental Equipment Entry Screen Note Double clicking on Repair Ticket cell will bring up the Repair Ticket Screen The repair ticket can then be edited Other Important Check In functions 4 a This icon opens a report menu Printing Return List In this report program prints a list of items that should be returned Options are Rentals or SubRentals in ordered by department or equipment code and for remaining items or complete list On many occasions you may find it useful to print a Return List before beginning the Check in process Like the Pull List the Return List can be used for users to make handwritten notes about the equipment that is being returned Printing Check in Sheet This report has different options which are explained as follows Return and Remaining Items This report shows the returned items and items which are still out for an order All Returned Items Using this option shows all the items that have been returned by the customer Partial Returns This prints items returned within a specified date range Remaining Items It shows remaining items that are still out Loss Damage Only The report prints items which were returned as loss or damaged Unbilled L amp D Only The report prints items which were ret
391. ll see the user code of the person who revised this order quote reservation date and time of revision In the same section you can see some helpful information such as Order Type Quote Reservations and Order Activity Sales Rentals PO required indicator Expired Insurance and over credit limit indicator Only some of these indicators are available Steps to add a New Quote Reservation Order To add a new rental quote reservation order first determine 1f there is a production company already established for the order MS Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc To check if the production company exists click on the lu next to the Production label A list of all productions customers will be listed If the Production exists double click on the Production If the Production does not exist then 1t can be added When the production 1s selected from the Production List the system will return to Order Processing Screen To add a new order click on the r icon The system will prompt to add a new order then select Yes Order Header Screen will appear Once a quote reservation order 1s created the next common steps would be 1 Order equipment and sales items 2 Print the quote 3 Print a pull list for the warehouse workers to pull the equipment 4 Checkout the Rental Items and Ship Sales The process for each is explained later in this chapter Another way to add a quote reservation order From the product
392. llar Lost Increase 1 0 00 Rall UP to the nearest dollar es ae Rollover New Rental Prices As price change entries are made in the Update Rental Prices Screen see above they will not update to the Equipment Table This allows you to continue to prepare and review the price changes until you are ready to update them all at once By clicking on Update Prices drop down tab or click on Rollover New Rental Prices you will come to this screen The update may be limited to a Department Category or combination Click on the Update Prices drop down menu and select Rollover New Rental Prices There will be the option to choose department and or category This allows for limiting the update If you wish to update across all equipment codes leave these fields blank Department If updating prices by Department enter in a department type in the Department Code or click the drop down arrow to choose a department from the Department Lookup Category If updating prices by a Category enter in the Category code or by clicking the drop down arrow to choose a Category from the Rental Category Lookup ji Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Leaving the Department and Category blank will update all Click OK if you wish to continue A Confirm screen will appear Click Yes to continue Another Confirm screen will appear asking if you are sure Click Yes to continue and finish the process Rollover New Sales Prices As
393. lling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Under some circumstances an invoice may need to be voided An invoice could not be deleted but can be set to void When setting an invoice to void system will ask for a reason The reason will be stored on the voided invoice header In addition a record will be written to system log showing the date and user who voided the invoice Orders attached to a voided invoice will be released for billing Delete Preview A preview is an estimated billing which does not lock in totals for an order Delete Draft A draft is an unconfirmed invoice If a draft is deleted the orders attached to the draft will be released for billing Void Credit A credit is an invoice with a negative amount Note There are various options available within right click menu on the Invoice Screen Select a desired row in Order section Right click on the selected order and choose one of the available options in the list to edit on the order view order notes view invoice detail or to remove order from this invoice Export Invoices RTRpo has ability to export invoices in different file formats that could import on many inventory Accounting software such as Quick Book AccPack etc To export invoices users have to define a specific path where invoices should be uploaded Press Verify Upload to validate invoices for uploading then click Create Upload to create a file that contains exported invoices x Export Invoices Screen
394. losed status then the production must have all items returned and billing must be completed When marking a production as closed the system will check over all the orders for the production and will give a message whether it can or cannot be closed Once a production 1s marked as Closed a process can be run in RTPro to move closed productions to history When a production is moved to history then all the orders rental amp sales activity and billing will be moved to history for that production The information in history can be reviewed and restored to live area within the History module Refer to the Administration module month end closes section for details on moving productions amp orders to history Payment Type Payment Type should identify the typical way that the production will pay for invoices The payment type will default over to orders when new orders are created The payment type is validated against a table The payment type can be entered or selected from the table To setup pay type refer to the Payment Type entry screen in file maintenance section There are several reports that can be run against a payment type Certificate of Insurance Required This box should be checked when the production company should have a certificate of insurance on file There 1s an option in system setup to warn a user if an insurance policy has expired If this box 1s check marked and certificate has not been entered or has expired user will
395. lows ECS Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E Invoice Screen RTPro Demo Company File View History Confirm Void Record Help lt 326153 ci ar amp Invoice i gt 0 Date Created 3217 2010 5 09 00 PhCrested By LU Managing Dept Date Range 3 2 2010 3842010 Production 20269 Billing Hame AVION FILM PRODUCTIONS INC Teins NET 30 Biling Address 517 Wellington St Ww Upload Include Billing Cont Accounts LL Production Type Comm y Vas Type Notes Credit for taal MEN Fri Checks Credit cal CardH ae TE 13 2720 0 3 8 201 0 12 740 00 ro T 00 1024 20 10 269 20 ET 4 LE Edit Rental Subtotal a MT oe _Bilable Discount Subtotal Tax Total Rentals 173066107048 z 11 zI O0 3435 00 8 1 55 OO 975 60 3 133 60 Sales e 225 00 0 00 225 00 27 00 252 00 Shipping O 155 00 155 00 418 60 173 60 Labor 111599000505 L 4160 00 0 00 160 00 0 00 160 00 Space E 550 00 0 00 550 00 0 00 550 00 Total 2740 00 3 495 00 9 245 00 1 024 20 10 269 20 ENE 7 4 Browse Payment Type CREDIT Job Component Upload Batchtt 103 Upload Date 3 17 2010 est Definition of Invoice fields PO If a PO covers all the orders attached to the invoice PO can be entered The PO will roll back to all the orders attached to the invoice The PO will default from the order if there is one order attached to the invoice Project The invoice can be linked
396. lso Quantity Billed and Billed Revenue for each equipment code User has option of Include or Exclude Subrental and Misc items to this report This report is available in Summary and Detail In Summary format user Department J y vendor can also select a Grouping Category Eeri The information for this report comes E cs MO lt Equipment E roduction from the Items Checked Out and also Range Project Invoices that are generated TETE For rental part items checked out Lee Location El ange 1431 2012 program looks at the checkout date For invoices it looks at begin and end date on the Rental Invoice Detail information Format Order Ey i Parent Equipment Summary Production Vendor Detail Include Subrentals E Include Miscellaneous W OK X Cancel List Save Filter Options Department Select department to limit report to show only items for this department Leave this option blank to show results for all departments Category Select category to limit report to show only items for this category Leave this option blank to show results for all categories Date Range Displays the detail of changes between this specified date ranges Vendor Select vendor to limit report to show only items for selected vendor Leave this option blank to show results for all matching vendors Parent Select parent to limit rep
397. lti location there will be a list of locations available select location for this profile from the locations list Each profile may have permission to add discounts to rentals or sales It can be defined here If these values are zero each user linked to the profile cannot add discounts Profile also may have permission to change Days Per Week for rentals this also can be set here If the discount and days per week is blank the user has no restrictions to adjusting DPW or discounts To permit or prohibit user or profile to gain access on departments or locations 1 Highlight a department or a location in Prohibited area 2 Click on the lt icon the selected item will be moved to the permitted side The gt gt moves all users listed on the permitted side to the prohibited side The lt lt moves all users listed on the prohibited side to the permitted side Save the record by clicking on the post icon or by pressing F10 so Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc s User Entry Screen RTPro Demo Company File Record Help D Belong to Profile x Profile CHK_1 User Code Profile 7 User Name Alek User Security Rights Printout Users linked to Profile Printout Manual Setting Password Dis Profile or not Maximum Sales Disc Force Password Change D Inac T Force Login as Remote User e Disable for Profiles 3 Depariments Locations Permitted Departments Prohibited Departmen
398. ludes sale items on the report sheet Cost Sheet This report will print the cost of sales and sub rentals for the selected order and the price of the production customer charged You can choose to print Sub Rentals Only Sub Rentals for Current Weekly Cost Sales Only or Sub Rentals and Sales If you choose to print sold items you have option to print Current Costs or average cost Subrental Vendor Select a vendor to print equipment subrented from a specified vendor Print Weekly Total This option 1s available only when either Subrentals Only or Subrentals and Sales is selected When this box is checked program prints Weekly Vendor Cost and Weekly Customer Price on the bottom left of the report after the grid totals Print PO Print Po checkbox is enabled for all user selection options except Sales Only When it is checked program prints subrental purchase order in PO column Shipping Labels This report will print mail label for an order You can see what will be printed in preview on the right side of the screen Print Return Address The return address will be included on the printed label Shipping Address Shipping address of the order will be printed on the label Billing Address Billing address of the order will be printed on the label Enter Address Customer address can be entered and edited in text boxes on preview screen Number of Copies Enter number of copies you want to print here Label Setting The dim
399. m each vendor Department Shows only the sales stock belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the sales stock belonging to this Category First Last Stock Filters the report between first and last stock You also can select multiple stock numbers To do this click on the list icon and select each one you want to include in the report EC Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only Currency If you are using multi currency features you can select the currency to show properly the cost of items to reorder Example Rental Tracker Pro Sales ReorderReport Date Time 3 27 2012 1 01 56PM Page 1 of 1 Order By Description Description Vendor Manufacturer Quantity Minimum Quantity Cost Total Cost Part Part On Hand On Hand ToOrder PINE3 1 X 12 X16 Pine A 000 10001 100 00 Ea 10 00 1 000 00 PLYWOODAX 1 4 Plywood 4x8 p80 20 00 100 00 Ea 10 00 1 000 00 12WHMIGLOB 12000 WIGS HMI Globe pT 200 500 Ea 10 00 50 00 14000 i8KAlphaHead_________ __ ____ 100 ICBAGCAMPR CineBagCameraProductionBag 000 10 00 Ea si000 100 00 ICBAGGELLR CineBagGelSheetRoll______ 5 00 12 00 Ea 510 00 120 00 ICBAGJUMBP CineBagsJumboPouch 0 00 10 00
400. me 2006 06 18 33 4 M DateRange 2006 06 18 Format Summary Location LA Currency US Code Description Sales Rate Tax Sales Rentals Rate Tax Rentals Tax m e A A ET p oa A a A ono A SE EEE E Of ea TEA 18 00 o ao pt 57070287 AE Report Total 540960 35 72 10 976 12 632 08460 540421438 35 72 DS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Tax Liability Report Tax1 Tax2 Rate Break Down A report listing the taxes collected are broken down by PIPA TSR px Tax rates The information on this report is gathered from the confirmed invoices F e lees on Summary Location Options C Taxlype Format Summary prints one summary line for each tax C Detal C Invoice type Detail prints one row for each invoice a Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on Begn Date PS gt the report You can sort the report by Location Tax Type End Date 1072 2011 Invoice if detail format is selected Date Range Filters the report to the invoices created between the given date range If begin date is blank 1t will print all the invoices created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print all the invoices created on or after the begin date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Currency If you are using the m
401. me can be entered in this field Within system setup sort order can be setup as code or name When entering a value the system will validate against the sort order RTPro has an auto populating feature which goes to the closest occurrence of the record as the value typed in If the parent field is filled in and if it is clicked on the then only the productions for the parent will list This is very helpful when reviewing the productions across a parent Contact BE After selecting a contact in this list click on the order En and a list of orders for the selected contact will display The El icon will show a list of all contacts Urder Se You can enter an order number here The lu icon shows a list menu to choose the most recent 50 200 or all orders If one of the parent contact or production fields was filled in before clicking this icon will show the full list immediately showing orders for that order production or contact There are many fields which are validated against tables Some of these types of fields are Tax Type and Production Type Parent and Product For details on adding codes to these tables see the File Maintenance section CN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ES Order Processing Screen CPP File Listing Parent Production Contact Order Process Gilling Reports Help Pa Pr 4 Or R S gt Out R 5 In Or Pr Pa Al P le oe Currently Working On Order 386 Last Rev
402. ment will print in Equipment Pick List Do not allow checking out more than available If this is checked then when an item is checked out the quantity owned the quantity already checked out must be greater or equal than the quantity user wants to checkout for that location If there is not enough available to meet the checkout quantity program displays a message Not enough available to checkout Quantity available is xx Serial Number Required If this box is checked all inventory items that are added to this equipment code must have a serial number Show on Defaults This section of the Rental Equipment Entry Screen dictates where this equipment code will display or print RTPro checks all boxes as defined in the system setup To change click on the box to remove the check mark and this equipment code will not appear on that function You can choose to show Item on Order Entry in equipment pick list quote Pull List Contract Invoice For example you may wish for all items including accessories to print on the Pull List so that shop personnel know every item that is needed for the job You may even wish to print all items on the Contract so client knows everything he is receiving and responsible for However on the invoice you may want to show main items or those items chargeable for clarifying on the invoice In this example Show on Pick List as Main and Show on Contract should be checked The Show on Invoice
403. mer Notes in the Description column of the Invoice Detail report Print Days Weeks If checked program prints the value of days weeks for rentals in printout sheet Creating a Non Order Invoice You can create an invoice that is not attached to an order You can use this function to create an invoice for miscellaneous charges or perhaps a credit invoice To do this choose production select Create Non Order Invoice from Create menu of Billing Module Select the Create option on the top menu bar An Invoice Draft Header will display Add charges to Invoice Draft Refer to Definition of Invoice fields for details on adding miscellaneous charges Once Draft is complete invoice should be confirmed Refer to Confirm a Draft to an invoice Quick Search Toolbar Quick Search allows you to search for an invoice quickly 1 Search for invoices for a specific Parent and Production Enter in the Parent Code and then enter in the Production If you do not know the Parent click on the El button to bring up a lookup table Once you have filled in the Parent code and Production click on the E button on the Invoice This will bring up all the invoices for the specific Parent and Production you have selected 2 Search the entire list of invoices Click on the E button The system will give the option to see the last 50 200 or all invoices Options Available in Invoice Screen File menu Print Invoice Draft This feature brings up the print opti
404. mputer can restore during the next ActiveSync operation To perform a cold boot Press and hold the Power button for approximately 20 seconds As the unit cycles into a cold boot appears in the upper left corner of the display window followed by the message Booting System Release the Power button As the mobile computer initializes its system the Symbol splash window appears for about 30 seconds Calibrate the screen Troubleshooting Cannot Synchronize with PC Check Cable Check to make sure the link cable is correctly connected to the pc and the cradle Check Setting on the ActiveSync to allow COM or USB On Microsoft ActiveSync select the Connection Settings submenu under File menu If you are using the serial cable for connecting to the scanner check the Allow serial cable or infrared connection to this COM port and then select a proper COM port from the available list If you are using the USB cable for connecting to the scanner check the Allow USB connection with this desktop computer Check the COM Setting on the scanner to make sure it matches the COM or USB setting Open MC9000 Control Panel is selecting the Symbol Setting on the start menu and double click the Comm Settings section If you are using the serial cable select the Seriall 115200 ports If you are using the USB cable select the USB port Make sure REPLLOG EXE was not renamed to REPLLOGO EXE Open the Windows folder of the scanner and make sure the R
405. ms are received the quantity will be added to the Sales Inventory with the new destination location 1460 Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Checkout Sellable Items In Rental Equipment Entry Screen there is an option to mark an equipment code as Sellable In the Sales Checkout Screen the user 1s able to sell barcoded and non barcoded items sil By clicking on the Noncoded Sales icon the Sales Noncoded Equipment screen will display User can select the equipment code from a drop down The equipment codes that are not marked as barcoded only and are marked as sellable items will display The user can then enter in a quantity If there is not enough in stock of that equipment code the user cannot continue Program displays a message Not enough inventory to sell Note Noncoded items can be canceled by selecting Cancel Noncoded Sales through the right clicking menu Items cannot be canceled 1f the items have been billed By clicking on the Sales Barcoded Equipment icon the user can enter in a barcode sell The user can continue to enter in barcodes to sell until the stop sign is clicked on Sk This allows canceling of a sold barcoded item Sold barcoded items cannot be canceled if the items have been billed The user can continue the cancel barcoded sales until the stop sign is clicked on Stock Detail Screen Using this option new items can be added or existing items can be edited into the sales stock table To access t
406. n Not Marked for Upload Both choose to include Uploaded or Not Uploaded invoices and credits in the report Use filtering options to see the From Date DE 010 result You can also include the GL breakdown using To Date hozam gt Include GL Breakdown j Production Typs Include GL Breakdown Dour gt Cunency 7 OK X Cancel O Lia Save wy Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Batch Upload Billing Report Date Time 2006 06 12 12 21 04PM ReportType Uploaded Status Invoice DateRange 2000 06 12 2006 06 1 2 Location LA SP EE SR ee Date el 995 an eekend lott 2003 04 19 2006 01 24 12345 1S 575 12 PP Eu DE Es sae BE DE bo RE ee Title Name Date RE TAN ee a IEEE CE CE E e o 504 876 20 ES Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Subrental Invoice Detail The Subrental Invoice Detail report prints a list of sub rentals separated by vendor and the invoice can be seen You can filter this report by date range vendor production and if your company is multi location with location You can also choose to print uploaded invoices non uploaded or all of them C Subrental Invoice Report RTPro Demo HP xj Vendee Production Nor Uploaded Invoices All Order Regn Dale End Date Location Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company subrental Invoice Report Date Time 2006 06 12 72 30 30FM Location
407. n Return Drop Ship CancelShip CancelReturn CancelReceive Transfer Item is added tosystem Item is added tosystem ltemis added tosystem Userships items Userreturns items Userdrop ships items Usercancels ship items 7 there are existing shipments when not enough was available the purchase will deplete lf there are existing shipments when not enough was available the adjustment will deplete If there is not enough purchases or positive adjustment quantities the record will not get FIFO d until there is arecord to deplete The record will deplete the FIFO purchases Adjustments The record will increase the FIFO purchases Adjustments which was effected by the transfer out The record will deplete the FIFO purchases Adjustments The record will increase the purchases Adjustments records which were effected The record will deplete the FIFO purchases adjustments The record will increase the purchases Adjustments records which were effected The record will decrease the purchases Adjustments records which were effected The original transfer receive will be deleted and the items will go back to the transfer from location The purchase adjustment record will be increased If there is a negative adjustment purchase will deplete if there is a negative adjustment the positive adjustment will depleted Once there isa positive purchase adjustment the record will be depleted
408. n Search Help FAYYS 0 Department E bd Category y Ca Refresh F2 a Hide Accessories Equipment Description A ver Fume men ele ee vem 7 14000 14000 18K Alpha Head 1 320 00 320 00 1 300 00 1 300 00 p 14000 1812FFPGB 18K12K FF Powergem Ballast 1 60 00 60 00 300 00 300 00 14000 1512KPOWE 18K 12K 6K Power Feeder 1 14000 14000 01 220 F Bates To M Camlock 18K 1 14000 14000 02 18K Alpha Fresnel Lens 14000 14000 03 18K Alpha Clear Lens f Rim 14000 14000 04 18K12K Fresnel 29 5Pc Scrim Set 1 10 00 10 00 50 00 50 00 14000 18HMIDEGE 18K HMI D E Globe 1 25 00 25 00 20 00 70 00 14000 14000 05 18K Alpha Lens Protector Circular 1 14000 14000 06 18K Alpha Lens Road Case 10 00 10 00 50 00 50 00 14000 HEADEXT1 18K 12K 6K HMI 50 Head Ext 2 5 00 5 00 25 00 25 00 14000 18000 55 30 Chimera Lantern 14000 14000 18K Alpha Head 1 320 00 320 00 1 300 00 1 300 00 14000 1512FFPGE 18K12K FF Powergem Ballast 1 60 00 60 00 300 00 300 00 14000 1812KPOVVR 186K 12K 6K Power Feeder 1 14000 14000 01 220 F Bates To M Camlock 18K 1 14000 14000 02 18K Alpha Fresnel Lens 14000 14000 03 18K Alpha Clear Lens YY Rim 14000 14000 04 18K 12K Fresnel 29 5Pc Scrim Set Vv 1 10 00 10 00 50 00 50 00 14000 18HMIDEGE 18K HMI D E Globe 25 00 25 00 70 00 70 00 a 4 p Auto Include Accessor Vv s Update Order F3 Update amp Ex
409. n program will delete all Pricing and Equipment description for that location Barcode Auto Populate Prefix By this feature system will automatically populate a desired prefix when adding barcodes For instance when a company wants to have barcodes with different prefixes in different locations they should define the prefix for the location Local Data Path for Remote Users RTPro has ability to save some specific files for users that might be connected to the server remotely Local Data Path is the path of directory where these files can be saved on the client s computers Save Revisions If the checkbox is checked and when an order is revised the revision will be saved into the Revision Path Revision Path This is a directory path where the revisions are stored Loss Damage Taxable Due to the different laws for states the loss and damage taxable flag could be different per location ES File Maintenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Footers A different footer can be used on a Quote Checkout Pull List Checkin Repair Ticket Sales Return and Invoice for each location When a report is printed the program allows a footer to be selected Default footer can be setup on the location level and if the location level has no default footer the footer that 1s assigned in system setup will be used Header Files A Customized header can be created for the locations and linked to the Quote Checkout Sheet Contract Checkin Sheet Invoice
410. n the Repair Ticket Screen Labor Detail This option displays detail of the labor charges breakdown This option is available 1f the Labor module is used Customized Output A This screen 1s mostly used to allow the user to enter a summarized version of the invoice and print that one instead of printing the normal invoice There will be a button on this screen that is called Default from Ist Order If this 1s selected then the description lines will default in from the Customized Rental Order Screen of the Ist order attached to the invoice Invoice Shipping Charges Detail This screen shows the detail of shipping charges for an order You will get access to this screen by double clicking on the Shipping if existed in the lower grid of the Invoice Screen History Menu Restore from history If you are viewing an invoice in history you can restore it from history to live using this option Confirm Menu Confirm Invoice Credit This option will confirm an invoice from a draft Once an invoice is confirmed totals cannot be adjusted Note If your company uses the AR module to confirm the invoice GL Account distribution must balance Change Invoice Date The Change Invoice Date allows changing an invoice creation date Enter the new creation date or use the calendar by pressing drop down arrow on the prompted screen and press OK Note This option is enabled only for Invoice and Credit Void Menu Void Invoice Mo Bi
411. nc 326195 CASH Invoice 20000 11 27 2010 5 07 00 Pt 326104 PE EEE CREDIT C Preview Print Selected Invoices Mark Selected Invoices As Not Uploaded Print Grid Ctrl G Save Grid to Reset Grid Settings to Default Mark Selected Invoices As Not Uploaded Program allows user to mark invoices as not uploaded in Invoice List screen To do so select one or more invoices from the list and then right click anywhere on the grid and select Mark Selected Invoices as NOT Uploaded option Users can select multiple invoices by holding the Ctrl key and pressing on each invoice Or by selecting an invoice and then holding the Shift key and selecting another invoice to select all invoices between of 2 invoices Ctrl A can be used to select all invoices on the Invoice List screen Use this option with caution An invoice marked as not uploaded will mark the invoices as though it has never been sent to the see ae invoice will be eligible to asu n Print Selected Invoices Mark Selected Invoices 45 Hot Uploaded Save Grid bo 326170 129215 6 19 2010 4 4 Reset Grid Settings to Default f f en E Print Grid Ctrl 6 m EAE E gt f Batch Invoice There is an option within RTPro that allows you to create an invoice for orders in batch method From the Billing Module select Batch Invoice Screen under Batch menu Note If your company is multi location you should select location before continue The Batch Invoice Scre
412. nd ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Note You can include all records in report or select to print all invoices uploaded or non uploaded invoices Rental 537 275 00 RES re O 53 310 00 56 480 00 Customers Page 1 of 1 Baal A Bell 3200 00 ime Cassie Dake oc En Display Code Fe Dees F 20000 QUOTES 20001 MILLENNIUM PICTURES 0003 SPARES PRODUCTIONS 20004 ER OWN ENTERTAINMENT INC 20006 ELINK PICTURES INC 20006 GREEN DOT FILMS 20007 CODE FILM INC 20008 STEAM FILMS INC 20006 4410 FILM PRODUCTIONS INC 200 SFr ENTERTAINMENT 20012 WORLD WIDE TY ASSOCIATES 20013 MONSTER SLATER PRODULTIOR co 4 Tw THREE FWE INC i 2001 6 LUMANITY PRODUCTIONS INC 20021 DEUS COLOR ME Cl FAOCUICTIC 0027 Tw THREE FIVE INC 20065 M PRODUCTIONS 20068 IMPORTED ARTISTS 20029 PICTURE PERFECT PACKAGE SUI 20060 SFr FILMS INC 20035 MONTANA STEELE ADVERTISING US Tw THREE FIVE INL 37 275 00 ETS x 0 SALT PE VE 1 000 00 _ 4370 00 CF 80 00 1 000 0 3200 00 SAS SRA AP A 524 168 00 2 521 75 5500 00 52600 00 5100 00 535674 530 246 49 Sar S3250 doo poo 347 932 50 x Revenue Report by Selected Production RTPro Demo Company Show Hit fe gt nied dire adhe O x This report p
413. nd to which main code the accessory is ns Bere linked to and how many are auto included and or auto Lai tres checked out Print Weekly Price Filter Options Print Dady and Weekly Proce Daily Price Prints a column showing Daily Prices H nin Weekly Price Prints a column showing Weekly Prices Category y Daily and Weekly Price Prints both Daily and Weekly A Prices spn El are ue Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all Locabon z departments Cunency Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Location If you use multi location features you have an option to filter the report by the single location Currency If you are using multi currency features you can select a currency Example ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Accessory Used Report Date Time 2006 06 12 3 10 34 PM Page 1 of 56 00005 ARRI12 18K HEADd Daily 0 00 Weekly 0 00 Equipment Description Auto Auto Include Checkout a ui LE ANT 20 ARRI 125 POCKET PAR HEAD seo 10006 ARRI COMPACT 6500 HMl HEADH l 00120 ARRI 125W POCKET PAR HEAD D
414. ne de B ATEN ME 2002 110 A 55 Cons Canera he 500077 A E S Carmen Camera 02 206001 20050 ae O Comet Pone Pease shana 200 0028 A Comet Home Pease OO EA EA SSCS Order Status Report This report lists the orders specifying their eqn RIES TETE Billing Type Order Type and Order Status Sort by Filter Options E Production Sort By Specifies the sorting order of Ondertt the records on the report You can sort the report by Production Order Production MMMM Production a Shows only the orders A m E belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all Bill Type productions Ordes Te x Date Range Filters the report to the Order status gt orders created between the given date range Biling Status Bill Type Filters the report to any of the following billing types Regular Bill No Charge No Further Bill No Charge Sales Leave this option blank to print all orders regardless of their billing types Order Type Filters the report to any of the following order types Quote Reservation Order Cancel Leave this option blank to print all orders regardless of their order types Order Status Filters the report to any of the following order status Empty Not ship Part ship Shipped Part Ret Returned Closed Leave this option blank to print all orders regardless of their order Status Billing Statu
415. ne time The number should be significantly different then the Next Order Number field Next Draft Number and Next Invoice Number This will make it easier to identify the preview numbers on various screens and reports If your shop is setup for multiple locations the next preview number can be setup at the location level Next Subrental PO PO stands for purchase order Within the system PO numbers can be assigned by the system If you choose to use this feature then the next PO can be assigned and the system will increment the number Next Inv PO If you choose to use this feature then the next inventory PO can be assigned and the system will increment the number Next Draft Number This number should be set one time The number should be significantly different then the Next Order Number field Next Preview Number and Next Invoice Number This will make it easier to identify the draft numbers on various screens and reports If your shop is setup for multiple locations the next draft number can be setup at the location level Next Invoice Number This number should be set one time The number should be significantly different then the Next Order Number field Next Preview Number and Next Draft Number This will make it easier to identify the invoice numbers on various reports If your shop is setup for multiple locations the next invoice number can be setup at the location level Next Invoice Batch Number There is the ability to have the s
416. ng Date Main Equipment code Equipment Code Description and the Quantity Receiving Location Filter Options yr Sending Location shows only the results of selected Sending Location Leave this option blank to show all the original Locations EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Receiving Location Shows only the results of selected Receiving Location Leave this option blank to show all the destination locations First Equipment The report can be filtered to print the requested equipment that is belonging to the orders From a look up table that appears you can choose the equipment that you want You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on list icon in front of First Equipment and select each one you want to include in report Example Rental Tracker Pro RTPro Demo Company In Transit Report Date Time 9 5 2007 10 45 01 4h Page 1 of 1 Sending Locationh Sending Receiving Ship Location Location Date SO0247 Equipment Quantity Description 9 FULL DOUBLE S Flt 9 FULL SINGLE SCRIM 9 HALF DOUBLE SC CRIM 9 HALF SINGLE SCRIM 500247 124722002 00005 001 121772002 00005 2002 124722002 00005 003 12722002 00008 3004 Sales In Transit Report This report displays transfer orders where the receiving location did not received the items yet The report contains Sending and Receiving Location Order number Shipping Date StockNo StockNo Description and the Quantity
417. ng Orders 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E Orders to E B PEZ S Ua goH EE As Ol Dale Bl Type A AAA A F Lon FF Reslocking EE AsolDate 5272010 Do not Ba Beyond As of Date fF Soles F Damage F Labor Locaten Geni E Y ei sn Ie Use Qu Ordered F Shipping F Space La a 0 F COME EN EMA 305 641 214430 SHE 2060607 0 00 15 554 038 00 06 06 07 11 2006 06 07 11 HET 41 27200 310 600 00 11 872 00 1272 00 0 00 4 00241 SO 11 87200 To include an order on a draft checkmark the Include column by using Space bar Click on Create the Draft to bill the order To edit totals on a Draft C Invoice Screen RTPro Demo Company File View History Confirm Void Record Help a LAR Draft amp gt ue Date Created 1071 2010 6 05 00 PM Created By U Date Range 3 13 2010 10 1 2010 Production 20000 QUOTES Eiling NameJQLIOTES POH j 7 TemsCASH y a Biling Address Salesperzo Upload Include M Billing Cort Customer Contact SARONGOLDM Production Type OTHER y Tax Type ONGST Customer hee Credit for Invoices ce CON Payment Check Bank Amount Credit Card Card Name Expiration Location TORONTO PA Job Title 29148 3132010 10142070 1 006 00 0 00 6 50 1 012 50 6 50 0 00 ONGST O a CES a Edt Rental Subtotal Description Gl Account Taxable Orde Bilable E Rentals 4790107048 M 870 00 0 00 870 00 0 00 870 00
418. ng the billable charges The tax type will default in from Production Entry Screen Customer Contact The Customer Contact information defaults in from the order if there is one order attached to the invoice A management report is available showing the revenue generated against a customer contact Customer Note This is a free form area Any information entered in the field will print on the invoice document Billing Name and Address The billing name and address will come over from the production entry screen Payment Area This information shows 1f invoice 1s paid by Cash Check Credit Card Order Section This area displays all the orders attached to the invoice If the cursor 1s positioned on an order and you double click on the order a detailed breakdown of the order will appear on the Order Billing Detail screen You might also find this information by selecting View Invoice Detail for this Order from right click menu To see all the records included in this order double click on a valid row in Order Billing Detail screen This will enable you to see information about the equipment such as Ship Date Return Date Quantity List Price etc thru the Invoice Detail screen If invoice is not confirmed you may add a new equipment to this invoice at the lower part of Invoice Detail screen Press Add Ons icon in the toolbar and fill the Equipment column System will calculate total value of Add On equipment then re
419. nk to show all equipment Date Range To filter report results to show only Parade records between dates use these options If only begin date 1s entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date PO Enter Purchase Order numbers here to filter results of report by entered PO numbers You should enter at least one PO to include in report 0 utilizations only If you want to see which items in your store which were never rented check this checkbox Report Format You can choose to include more details in your report by selecting detail or include less information by selecting summary Example CON Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Barcoded Equipment Utilization Report by PO Date Time 10 10 2010 3 02 54 PM Page 1 of 1 Date Range 1 1 2009 10 10 2010 Format Summary POs 1023 ae Description POR T4322 MO 161 ra Description Day a Avail eae pair BUGS BKH 5 BUGPOWER 5001 Joker B ug Power Su 5 KERS00HD 800W Joker Bug Head POT otals Repair Loss of revenue This report shows how much revenue was lost because the items were in repair Note This report does not calculate future loss of Revenue Therefore if the item is not out of repair yet then program calculates loss of the revenue u
420. nnect to the server it is because the scanner is unable to connect to the RF Server User ID program po Password Enter your User ID and Password Server IP 100 100 100 1 Que ion Mode RF 4 18 2006 03 19 06 Main Menu This is the main menu of the program that you will get to after selecting the Batch Mode or after logging in to the RF mode User can select any of the options by taping on the corresponding button If an option is not applicable then that button is grayed out For example in the RF mode the Send Batch Data button is grayed out Rental CheckOut View Barcoded Info Send Batch Data Mode REF 11 15 2011 13 10 18 Checkout Barcoded In this page you can checkout a Barcoded item to a specific order U Mia ta TE te cre Just scan items with pressing the trigger button or the yellow scan button on the keyboard After scanning a Barcoded item to check order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt out program displays a success message followed by the equipment description It also displays the following quantities for th i t just checked out e equipment you Just checke out Barcode sd ORD Shows the number of items ordered for this equipment Barcoded Subrental Barcoded OUT Shows the number of items checked out for this equipment REM Shows number of remaining items to be checked out Barcode This box will show the scanned barcodes In addition you can type the b
421. nt f Department days rented days days in repair Range NA Include Subrental Information utilization percentage and billed days C Category displayed with revenue for each type Begin Date LE Baumert of equipment The subtotal of each EndDate 1102 2011 L o item will be printed in report l Location Exclude 0 Quantity Filter Options Department Select department to limit report to show only items for this department Leave this option blank to show results for all departments Category Select category to limit report to show only items for this category Leave this option blank to show results for all categories Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in report by selecting begin and ending equipment Leave these fields blank to show all equipment Date Range To filter report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date These dates should have values Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Include Subrental Information By
422. nt both the rental and sale items in checkout sheet Exit OK Mode RF 5 3 2006 02 49 14 Price Information No Price Do not print the price columns in checkout sheet Total Price Only Only print the total price on the report All Prices Print all the price columns and totals on the checkout sheet Other Information Partial Select this item if you want to print checkout sheet for a date time range Note As Exchange Marks this item an Exchanged item Print Kit Header Determine to print the kit header in checkout sheet or not Use Billing Schedule Check this to use the billing schedule in checkout sheet Print Replacement Price Determine to print Replacement price in checkout sheet or not Print Subrental Vendor This will print Subrental vendor in checkout sheet Current Week Contracts Print the current week contract report for current order This MEAR EE E is the same report that you can print from the desktop No Price version of RTPro and is added for convenience to the Total Price Only scanner program This report saves the selections you have l Ora TH PRG AL PACS CONTE made and defaults them for the next time you print it ar Price Information ll No Price Do not print any prices in the report al El z Er _ Print Internal Notes Print Kit Header Total Price Only Just print the total price in report sheet gt print Customer Notes Copies Line Item Prices wit
423. nt code or selecting it from General Ledger Lookup screen by clicking drop down arrow Cases For types of equipment that permanently resides in a travel case enter a quantity in this field RTPro will then tally the number of cases on an order and list them on the contract As a rule this field should only I Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc used for a type of item that is shipped in the case works in the case and returns in the case Create separate e codes for shipping cases that hold more than one item or different types of items Weight Enter the weight of the type of equipment in this field On the Value Sheet RTPro calculates the weight of all of the items and provides the total weight of the order Use this figure as an aid to filling out shipping forms and determining your shipping needs Volume Enter the size of the type of equipment in this field Country of Origin Enter the country from where you ship your equipment to your customers Commodity Commodity is the material that the equipment is made of Notes El In this section enter information specific to equipment code that may be of help as a point of easy reference or operational instruction Suggestions include manufacturer or vendor information such as phone numbers or part numbers power requirements or historical information Simple notes may be entered and edited from the Notes box on the Rental Equipment Entry Screen For more detail notes and
424. nt to the invoices and deletes the payment A window would then popup to verify the confirmation of this action selecting yes will change the status of selected payment to void Apply Payment This option is available only for unapplied or a refund adjustment payment After selecting Apply Payment Payment List screen will appear You can apply selected payment to listed invoices View Payment Application For viewing payment application right click on selected payment and click on View Payment Application payment screen will appear with disabled options that only inform you about payment specifications Note Double click on each payment and it will also display the payment application Apply Refund Adjustment Whenever you want to change the status to refund Adjustment you should right click on each payment and select Apply Refund Adjustment a box will appear and will request a Debit GL Account and Credit GL Account Note Only unapplied payments can be changed to Refund Adjustment Undo Refund Adjustment This option cancels Refund Adjustment and changes the status to Unapplied Change Refund Adjustment Transaction Date This option will change the date of Refund Adjustment transaction for the selected payment ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Create Credit Memo C You may establish a credit memo for a production through the Invoice Screen Select this option from Payment men
425. ntal Vendor Invoices Not Paid This is a list of Subrental POs that your shop has not CS Subrental Vendor Invoices Not Paid F p paid This will look at the vendor invoices that were manually inputted by your shop and will look at the paid amount field If 1t is blank then the record will print out on the report Also if the Amount Paid less than Amount records will be printed Billed Accruals This report will list the invoice cycles for the specified date range The report will breakup by Vendor and show the quoted amounts per cycle the actual checkout in rental amount the amount invoiced and the amount paid This report is helpful for projection of what the vendor should be billing your shop based upon the invoice plan The report can be used as a projection of what you will owe the vendor based upon the date range Subrental Balance Detail Report This report is broken up by PO and reflects what MEME EEE al has been paid against the PO what has been invoiced against the PO and not paid what the PO balance 1s your shops cost for the subrentals and E Z that you have charged your customer The report also reflects the profit made ES Purchase Order O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Subrental PO Cost Sheet This report will print the vendor cost and customer price of sub rentals for the selected vendor PO based upon a date range This report will run across customers and orders This report is helpful
426. nto extended field The fields included in this part are as follows Employee Id Employee Id is the employee code of the laborer Occupation What the laborer did to equipment Hours How many hours the laborer worked on equipment Hourly Rate How much the laborer is paid per hour Extended This field shows the total cost of each line Bill this Repair Ticket Repair Ticket can be billed from the repair ticket screen To access this option press Bill this Repair Ticket icon from toolbar menu in Repair ticket Screen Repair List This list shows all items currently in repair When entering this page for the first time you must choose a filter Click on Refresh button or press F2 to see repair items This list can be filtered with some fields as shown below Location Barcode Production Repair Location w Department iw Equipment y Date In Begin w Currently In Repair Only _ Category Reason Date In End we Ca Refresh F2 Repair Information Double clicking on repair items will open the Repair Information page In this page information which is explained earlier in this chapter can be modified this information is as follow Repair Vendor Repair type Expected date out Repair cost Repair Damage Description Repaired by Resolution Description Adding Image Refer to the image screen section in this chapter Check Item Out from Repair See Check Barcoded Out of Repair earlier in this chap
427. nvoicing can be designed by setting up a billing schedule For example you may wish to only invoice an order every week or perhaps invoice with a 50 discount every four weeks Use the billing schedule to define these billing periods so that certain reports and invoicing procedures will prompt billing periods for the order according to your schedule and amounts rather than the weekly default settings See Setting up Billing Schedules in Chapter 3 for more details A billing schedule exclusive to the order Click on the Add icon The Cycle field will be populated with the next available cycle Enter the following fields Number of Weeks This is the number of weeks that a cycle will be billed When you choose number of weeks the date fields will automatically fill in The begin date is the next available begin date and the end date 1s based on the number of weeks entered Discount Percentage If a discount should be applied to the rental charges enter a discount The discount will be applied at the time of billing the order The discount will be applied on top of any discount given from the Rental Order Entry Screen Fixed Amount If a fixed amount should be charged for the cycle then enter the fixed amount The fixed amount will affect the subtotal column of invoice The system will back in the rental items charges into the fixed amount total The rental items discount column will be affected You may add additional cycles until the desired
428. o the order The labor and space rental can then be charged to the production Refer to the Labor and Space chapter for details Change Subrental Vendor The purpose of this option is when a user wants to APE MENT Ce xj change a Vendor to another Vendor for the Currently Working order on the Order Processing Screen This ES x option will be available under the Process menu The vendor can be changed only when an order is selected Existing POR on Order Processing The vendor will be changed enviar UT against a selected po ff OK x Cancel T Help Billing Menu Billing features are available from Billing menu of Order Processing Screen Listing of all Invoices A list of all invoices attached to current order will be listed Invoice types are separated in the list with different colors as follows Gray Previews Blue Drafts Red Voids Green Credits White Invoices Create a New Invoice Ken Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This option allows the user to create a bill for the selected order Users can create a Preview or Draft for different cases such as Rentals Sales and Loss on specific period Selecting Create Invoice if total 1s 0 00 will create a new invoice even if the order has billable items which are a 0 00 price Refer to the Billing chapter for more details Order Header Order Header Screen You will see this screen when you click on Order number in the middle box
429. obe PO 9 28 2094 aoao 50 0 GE 71922 12x18 Silk Flag 317 Loss Non Inventory Items T 40 19 2009 10 25 2009 50 0 HEADEXT18 _18K 12K 6K HMI 50 Head Ext A 9282011 10732011 SY 20 0 En NC EA E E E E E reg veg lalo llull olo O a fa G DERS Ladder 8 Step 293 Test Of Tax And Fuel 6 24 2008 6 30 2009 5 00 100 LOSANGE TESTXX 151 Subrentals 4 28 2011 5 11 2011 5505 00 BRIDEWARS Bride Wars qe BR Fad aed Fut N NN IN IN IN SOU SS 4 LOSANGE 1812FFPGB 18K12K FF Powergem Ballast 3831 11112222 3 31 2011 11 7 2010 CONCEPT 60 00 A O 60 00 Current Rentals Report Format 2 This is also a report that lists the items that are currently out on orders Filter Options Summary Detail The Summary format lists the information in the order level specifying the order and the date the equipment should have been returned The Detail format lists EN ji Rehan Date the information in the equipment 5 level specifying the equipment and ve C Production quantities out Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report You can sort the report by order number return date and production in Summary format and also sort the report by job title order number equipment code return date and production in Detail format E Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items
430. ocation Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it As of Date Option By choosing Extend to end of Weekly Cycle option system will change the date you entered to include all weekly cycle that this date is inside it If you don t want to change the date you should choose Up to as of date only option Examples am Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Estimated Revenue Report By Customer Type Date Time 10 10 2010 2 40 21 PM Page 1 of 2 As Of Date 10 10 2010 Location LOSANGELES Currency USD Episodic rin Date Cougartown 81 76 2010 76200 520000 AA AN Coat Haetaan azan n EE 00 00 CougarTown fea 622200 o TS stan CougerTown CL 1 aw E a 4500 00 Coon A MANU LOS So S S9144 5812 56 gares seat eso e OO pl ses CougarTown 3596252010 7222010 se1e000 s1400000 so 180 0 TT ERA reo 800 00 O LL ema 2 A A a T E T Modern Fami 6 23 2010 6 29 2010 5160 00 1 000 00 TC PO 1 160 00 Modern Fami SS RS AO E E Modern Fami 329 6 17 2010 172010 52920000 _ 5220000 odern Family 3301 errr2010 enrm 0000 _ Go odern Family 331 ertr2010 er232010 5980000 CCT TS Modern Fami 332 6 17 2010 6 30 2010 S1595 00 14 000 00 __ 400 __ 525 00 51562400 Modem Fam 343 6 22 2010 6282010 S60000 _ _ 500 00 Modern Family 345
431. ocation is the place where your equipment currently resides If the company is setup as multi location then each item will have a current location When items are added the current location will be equal to the original location when items are added As items are transferred from one location to another then the current location will change Purchase Date The system date is defaulted but can be overridden by entering a date or using the calendar dropdown When the actual purchase date is unknown the date may be left blank Purchase Amount Purchase Amount is the value of this equipment that 1s purchased PO Number Enter the purchase order number used to purchase this item MWO Major Work Order is the number that is used for purchasing this equipment Vendor Enter the Vendor Code or use the drop down arrow and choose a Vendor from the Vendor Lookup screen for the vendor from whom the item was purchased Manufacturer Enter the name of the company that manufactured the item Owner Select the owner of equipment from Owner Lookup table For details on using the ownership feature see Chapter 3 Use Ownership The owner is a company or individual which houses their inventory in your warehouse It is a consignment owner RTPro will track the usage and revenue against the owner Select the owner of equipment from Owner Lookup table To use the Owner feature refer to System Setup section Comments De Inventory 2012 Rental Tracke
432. ocking As of Date 3 25 2012 Y Do not Bill Beyond As of Date V Sales Y Damage Y Labor Create a Preview Location LOSANGELES A fo exhale ek M Use Qty Ordered MN Shipping V Space Create the Draft epair Ticket COUGARTOWN 101 F Multiple Packages 3 25 2012 3 25 2012 100 00 100 00 COUGARTOWN 119 E 1 5 2011 3 27 2012 74 240 00 74 240 00 74 240 00 COUGARTOWN 128 F Subrentals 2 17 2011 3 28 2012 32 370 00 32 370 00 32 370 00 COUGARTOWN 141 E Test Subrental Yendor DP 3 23 2011 3 27 2012 242 210 00 2 369 10 244 579 10 242 210 00 z COUGARTOWN 155 F Sales Test 3 25 2012 3 25 2012 125 00 125 00 COUGARTO WN 170 F 450 9 26 2011 3 25 2012 50 750 00 50 750 00 52 000 00 1 250 00 COUGARTOWN 176 F 461 9 21 2011 3 27 2012 540 00 540 00 540 00 COUGARTOWN 185 D Labor Maintenace 12 19 2011 9 4112 19 2011 9 41 275 00 275 00 275 00 COUGARTOWN 341 Subrental 3 10 28 2010 3 28 2012 162 800 00 162 600 00 162 600 00 COUGARTOWN 352 C Cancel Loss Partials 4 20 2011 3 27 2012 49 000 00 49 000 00 49 000 00 COUGARTOWN 362 TP subrental Change 4 22 2011 3 29 2012 59 780 00 59 780 00 59 760 00 COUGARTOWN 408 F Exchange 9 26 2011 9 30 2011 8 31 8 00 8 00 8 00 COUGARTOWN 435 TP 208 9 29 2011 3 28 2012 4 420 00 4 420 00 4 420 00 COUGARTOWN 439 F 62 10 1 2011 3 30 2012 13 262 00 13 262 00 13 262 00 COUGARTOWN 469 F Subrental 204 11 6 2011 3 31 2012 14 350 00 14 350 00 14 350 00 COUGARTOWN 475 D Project 1 11 10 2011 3 28 2012 800 00 80
433. oduction company Fax This should be the fax number of the production company Email This should be the email address used for contacting the production company Shipping Name amp Shipping Address Shipping Address indicates where the rentals and sale items will be sent to the production The shipping name can be entered or selected from a drop down listing To setup Shipping Name amp Address refer to the shipping address table in file maintenance section The shipping name and address does not need to be selected from the drop down The shipping name will not validate Ship Method This method should identify how the rentals and sale items will be sent to the production The shipping method can be entered or selected from a drop down list To setup ship methods refer to the file maintenance section The ship method prints on various customer reports Return Method This method should identify how the rentals and sale items will return to the production The return method can be entered or selected from a drop down list To setup return methods refer to the ship method table in file maintenance section The return method prints on various customer reports Production Status There are two different types of status for a production Open and Closed Open status of the production will allow new orders to create rental amp sale items to order checked out and returned and allows for billing If a production is marked by a c
434. of the Pull Sheets at once based on date and order criteria that you specify Date inclusion is based on the Pull Date on the Order Header The standard Pull Sheet printing options are also available Select the desired options and then mo Begin Date 10 1 2010 a click on the Next button that will send you to the regular Pull nos Fort List report screen See Pull List Report for more details ina Filter Options Production DE Date Range Prints the Pull List for orders with the Pull Fat idee de Date in the given date range Beginning and End date will be the default date of the system Last Order Production You can choose a specific production and get Location z the pull list report for this production You also can select multiple productions To do this click on list icon in front of Production and select each one you want to include in report Order Range Prints the Pull List for orders with the Order in the given range You also can select multiple Orders To do this click on list icon and select each one you want to include in report Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Hental Tracker RTI Studios Los Angeles 12481 Tejas Court Rancho Cucamonga CA 91739 666 595 3041 Faxj
435. ogo of your company on the Quote report Print Address On Quote If checked program prints the address of your company on the Quote report Print Logo On Contract Checkout Sheet PS Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If checked program prints the logo of your company on the Checkout sheet Print Address On Contract Checkout Sheet If checked program prints the address of your company on the Checkout report Allow Rental Checkout if Not Ordered This option allows checking out Rental items even if not ordered within the Order Entry Screen Allow Sales shipping if not ordered This option allows Sales items to be shipped even if not ordered within the order entry screen Allow Sales shipping if not enough in stock This option allows Sale items to be shipped even if not enough in stock If not checked program stops user at the time of sales shipping if there 1s not enough items available to ship Sell Rental Equipments Use Existing Line Items If it is checked when a rental item is sold in the Sales Checkout screen the program will use the existing line item from Sales Order if the stock number has already been ordered Checkin Tab Return List Footer Default return list footer can be selected here The program will default over return list footer when printing the checkout sheet Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer
436. ogram brings data from these two columns to the Rental Order Entry Screen This is only available when user is not using the REMOTE view Subrenting Equipments Within RTPro there is the option to subrent items that are not available in your shop Cs Subrental Records RTPro Demo Company Eu OI x File Search View Action Help WI 5470 ee Equipment HMIFIO005 12 18 HMI FRES PACKAGE CMC Quanbty Ordered 9 Usage Pernod 6 6 2008 8 6 2008 DailyWeekky Daily Days Per Week List Price 1 155 00 Dise 30 Actual Price 808 50 te AAA Subrent Ben De Date End Date Des List Price Disc Actual Price Etre 074001200 11862008 876 2008 Daily 1 155 00 ci 608 50 908 50 119002200 a 2 8 6 2008 6 6 2008 Daly 31 155 00 ci 608 50 1 617 00 460001 200 92 2 6 6 2008 8 6 2008 Daily 5 1 155 00 3 508 50 1 617 00 H 748001200 118 3 8 6 2008 6 6 2008 Daily 1 1 155 00 1 155 00 33 465 00 a a de Browne Order 60000039 Production 20287 SPARKS PRODUCTIONS Subrenting Items To subrent equipment position the cursor on the equipment line on the Rental Order Entry Screen and press F5 You can also select Subrental from Subrental menu In Subrental screen enter vendor code and purchase order and quantity to subrent Most of the fields have default values but you may edit them It 1s possible to subrent equipment codes from multiple vendors From the Rental Order Entry screen the SubOrdered column represents the quantity of subrented equ
437. om Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 29 2009 3 30 2009 2d Hourly 20 10h 25 250 Weekend Normal 10h d weekend 10h 20 200 D PE A ML NL Note L1 summarizes the of employee working time can be set through the Employee Detail screen with Hourly Rate and Weekend Hourly Rate Calculation of Billable Amount using Force Use option This option will force user to use either the Normal Rate or the Weekend Rate This option will be helpful when we have a date range that a part of it is normal day and the other part is weekend Imagine your employee should go to work on 29th of March until 30th of March Please note that our calendar displays 30th of March as a normal day Here for example you can force the program to use the weekend rate or normal rate for both 29th and 30th of March Consider the following examples a Force to use Weekend Rate for Hourly bill type Time al Time al ka Hours Billable Rate Weekend eee Type Rate mini ml 00 _ 30 23h Hourly 23h 30m ill Weekend Normal AM AM 30m 587 50 Day Program declined the Normal rate and considered the weekend rate instead for both selected days b Force to use Normal Rate for Hourly bill type al Time al Time ual Hours Billable Rate Weekend Type Rate a nul nl 00 ml 30 23h Hourly 20 23h 30m ill Weekend Normal AM AM 30m 470 Day Program declined the Weekend rate and
438. on Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Labor Space Conflict Report If we have scheduling conflict in our system this report will print a list of these records For example a labor should go to work for the order xxx on 30th of March from 01 30 PM until 05 00 PM and also he scheduled to work for the order yyy on the same day from 04 00 PM until 06 00 PM Here we have an hour conflict There will be an option to either print Labor or Space E Labor Space Confilict Report ATPro Def Production D Date Begin E Date End saa Select 1 f Labor Employee C Space Options EURE Labor Space Scheduling 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Date Range Filters report to the labor space s scheduled days of work between the given date range If begin date is blank it will print the entire labor space schedule that are created on or before the end date If the end date is blank it will print the entire labor space schedule that are created on or after the begin date Production Select the production to limit the report to only show labors spaces for this production Leave this option blank to show the result from all productions Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the records for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations EC Labor Space Scheduling 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter B
439. on Functions Within RTPro there are icons that are consistent in functionality throughout This icon allows adding a record The information screen will appear Shortcut Key CTRL N This icon performs deleting a record The system will prompt for confirmation before a record is deleted RTPro only EN Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc allows deleting of a record if the record has not been used somewhere else in the system Shortcut Key CTRL DEL de This 1con allows editing of a record When clicked on the record information screen will appear and the record can be edited This is the save post icon When clicked on any edits to the record will be saved Shortcut Key F10 66 99 Note When closing out of the screen by clicking on the dy button or the x in the right hand upper corner the edits will be saved w This cancels the Add or Edit process If you are in the add mode the record will not be saved If you are in the edit mode the edit will cancel e This is the refresh icon When clicked on the entire screen will refresh back to what it was prior to editing the information A These are Navigation Buttons Use these buttons to navigate between records in list While navigating an arrow d will show current record in front of it in list The three dots icon 1s called the ellipse The ellipse is the lookup icon If it is clicked on a listing of records will appear For example if you
440. ons about Reports Does RTPro have any Revenue Reports Yes Under the Reports menu we have Revenue Generated Reports hard dollars You can run this report for a certain Parent Productions for a Production Type or many other ways When print reports it shows generating page 1 2 3 then it goes through page 1 2 3 for the second time Why is it going through these pages twice RTPro prints Page 1 of 3 on the top right of each page on the reports First program finds total number of pages in report in this case 3 then 1t generates actual report need to know what orders have not returned and if the return date passed We have a report for this in the Reports section of RTPro under Rentals Operations called Past Due Orders For Tax purposes need to know the value of my inventory that was out on the last day of the year How can get this information You need to run the Rental Inventory out Report You can access this from the Reports Module under the Inventory submenu The As of Date should be the last day of the year I was checking the estimated income report and the orders to bill report would you explain how do they filter the orders In other words what should expect to get from each report and what are the differences The Estimated Revenue Report does not bill past the Return Date of the order The Order to Bill report there is asterisks on the some order indicating the order will have billable charges past the Re
441. ons for printing an Invoice Draft Print General Ledger A general ledger breakdown report will print Print Customized Invoice This option will allow users to print the customized invoice li Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc View Menu Order Detail This option will show detail charge breakdown for a selected order The detail breakdown for Rentals Sales Loss Damage Restocking Space and Labor will be displayed To see this information directly press F3 on the Invoice Screen Invoice Detail If invoice is not confirmed you may add a new equipment to this invoice at the lower part of the Invoice Detail screen Press Add Ons icon in the toolbar and fill the Equipment column System will calculate total value of added equipment then recalculates the entire value of the invoice and displays the result at the bottom of the screen General Ledger Detail This option shows general ledger breakdown for invoice and can adjust within the screen During adjusting of detail lines amounts must be balanced to invoice total System will not allow an unbalanced ledger When making any changes breakdown click on lock icon to save before exiting Screen will display showing it has been saved Repair Ticket Detail This option illustrates the detail report with charge breakdown for a repair ticket You will get access to this option under View menu or just hit the F4 key on the Invoice Screen Double clicking on a ticket row will ope
442. oolbar In this section users can see filter payments by a status In this list the status 1s separated by color There are many filters available You can also click on the legends to filter out Unapplied Applied Voids or Refund Adjustments ENS Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CX Payment List R TPro Demo Company JO xj pie Search yew isting Help lt gt NN ajuar e see Urappled fr Production Feo Payment Applied F po bare E Beh F2 pes en A ayment Ref iid f End Date CI a 12762004 20 00 1 5600 5 778 00 5711400 14 108 00 1 35600 1198600 157 114 001 F In this list different colors are used to distinguish each payment type You may observe Unapplied payments in Blue Applied payments in White Void payments in Red and Refund Adjustment payments in Green Changing Payment Status In order to change payment status right click on each payment that you want to change and click on the appropriate status that you want The status 1s described in the following section Cancel Payment Application This item can be selected only for applied payments After selecting this item status of selected payment will change to unapplied but it leaves the payment intact so it can be reapplied Note After canceling payment application all paid invoices by canceled payment will roll back to unpaid status Void Payment This option undoes the application of this payme
443. or a specific location Note There is a hot key F3 which brings up the drag amp drop feature Equipment can easily be added to the kit Sort Order By choosing different numbers in Sort Order field within Rental Order Screen rental kits will stand across the order list respectively Rental Kit Detail To add or make changes to the list of equipment that makes up a Rental Kit double click on the Rental Kit Code This will take you to the Rental Kit Detail screen From this grid you can add delete and edit the Equipment Codes you want to use to make up the package Note For larger kits it is easier to add a kit from Rental Order Screen in Order Processing module rather than Rental Kit Detail Screen You may create a dummy order and add items to it and save it as a Rental kit See Chapter 6 Order Processing Rental Order Screen for more details Rental Inventory cl Rental Inventory is where the physical inventory items are added to the system After equipment codes are created for each type of equipment physical inventory items will either created as be barcoded or noncoded in Rental Inventory Flexibility of the system allows you to maintain inventory records for both barcoded and noncoded items To see the Rental Inventory Screen and the content of it apply the filter function After filtering all barcoded and noncoded records based on the filter selection will be listed In the Rental Inventory Screen noncoded items are dist
444. or add them here The 38 is to add a new parent record The brings up the full parent information screen and allows the user to edit the parent record Pr 4 You can edit Productions or add them here The a is to add a new production record The brings up the full production information screen and allows the user to edit the production record Or 4 You can add or edit an Order by using these buttons The a is to add a jis Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc new order record The brings up the full order information screen and allows the user to edit the order record Out R R is for Rental checkout screen and S is for the Sales shipping screen In Or Priv Pa All Or is for the Rental Check in Screen By Order Pr is for Rental and Sales Check in for multi order Pa is for the Rental Check in Screen By Parent and All is for the Rental Check in Screen across all orders R This button opens Rental Order Screen 5 This button opens Sales Order Screen y This button opens Order Total Screen Parent PA A parent code name can be entered in this field Within system setup sort order can be setup as code or name When entering a value the system will validate against the sort order RTPro has an auto populating feature which goes to the closest occurrence of the record as value typing Clicking on the E brings up the complete parent listing Production A production code na
445. or by pressing F2 or selecting View Edit Order Header from Order menu You can see the header information of an order here In addition the red indicator boxes on the right side of the screen show some important information about order When creating a new order billing information shipping information and some other fields will default over from production Available fields are as follows To Access the order header detail click on the order number in the middle box on the screen You can also press F2 or select View Edit Order from the Order menu Currently Working On Order 5 Current PO 471 Last Revision 0002 CINDYLA 10 31 2011 10 06 03 AM Order Subs Hiatus Salesperson SALLY Parent REVENGE Ine Exp Date Revenge Contact Mike Brown Production Additional Functions Available for the Order Header Screen Delivery Notes LH Delivery notes can be input on the order level The delivery notes print out on the Pull list The notes print above the header section There is also an option on the Checkout Sheet Contract to include the delivery notes In the order processing section and order header screen the system displays if there are delivery notes in the red indicator section Force Close Order When selected a message comes up and asks Are you sure If Yes program will close and mark the opened order to Stop All Billing even if there is an unshipped item If the order has an item that is not checked in and a
446. or colors of the same equipment and have created separate equipment codes for each one However when the equipment that the customer ordered is not available the Substitution List gives you easy access to the other codes of the same equipment and can be used Adding an Equipment Code to the Substitution List To do this in Equipment Screen click to highlight Equipment Code Click on the Substitution List icon In the Rental Substitution List screen click the plus sign In the Equipment Code column enter an equipment code or press the down arrow to access the Equipment Lookup and choose the equipment you wish to add Rental Price List Rental Price List will print rental prices of F Rental Price List equipment for Daily or Weekly To access this feature click on the Reports dropdown tab and select Rental Price List or click on its icon on the toolbar menu Use the filter feature from the C Print Weekly Price toolbar to print a Price list of selected equipment 2 Select Print Daily Price Exclude Inactive Equipment w OF A Cancel Save Her Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Vendor Catalog List Y This list demonstrates all vendors of one equipment code In this list vendors of this equipment can be added To add vendor for the selected equipment press button and choose vendor code from list of defined vendors Print Standard Barcode Labels For all equipments in this list i This feature prints
447. order level specifying the order and the date the equipment should have been returned The Detail format lists the information in the equipment level specifying the equipment and quantities that are ordered f Order F Production Order by order In Summary format if this option is selected the report will sort by order number Order by Equipment In Detail format if this option is selected the report will sort by equipment code Order by Production If this option is selected the report will sort by production code Production Shows only the orders belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all productions Equipment Shows only the orders having this equipment as a late shipment Leave this option blank to show orders with all equipment Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Late Return Report DateTime 2006 06 14 2 40 20PM Page 1 of 1 Location LA Orders ProdTitle ShipDate ance Socerntlighting 2002 11 E E LL EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Batch Print Pull List When you have several orders that must be pulled during a EAST particular time window you do not need to go into the orders individually to print out the Pull Sheets This function will print all
448. ores all records beyond that date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Format You can choose to print more details or brief information using this option Choose detail to print more information on this report Sort By You can sort results using equipment code order number production code or vendor code Example Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Subrental Statistics Report Date Time 10 10 20102 32 48PM Page 1 of 1 Date Range 1 1 2010 10 10 2010 Sorty By Vendor Format Summary Location LOSANGELES Currency USD e hard Weeks Price KINOFLO 52 973 00 3165500 51 324 00 14 00 MOLE MoleRichardson 58 961 40 58 345 00 5816 40 172 00 PASKAL Pas a 51 660 00 1 660 00 4000 Report Total 512 800 40 511 880 00 51 940 40 ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Subrental Statistics Report Date Time 10 10 20102 25 30PM Page 1 of 3 Date Range 1 1 2010 10 10 2010 Sorty By Vendor Format Detail Location LOSANGELES Currency USD Equipment Description Customer Customer Name Vendor Customer Rental AAA 5 Fc ee a fiesta KINOFLO Kino Flo 2382 1151DOGEAR Dog EsredFenoe__________ COUGARTOWN Abc LOB 2 1 800 00 1 000 00 100 262 1152GOTHIC_ GothicPidketFenos_______ COUGARTOWN
449. ort shows the quantity of items that were on hand on that given date If a date in the future is entered in the As of Date the report will treat it as today s date Department Shows only the sales stock belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show the stock from all departments Location If you use multi location features you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only Currency If you are using multi currency features you can select currency values to show for the replacement cost and price Example DN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Sales On Hand Report Date Time 2006 06 1411 35 05 4M As Of Date 2006 06 14 OrderBy Description Currency CANADA nn a ee abi enee ee a Oa Hand URETA A OAT EAD RS IA e e NE EE e E Reporta 1300 4322 326220 o Sales Inventory Transaction This report shows all the sales transactions that happened EP between specified dates or for a range of the stock items You can filter the results to show the stock in a specified 7 Sort By department and category Description C StockNo Filter Option C Dals Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on aan aa im Group By Vend Inchude Transf the report You can sort the report by Description RE EEE LLC MN Stock Department O Department Shows only the sal
450. ort to show only productions for selected parent Leave this option blank to show results for all parents Production Select production to limit the report result Leave this option blank to show report across all productions Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location ER Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Equipment Revenue Date Time 4 1 2012 4 52 55 PM Page 1 of 1 Include Subrentalsyes Include Miscellaneousres Date Range 1 1 2010 3 31 2012 Production HAUNTING Parent Production a Order Days Rental SubDa Sub SubQty SubQty Vendor Total CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812FFPGB 35 2328 AA AAA E 1 N SRDG HAUNTING fiare as 0 AH aa aa 7 CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812KPOW 35 2328 J 8a o o CINEBRIDG HAUNTING te12KPOW 35 o To o KNOFL Se gt gt gt 7 CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 18HMIDEGB 35 2328 __s Too A eee CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812FFPGB 221 O PARAM 732 4725 00 3 63 5100 36 375 36 4 725 00 CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812FFPGB 221 O 0 SE e E EA EE EE E CNEBRDG HAUNTING a 2210288 Ta A 2 ee AA AAA CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812KPOW 221 ol Of 42 PARAM 732 TS CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 1812KPOW 221 ol Of 42 PASKAL 488 Jo 2 o _ _ ponei i ee CINEBRIDG HAUNTING 18HMIDEGB 221 0 1 050 00 OO 42 PARAM 732 1 968 75 3 63 2 125 14 156 39 3 018 75 a a a a a CINEBRIDG
451. ou can add or edit on Master List screen Enter the code and the description of the new Master Parent Pa Parent 1s the container of productions Each production can have one parent but it 1s not required i In this screen there is an option available to print mailing labels for all of the parent companies Managing Parent Company records Parent records can be added by clicking on 5 icon To edit existing records you can double click on them or select record and click on icon If you want to delete a parent record you should ensure that the record was not used in productions otherwise the system will not allow the deletion Create Edit Parent Company record There are two ways to create a new parent 1 Click on the plus icon from the Parent List in Administration module 2 Select New Parent option under Parent sub menu in Order Processing Screen System will ask to confirm adding parent select yes After clicking on add or edit icons Parent Entry Screen will open The following fields are available Parent Code Parent Code 1s a unique code and will be assigned to a parent record The code should be significant and easy for users to identify Through the system users will be able to sort and filter data based upon the Parent Code This field 1s required Location If your company is setup for multi location this field will appear The field is optional To setup Location refer to the Location table in fil
452. ou may select to display discounts and item prices on the report sheet f Print the invoices that are not printed line Summan Fe Pant Rertal Line ltem Prices Le Invoice Deta fr Frnt Remal Discourt F Do nol print 0 00 tems I Print Sales Line ltem Prices F Pont Sales Discount e Footer A Print Line Item Customes Notes Billing Reports Orders to Bill This report is one of the most important CE orders To Bill Report RTPro Demo Company reports in RTPro This report reflects all the orders that are due to bill based on on ee EX Sena the criteria entered This report should be FREE aie SRE run frequently perhaps daily or weekly M Sales M Damage FF Labor Print Option IT Use Qty Ordered F Shipping FF Space Allows the user to select the types of DE 00 charges that the system should include in Payment Type Entend lo end of Weekly Cyclo the bill For instance when selecting As0fDate 10 2 2011 ae Do not Bill Beyond As of Date Rentals the system will look for all the Production x Ji Do not Bil Beyond Usage End Date rental items for the order which were P out during the billing range The Use Group by Job Component Salesperson Qty Ordered ignores the rental check in out and creates the invoice for the quantities ordered w OK X Cancel List Save o Payment type A payment type can be selected Only those orders matching the payment type wil
453. out report From parent listing screen the icon will print a parent listing report DES Getting Started O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Shortcut key CTRL P a The magnifying glass displays the detail of the record selected The icon 1s only accessible on Listings A listing 1s a scrollable display of records One line per record shows on a listing There 1s a record pointer on the left side on the record The record pointer looks like P When the magnifying icon 1s pressed the full detail on the record appears Shortcut key CTRL D T This is the filter icon Filtering can be very helpful when researching data Filtering allows the user to search for particular records When the filter icon is selected RTPro will prompt for the field values of the search RTPro will then filter out only the data that meets the filter criteria and display the records on the screen Ge The flashlight icon 1s a locate function If you need to locate a certain record from a group of records the function is helpful When the locate icon 1s clicked the locate screen will appear Shortcut key CTRL F Locate Field Value x The search characters should Field Value be entered in the field value If upper and lower case search Type should be checked within the Case sensitive search area click on the case sensitive f Exact Match Partial Match at Beginning Partial Match Anywhere There are options to find an exact match partial match at Bene
454. p to today Filter Options Department Select department to limit report to show only items for this department Leave this option Dale In Renai blank to show result for all departments Range pS Category Select category to limit report to show only items for this category Leave this option blank to show result for all categories Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in report by selecting begin and ending equipment Leave these fields blank to show all equipment Ticket Enter Ticket number here to limit report results to entered ticket number Barcode Enter Barcode number here to limit report results to one barcode Date in Repair Range To filter report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date 1s entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Days Per Week Enter Pay Days per week here to calculate results based on these paydays Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Example am Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Repair Loss of Revenue Report Date Time 2006 06 20 3 16 18 PM DaysPerWeek 1 Location LA Currency US Code A ESE O II SubTotal Stati
455. past order information for each Stock Number Although the on hand quantity 1s included in the Sales Inventory Information screen it may be easier to reference it from the availability screen Sales Availability List Click on the Sales drop down tab and select Sales Availability or click on Sales Availability List icon in the toolbar The Sales Availability List will display information from the Sales Inventory Screen including Stock Number Description Cost Price Extended Cost Extended Price and On Hand Quantity Sales Availability Detail Screen From the Sales Availability List double click on a Stock Number or select the Detail Ctrl D from View dropdown menu The Sales Availability Detail Screen displays the orders with this Stock Number For each order you can see Order Number Production Code and Title Transaction Date Quote Date quantity Ordered quantity Shipped and Back Ordered quantities of the Stock Number The Back Ordered is the quantity that ordered but has not shipped yet Back ordered items are showing in red Stock Quantities fa company is multi location the availability of each stock item across each location can be seen Retired Menu Retired Inventory T Equally important to making sure your entire inventory is added to the system is to make sure you remove your inventory from the system that is no longer being used Use the Retired Inventory Module to do that Click on the Retired d
456. pe A EE OET T E deinseretoee 18 USING RIPO MNU eire A A een ironie ren diet tel AAA 19 COMNACEUAD SUD nd e etui tentent du unie 19 Whats Unique about RTPrO SOMW ALC ina mnt ia 19 GETTING STARTED 0 atraer 21 Welcome to RTPro software iii A deta teas ae Re ts 22 Understanaine the Wain Mentilavob Tossal einen 22 STINE the OO adidas 23 COMIMOMIEUIMCUIOINS a ni ai 23 MUtpie AS ANGES ER SR a oa cuisine te ain in 26 COMMON SMORECUTS AN ami doter a aa 26 US En ea LC EL ESA PR RS D rain 27 Standard FUNCHUONS masinman SE PE TE CTO CO INR TE EN Ee ER 28 DISDIGVLISUINGS GIG A A A anodin pire entu net 28 A PP ae a A nd wu eniae tae D A nb ere 29 PANTICOSA dla ennemi oc 29 EXON GIO CEOs ER Aa 29 PFIRHNO TEDOUIS a en tatin last dard ANENE EN EE ados lier date dE sn 30 ELECTING A COUE sas dosnt aa eue dns ide asie Pen don a ee DE ne el en des 30 MUNDI Selection ea one hi anche oies ae 30 REDOT LISE PA PER RAAE EETA E TT Gn caida inc diceuaien dices aiebes OORA 31 Mal NERT ODIOS ee Rennes idee uen ie ailes tt nine 31 TEND 0 dd oO ee Dana ae dd ic eee 31 Database Ut Ie ura RS E OtAa 31 BESO SU UI IS redada ake ate atu haat aw atta ade ah ett ately 31 Camera Slot oncle et teen tan 32 Barcode Printer Sel 32 SAA A A A ie ne 32 EG De LAS EN A OI ici 32 Downlad Bat Gl cae smart dida ida den date ans date as lee ie 32 Users CONTI AECL Cd vdieo os olen oss oilers ph oes ASA 33 ODHONS MENU AA AAA AAA Den ESTERS 33 PGE VICI asad das 33 Change PAS SW ON le
457. pe of orders To do this select a desired order type from Listing Menu Available filters are Quotes Reservations Orders Cancelled or All By i Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc selecting All Orders you can see a list of all orders colored by order type and described in the screen legend A list of the orders can also be displayed by clicking on the ellipse 2 the option most recent 50 200 or all orders Recent 50 Orders Recent 200 Orders All Orders Note On the order listing there is Dollar sign icon when selected displayed will be the 1st Week and Current Price for each order The values of these columns will be the same values displayed in the bottom left of the Rental Order Screen when the Display Totals button 1s clicked A screen will come up with options Select the options and click ok Duplicate Selected Orders Program has 5taff 5 ability to duplicate multiple orders using Duplicate Selected Orders option through the right click Saba G menu of Order List Screen Users can select C Rental C Use Quantity Ordered multiple orders by holding the Ctrl key and pressing 0 Sales on each order Or by selecting an order and then ao f Use Quantity Shipped holding the Shift key and selecting another order to select all orders between of 2 orders Ctrl A can be WF Use Equipment Table Pricing used to select all orders on the Order List screen D Copy Customized Records W Copy Shipping Charg
458. pics A revenue generated report 1s available to run against the Project The project field is validated against the Project table in File Maintenance module roa Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Job Component This field indicates type of equipment that will be added to an order like Visual Effects or Lighting Package Customer Notes This area is put aside for notes which can print on an order header section of some reports like Quote sheet or Pull list Internal Notes This area is put aside for notes which can be used for internal purpose and it is not printed anywhere in the program Print Notes If the customer s notes should be printed on customer reports then this field should be check marked Purchase Order Multiple Purchase Orders can be linked to an order Click on the to add a new purchase order A Purchase order screen will appear A purchase order can be entered or selected from a list of purchase orders attached to the production To select a purchase order already created for the production click on the 3 icon When a purchase order is attached to an order the most current purchase order will be carried over to the invoice when the order is billed Reports can be run to see the invoices and or orders attached to a purchase order Current PO When a new PO being added to the list user can select either this is current PO or not There is an option in right click menu called Set as Current PO
459. pment level ms ify iti Production D specifying the equipment and quantities that were ordered Equipment Order by order In Summary format if this option is selected the report will sort by order number Order by Equipment In Detail format if this option 0 is selected the report will sort by equipment code Order by Production If this option is selected the report will sort by Production code Production Shows only the orders belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all productions Equipment Shows only the orders having this equipment as a late shipment Leave this option blank to show orders with all equipment Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Late Shipment Report Date Time 2006 06 14 2 35 27 Phi PS i oerDistribution CC C CC dY C003 08 3 1 A 2003 04 01 2003 07 26 O2 2006 05 22 ar Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Late Returns Report Orders with equipment that were shipped and have not EEE ed P returned or returned after the expected return date will Format appear on this report E Summary Filter Options Dea Order By Summary Detail The Summary format lists the information in the
460. point and the access point 1s turned on and working properly If you can see the Access point in the list select that and press the Connect button Then set the proper wireless configuration and press OK Can scanner ping the computer running the RF Server Click on the Status menu and select the Ping page Type the IP address of computer running RF Server press Start Test button and make sure scanner can ping the computer Can computer running the RF Server ping the scanner On the command prompt of the computer running RF Server ping the scanner IP and see if you have reply from the scanner Does the scanner have a Static IP Click on the Status menu and select the IP Status page If your network is configured to use the DHCP The IP Address field should have a correct value If it is displaying the 0 0 0 0 press the Renew button to get the IP from DHCP server If your network is configured to use the static IP make sure all the network settings in this page like IP Address Subnet Mask are correct If something is wrong select the WLAN Profiles menu and make your changes We recommend using a static IP number Can the RF Server PC ping the SQL Server On the desktop computer which is running RF Server try to ping the server computer which is running SQL Server and get the reply If the PC cannot see the SQL Server it cannot communicate with it and send the scanner request to the database Installing RTPro for persistence Symbol
461. port e Creating Invoice By checking this item while creating draft invoices the system will warn user that credit limit has been met but it doesn t stop the creation of the draft invoices e Confirming Invoice If the indicator is checked and the credit limit reached the system warns the user when confirming the invoice The confirmation of the invoice will not be stopped PS Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Next Numbers Next Barcode Number RTPro has the ability to assign barcode numbers when adding inventory This field displays the next barcode number that will be used There is logic in the system which does not allow duplicate barcode numbers so if the number is set to an existing barcode number system will skip the number and advance forward until 1t reaches a valid barcode number If your shop is setup for multiple locations the next barcode number can be setup at the location level Next Order Number This number should be set onetime When a New rental order quote or reservation is created the number will be incremented It recommends that the number set to a different numbering sequence from the Next Invoice Number Next Preview Number and Next Draft Number This will makes it easier to identify the order numbers on various screens and reports If your shop is setup for multiple locations the next order number can be setup at the location level Next Preview Number This number should be set o
462. port results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Report Format You can choose to include more details in your report by selecting detail or include less information by selecting summary Example EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Owner Revenue Report Date Time 2006 06 21 12 40 30PM Page 1 of 1 Owner SONY FREEO1 CAS siii AAA ae Weeks 237 67 18004 C 102 306 57 102 396 67 41 67 37020 eee 250 00 48004 rn A Totals 21 931 70 Report otals 124 328 37 Barcoded Equipment utilization Report by PO This report shows how often Barcoded items have MIAME eral been rented Utilized and how much revenue these items have generated against inventory attached to a Equipment Range a Ce Utilization Ori M PO You should select at least one PO to view this To report E Summary Filter Options Begin Date 3 2 2011 Fa pe Equipment Range You can limit the range of End Date 10 2 2011 El equipment displayed in report by selecting begin and P ending equipment Leave these fields bla
463. ports For example you may wish to run a report of all the items purchased from a particular vendor When adding like items the information entered into the fields will apply to the quantity entered Start a new session whenever new items you are entering have many differences from previous one otherwise the new quantity will inherit the information from the previous entries To start a new session simply change the data or exit the Add Rental NonBarcoded Items and re enter The Equipment Code Location and Vendor fields must be selected from tables Although it is possible to create and add codes to these tables from the Add Rental Barcode Items screen it may be helpful to create the necessary codes in File Maintenance Module prior to adding rental equipment Department Choose a department code This is not a required field Category Choose a category code This is not a required field Equipment Code Enter the Equipment Code or use the dropdown arrow to choose an Equipment Code from the Equipment Lookup screen Original Location If the company is setup as multi location then each item will have an original location This is the location of where the item originated The original location and current location will be identical when the item is entered into RTPro The original location will default in If the user has access to more than one location the original location can be selected from the drop down Current Location This l
464. pressing the F10 To remove a picture from equipment code select the image menu at the top of the Rental Equipment Entry Screen Next select remove picture There is an Image Screen that you have some minor editing features on like rotate mirror stamp You can use this screen to edit your picture Rental Kit List If the same combinations of equipment types are needed on orders repeatedly they can be packaged together The list of equipment as a package can be included on any order without having to add each equipment type individually Rental Kit List feature can facilitate to do this approach Rental Kit List is more than just a way to package traditional kits e g Mini flo Kit Sun Gun Kit etc It is a quick and easy way to add a list of equipment to an order For example all of the equipment in a studio or a truck rental can be packaged into a Rental Kit List When pulled into an order quantities can be changed additional equipment can be added or removed and pricing will be manipulated the same as a standard order A Rental Kit List can be built in one of two ways from the Inventory Menu or from the Rental Order Screen in Order Processing In either case the Rental Kit List is building from current equipment codes in listing If there is something that you want to include in the kit that is not in the equipment table create the Equipment Code first From the Inventory menu click on the Rental dropdown tab and select Renta
465. price change entries are made in the Update New Sales Prices Screen see above they are not updated to the Sales Inventory This allows you to continue to prepare and review the price changes until you are ready to update them all at once By clicking on Update Prices drop down tab or click on Rollover New Sales Prices you will come to this screen The update may be limited to a Department Category or combination Click on the Update Prices drop down menu and select Rollover New Sales Prices There will be the option to choose department and or category This allows for limiting the update If you wish to update across all sales stock codes leave these fields blank Department If updating prices by department enter in a department type in the Department Code or click the drop down arrow to choose a department from the Department Lookup Category If updating prices by Category enter in the Category code or by clicking the drop down arrow to choose a Category from the Rental Category Lookup Leaving the Department and Category blank will update all Click OK if you wish to continue A Confirm screen will appear Click Yes to continue Another Confirm screen will appear asking if you are sure Click Yes to continue and finish the process us Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ji Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Order Processing Module The Order Processing Module handles all the rental quot
466. ptions to handle a timely and accurate Check in of all items On the surface the procedure is simply a reversal of the checkout procedure what went out must come in including Barcoded items Noncoded Miscellaneous and Subrental items Each item will be marked with the date and time it is returned as well as the user who checked in the item RTPro will also allow you to check in items as loss damaged or missing You may also transfer an item to another order or swap it for another item and it is possible to check in more than one order at the same time by using the Check in by Production feature as outlined later in this chapter Return List In this report a list of items to be returned can be printed On many occasions it is useful to print a Return List before beginning the Check in process Like the Pull List the Return List can be used for users to make hand written notes about the equipment that is being returned Click on the Return list in reports menu of order processing Note that it includes various options For more details see reports in this chapter Or Cu Pa All or In There are various icon for checking in items one for single order Or and the other button for Check in by production Pr Pa is checkin by Parent Company and All is to checkin across all orders Click on either of these buttons and the Rental Check in Screen appears With the is Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc
467. purpose of this table is to store report footers names and text that are used to print on specific reports This table allows you to have separate footers for different reports Users are able to Add Edit and Delete records The table consists of a code description location body and an option which allows you to split the text of footer Body Body 1s a free form text area with edit capabilities like choosing font font size and paragraph alignment The text entered ex Terms and Conditions will print for example on the bottom of a quote sheet Note We recommend not using tab characters in the body CN File Maintenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note Some Table field names may be entered in the text body Their value will be used instead of their names when printing reports Contact Rental Tracker Support for more details Utilities Menu Delete Previews This item will delete all Previews bills that you have in your system For more information refer to chapter 7 Im File Maintenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Inventory Module In the Inventory Module tables are created and maintained to keep track of each type of equipment in inventory as well as the individual pieces of inventory In this module you will find the tables for the Equipment Codes and the Kits Barcoded and noncoded items can be added and the information for individual items can be viewed and changed The Availability screen can be acc
468. r Inc Use this note area to record any useful information about this item Remember that the information entered when adding the inventory will apply to all of the items in this session see Notes before starting above Thus if the comments do not apply to all of the items added enter only the quantity for which they do apply Change the comments and start a new session Quantity to Add Enter the number of items that you wish to add to your shop After items are added into inventory changes can be made and status can be checked in the Rental Inventory Entry Screen To access this page from the Inventory Menu click the Rental dropdown tab and click Rental Inventory Rental Noncoded Items Added in This Session This box will display the rental non coded items that are added to the system at that moment Transfer History For clients using the multiple location feature of RTPro the history of items as they are transferred from one location to another can be displayed Inventory transferred from one location to another must reside on a transfer order See chapter 6 for details on creating a transfer order Equipment Rental History The history of rental items can be displayed through the Equipment Rental History screen To show a range of equipment this screen can be filtered according to different levels such as Location Equipment Code and Date ranges Also you can include subrental items in the list This will be useful wh
469. r 179 OBS TOD lla 179 UNICO REDI TICK OES ada ta A AAA A ANA 180 Print RONG Or INVOICES A A A ee 181 invoices Attached LO PO aaa ae etat he at ne Dore nl ed older a Doro 182 Invoice Credit Void REO TO Feist 183 INVOICE LISE DY PIOQUGTION a cios 183 Invoice and Credit Memo GL Distribution 184 GL Distribution Grouped by GL COQ tie rene arrete 185 GLsDISEMIDUTION SO TEA DY GE COUR de EE A aia 185 Payment RECEIVED REDOT a E E T uaa 186 GE DISEFIOULIOINS UIA Oo ose lod AAA ia 187 GL DIST DUO DETON TE EE EEE ON EE TA TRT 188 Uplodd REE E E E E T 189 S br nta l INVOICE Deta nucena E AA A 190 Sales Summaa BY MONT er enr EEE ei 190 PURCHASE ORDER nn a N tete e tune 193 Purchase Order MOdulle cccscescccsceccccsceccccscececcaceceneacecectacsctacecentacscecsacececsaesceceanscssennacsseataces 194 SDr Nal cee wisn A IA 194 Subrental Purchase Orders aiii NE AN MN tees 194 NVM STAT OY A RR 198 Invento PUNOS ONGEN A deteste et o en en einen tetes tt 198 Inventory Purchase Order Detrol iO 198 Inventory PO Detail SCOICW assimilation 201 AP nia natapoiawe tnd tanutenasawatiadinsiatasbiawe fund N N 201 Billed SUD remta REDONNER diia 201 Subrental VENOOPINVOICES NO PONG AAA 202 BHICG ACCIUGUS SERRES RS Ne AE ie une 202 Subrental Balance Detail REPO ad nd Re a Nr fe te ie 202 SUbDrentalPOCOSESNOEL SR RTE aa 203 REPORTS en denis unetdnesusesdneesnes diese einen tentent ee ie Rec nine cine 205 Introduction to Reports Module sis
470. r and then realized it belonged to a different production Do need to delete the order and recreate it No There is an option under the Management Screen for Move Order to a Different Production Use this option instead of deleting and recreating the order checked in an item as usual and then realized that it damaged How do Checkin an item as damaged You need to cancel the Check in on that item then set the Check in mode to Damaged from the drop down on the top of the Check in screen and Check in the item again was working on an order today but do not remember which one How can find it out From the Order Processing screen click on File menu the list of the last 10 orders that you worked on appears Click on the one you want How do check in and create a contract for missing lost rental items To check in items as missing rentals loss go to the check in screen There are two ways 1 Single item at a time Set the mode at the top Normal to Loss ES F A Q 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Check in your item and the system will prompt for the loss reason The item will be checked in on the order as a loss and the item will be retired You can view the loss items from the loss damage list on the check in screen You can also edit the pricing there RTPro does not create a second contract and keeps the items on the original order contract 2 Across all items At the top of the check in screen select missing rentals
471. r in the chapter Damage Items checked in as damage shows that these items are damaged and they must be sent for repair When checking items in as damaged system creates a repair ticket for each item and pulls it out of stock and puts it into repair You can view the damage list RTPro will allow you to calculate the costs of the damages and bill the customer See Damage List later in this chapter Enter Repair Ticket When items are checked in as damage in Rental Checkin Screen a dialog box will open to send damaged item into repair to do this you may add a new ticket or add items into the existing ticket Transfer Transfer allows items to check in on the current order and check out to another order As you begin the Check in process in the transfer mode system will prompt you to enter order number to transfer items to These items will check in from current order and check out to selected order Exchange Use this feature to replace items of the same type with different barcodes This will be useful when customer rented something but it does not work then customer brings back that item and gets another item of the same type To trace this transaction this option can be used Noncoded items can be checked in as an Exchange in single check in mode only The user will not be prompted for an item to exchange with when checking in the item as noncoded Note When checking in an item as an Exchange the user gets the prompt and ente
472. r shop should be entered There can be multiple prefixes used If the multiple prefixes use a comma between each value Example 40 20 22 Barcode Auto Populate Prefix The value entered here will be added as a prefix to barcodes created in the application Default Serial Required When adding new equipment code there is an indicator labeled Serial Required When adding inventory for the specific equipment code the serial number would be required Auto Assign Barcodes when adding Barcoded Inventory If option 1s check marked the default to have the system assigns the barcode numbers will be check marked when adding Barcoded inventory Print Barcodes when adding Barcoded Inventory If option is check marked the default will have the system print the barcode numbers when adding Barcoded inventory will be check marked when adding Barcoded inventory Allow scanning of Serial in place of Barcode If this item is check marked user can scan serial of an item instead of its barcode Note Check this item with special care The application will always search barcodes first and if it cannot find a proper barcode then it will search for its Serial No The drawback is the application may find a barcode equal to a serial number but with another item Days per Week The default days per week will default over when a new production is created For an explanation of Days per Week refer to the Rental Order Entry section in Chapter 6 Default Sales
473. range Sum of List price charged to customer Weeks Quantity quantity short This will only print if there is a quantity short ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Subrental Statistics Report With a multitude of options and sort by combinations this report will display the Vendor Price the Production Price and the total weeks rented for all Sub rentals that fit the selected criteria All options and sorts can run in a summary or detailed format Filter Options Order Number Fill an order number here to filter report results for selected order Leave it blank to include all orders Production Select production to limit report to show only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show results for all productions Vendor Select vendor to limit report to show only items for selected vendor Leave this option blank to show results for all matching vendors PO Enter Purchase Order numbers here to filter results of report by entered PO numbers Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in report by selecting begin and ending equipment Leave these fields blank to show all equipment Date Range To filter report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ign
474. range the columns such that the Production Code Production Name and Credit Limit are the first 3 columns on the screen 4 Then select File submenu from the top of the screen and select Print Grid or press Ctrl G Questions about File Maintenance What is the Project Table and why would want to use it The project table can store different projects that your shop would like to track An example would be Winter Olympics or Pepsi Commercials The reason why you might want to setup a project 1s perhaps several production companies are working on the same project and you would like to know the revenue EIN F A Q 2012 Rental Tracker Inc that has generated by the entire project Available is a Revenue Generated by Project Report in the Reports Module under the Statistical Reports submenu What is the Shipping Address Table and why would want to use it If you repeatedly ship equipment to the same location you can setup the address in the address table and then select it when creating a new order from the Address Lookup provided in the Order Header Screen Questions about Inventory An item returned and the barcode is missing from it What should do First you need to find out what barcode number it was If you know what production returned the item then go to the Check in by production Filter the list to show the items that are not returned Look at the description of the item to find the barcode Check in the Barcoded then go
475. rchased from or subrented In Vendor List you can see a list of all Vendors defined in application They may be active or inactive nl Use this button to print mailing list labels for all vendors R You may view the catalog of rental equipment for the selected vendor in Vendor Rental Catalog Screen 3 You may view the catalog of the sales stock number for the selected vendor in Vendor Sales Catalog Screen Managing Vendor records Vendor records can be added by clicking on S icon To edit Existing records you can double click on them or select record and click on icon If you want to delete a vendor record you should ensure Vendor record did not use in Inventory Items Create Edit Vendor record After clicking add or edit icons Vendor Entry Screen will open The following fields are available Note Vendor List is also accessible from the Main menu under View sub menu Location If your company is multi location this field will be available This is the location that is registering this vendor This is not a required field Vendor Code The Vendor code is a 10 character code which should be meaningful to identify the vendor title Many reports and searching options throughout the program prompt for the vendor code Vendor Name This is brief description or name of vendor Contact Name and Address This is address and contact information of vendor itself or its contact person Tax Id This is Tax Id of vendor Tax Type A ta
476. rds Screen When a price is locked in Rental Order Screen a company will charge the customer with this price for non Subrental items If the pricing should be passed through to the Subrental items then select All on the customer section The Subrental Customer pricing will be updated If vendor pricing should update then select All on the vendor section RTPro has flexibility to allow the user to dictate how Subrental prices should update If Subrental lines are locked and only unlocked Sub rentals should be updated the user can indicate only to update the Unlocked Items Only Remember the locking on the Subrental level is different from the locking on the Rental Order Entry screen For example when you might use locking on the various levels if your non Subrental pricing 1s different from the Subrental pricing you will be passing onto your customer then you would look in the subrental pricing and lock in the non subrental pricing When the non subrental price differs from subrental a yellow color highlights the extended price P Pul C Ship DES ption Ordered SubOrdered QUI Price Extended T 575 HMI HEAL 1 00 s00 2 F ON Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Mass updating Subrental Record System is able to have mass update prices for Subrental Records To update Subrental prices Press F11 or from Subrental menu select Subrental Records A list of all Subrental records wi
477. re you can insert any extra information about this specific payment Apply Payments to Invoices After entering the payment information described above you can apply it to one or many invoices on a particular production You have few options If this payment is received prior to an invoice generated you can simply leave the payment screen after posting the payment without applying it to any invoice and apply payment to an invoice later Apply to this Invoice ENS Account Receivable O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc dl You can apply the payment to one invoice by positioning the cursor on the desired invoice then click on the Apply to this Invoice icon or select Apply One under the Apply menu bars F2 Program will apply the payment to this invoice If the amount of the invoice is more than the payment received the invoice will not close and will show up in your list of unpaid invoices the next time you post a payment for this production If the amount of payment is more than the invoice amount you will have some remaining balance on the payment and you can apply it to another invoice or you can leave it to apply later Quick Apply If you receive a large payment that should be applied to many invoices for this production RTPro provides a quick way for applying the payment to the unpaid invoices To do this select Quick Apply from Apply menu or simply click on its icon in the toolbar F5 When doing this you do not need
478. reation Credit GL Account Unapplied Payment Creation Debit GL Account I Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc When a new payment is added the values of these fields will be added into the Invoice General Ledger Transaction table for the amount of the payment Credit Memo creation Credit GL Account Credit Memo creation Debit GL Account When a new credit memo is added the values of these fields will be added into the Invoice General Ledger Transaction table for the amount of the credit memo Credit GL Account when applying Unapplied in future month Debit GL Account when applying Unapplied in future month When an existing payment is applied in a month past the payment received month the values of these fields will be added into the Invoice General Ledger Transaction table for the amount applied Labor Space Tab Company Working Days The days check marked as Working Days will be used in the Labor and Space module for billable days Begin Time End Time This is the default time used on the Labor and Space module when the scheduling is for a day Language Table RTPro has ability to translate labels and captions to various languages To use this feature use multi language option in the setup screen should be enabled Each language will have its own translation table Users can select one of the available languages and all labels and captions will translate based on translation table contents or if the application 1s set for a new
479. recorded in the system w DK Date Range Filters the report to the exceptions occurred between the given date range If begin date is blank 1t will print all the exceptions occurred on or before the end date If the end date 1s blank 1t will print all the exceptions occurred on or after the begin date Production If the Production is blank then the system will consider all productions Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the exceptions for the given location Leave this option blank to show all exceptions Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Exceptions Report Datel me 2006 06 18 46 55 hi Page 1 of 15 Sort by Date Datanterval 2006 01 0 2006 06 18 2006 02 14 65 OF MADMIN CancelBc lasa so0a20 100282 00016 ara 2006 02 i ES SEN ADMIN CancelWc E53 500920 PALA FALMT FALM anceled 07 ET A TAO a E A 2006 02 1H0 00 0AMADMIN Cancel t TESTOS 500021 100252 Jeo080 A IE IN aS S A 2006 02 1904 0AM CancelNC TESTSS 500921 91000 OHFBI000 PARKINESPACGENTAL anceled o EIA A ATA CS DS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc User Login History When users log in or log out of the system RTPro keeps TERME PE HP x a history with user code date and time of the login and 5 logout You can print this report that lists the history of Less a s logins user s logins Logn Date From Filter Options To 10 2 2011 User
480. reen can be shown by pressing F4 or choosing Pick List from Goto menu through the Sales Order Screen Pick List can be filtered by Department Category Stock No and Description Press F2 or click on Refresh button after filtering EZE Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc CE Sales Entry Pick List RTPro Demo Company 4 JO xj File Action Search View Help Department E Category al Ca Refresh Fe StockMo e Description T 300300 GENERATORS ALCESO005 ek BARNOOOR Calgary 2 00 THEATRE ACCESO010 2K COLOR FRAME 27 17 THEATRE ACCESOU25 2K SPIGOT 21 THEATRE CCE 50030 122 CHEESEBOROUGHS1 THEATRE ll ACCES 0040 1K BARNDOOR 4 79 15 THEATRE ACCESO1051 CAMERACAR ADTEST Tor Desc O 23 00 CAMERACAR CAMDELIN FICK UP 7 DELIVER CHARGE IN 10 00 OTHER CAMLASBOUR LABOUR CAMMILEAGE YEHICLE MILEAGE PER KILOMETRE 5 CAMPERDIEM PER DIEM v UpdateUrder F3 Once quantities are added in the Quantity Ordered column click on Update Order button or press F3 function key The equipment ordered will add to order Press F10 or click on Update and Exit button to update order and close screen _ Update amp Exit F10 e Browse Sales Checkout Screen When items are ordered in previous step equipment can be checked out from Sales Checkout screen Out To access from Sales Order Screen press Out button Qui in the toolbar or s
481. refix Any file that you upload to other programs will use this prefix by default in their name Upload Format This field indicates the program which you want to export RTPro data to it Currently uploads for Quick Books Mass90 PeachTree and AccPack are available If you are interested in exporting invoice information to another accounting package please contact Rental Tracker Invoice Upload File 1 File 5 Invoice Upload File 1 five field stores the path of where the export files will copy AR Tab AR Footer Default Ar footer can be selected here The program will default over AR footer when printing the Ar reports Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Default Payment GL When payments are made the GL account is required The Payment GL will default over but can be changed AR Discount GL When discounts are applied the amounts will link to the AR Discount GL Show Payments in AR Statement The payment detail will print on the customer statements Otherwise only the invoices and remaining balances will print Default Payment Type The Payment Type defaults in on the Payment Screen within AR module There is a Pay Type table which can be maintained within the file maintenance module Refer to the Pay type section for further details Unapplied Payment C
482. rint Quantities 162 Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc When this option is checked program prints only the Equipment Code Description and the blank Returned column Checkin Sheet This report will print checked in rental items and the sales items that are returned You have an option to print Returned and Remaining Items All Returned Items Partial Returns Remaining Items and Loss amp Damages Only A customized footer can be printed at the end of Check in Sheet Footer section can contain terms and conditions or may be signature line To modify the footer section refer to system setup section of Administration module Note When user clicks on the Partial Returns program enables Vendor Lookup on the right side of the Partial Return User can select a vendor or leave it blank If a Vendor is selected program filters only subrental returns for that vendor Begin Date Time This is the beginning date and time for a partial Check in sheet End Date Time This is the ending date and time for a partial Check in sheet Note as Exchange This checkbox indicates if the items checked in should be noted as exchange items The report title will change to Exchange check in sheet and the layout of the columns printed on the report will be different When checking this option it goes to partial returns by default but you may change your selecting items to print 1f desired Separate By Order If items are checked in by production
483. rints out orders that are marked as no charge The information referenced is if the order were a regular bill order what the billable charges would be The revenue generated as of today is based upon the Ist billing cycle and does not include extended rentals Options w OF EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Production Select production to limit report to show only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show result for all productions Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company No Charge vs Actual Charges Report DateTime 2006 06 24 12 49 47 PM CONCI Concept Lighting Cooperstown Hall Of Fame Page 1 of 1 Date Te Rental A O LE IE LS at 38 e a EC ee A gt Owner Revenue This report is used mostly for keeping track of consignments If the inventory items belong to a 3rd party owner then this report will show how much revenue these items have generated Filter Options Owner Select owner name to filter results for that owner You should select an Owner to view this report E Owner Revenue Report RTPro Demo Company a z FU Summary Cote From Production Select production to limit report to show only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show result for all productions Date Range To filter re
484. rm Initially when a new user is created they will have NO rights throughout the system As each person s job 1s defined then the user s security can be modified to fit the business Besides creating Ds for multiple users RTPro allows defining a profile in the system Profiles should have a descriptive label such as Billing or Doc Worker When clicking on the user icon a list of all users who are setup to enter into RTPro will be displayed on a listing In this list all inactive users show in red profiles in yellow and active users in white ES Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E User Setup Screen RTPro Demo Company Of xj File Search wiew Record Help O Profile GS 4 VY 8 Go tomas Force Force Min Man Man Code Mame Password Remote Days Rentals Sales Per Week Discount Discount Alek 100 Andrea Leverton CINEQUIP HE aa TORONTO Anna Popia TORONTO BOUGAN Brian Dugan C 100 TORONTO e Browse To Add a new user Click on H icon from User Setup Screen The User Entry Screen will appear Enter in a User Code User will use this code to log into RTPro It is a good idea to use user s first name for this code Fill in User Name and choose a password The password will not be viewable From Departments list you can select single or multi departments that user is permitted to have access If your company is multi location there will be a list of locations available
485. rom the Inventory menu click the Rental drop down tab and select Rental Availability or click the Rental Availability Screen icon Enter the Equipment Code or use the drop down arrow to choose an Equipment Code from the Equipment Lookup screen When the equipment code is entered the information from that Equipment Code 1s displayed for reference Cae Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc THU FRI SAT RE RCE EEE 120842007 1219 2007 50 12274200 1220200 12234200 50 12242007 50 12 30 2007 Jp 1 3 2008 1 4 2008 mo 50 r 50 50 50 elie 1 14 2006 50 hr 0 50 1 20 2006 1 21 2008 1422 2008 1 23 2008 242008 50 5 a nan 128000 128006 1 30 2008 1731 2008 2 2 2008 50 arm jane 25200 262006 2706 ETES 50 nico 2112008 2122008 21242008 2142008 2152008 2162008 50 Note If your company is multi location to see the specific location availability fill in the location field In the Rental Availability Screen a floating box followed by pointer arrow shows all locations for your company and the quantity of equipment available in each location separately Different colors display the availability of equipment for the different locations Note Program notes the last 10 equipment that are visited in the Rental Availability Screen under the File submenu Inventory Items To see the inventory items for the selected equipment code press F8 key or from the Equipment drop down menu sel
486. rom the old Cost to the New Cost If the new cost is less than old one the Cost Inc will show the subtraction result in the parenthesis Cost Inc percentage When a New Cost is entered a number in this column is the percentage of increase or decrease between the old Cost and New Cost New Price In this column enter the New Price Use the down arrow to move to the next New Price No changes will be made and the Price will remain the same for those Stock s that have no entry in the New Price column Price Inc When a New Price is entered this column will reflect the increase from the old Price to the New Price If the new price is less than old one the Cost Inc will show the subtraction result in the parenthesis Price Inc percentage When a New Price is entered a number in this column is the percentage of increase or decrease between the old Price and New Price Increase All by Percentage To increase all costs prices by the same percentage use this option The number that you enter in Update Sales Prices Increase dialog box is the percent that will be added to costs prices of all sales stock items There is the option to roll up to the nearest dollar Note To decrease all costs prices negative numbers can be entered Program can round up the value of the price cost to the nearest dollar using Roll Up checkbox if they are increased Update Sales Prices Increase 23 Price Increase x Roll UP to the nearest do
487. ropdown and then select Retired Inventory or click the Retired Inventory icon on the Rental section of the toolbar menu Thru this screen retired records for both Barcoded and Non barcoded items can be added or edited and a retired item can be restored back into live in inventory jun Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Also you can see the transaction history for each retired item To see this list click on list View icon ES or select List from View menu Retire Barcoded Items E From the Retired Inventory Screen click on the Action dropdown tab and select Retire Barcoded Items or click on the Retire Barcoded Items icon The system will prompt you for a reason for this retirement The Reason must come from the Retired Reason table refer to the File Maintenance section Enter a Reason code or use the drop down arrow to choose a reason from the Retired Reason Lookup Any comments about the retired items could be written in Retired Comments filed The system will prompt you to enter the barcode number of the item to be retired When entered the information for this barcode comes over from the Rental Inventory Screen for reference purposes At this point another barcode might be entered When finished click the Stop 1con O to continue with another option in this screen or close to exit Restore Barcode ltems When you want to recover a Barcoded item that 1s retired you do not need to add the item into your inv
488. roups having equipment assigned The PI equipment group is helpful for linking equipment together when performing cycle counts CON File Maintenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Order Processing Menu Production Type Table This table is an important table in RTPro It allows identifying the types of productions customers your shop services Examples of Production Types are Features Commercials Video and Employee There are reports such as Revenue and Estimated Revenue Reports that can be ran by production type to track the types of business you are doing To access this table use Order Processing dropdown menu and select Production Type There are several listings and reports that the project is referenced Ship Method Table This table consists of a code and description The table should store ship and return methods Examples would be Fedex Will Call Our Trucks etc The ship method is used in Production and Order header screens Shipping Address Table This table stores shipping locations The table consists of a code shipping name and address refer to chapter 3 The shipping address can be used in production and order header screen This comes in handy when equipment is repeatedly shipped to the same location Project Table The project table can store different projects that your shop would like to track An example would be the Summer Olympics or Winter Olympics The reason why you might want to setup a project is perhaps
489. rpose of this report is to check across a kit for the availability of items for a single venue as of a specified date This will help in determining if your company should perhaps purchase more equipment for rentals Revenue Begn Date NE Revenue End Date Filter Options Protection Date po Location If you are using the multi Suppress Accessories 7 location feature you can filter report Location results to a specified location Grena o Revenue Begin End Date Range are the range of dates to analyze for the Total Days Billed Total Revenue and Projected Weekly Subrental Cost data If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Projection Date Is the date to be analyzed the date the Projected Equipment Utilization data is calculated Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Suppress accessories If you do not want to include accessories in result check this box to remove them Kit Selection Gives the user the ability to specify kits which will be used to check across the availability At least one kit will be required to run report ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Example Rental Tracker Pro RTI Studios Projected Equipment Utilization Analysis Date Time 10 10 20102 29 14PM Page 1 of 1 Location LOSANGELES Date Range 1 1 2010
490. rs in the item then system prompts Do you want to put item into repair if Yes then program will bring up the Damage dialog box Then the user can put the exchanged barcode into repair For noncoded the prompt will come up Do you want to put item into repair If Yes the program will bring up the Damage dialog box Swap Use this feature to move a Barcoded item from one order to another one You should enter destination order here Source and destination orders should be from one production No Charge The feature can be used to note the item should be reviewed and considered a no charge when billing the client The system will not automatically no charge the item It will just note to the billing clerk the item was checked in as a no charge It is up to the billing clerk to waive the charge Enable Double Scan Error Right click on the grid refresh button on top left side of grid There is an item that says Enable Double Scan Error this means if an item is already checked in don t show error Already Checked In to Order message on the screen Instead a double scan sound will be played Check in Barcoded Items Checkin Single Barcoded ES When items should be checked in as Barcoded select Barcoded option under Check in menu or click on its icon from the toolbar then a green highlighted field will show and prompt the user for a barcode and you can start the Check in process If you see this box in white click on
491. ry with the current cost and price can be printed Select Sales Price Cost List from Reports menu or click on Sales Price Cost List icon Vendor Catalogue V If vendor has a catalogue or stock number for this item it can be entered here Select item and click on this icon this will open Vendor Sales Catalogue Screen and the catalogue information can be entered CS Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Labels H Printing sales stock barcode labels is available By clicking on its icon from toolbar menu labels can be printed for all items in the list TW SPRAY FS SPRAY90 Television 1 Spray 54dhesive Spray504dhesive DAGA BAGH BAGC Storage Bag storage Bag B Storage Bag C Quantity of Each Label to Print Program prints each label based on selected quantity For example if there are 2 stocks and Quantity requested is 3 then program will print 3 of the first one and then 3 of the second one Hint Filter Sales Inventory list to print few labels instead all of them Cost of Goods Logic FIFO First In Fist Out Rental Tracker has implemented the Cost of Goods FIFO logic As items are shipped from sales the first items entered into the system will be sold and will deplete the inventory There are several types of transactions and activity which will play into the FIFO logic m Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Transaction Type Purchase Adjustment Adjustment Transfer out Transfer i
492. s Filters the report to any of the following billing status Not Billed Part Billed Billed Leave this option blank to print all orders regardless of their billing status Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example DN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Order Status Report DateTime 2006 06 14 2 30 03PM Date Date Ret Date Type Type Status 00036A Minero gt 2001 07 25 2001 07 26 2007 07 29 Order NoCharge Not Ship Horse Track New York SE 44 LL EE EE ro Soot LA MomenProfessionaSoccer 2001 07 31 2001 07 27 renee San Diego Spiri Loau enr SO00T3LA fWomenisProfessionalsoccer 2001 08 09 2001 08 10 2007 06 13 Order NoCherge peso promus SOCCER SE SO0376 LA fMomen sProfessionalsoccer 2003 10 18 2003 10 18 2003 10 18 Guote ReguarBil Not Ship Cd Late Shipments Report Any order that has equipment that has not been shipped ETETE RTPro Demo completely or was shipped after the scheduled ship date e will show on this report Summary Filter Options Detail Summary Detail The Summary format lists the Order By information in the order level specifying the order and Odert the date the equipment should have been shipped The C Production Detail format lists the information in the equi
493. s Warner Bros One Life To Live Total 1 871 24 Cash Receipts Journal Summary The report will list based upon the date range specified the cash receipts activity for the criteria selected The report summarizes by GL account Deals Cor D j Date To GL Code Range El Production Payment Type T Journal Type Bath Include Unapplied Payments Include Cost of Goods Location Currency hd Example ETS Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Cash Receipts Journal Summary Date Time 2006 06 10 3 53 13FM Location LA Currency US 010 IS 40 000 00 A o o ne 15557 515 236 21 Totals 7558 008 51 7558 406 5 Cash Receipts Journal Detail The report will list based upon the date range specified the cash receipts activity for the criteria selected The report is detailed breaking out by GL account and invoice From Date To Date GL Code Range Production Payment Type Journal Type Both Currency r Location k Example ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Cash Receipts Journal Detail Report Date Time 4 1 2012 10 48 57 PM Page 1 of 1 In each group sort bynvoice Date Range 1 1 2012 3 15 2012 Journal Type Both Include Unapplied Refund Adjustments Production PO Journal Payment Debit Credit Tithe No Amount Amount REF L i E J J ur 3 2
494. s between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Rental Inventory Statistics Summary By Production Report DateTime 2006 06 19 2 56 14PM Page 1 af 5 DateRange 2006 06 19 Location LA Currency US ACP OA AC Power Distribution Equipment Description Days Weeks Revenue er A lay 600 00 pore COPA AERO ce E EC SSCS Cr HA TR gt E E Equipment Description Days Weeks Revenue ma ET RE AAA a RRI COMPACT 4K HMI HEADA 0200 ARRI 12468 ELECTRONIC BALLAST Report otal 44552 60 106 00 1 005 142 95 120 450 00 LLL Description of columns Days Billed If the invoice Credit creation date is within the date range the invoice rental detail level will be calculated If the invoice rental detail item is Daily the days billed days weeks the quantity Weeks Billed If the invoice Credit creation date is within the date range the invoice rental detail level will be calculated If the invoice rental detail item is Weekly the days billed days weeks the quantity Revenue Quantity days weeks actual price CON Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Equipment Revenue Report This report prints Quantity and Days ap xi Rented a
495. s the extended price charged to the customer It is the net amount Extended Cost This is your company cost for the sales items The cost is the purchase cost of the items sold This is not the Current Cost from the Sales Stock Table Ie Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Profit Amount Difference or the Price Cost Statistical Reports Rental Inventory Statistics Detail This report will show all billing activity for equipment within a specified date range The total revenue generated by all items invoiced under this equipment is displayed Department a j For compare cost versus revenue the replacement cost of Estada po the equipment and any maintenance cost 1s also displayed Filter Options Eeen z ange Department Select a department to limit the report to show only items for this Department Leave this option BiledBegin Date blank to show results for all departments Biled End Date mm aray Category Select a category to limit the report to show Group By Department he only items for this category Leave this option blank to show results for all categories Location Cunency Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in the report by selecting begin and ending equipment Leave these fields blank to show all OK X Cancel TLst Save 0 equipment Date Range To filter the report results to show only records between dates
496. s to keep History Clear the history older than this day Start the Server Initialize the server with the parameters set in setting page and then try to connect to the database Users can use this feature to restart the server if stopped for any reason When server is running this menu is not available EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc D Start x Stop le Settings Cle Exit RTPro RFServer Stop the Server Disconnect the connection between RF Server and DB and then stop the RF Server from sending and receiving commands to from scanners This feature is useful when the user makes a change in DB connection setting for example changing the Server name DB name P Start ES Stop ca Settings Cle Exit RTPro RFServer Connections In this page you can find out more about the scanners connected to RF Server loix Server View Help gt amp o ue BEAR 2 Server Connections Transaction Log Error Log History IP Address Port HostName Notes Connected 100 700 700 176 24 5 4 22 2006 12 5 100 700 700 21 1024 4 22 2006 12 5 IP Address This is the IP Address of the scanner connected to server Port Shows the port number that the scanner used to connect to this server Host Name The host name of the scanner Notes This column is reserved for future use Connected Shows when the connection between scanner and RF Server was established ID
497. screen named Production Notes If this production has parent notes a red box for it will appear there too If production has Blanket Deposit a red box on right of screen will appear G This is New Order Icon See Create New Order for more details came El Any additional notes can be added to the production If production has notes on file then a red box will appear on right of screen showing there 1s a note Restore From History If a Production has been closed and moved to history the production can be restored to a live production by using this option Move to History Closed Production can be moved to history using Move to History option under the History menu This option will be enabled only when Production Status is Closed and the Production is not in History Create Edit Production record There are two ways to create a new production 1 Click on plus icon from the Production List in Administration module 2 You can create a new production through the Order Processing Screen In order to add a new production for a parent first select a parent then use plus icon to create a production System will ask to confirm creating Production select yes Production Entry Screen will open The following fields are available Note You can add a new production without selecting parent Parent A parent company can be attached to the production company The parent company can be entered in or selected from a drop down
498. secdasesteussacec desc te ten needs en tote 75 VENON MOQUE As D de ates esse de de des 76 FRE MAPA OU iia 76 QUIDMENE TODO RS EE AAN A cea ease detre cdi 76 Rental ECCI VIET NS IAT ECs eae na ane te 76 Chane ine an EquUIBment Recodo 80 AVION Henson 80 Print Customized Scanner Readable Label for this Equipment Code 81 Merge EQUIPMENT dent nt A M datada aoa 81 CODY ACCO SONES aaia aE nwad tans tauetoust ons o ld 81 Assign PI Equipment Group to Selected record s 81 Locator CCNA cca Sele Set aaa oa 81 ACCOSSO US irrita na en ten ne desde ie ne een 82 Full ACCESSOS Cree In amsaananccnctaie am aaimcnaaieataatetantnnnaakacmawnantcnmontaamentantadeaanacnannaneenauiat 83 Subs tito tapa daa dd dd AA ASS A AE A A A A EAS 83 Remal Prce taa naaa The oe 83 vendor COES E aeeie a RAT A cama es 84 Print Standard Barcode Labels For all equipments in this list 84 mape Sree a nena O 84 PRTC IU IGE A O A E ns 84 Rental Detallada E E T NA 85 RENTA Vento conan 85 O A O ta edi inert ON E E E S 85 A O E E AN 86 Revenue Generate iieii a A 86 PRET A end A E AAN 86 Chane NABI oded MEN aaee A A A O nn A 86 Adame Mitra 86 Listof Rental IA Ent ES a 86 CHAM SIA Noncoded ten Ssntindstsi dun node 87 Rental AVAUABIIT Y reisn ENS eee onde aia AS A ot 87 Rental Availability Detail SECCON asesinada 89 Rental Availability Location Detail Screen ss 89 AGA BAI COG CON ONS aaa ac 89 ViewBarcodea SUbr ntol FISTO SRE sn ia es
499. select location for this user from the locations list Each user can be linked to a specific location or locations This option will ensure that user only can check in out inventory items that are linked to authorized locations Each user may have permission to add discounts to rentals or sales It can be defined here If these values are zero user cannot add discounts User also may have permission to change Days Per Week for rentals this also can be set here If the discount and days per week is blank the user has no restrictions to adjusting DPW or discounts Checkmark Force Password Change will force users to change their password on first login As the manager of the system if you want to disable a user temporarily from accessing application you can checkmark Inactive checkbox RTPro has an ability to cache some table contents in client systems to increase speed of application To use this feature checkmark Force login as Remote user checkbox When using the remote option certain listing will have limited columns displayed Note Use this option only if user is located out of the main networks containing database server We do not recommend using this option for local users To Add a new Profile If you want to add a new profile first checkmark the Profile Fill in the User Profile Name and choose a password From Departments list you can select single or multi departments that profile is permitted to have access If your company is mu
500. ses are listed www RentalTracker com If you have an internet connection established on the workstation by clicking on this option you will be sent to Rental Tracker website Email to Rental Tracker l This will bring up an email program such as outlook If your workstation has an internet connection email to Rental Tracker could be sent easily Batch Barcoded screen This screen 1s used in many parts of RTPro and is available when batch barcode scanners are used In batch mode data is scanned into the scanner and can be transferred to application Scanned items will be validated and display in a list when downloaded to the application Records are not posting to orders instantly Any records that are not valid will display in red If a row was not valid reason will display You can edit or delete scanned rows then post them Action Select Existing Batch There is an option in Batch Download Screen which displays all the existing batch numbers This option will list all recorded items for the selected batch number From Action menu click on Select Existing Batch a dialog box will appear Enter batch number or select a batch number from a drop down menu Change Post Date Across All Items ES Getting Started 2012 Rental Tracker Inc When items are scanned into the scanner a date is ENMI Ri a ot x entered This represents the checkout or checkin date of the items If the date is incorrectly entered and you need
501. settings If your company 1s multi Location you can Print Flertal Discours y Pint Previews M also choose a location to filter the report Depending on Print Sales Line Item P g Print Voide E how you filter the report 1t can give you separate pages Print Sales Discount G like Invoice header Invoice detail or GL distribution Piit Invoice Foci TEpOTIG Print Line Item Customer Motes a Pmt Only Invoices that have Rentals E de F a Ld Jrnvoice Date 2006 06 11 Time 2 1358 Phil Date Created 2005 04 19 9 37 00 AM Created by ADMIN Date Range 2002 10 19 2003 04 19 Cra puchor i upping Address Salesperson Debbie DeSantis Me Terms Met 30 BOOTS 2002S 2003 04 19 13 575 12 Jnvoice Detail Rentals Date 2006 06 11 Time 2 13 59 Phi Date Created 2005 04 19 9 37 00 AM Created by ADMIN Date Range 2002 10 19 2003 04 13 omar oduction Shipping Salesperson Debbie DeSantis Project i Terms Met 30 Usage Date 2002 10 19 T a 23 Equipment Description Bill Bill List oe Actual Extended SAREE End none Price Price Price 45002 2002 10 28 2003 04 19 26 00 IET IO CCT 104 00 O a 11mm 33 DIFFUSION BAG eon BE 26 00 EN A MISCODO1 AT 007 10 38 2003 04 18 Sa i Rental Total P10 240 58 Tan 952 64 114 45 Total 11 3086 00 TN Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc G Distribution Date 2006 06 11 Time21359PM M VOICE 1001647 Date Created 2003 04 19 9 37 00 AM Created by ADMIN Date Range 2002 1
502. shows the total cost of each line Repaired By This is the person who has repaired equipments This can be selected from Lookup Table Resolution Description This field shows how this item was repaired or which parts were used to repair this equipment Parts If some parts are used to repair an item for keeping this information RTPro lets users enter the parts that were used for repairing Price and the number of parts can be inserted here Then the system automatically calculates the total cost Stock The stock number of parts that are used for repair can be selected from Sales Stock Lookup Table Description This field is read only and describes the equipment Quantity This field displays the number of parts that are used for repairing the items Unit Price This field describes the price of parts used for repair Extended Price This field shows the total price of each line GL Account Select GL Account for this part from General Ledger Lookup Table Taxable If the item 1s taxable check this box List Price This is the price of the part as documented in list List Cost Cost of part as documented in list IH Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Labor Users can insert data related to each laborer who works on a repairing action They can select Employee Id Occupation and the hours that this laborer has worked on equipment RTPro automatically brings the hourly rates calculate total cost and inserts it i
503. sing View Edit Production Q From the History dropdown menu select Restore Ce Parent LES Production Code E de From History Subsequently the system will move the selected production from the history to the live area Restore Quotes or Orders from History Two ways to restore Quotes or Orders from History to Live 1 In History Menu select an order that is moved to history in Order Processing section then select Move Order to Live from Order menu 2 In History Menu select an order in Order Processing section then go to History menu on Order Header Screen and select Restore from History Remember that since an order is stored in History it 1s impossible Ce xj to reach this order from the main Order Processing Menu If you attempt to use an order that is moved to History from main Order Error Order is in History Processing Menu you will receive the following error message X Restore Invoices from History To restore an Invoice from history section to the Live area 286 History O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc From History module click on the Billing button select the desired invoice from Listing menu and go to the Invoice Screen Through the Invoice Screen select Restore from History option under History submenu on the top section of the screen Afterwards the system will restore selected invoice from History and move it to live area E Invoice Screen RTPro Demo Company File View
504. so that they always match the quantities checked out Print Order Description on the Checkout Checkin Invoice Printouts On the order header screen there is a location to enter the description of the order If this option is used the description will be printed on the Quote Checkout Check in and Invoice sheets Auto Fill Quantity in Mass Checkout Noncoded When using the mass checkout option the quantities can either default over empty or default over as the quantity ordered Rollup Prices to Main Item and Show Accessories as 0 00 This option will print out the main items showing sum of the rentals for the main items plus the main item s accessories The accessories will print with 0 00 amounts Display Reorder Point Warning when Shipping Sales At the point of shipping sales through order processing a warning will display if the sales inventory is below the reorder point The warning will not stop the user from continuing Print Job Title on Subrental Pick List and Subrental Return List Checking this item will print Job title on Subrental Pick List and Subrental Return List reports Require Confirmation before Adding equipment on the fly When checking this the system will prompt Add Inventory if yes the inventory add screen will appear Show Billing Schedule Total on bottom of Rental Entry Checking this will show the Billing Schedule Total at the bottom of Rental Order Screen Print Logo On Quote If checked program prints the l
505. son This page covers both your inventory items or sub rented ones Order S00880 lt EXPRO1 gt Last Equipment 00005 Order The number of the order you work with Last Quantity 2 Last Equipment The code of the last canceled equipment eee Last Quantity The number of the last canceled equipment Quantity oo Subrental Check this if you want to cancel a Subrental item After checking this box you can fill the front field in with the name of the vendor Equipment The code of the item that you want to cancel its check Success ARRI 12 18K HEADd out Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 17 16 Quantity The number of items that you want to cancel their checking out E Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Mass Checkout Mass Checkout Noncoded will display the Noncoded items to check out one equipment code at a time and will allow you to enter the quantity of each to check out In the mass checkout Noncoded page select the mode for Checkout or Canceling Checkout You can also filter to do only the Miscellaneous or Sub rented Items by checking the appropriate boxes on the screen If you checkmark the Subrental box then you can enter a specific Vendor You can also enter the First Equipment to start the checkout or Cancel Checkout from that Equipment Code Otherwise leave this field blank Order The number of the order you are working with You can see the name of customer in lt gt block in front of the order n
506. ssures that most of the sales inventory will be assigned a code and will aide in grouping similar item together Grouping similar items together is a useful tool in quickly finding the desired code when conducting a search for review or input whether on a report or a screen For example all of the gels might be given a code range between the numbers of 20000 to 30000 while all of the video tapes are given numbers between 30001 to 40000 Or perhaps all of the batteries have codes that begin with the letter B It is not so important how items are grouped together but once the ranges are established the layout stays consistent and they are maintained accordingly For example an Acme 12 RE Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Volt Battery might be grouped with all of the Acme supplies or it might be easier to find with all of the other 12 Volt Batteries It is also recommended that you leave gaps in the Stock Numbers so that there will be room to add new products within the related ranges Note When a Sales Stock number is made inactive by the user the quantity owned is zero If the quantity is not zero then program displays a message showing Inventory exists for this stock please reconcile inventory first and it doesn t allow user to set the stock number as inactive Duplicate Current Item OC There is a toolbar button called Duplicate Current Item The purpose of this icon is when users select a StockNo in Sales
507. stical Graphs There are several reports that you can review in pie or bar chart This feature operates a bit differently than the other reports When you click on the Statistical Graphs dropdown and then on RTPro Statistical Graphs or press CTRL G you will come to the Statistical Graphs screen Click Select Graph Dropdown The following reports are available Inventory Value by Category This graph shows a breakdown of the purchase amount of rental items by Category Example CE Inventory Yale Ey Category l OI xj File Customize Help fee D gt inventory Value Ey Categor e 13 000 000 JP ss TE 7 1 nas a ee er eat em ae I 12 000 000 F JS e A ti i mes 5 i en pelle a a a S Pre AE A 11 000 000 eee eee ri Gas H 5 paren eve A mirarnos a aa aro 10 000 000 E gt M INCANFRES 3 598 872 i sc de M MAGBALLAST 3 550 685 sLrozanbhror ts creme Se en M LIGHTOMME 1 974 829 i a i E HINOFLOACC 1 563 595 RER OS HMIHEADEXT 1 552 535 3 000 000 7 000 000 6 000 000 5 000 000 4 01010 Oat 3 000 000 2 0001 000 1 O00 00 o oe GENERATORS HMIFIX TURE TRUCK TRAIL INCANFRES wentma Ula Category LIGHTOIMIME sae ADEXT a Count Inventory Value by Department This graph shows a breakdown of the purchase amount of rental items by Department Example Lame Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc 3 Inventory Value By Department
508. t Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print the value of the inventory for that currency only Replacement Price If the Replacement Price is selected the Replacement Price from the equipment table will be multiplied by the quantity on hand to reflect the value of inventory Replacement Cost If the Replacement Cost is selected the Replacement Cost Current Market Cost from the equipment table will be multiplied by the quantity on hand to reflect the value of inventory Purchase Amount If the Purchase Amount is selected the Inventory Purchase Amount will be multiplied by the quantity on hand to reflect the value of inventory Group by Department You can group the report results by department using this check box Include 0 00 Equipment This option will list equipment with no inventory items on file Exclude Owner Consignment Items When it is checked any item in the Rental Inventory Screen that has a value in the Owner field is excluded from the report Exclude Non Inventory items If the Exclude Non Inventory Items is checked program will not display Non Inventory items in the Multiple
509. t benefits and cannot place a dollar value These soft benefits are intangible benefits such as increased efficiency increased information accuracy improved sales and increased customer satisfaction How do print the logo of my company on the invoices You need to create your company logo in Bitmap format Copy this bitmap file to rtpro bmp logo bmp This logo will print on the Checkout Sheet Check in Sheet Invoices Labor Tickets and few other printouts If am going for a break should I exit the program completely No we suggest using Suspend RTPro mode This is the Lock button on the Exit option in the main menu of the program This way you can login back to the program without exiting it Can I email a Quote to my customers Yes you can send any reports including Quote and Invoices by first viewing them on the screen then clicking on the Email icon from the preview screen RTPro works with Microsoft Outlook Netscape or any email program that uses MAPI or SMTP You may need to setup RTPro to work with your email system To do this from the main screen of RTPro select File then select Email Settings and fill in the required information Can save any RTPro Report Yes you can save any RTPro reports by first viewing them on the screen then clicking on the save icon You can save reports in the following formats Adobe Acrobat Document PDF HTML Document HTM Excel Document XLS ES F A Q 2012 Ren
510. t then from the right click menu select Check Item Out of Repair enter the resolution description and enter the quantity to Checkout Note Like barcodes canceling the noncoded items is possible by selecting Cancel Checkout from the right click menu Repair Items Equipment Select the equipment from Equipment Lookup Table Description This field is read only and describes the equipment Barcode If this equipment is a Barcoded item this field represents the barcode number Repair Type Select a repair type from lookup table Quantity The number of equipment you are sending for repair Date in Repair EU Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This 1s the date that this item has been sent for repair User In This field shows the user who sent this item to repair Date Out Of Repair This 1s the date that this equipment was checked out of repair User Out This field indicates the user who checked out equipment from repair Expected Date Out This field is the expected date for equipment to come back from repair Cost The cost of repair should be entered in this field Last Order Number This field indicates the last order that this barcode has been used Repair Location This field indicates where the equipment goes for repair This can be selected from Vendor Lookup Table Damage Description Enter a short description about the type of damage that happened to this equipment Extended This field
511. t Sub rentals from all vendors Equipment Range You can limit the range of equipment displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Begin and End Date You can use this option to filter results to show only sub rentals between specified date ranges Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the Sub rentals on the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show Sub rentals from all locations Sort By The report can be sorted with by equipment order number production and vendor Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Scheduled Subrental Report Date Ti me 2001 06 1710 39 00AM Page 1 of 5 Date Range 2001 06 17 Sorty By Equipment Location LA Code Code Name 500135 SAUNO4 po AEA Ace Rentals pl a 500135 __ SAUNO1 po STE CastexRentals BE PA Wore CACTI ActionGrip 1 BACKO1 MOOS ARRI12M8KHEADA 5001425 LEUCON O __ _ gt __ Je Backstag quipment A 00005 ARRI12MB8KHEADA 500135 saunos 1 BACKOT Badetag quipment 2 EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Purchase Order From here you may print out a Subrental purchase order Filter Options PO Enter in a PO This is required Vendor Select Subrental Vendor or leave it blank to print Sub rentals from all vendors for selected PO Sa es Print Single Under Ina Print Subrental Intern
512. t and then attaching it to the email you re sending to your customer ES Introduction O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Chapter Welcome to RTPro software RTPro has many features to help you get up and running quickly Read this chapter to get tips on short cut keys and how the system is laid out In addition this chapter will describe how to use on line help to get answers about the system quickly RTPro is the premier rental inventory tracker system that tracks both barcoded and non barcoded items for the rental set lighting and audio video industry Rental activity can be tracked across Parent Companies Productions Orders Projects Job Components and Contacts RTPro makes it easy to track rental inventory It is flexible to track both Barcoded and non barcoded items Barcoded items are items that have a unique barcode label attached to the item This is the best way to track an item because the unique barcode label distinguishes the item easily in the system Non Barcoded items are items that do not have a unique barcode These items are usually tracked by quantity or not tracked at all A non barcoded item is usually an item that cannot physically have a barcode label or it is not worth tracking the individual piece This would be for example cables sandbags glass items paper items or items with a low value that it does not really benefit having a barcode attached The non barcoded method should be used sparingly One benefit of RT
513. t has been ape End Date 3 27 2012 Production Filter Options Production Pe Cost Replacement Price Department Shows only the Location f Replacement Cost equipment belonging to this Purchase Amount Department Leave this blank to Ten show items from all departments Category Shows only the Y OK X Cancel List Save equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Note You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on the list select each one you want to include in report Retired Reason Filters the report to the requested Retired Reason Leave this option blank to show retired items across all Retired Reasons Retired Date Range Filters the report to the requested Retired Date Range If the Begin Date is left blank then all items retired on or prior to the End Date will print If the End Date is left blank then all items retired on or after the Begin Date are printed Production Shows only the items that are retired and linked to an order for this production Leave this blank to show items from all productions Location If you are using multi location features you can filter the retired inventory report by a specific location Currency
514. t icon in front of order range and select each one you want to include in report Net X Cancel T 2 Save ey Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Batch Print Quote Sheet This option can be used when there are several RSIS PET ne orders that you need to print a quote for This option allows a batch to be printed so you do not need to print the orders individually through se 101 201 order processing This function will print all SOUL Md Cc quotes at once based on the criteria that you EndDate 10 1 2011 specify Select your desired options and then Production a click on the Next button that will send you to the regular Quote Sheet report dialog box First Ordes _ Filter Options Last Order Date Range Prints the Quote Sheet for orders Location with the Quote Date in the given date range Production You can choose a specific production and get the Quote Sheet report for this production You also can select multiple productions To do this click on list icon in front of Production and select each one you want to include in report Order Range Prints the Quote Sheet for orders with the Order number in the given range You also can select multiple Orders To do this click on list icon in front of order range and select each one you want
515. t production to limit report to show only orders for this production Leave this option blank to show results for all productions Department Select department to limit report to show only items for this department Leave this option blank to show results for all departments Category Select category to limit report to show only items for this category Leave this option blank to show results for all categories Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Stock Range You can limit the range of stock numbers displayed in report by selecting begin and ending stock numbers Leave these fields blank to show all equipment You may also select stock from list to include in report using list button in front of the first stock number EN Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Date Range To filter report results to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Examples Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Sales Inventory Statistics Summary By Production Report Date Time 2006 06 19 3 34 51 Ph Page 1 of 2 DateRange 20
516. t sub rented item will display Enter quantity and press Enter then continue to checkout next sub rented item Checkout mass sub rented Noncoded items using list Press F5 key or select Non Barcoded List from Checkout menu The Mass Checkout Noncoded screen will appear Check Subrental box enter Vendor code and press F2 or Refresh button Enter quantities for each item and press F3 to update and continue editing or press F10 to update and exit Checkout miscellaneous Subrental items Checking out miscellaneous sub rented items is like Noncoded items You need to checkmark Misc box in each screen too 149 Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Add amp Checkout Noncoded nu You can add and checkout Noncoded and miscellaneous items that are not ordered By clicking this icon Add amp Checkout Noncoded screen will open In this screen you can select equipment or enter miscellaneous items to add to the order and checkout simultaneously Checkout All This option will allow the user to checkout all items without confirmation for each item All items will be checked out as Noncoded This option will checkout all miscellaneous and subrented items too There is a security setting for this option Users must be permitted to do this function Batch Download checkout Fil This 1s batch download checkout For more details see Batch Download Screen in Chapter 2 Cancel Checkout Cancel Barcoded Items Br You can canc
517. tal Tracker Inc RTF Document RTF Text Document TXT How do change my password From the main screen of RTPro select Edit and then select Change Password Follow the prompts on the screen How can change the beep sound that I hear from the computer when scan a barcode From the main screen of RTPro select File and then select Beep Settings You can set different sound for Bad beeps and Good beeps We have included 20 good beeps and 20 bad beeps If you want to add a different beep find any WAV file and copy it to 1 RTProwavGoodBeep wav and A ARTProwavBadBeep wav How do install a camera to work with RTPro RTPro works with cameras that have a TWAIN compatible driver Install the driver provided by the camera manufacturer Then from the main screen of RTPro select File and then select Camera Selections Select the driver from the list and click on Select If the driver is not showing on the list try re installing the driver and make sure it is TWAIN compatible If a TWAIN driver is not available an option in RTPro 1s to attach an image from a file 1s available JPG image are supported in RTPro Questions about Administration How does the Security works in RTPro Rental Tracker Pro is a multi user system It will allow you to create ID s for multiple people to use the system This will give you control on what features and functions an individual can perform using Rental Tracker Pro Initially when a new
518. talize first character of each word the user is typing Require Salesperson on Order Header Because of the many uses of the Salesperson field including being able to generate a revenue report by salesperson you may wish to require that a salesperson be entered on every order To do so check this box Require Payment Type on Order Header If you want system to use validation rules for payment type and not allow users to finalize order forms before entering the Payment Type you should check this box If your company is using the RTPro AR module this should be checked Require Project on Order Header By checking this item all orders should have their Project defined This option will force user to enter in a Project value before saving order header Require Tax Type on Order Header By checking this item all orders should have their Tax Type defined This option will force user to choose Tax Type of order before saving it Use Multiple Contact on Production RTPro allows controlling the contact selection across a production If the selection of a contact should be limited to specifics contacts across a production then check this item At the time the contact is chosen for an order the contact must be a contact which 1s assigned to the production Separate Reports by Rental Category If the sort order field is used in the Rental Category details by checking this option program will allow the user to separate the reports by the rental categor
519. te ea tae On ne nn ue nat On 148 REN taliG neck OUT POCOS ista ll di rete 148 checkout Barcoded HMS RS A A NN NN ta NU 148 Checkout NONCOGEO ITEMS RER AA A A due A sect dd 148 checkout Miscellaneous ENS dada 149 Checkout Ssubrental itens EL E Med ends tee leds 149 Add Checkout NONCOQCO ao 150 CH CKOULAIRE SR EEE E o ae tet ES te ee Per EETA 150 Batch DOWN OGO CHECK OU Edad 150 CONCE ENCON pote 150 Other Important Checkout Tanco Sii 150 RENTAROUE DELON Sree r E an TRO as 151 Some Common Error Message may you get Checking out Items 151 CROCK MEP OCS SS puso mao dal N ee 151 Renta Checkin STEE nena tidad 152 CHECK IN BONCOO CO IENS A AA AA AE E ee 153 CNECCRIAN ON BACA AAA ao 154 ENCINA Ma id 154 CONCE CAC SAS AA A a as 154 Loss and Damage DT RE 155 Other Important CHECK INJUNCTIONS at academie 155 SS OREA eae ee ia ace 156 PREIECI D LEA 016 1 SCC A OR OAOA 156 CHECKIN BY POQUCHON esla ner 156 CITC CII BYP OT OIE ai aisles i er a acl ae al soa ae Soak ail are aa Oe aha aa nt te oe ota 158 CHECKIN ACTOSS IVIUITIDIC All OFC EIS iii 158 Order Processing REPO Suc de di re iii 159 CUIR ROA 159 Quote MPB SR E died 159 PULICAR SAS AS ATRAS AE EDADES 160 checkout Sheel contract o 161 CurrenE Week CONTACT dia EE ban ee ane et 161 Exchange Shee beusina teen nt dr E A dr A A A 162 SWAD e iaa 162 RETURN dis 162 ETA A A PET AE VEA SENT AE A AEE E ree SN AE A A VOR AS ee ASE TR Pe OR 163 Checkin SNECE DY Production een ana N an ns AA 163 Sales
520. ted use Check in all User Security must be permitted to use this w Barcoded 2006 06 25 12 32 24 option Mon Barcoded Dialog F3 Mon Barcoded Single F4 Description Mon Barcoded List FS FS ARAIAHMIFRESHELS Batch Barcode OLE Be GK PAR CKIRT Checkin Al Checkin All Barcoded Items Only 244 00005 00005 Checkin All Excluding Barcoded 0244 00200 00005 Checkin All Items ES Handling Orders O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc MIE CNIL O A LA Otherwise if partially returning Non Coded Subrental or Miscellaneous Equipment click Non coded button Enter Filters 1f you need Checkmark Checkin Checkmark Sub rent or Miscellaneous if Checkin Subrental applicable Cancel Check Misc Click Refresh or press F2 Check in individual items enter quantity by line Click Update Order F3 or Update and Exit F10 to post quantities Update Order F3 Update Exit F10 ANOTHER WAY Position grid cursor on appropriate line press F4 x system will prompt for the quantity Enter the quantity to Checkout Fs care Checking in Multiple Orders across a Production Click Pr after In Help 5 In Or Pr Pa All Select individual orders click Include All F3 for Show Only Orders with Item Out all orders or enter equipment code C Show All Orders Click Checkin Screen F10 Sat I Check in orders as you would a single order ee M 24952 2001
521. tegory Leave this blank to show items from all categories Date Range Displays the detail of changes between this specified date ranges If a begin date is entered then the program summarizes all the changes prior to the begin date and prints only one row specifying the Initial Quantity Sales Stock Range You can limit the range of stock displayed in this report by selecting begin and ending stock Leave these blank to show all stocks Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter the report to a specific location Example E Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ABCD Gel Roll ABCD Oty Trans Trans User gio Vendo Notes Order Production Date Type y SET AMOO M2 intial Quantity em 100 00 6 17 2070 Purchase ENDT On RS E E 30 00 erirrzoto Ship JENDVLR enzo TT REN 10 00 6 17 2010 Retum _ CINDYLA error O MODERNA PA EE e S S itr 200 62972010 Ship __ CNDYLA eewo S EAN Adjustment CNDYLA 12 20 2010 Physicalnventory Er 00 Adustment CNDYLA 12202070 Physical inventory 53 00 E Si E A T BE E e ADMIN E 222 mao mea Aa S a e tr 40 00 6 10 2011 Purchase ADMIN 600 fes E soo 6 102011 Ship ADMIN enoo _ ou 2 136 00 EE e ADMIN E e E E EAEE E 20 ne ADMIN AO E E EAE oo enron pom emem PRE TAgusmen ONDYLA 91222081 Prevenir AA Een MORE CNDYLA 106 2011 W8sE 539 mon 200 Zool eros To or MODERNA 21200 ale ela ee sjaje
522. tem and exiting the record an Update Subrental screen will appear You have the option to change all subrental records or only those which are locked or the option not to change any subrental records AA Vendor Update Vendor Begin Date GAl C Unlocked C None Update Vendor End Date EA C Unlocked C None Update Vendor Days Per Week __ Cunokel f None Holais andor Beat FAI Unlocked None Update Vendor ListPrice C al C Unlocked None Update Vendor Actual Price ai Unlocked None Update Customer Begin Date Al Cin OF Nore Update Customer End Date Al CUnocked None This screen gives an opportunity for user to update the Subrental records all at once Refer to Subrental Update Section for more information The 3 will mark an entire column Misc Tab Shade Percentage The top header section on customer reports 1s printed shaded The shading can be adjusted Darker shading does not go through very well when reports are faxed You can choose a number between 0 30 to setup this feature Grid Delay Delay when user continuously presses Pg Up and PgDn keys Larger number reduces CPU Utilization but adds a delay to process each key press Print Main Item in Bold on the Reports If checked all
523. tem will prompt for production code and destination parent Move to History As time goes by and your data tables grow in size certain groups of information like Productions Orders Invoices Repairs and Payments that are closed can be moved to history area If setup for multi location enter a company location and the as of date then press Refresh button If on the production tab a list of all productions which are available to move to history will appear All items with their last activities will be listed Check mark Move To History Column for each item individually or press Include All to select all items and press Ok to move items to history All records linked to the production will be moved to history Individual tables can also be moved by clicking on the tab Production Order Invoice Repair or AR entering in the date and hitting refresh Records can be included in the move or excluded in the move to history Cae Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E Move To Hietory RTPro Dero Company 307828 20445 BROWN ENTERTAINMENT INC 548 2007 7 5300 4M 5 10 2007 312356 21117 ICE PLANET ICE PLANET CANADA 8 9 2007 10 20 00 4M 313862 20460 TREEHOUSE NORTH PROGUCTION 942007 4 06 00 PH 319825 21150 MAD FILMS INC 11 30 2007 8 45 00 At 12 3 2007 32483 21378 FILMWERKS INTERNATIONAL 12 12 2007 12 27 00 F 321156 21378 FILMWERKS INTERNATIONAL 12 30 2007 1 09 00 Ft 324050 24972 NYLON PRODUCTIONS LTD 4 28 2008 11 24 00 At 325058 202
524. tems off an order voiding invoices and changing dates Auto fill When entering data on specific fields RTPro has an Auto fill which will fill the closest value of a table Retire Inventory Items w Introduction 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Retire items from inventories that are un rentable due to damage or un usable It will take these inventories out of the live rentable inventory and place them into the retired inventory file Track Items in Repair Track items in repair by vendor Also track cost of repair and expected return It will give you the ability to maximize the use of inventory items for rentals by knowing which items are out for repair Flexible Checkin Checkout Checkout items easily Inventory items could be easily checked out as a Barcoded Noncoded and as a Subrental item Check in items across a Parent company Production Show a single order Project Job Component or across the entire system Robust Reporting capabilities Numerous reports are available for helping you to trace items repairs customer information billing invoicing and revenue Customized Reports From any grid listing data can be filtered and listings could be printed in portrait or landscape format All listings could be saved in PDF HTML XML Excel and Word format as well Email Any Report Reports can be sent through most email software If RTPro does not work with your email package we suggest saving the report in the PDF forma
525. tenance 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Ledger icon by the toolbar menu or select it from Billing AR dropdown list The Mas90 field is used 1f exporting invoices to a Mas90 file Tax Table Multiple Tax Rates are supported to be setup in RTPro The fields on the Tax Type table are Rental Rate Rental Rate is the tax rate for rentals The tax rate will apply to the rental charges if the rental item is setup as taxable Sales Rate Sales Rate is the tax rate for sales The tax rate will apply to the sales charges The tax rate will apply to the sales charges if the sales item is setup as taxable Ship Rate Ship Rate 1s the tax rate for shipping The tax rate will apply to the shipping charges Labor Rate Labor Rate 1s the tax rate for labor The tax rate will apply to the labor charges Space Rate Space Rate is the tax rate for sales The tax rate will apply to the space charges Rental Rate 2 Rental Rate 2 is for countries that support double rental tax rate such as GST and PST The tax rate will apply to the rental charges 1f the rental item 1s setup as taxable Sales Rate 2 Sales Rate 2 1s for countries that support double sales tax rate such as GST and PST The tax rate will apply to the sales charges 1f the sales item 1s setup as taxable Ship Rate 2 Ship Rate 2 1s for countries that support double shipping tax rate Labor Rate 2 Labor Rate 2 1s for countries that support double labor tax rate Space Rate 2 Space Rate 2
526. ter Physical Inventory Rental Physical Inventory As you know taking a physical inventory of all of your rental assets can be a challenge under the best of circumstances The RTPro physical inventory program can help with the process providing tools necessary to correctly account for all of your rental assets After a physical count has been taken and all Barcoded and Noncoded items have been entered these counts added to the quantities out on orders and in repair should account for all of your assets Those items accounted for will compare against how many owned To reconcile any differences missing items will be retired and extra items will add into your inventory 106 Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note BE SURE TO BACKUP ALL RECORDS PRIOR TO BEGINNING THE PROCESS Note DURING THE PHYSICAL INVENTORY PROCESS ALL ACTIVITY OUTSIDE OF THE PHYSICAL INVENTORY PROCESS SHOULD BE STOPPED THERE SHOULD BE NO ADDING OF EQUIPMENT CODE EDITING OF EQUIPMENT CODES CHECKING OUT AND IN ITEM CHECKING ITEMS IN OR OUT OF REPAIR AND RETIREMENT ALL ACTIVITY SHOULD STOP UNTIL THE PHYSICAL INVENTORY HAS ENDED Note At anytime during the process the physical inventory session can end All selection criteria and any counts that were entered will be erased as though the process never started The Physical Inventory reports for this session will not be available Please see End Physical Inventory Process later in this chapter for more details
527. tering criteria such as Employee Production and Date ranges After filtering press Refresh button or F2 to see the result Note If multi location feature is used Labor Space Scheduling screen can be filtered to bring only those records that are related to the selected location Note Location filtering is only available if Labor Space Scheduling is used from Labor module Space Scheduling Through the Space Scheduling screen space time scheduling can be entered in against an order Select Space Scheduling under Scheduling menu from Labor Space module or press scheduling icon in the Order Processing Screen toolbar As soon as users select either Labor or Space calendar screen will be opened Calendar starts at Quote Date Note If this screen is selected form Labor Space module program displays all Space time scheduling Space information area In this section user can add new schedules for the Spaces against an order Select New space Schedule from right click menu The following screen appears EIN Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc E space Scheduling Detail RTPro Demo Company a Of xj Invoice 32018698 Space STD Studia 10 5 2011 Picture Studio Start time 10 5 2011 6 00 AM All day event E End time 10 9 2011 11 30 aM Color a M Billable Billable Type Hourly Hours 99h 30m Original Rate Hours Days Billable Weekday 50 00 50 00 64 3 200 00 Weekend 60 00 60 00 3
528. the Administration Menu When the Auto Assign Barcodes is checked RTPro will assign the next sequence of barcode numbers for the quantity of items entered Print Barcodes box If you are using a barcode printer check this box to print the barcodes When using Auto Assign Barcodes all of the barcodes in the sequence will print If entering barcodes by hand the barcodes will print as they are entered Quantity to Print When adding barcoded items program allows user to specify the quantity of barcodes to print Department Choose a department code This 1s not a required field Category Choose a category code This is not a required field Equipment Code Enter the Equipment Code or use the dropdown arrow to choose an Equipment Code from the Equipment Lookup screen Original Location If the company is setup as multi location then each item will have an original location This is the location of where the item originated The original location and current location will be identical when the item is entered into RTPro The original location will default in If the user has access to more than one location the original location can be selected from the drop down Location If the company is setup as multi location then each item will have a current location This is the location the item currently resides in When items are added the current location will be equal to the original location when items are added As items are transferr
529. the grid Time ruler Minutes If checked Time ruler will be displayed to the left side of content area a E 3 o go ga 30 go gw 30 Work Time Only If working time 1s set for an employee through the employee detail screen by checking this option program displays the work time period for only the working days with lighter color Show Day Header If checked program shows the day header for each labor space on the top of the calendar Sunday Jan 25 Monday Jan 26 Tuesday Jan 27 Wednesday Jan 26 Thursday Jan 23 Friday Jan 30 7Week Single Column If checked program displays the days of a week in a single column for each Labor Space Show Weekends ES Labor Space Scheduling 2012 Rental Tracker Inc If checked program show weekends in labor space scheduling grid Compress Weekends If this option is checked scheduling screen displays weekends like the following picture 21 oe 23 24 25 Mon Jan 19 If checked program changes numeric times to the clock symbol 00am 8 30am Time As Clock 31Month Show Weekends If checked program show weekends in labor space scheduling grid Compress Weekends Refer to the above example Time As Clock If checked program changes numeric times to the clock symbol Time Grid Unit Users can select to see labor space scheduling grid by Day Month or Quarter Detail Information If checked labor space schedule notes can be displayed in th
530. the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Checkin Sheet Footer Default checkin sheet footer can be selected here The program will default over checkin sheet footer when printing the checkin sheet Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that 1s selected in system setup Repair Ticket Footer Default repair ticket footer can be selected here The program will default over repair ticket footer when printing the repair ticket report Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Sales Return Footer Default sales return footer can be selected here The program will default over sales return footer when printing the sales return report Note If there is default footer on the Location level the location level default footer will be used If the location level has no footer the program uses the footer that is selected in system setup Save Swaps in Customer Notes saves in Internal Notes if not checked RTPro is able to move a Barcoded item from one order to another one checking this item will save swaps in Customer notes If this item is not checked it will save in Internal Notes Note The current value in the notes will not be overwritten
531. then the calculation is based upon the subrental extended of the invoice rental detail level Sales Inventory Statistics Detail Report For each Stock Number with activity during the specified EOS alr X criteria this report will display all purchase quantities and o cain SN amounts sales quantities and amounts and adjustment quantities and amounts It lists quantity and amount totals Category x for each Stock Number as well as report totals ons se Filter Options Last Stockit Department Select department to limit report to show Acip Begn Dae y only items for this Department Leave this option blank to Acaviy End Date faz y show result for all departments Category Select category to limit report to show only Group By Department vw items for this category Leave this option blank to show Location result for all categories Stock Range You can limit the range of stock numbers displayed in report by selecting begin and ending stock numbers Leave these fields blank to show all equipment You may also select stock from list to include in report using list button in front of first the stock number ETS Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Date Range To filter report result to show only records between dates use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes
532. ting No Prices option Detail If this format is selected for printing you will see a report of each rental item in detail This format has various options to sort items when printing the report Options Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Note You also can select multiple equipment To do this click on the list icon Select each one you want to include in report Barcode Range The range of barcodes that you want to be included in this report can be entered in these fields It is mostly used if you print your own barcodes rather than using pre printed barcodes and want to get a report of the entire inventory added to the system knowing the barcode range Creation Date Range The create date is the date the inventory was added to the system A date range can be entered Purchase Date Range The purchase date is the purchase date entered when the inventory was added to the system A date range can be entered PO If a Purchase Order was used when purchasing equipment the report can be filtered by the PO Leave the PO blank to get th
533. tion This equipment was returned from this production to repair Order This equipment was returned from this Order to repair Estimated Amount Tickets estimated amount for the repair Billable This check box indicates whether or not a bill should be created for the repair cost Locked Checking this box will lock the ticket and additional items cannot be added to the ticket Ticket Description This will be the description of the ticket The description should thoroughly describe the ticket Ticket Amount a Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc After checking in all items to a ticket you can calculate a ticket amount by using the calculate button Check in Barcoded into Repair From the Repair Ticket Screen click on the option and then click on the barcode field The barcoded field will be noted in green Enter in Barcode the system will remove the items from the availability and add the barcoded items into repair The items will be attached to the ticket Note Color of Barcode field will change to green when choosing this option Information about added equipment will display to the right of the Barcode field Note Barcoded items can be canceled from repair using Cancel Checkin option available from the right click menu Please note that users can only do a cancel if the barcoded item was added to the Repair Ticket through the Repair Module not if the item was checked in as Damage through Order Processing Check
534. tion will list all outstanding rental orders for a specific production This helps to Check in more than one order at the same time To begin the multi order Check in process click on Order Processing module and choose the Production Click on the arrow close to Pr icon located on the header bar and select Rental This will open Check in By Production screen for the Rental mode All outstanding rental order numbers for the production will be listed Check mark the Include box besides those orders you wish to include or click the Include All button 1f you want to select all orders By pressing F10 or select Checkin Screen the Rental Check in Screen will appear from this screen items can be checked in as described earlier in this chapter 156 Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Checkin By Production Select Orders RTPro Demo Company 38 ET loj xj Elle Action Search Wew Help I SAVS 2 amp i Show Only Orders with Item Out Include oniy Ordas i C Show All Orders having this Equipment Cu Refresh F2 Include All F3 33 Checkin Screen F10 Project Job Component SE ooe ES A TN E 20000 25147 3 3 2010 Pait Fet QUOTES QUOTES 39 2010 L 20000 25148 3 13 2010 Pat Ship QUOTES QUOTES 3413 2010 L 0000 25149 3 15 2010 Pait Fet QUOTES QUOTES 415200 Li 20000 25150 3 1 772010 shpped QUOTES QUOTES 41 7 2010 L 20000 25152 3 1 772010 Shipped QUOTES QUOTES 41 7 2010 L 20000 251
535. tity Shipped will only include the items which were shipped on the original order There is an option to Use Equipment Table Pricing which will copy over the latest pricing from the equipment table otherwise if not checkmarked the pricing established on the order will be used This option will be useful if prices are changed after creating current order Customized Records and Shipping Charges can also be copied into the duplicated order 1f they are checked to include Note Before duplicating an order the order must be selected and displayed on the screen Note After duplicating an order new order will be displayed on the order processing screen A message will come up stating Order is duplicated successfully All parents productions and contacts will be the same Hint You can create the same order for another production by duplicating an order and moving it to the new production See Move Order to a different Production in this chapter Note When an existing order is duplicated program sets the Order Type to the Default Order Type that is set in the Setup Screen Delete an Order There is an ability to delete an order Select this feature from Order menu of Order processing screen Note An order can be deleted if there are no transactions attached to it such as checkout Rental and Sales Order Screens Within the Rental and Sales Order Screen equipment and sales items can be ordered reviewed adjusted and subrente
536. to activate it Scan the Barcode If barcode is accepted it will be added to checked in list on the bottom of screen otherwise an error message will be shown telling Error not out on this order Press Ctrl Z to Continue If you enabled sounds in system setup you should hear good beep if barcode is accepted or bad beep 1f barcode is invalid TE Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Batch Checkin Barcoded Fil This is batch download Check in For more details see Batch Download Screen in Chapter 2 Check in Non Barcoded There are several ways to check in noncoded items To check in equipment as Noncoded item right click on the equipment and select Check in Non Barcoded Enter the quantity to check in You can also choose an item and select Non Barcoded Single from Check in menu or press F4 You can setup RTPro to show quantity ordered as default value in quantity See Administration Setup Check in options for details As the items are checked in the grid listing on the bottom section of the screen will display the items checked in Using Non Barcoded Dialog box From Check in Screen Select the Checkin menu then select Non Barcoded Dialog or press F3 The Mass Non Barcoded Check in Screen will open and shows the first non coded item from the check in list The cursor will focus on quantity Enter the quantity and press Enter This dialog will then bring up the next noncoded item available to
537. to include in report Location If you are using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations E Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Batch Checkout Sheet This option can be used when there are several orders that Eq A mir xl you need to print a checkout sheet for This option allows a batch to be printed so you do not need to print the orders individually through order processing This Begin Date 10 1 2110 function will print all records at once based on the ae End Date 10 1 2011 criteria that you specify Select your desired options and then click on the Next button that will send you to the regular Checkout Sheet report dialog box Filter Options First Order Sa Date Range Prints the Checkout Sheet for orders with Last Oder E the checkout Date in the given date range Production You can choose a specific production and Location El get the Checkout Sheet report for this production You also can select multiple productions To do this click on list icon in front of Production and select each one you want to include in report Order Range Prints the Checkout Sheet for orders with the Order number in the given range You also can select multiple Orders To do this click on list icon in front of order range and select each one you want to include in report Location If you are
538. to the inventory screen and select this Barcoded item If you do not print barcode labels out of RTPro then from the Rental Inventory Entry Screen Record menu option select Reassign Barcode and assign it a new Barcoded item If you print barcode labels out of RTPro then from the Rental Inventory Entry Screen click on the Print Barcode Label icon and the barcode will be reprinted need to filter my inventory and find certain items How can I do that To do this from Inventory Screen click on Filter Records icon Enter any information regarding to the items like category equipment code serial PO etc Program will search through your inventory and brings all the items that are a match to your given criteria and display them A returned item is broken or torn and cannot rent again What should we do During the check in of the item check it in as Loss This will retire the item and optionally bill the customer for the loss Questions about Order Processing What are the different statuses of the orders mean Here is the list of the order status in RTPro Sales This is a Sales only order Empty No items are ordered Not Ship Items are ordered but nothing is shipped yet Part Ship Some items on the order were shipped nothing returned Shipped All items in the order were shipped but none of them are returned yet PartRet Some items are returned but not all Returned All items are returned created an orde
539. ts Permitted Locations Prohibited Locat gt CAMERACAR CALGARY gt DOLLIES CINEQUIP GENERATORS HALIFAX LIGHTGRIP REGINA OTHER TORONTO El RHC VANCOUVER El THEATRE WINNIPEG e TRUCKS El oy Browse Profile Options 1 Determines the profile that current user belongs to 2 Set user as profile or a normal user 3 Upon clicking on profile checkbox program will enable or disable the highlighted section if screen is in Edit or Insert mode 4 There is the option to set security for a user by assigning to a profile or manually setting rights 5 There is a button on this screen which allows you to print User Security Rights and Users Linked to Profile Note The second report is only available for profiles so this menu item will be disabled for normal users Manual Security Setting There is an option to copy rights from a profile by ELPC selecting a profile from the lookup or applying manual changes As soon as pressing the OK button all selected SPER Og ee 2 Include Parent Nodes e Include Sub Modes D AL No matter if the user is profile or not When user clicks on Main Page Controls this menu item RTPro opens a screen so user can set E H Administration Module ae H Maintenance Module permission only for selected user E Inventory Module E Order Processing Module securities in tree will be applied to the user Reports Module ae sub nodes when a parent node is being changed E E
540. tuation abbreviations etc in order to give a more professional look to all documents and screens If your company is setup for Multi Location Equipment Description can be setup uniquely for each location To do this click on ES button a list of locations will appear and description for each location can be entered i Location Description e CALGARY DMs ROTATOR CONTROLLER Ww POWER CORD 320 HALT FAL DMs ROTATOR CONTROLLER wy POWER CORD REGINA DM ROTATOR CONTROLLER Wy POWER CORD 320 TORONTO DM ROTATOR CONTROLLER Wy POWER CORD VANCOUVER DM ROTATOR CONTROLLER Wy POWER CORD WINNIPEG DM ROTATOR CONTROLLER Ww POWER CORD Daily In the Daily field enter the price that equipment will be charged on a daily basis If your company is multi location enter the price in the daily column for each location then Rental Tracker will calculate daily price based on the number of days per week to bill as indicated on the quote or invoice Weekly CN Inventory O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker is also able to calculate pricing on a weekly basis A price entered in the Weekly field is the amount that this equipment would bill every seven days For example if a type of equipment rents for a daily price of 400 00 the customer would be charged 400 00 if the equipment is rented for one day 800 00 for two days 1 200 00 for three days and so on up to the number of days per week to be billed However 1f a piece of equipment rents for a w
541. tures you have another option to select one of your locations and see the reports for that specific location only Example ES Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Production ithe tocki Description pen a a fa Deep Oran o 000 m20 900 es tai eee Get Deep Orang oo 000 10 00 9 00 6a cash Customer Deep Oram aarpus Bate 102207 eet 188 Gel Deep Orange alcangartown eran foe Deep Oran 2 00 oo 200 300 28 CougarTown GE el Roll A soj oo 5 00 00 ee n eo Gat Ro op CU 100 600 Sales on Hand Report For each type of stock in your sales inventory this report SHE displays the quantity on hand as well as the replacement i Sort By cost and price You can also use this report to get a total Ry Desenplion value of your sales inventory as of today or on any date in the past Stock Options Print Stocks With Zero QuanttyOnHand D Sort By Specifies the sorting order of the records on the report You can sort the report by Description As OF Date 10 1 2011 Stock Department OO Print Stock Numbers With Zero Quantity On Location Hand If checked all stock regardless of the quantity Currency that are on hand will print If not checked only the stock that has a value in the quantity on hand column will print As Of Date If the As of Date is the today s date it shows the current quantity of stock that is on hand If the As of Date is in the past the rep
542. turn Date EJ F A Q 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Questions about History How do restore an Order from History From History Module click on the Order Processing select the order and then from the Order submenu select Move Order to Live How do restore a Production from History From History module click on the Order Processing select the production and go to the Production Entry Screen From the menu on the top section of the Production Entry Screen select History submenu then select Restore from History Note When you move a Production to live 1t does not move all of its orders to live you need to move the orders you want to restore individually ETS F A Q 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Appendix Billing an Order Single and Multiple Order Invoicing Run the Orders to Bill Report for Weekly Billing Process Open Billing module from Main Screen Select Order to Bill Report from Reports menu E Orders To Bill Report RTPro Demo Company 9 sal P xl Print Options M Rentals M Loss MW Restocking M Sales M Damage MW Labor IC Use Oty Ordered M Shipping M Space Payment Type EE SU f Extend to end of Weekly Cycle As Of Date 248 201 El Do nat Bill Beyond 4s of Date Production C Do not Bill Beyond Usage End Date Project El e Group by Job Component Salesperson bd Location Check Rentals Sales Loss Damage boxes Input the As of Date Review the report an
543. u need to reprogram the scanner as follow a From the main scanner screen select 1 Scan Item ES Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc mus Home Ve Ili Scan Item Scan Inventory Tr MCL ta 4 Image Viewer 5 Config 236 Utilities Menu The scanner will prompt Quantity 1 ten 6 Menu Close b Scan the following 6 barcodes in the order they appear below If you can t scan them from this document then scan them from copy of the Quick Start Guide which came with your scanner bl HID KEYBOARD EMULATION EN Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc b2 IBM PC AT and IBM PC COMPATIBLE CRADLE HOST lt DATA gt lt SUFFIX gt SCAN OPTIONS b3 b4 I Barcode Scanners 2012 Rental Tracker Inc ENTER c Now pair the scanner by scanning the barcode that is on top of the scanner base 3 Ifthe scanner 1s still not working then e Unplug the 2 cables on the base e Plug in the USB HOST Connector e Plug in the Power Connector Power USB Host Connector Connector 4 If you are still having issues then Cold boot the scanner To perform a cold boot press and hold 2 and the scan trigger simultaneously for 10 seconds
544. u or click on its icon in AR module Credit Memo List This option will return a list of all Credit Memo relevant to selected production Reports Production Account Inquiry With this report you can select a production and see its balance in detail According to this report each invoice regarding the selected production amount of this Production ou invoice payment type and finally the complete balance 7 of the production can be seen Each invoice is Open Invoices represented in a separate table To track invoices for a production choose a production from lookup table cli E There is an option here to filter the report to show Open a 10 2 2011 Invoices or All Invoices By choosing All Invoices this TA report can be filtered using a date range In this case Include Order Infomation only invoices which are created in the date range will appear Select Include Order Information to print out brief information about orders Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Production Account Inquiry Date Time 2006 06 10 12 08 09 P 1 Production CONCO Concept Lighting Cooperstown Hall Of Fame e imc agmg Deseo amot 2006 08 27 41001711 Order 500193 PC0 34 9 200 00 BA 5000 6 200 00 a 2004 02 07 100223 Order 500357 50i 350 00 6 270 00 Current 6 270 00 1 30 0 00 31 60 0 00 61 90 0 00 gt 90 0 00 ES Account Receivable 2012 Rental Trac
545. u want to Check in items or cancel checking in Miscellaneous Check this box if you want to work with miscellaneous items Subrental Checkout If you sub rented something in this order and you want to Check in or cancel the sub rented items then checkmark this box Vendor The Vendor code for sub rented items First Equipment Start the mass mode with this equipment code Leave this blank if you want to start from the beginning of the list Mass Check in Noncoded Information Order The Order number you are working with You can see the name of the customer in lt gt block in front of order number Vendor Represents the Subrental Vendor code Last Equipment The equipment code of last equipment checked in Last Quantity The Quantity of last checked in equipment Main The main item code for which this equipment is an accessory to Code The equipment code of the current item that is being checked in or the check in being canceled Description The description of current equipment ES Barcode Scanners O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Print Check in Sheet From this page you can print the Check in sheet of an order This is the same report that you can print from the desktop version of RTPro and it is added for convenience to the scanner program This report saves the selections you have made and defaults them for the next time you print it Select Information Returned and Remaining Items Print both returned
546. uantities to check out equal to quantity ordered Press F3 to update order and continue or press F10 to update and exit RTPro can set default quantities for check out if it is setup to do it See Administration Setup Options for details Note If All is checked program will list all items including Rental Subrental Misc and Misc Subrental Note To have mass cancel non Barcoded items in a list select Non Barcode from Cancel menu To cancel Subrented items select Non Barcoded from Cancel menu and check mark Subrental and press F2 or click on the Refresh button then enter quantity of items you want to cancel In the same way miscellaneous items can be canceled To cancel all check All Checkout Miscellaneous Items Checking out miscellaneous items is the same as Noncoded items Press F3 or F5 to mass checkout or F4 for single checkout Checkout Subrental items Checkout single Sub rented Barcoded item At the bottom of the screen click on Subrental Barcoded tab Choose vendor and equipment code If the application is setup to get a serial number enter it in then scan or enter in the vendor s barcode number Checkout mass sub rented Noncoded item On Rental Checkout Screen by selecting Non Barcoded Dialog under Checkout menu or pressing F3 the Mass Non Barcoded Checkout Screen will appear Checkmark the Subrental box and choose vendor of subrented item press F2 or click on the Refresh button the firs
547. uction location or currency The report From Date sheet contains the production title creation date To Date ae invoice number amount and description Producton wa Currency w OF M Cancel Lit Save Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Payment Received Report Date Time 2006 06 1211 20 45414 Page 1 of 1 DateRange 2001 05 01 Location LA Currency US m enn TEATAR ane 00838 fitter Petes Equa Ons Ue STE OP a A 0700 ma e iss Billing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc GL Distribution Summary The GL Distribution Summary report prints out a summary sheet per GL code across a date range and payment type Filtering options are by date range GL Date From range production payment type and journal type If your Date To company is using multi location and multi currency features you can choose location and currency to filter GL Code Range gt the report 7 Production Bl Payment Type Journal Type Both a Include Unappbed Payments Include Cost of Goods Location Currency hi Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company GL Distribution Summary Report Date Time 2006 06 1211 24534M Location LA GLCode Debi mount Credi mount ton SSS mo ooo HT TT E O EA a 000 00 O AA 1 071 996 76 1 071 996 76 TE Billing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc GL Distribution Detail The GL Distribution Detail report prints out a detail of each G
548. ue 4 Tape 10 00 5100 00 5100 00 1 000 00 S50 00 5500 00 670116 227 TAPEBL4 TRAITOR Cinebridge Productions Digital Blue 4 Tape 15 00 580 00 560 00 1 200 00 550 00 5750 00 6 70076 361 TAPEBL4 MIDDLE ABC Digital Blue 4 Tape 10 00 510 00 510 00 5100 00 550 00 5500 00 670192 87 __ TAPEBL4 FIGHTER Paramount Pictures ________ Dig tal Blue 4 Tape 1 00 580 00 580 00 580 00 550 00 50 00 670076 361___ TAPEGRN MIDDLE ABC Digital Green 4 Tape 10 00 510 00 510 00 5100 00 550 00 5500 00 ronel rarer faros ense Produire tal Geen 4 Tape 1200 seo on sao oof soso oof sso tof 00 on _670151 355 ___ TAPEGRN MODERNFA ABC Studios Digital Green 4 Tape 4 00 512 00 51200 s4800 550 00 200 00 Report Total 51784155 51458138 Inventory Reconciliation This report will show the activity of an equipment code based upon a date range and location The report will show the beginning quantity the transactions which happened during the date range and the ending quantity Filter Options Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Department Leave this blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only the equipment belonging to this Category Leave this blank to show items from all categories Date Range Use these dates to filter results by the activity dates Location If you are using the multi location feature
549. ugh the process never started The Physical Inventory reports for this session will not be available If you are working on a small selection of inventory or 1f you are not too far into the inventory the end process 1s a convenient way to start over if things are not going correctly Obviously 1f you are deep into a major inventory it could be disastrous to end the inventory prematurely It might be better to use the PI Review and Update Screen see above to include those equipment types that have been reconciled and update the portion of the inventory that has been completed before ending the session process Whether you have ended your inventory counts or are starting over to end the process click on the Physical Inventory dropdown and click on End Physical Inventory Process A Confirm screen will appear to remind you about the session you are currently in Click NO to return to the Inventory Menu The inventory and review may continue at anytime Click YES to end the current physical inventory Sales Physical Inventory RTPro has the capability of performing a physical inventory of sales inventory After a physical count has been entered the sales inventory can be updated with the physical inventory counts As counts are enter the system will show the expected on hand quantity and the quantity that has been counted and if there is any difference Short Counted quantity is lower than Quantity On Hand Expected Quantity The line will disp
550. uld be used sparingly Statistical information cannot be obtained from miscellaneous items Summary and Totals When clicking on the Display Totals button order header information such as ship date return date usage begin date usage end date discount shipping method and shipping charges days per week will be displayed These values can be edited from this screen Billing schedule and Shipping charges are also accessible By pressing Truck button Shipping Charges screen will appear and it 1s possible to add or edit shipping charges It is not necessary to refresh totals or to use the recalculate button upon opening it will be refreshed automatically When Edit Total Actual is pressed a panel comes up to prompt Weekly and Extended Actual Here users can enter in a weekly actual total system will calculate the extended Note If user changes the Weekly the system will calculate the Extended or if extended is changed the system will update the Weekly Extended Actual Weekly Actual 368 20 Lack Unlock x Cancel After editing the total the system will lock in the total and discount the line items to come to the edited figure A lock icon will appear in front of Edit Total Actual To unlock totals click on lock icon Line items which are locked in will not be effected by the edit totals recalculation Weekly Prices Detail A When this icon is clicked in the Weekly Prices section the program d
551. uld go to work on 29 of March until 30 of March Program calculates the billable amount for the four following Bill Type like following Note Please take into account that we have weekend and normal day for this example a Hourly Rate 3 29 2009 3 30 2009 02 00 03 30 25h a 20 10h 25 Weekend Normal PM PM 30m 250 weekend Day 15h 30m 20 310 OE A A ee The should 10h for the weekend with Weekend Hourly Rate 25 and 15h 30m for normal day with Hourly Rate 20 b Day Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation a Rate 3 29 2009 3 30 2009 02 00 03 30 25h 160 170 Id 170 Weekend Normal PM PM 30m 170 weekend a 1d 160 160 rial EE The a will receive 17 a for his weekend work and 160 for the normal day Labor Space Scheduling O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Note Program will not consider hours even if they are selected It calculates full day rates for both normal and weekend days c All day event with Bill Type Day Start Time End Time From Until Hours Billable Rate Weekend Calculation Type Rate 3 29 2009 3 30 2009 2d Day 160 170 Id 170 Weekend Normal 170 weekend Day Id 160 160 E EE LAA AA Note Program calculates All day event similar to Day bill type d All day event with Bill Type Hourly Start Time End Time Fr
552. ulti currency feature you can also select prices that use the different currencies to print Example Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Tax Liability Report Multiple Rate Date Time 2006 06 159 35 294M Page 1 of 1 DateRange 2006 06 18 Sorty By Location Format Summary Location LA Currency US PES LS LES A BE s 104 77 955 36 714 48 1 569 84 A 5000242 28 9 18 PCO 9418 DE 222 0 a 7 359 26 518216 192 15 539 603 60 1 001 979 31 5 767 a EA 103 74 e F a E Orders with No Purchase Order This report will list the order which do not have a PO ETETE Report oo px established on the Order header Order Type TORONTO X Cancel Lit Save Filter Options Order Type Filters the report to any of the following order types Quote Reservation Order Cancelled Leave this option blank to print all orders regardless of their order types Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Example DS Reports O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Rental Tracker Pro Demo Company Orders With no PO Report Date Time 2006 06 169 39 21 4M Page 1 of 1 Location LA Production Order Creation Contact Phone Name Date Number BRETT FREEBERG LI DirectLightng O O 50084 2007 09 25 BRETT FREEBERG reedomWeekendBlott 500198 2002 10 19 candiceS
553. umber Mode Determine if you want to checkout items or cancel checking out Mass Checkout Noncoded File Transaction Help Order 500880 lt EXPRO1 gt Cancel Checkout Miscellaneous SubRental Checkout Exit OK Mode RF 5 3 2006 03 15 26 Miscellaneous Check this box if you want to work with miscellaneous items too Subrental Checkout If you sub rented something in this order but you want to checkout or cancel them check this box Vendor The name of the vendor you sub rented items from First Equipment Start showing the items in the next page with this item code In Mass Noncoded Detail page you can move between items with pressing the Prev and Next buttons Pressing previous and next does not checkout or cancel items Pressing OK checks out or cancels the checkout for the quantity entered in the box Fill the text box with the proper quantity you decide to checkout or cancel and then press the OK button If this task was successful the application automatically shows the next item in the list Ordered This is the number of ordered items from this equipment Out The quantity of items checked out to this order for this equipment code To go out This is the number of items remaining to be checked out from this equipment User can enter a value here This will be the quantity to checkout or the quantity to cancel the checkout Mass Noncoded Detail File Transaction Help Order
554. urned as loss or damaged and that have not been billed Check in sheet has other options Note As Exchange If items are checked in within a date range that are considered an exchange the user can use this option to note the items checked in within the specified date time range should be noted as exchange Include Loss Damage It includes all loss and damage items in the report Print QTY Out This option will print the quantity which was checked out Separate By Order If items are checked in by production the report will group items in to the separate orders Print Kit Header If a Kit is defined for an order check marking this option will print header of the Kit in the report Inventory Records EN Order Processing O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc This option will show a list of all the physical inventory for both barcodes or noncoded items in the system for the specific equipment To use this option first select an equipment code in the list then press F8 or select Inventory Records from view menu This screen displays information such as Location Status of equipment Current Order Current Production etc for each barcode or noncoded item Filters You can filter a list of items to show only items still out or subrentals still out Missing Rentals After completing the check in process you might want to see a list of missing rentals or retire all of them View Missing Rentals The grid in the Rental Check in Screen wil
555. use the sales stock can be searched by description great attention should be given to be consistent with the description For example the Acme 12 Volt Battery can be found with all other Acme products in which the description began with the word Acme However by changing the description to Battery Acme 12 Volt you can find it with all other equipment types that begin with the word Battery As with the Stock Numbers it does not matter so much which way as it does to pick one layout method and stick with it It 1s recommended when entering the descriptions to be consistent with upper and lower cases punctuation abbreviations etc in order to give a more professional look to all documents and screens SKU SKU is an identifier that is used by merchants to permit the systematic tracking of products If your company supports this universal convention code then enter the product code s SKU or UPC Universal Product Code Number Cost This is the current cost of the product Understandably if this product was purchased from several sources the cost may vary Enter here the normal most consistent cost to use as a point of reference Average Cost As purchases are entered RTPro will calculate an average cost The Average Cost is displayed here and 1s used for other reference and reporting purposes Price The Price field is essentially the list price of the product This information might come from the suggest
556. use these options If only begin date is entered system includes all records after begin date and ignores all records before that date If only end date is entered system includes all records before end date and ignores all records beyond that date Group by Department You can group report results by department using this check box Location If you are using the multi location feature you can filter report results to a specified location Currency If you are using the multi currency feature you can select the currency to print values for it Example Rental Tracker Pro Rental Inventory Detail Statistics Report Date Time 2 20 201212 31 24PM Page 1 of 4 Date Range 1 1 2010 3 30 2012 Location LOSANGELES AM AudioVideo Equipment Scriptior Oty Replacement Total y Weeks Dwned Cost Value ill Billed 2100LUMENS 2100 Lumens Projector 5100 00 42 00 MING CJ S000LUMENS Lumens Projector 3100 00 35 00 A J AA Pro se 100 00 senza ase oo eet ral sees 00 Sonya Sony ProjediorModel____ 78a sooo svaa o2 424700 00 se2 100 00 sez 100 00 Twi Television CB 5100 00 788 02 2s000 41 43 82 000 00 5200000 TVET Yo mos 5100 00 51 104683 8 860 00 1280 00 51280000 51280000 Tv3 Modes ar 5100 00 5473 41 Banoo 90 00 DOOD I Tva Mode 755 stu000 sesar 7000 1000 st00000 1 000 00 Total 47 071851 5600 00 54 707 20 1886200 26857 514404500 514404500 CAMERA Camera al E O a y Cane Cost
557. user is created they are given NO rights throughout the system As each person s job function is defined then the user s security can then be modified to fit the business have created an order and checked out some items to it and then realized that it was created for a wrong production How can fix this From the Administration Module select Move from the menu then select Move Order to Another Production Enter the Order Number and the Production to move the order to and press OK When do a lookup of a production there are many productions in the list Can remove some of the productions that have been finished You need to mark the production as Closed from the Production Entry Screen Then from the Administration Module select Move from the menu then select Move Closed Productions to History You can then move all the productions that are closed to History files This will make your live data smaller Few productions have bad credit and we want to make sure that no items are checked out to these productions What should we do From the production Entry Screen mark the production as Inactive Every time an item 1s being checked out to an inactive production program displays a warning message and reminds you that the production 1s Inactive Is there a way to print a report showing production code production name and credit limit amount 1 Go to the Administration Module 2 Then go to the Production List Screen 3 Ar
558. using multi location features you can filter to show only the orders for the given location Leave this option blank to show orders from all locations Current Rentals Report This report lists the items that are currently out on orders Format Filter Options Deparnert M Summary Current Rentals Report RTPro Demo Company E PL Summary Detail The Summary format lists Category C Deal the information in the order level specifying the ae order and the date the equipment should have been Range Sort By returned Detail format lists the information in Reun Date equipment level specifying equipment and EE quantities ordered Froyect Department Shows only equipment belonging to this Department Leave it blank to show items from all departments Category Shows only equipment belonging to this Category Leave it blank to show items from all categories Equipment Range The range of equipment displayed in this report can be limited by selecting the beginning and ending equipment code Leave these blank to show all equipment Production Shows only the orders belonging to this given production Leave this option blank to show orders from all productions Project Shows only the orders linked to this given project Leave this option blank to show orders linked to all projects Subrental Vendor Shows only the orders with Subrental from the given Subrental vendor Le
559. ustomer fields are changed you should lock in the line item There 1s a vendor lock and a customer lock Note When items are subrented as a Kit the kit items will be shown in a light yellow color in Subrental Records screen Use Vendor Defaults If Use Vendor Defaults is checked when the Vendor is changed the value of Vendor Daily Weekly Vendor Discount Vendor DPW fields are copied from the selected vendor setup E All Subrental Records for this Order r MA v Use Vendor Defaults E z a Ta a D Eje P 14000 06 14000 06 18K Alpha Lens Road Case MOLE Daily ABITZ0 AB1120 HMI Molepar 126 758 MOLE Daily Edit Vendor Subtotal Vendor subtotal can be edited through the Edit Vendor Subtotal dialog box If user types the new value program will distribute the value across that order vendor and Po This option is accessible through the right click menu Printing Subrental Purchase Order Subrental purchase orders can be printed by selecting Subrental Purchase Order item under Subrental menu This sheet shows a full description of Subrental Purchase Order The subrental purchase order can also be printed from the subrental records screen To do this click on the printer icon PO SPS10003 Vendor ACEDO Ace Rentals Address 505 M Fairoaks Phone 900 000 6000 Pasadena CA 99999 0d al VE M Date Date 500660 48005 29 GEL FRAME aoos os sja00 08 28 5 S00860 PALMI PALMI OATS 2004 09 28 Op 500949
560. utton the quantity counted column will highlight and allow the user to enter in the physical inventory counts 4 Update Inventory This option will reconcile the inventory by adding to your sales inventory items that were counted over and adjusting from sales inventory items for item that are short When you click on the update inventory button a message box will appear prompting for confirmation 5 Stop Sales Pl The stop Sales PI will end the Physical Inventory process This should be selected after step 4 Update Inventory is performed If you do not wish to update the counts to inventory the stop can be done but understand all counts will be erased Rental Physical Inventory History Program saves a snapshot of PI data immediately prior to posting the counts At the time the user clicks on the Update Inventory F3 button in the Physical Inventory Review amp Update Inventory screen a copy of the grid listing will be saved The PI snapshot can be displayed from the Physical Inventory Menu through the Rental Physical Inventory History screen This screen can be filtered by Date Ranges PI Group and Location if multi location feature is used When double clicking on a row program will display another form called Rental Physical Inventory History Record that shows the quantities related to the specific PI number fi Inventory 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Physical Inventory Update Prices Help Rental Physical Inventory I Sales
561. wh Customer Contact docs _ Insurance txt La LB 200 A jpg Select Scanner Acquire 5 Browse File C 4LB 200 F jpg y DK x Cancel fe Help Rental Order Rental Order Screen Within the Rental Order Screen equipment can be ordered prices can be edited and reviewed and a quote can be printed Rental Order Screen 1s divided into 4 sections 1 Equipment Tree 2 Rental Items Barcoded and Noncoded 3 Rental Miscellaneous Items 4 Summary and Totals fico Order Processing 2012 Rental Tracker Inc S Rental Order Screen fo x File Subrental Goto Action Help Display CodeW Desci X cal Equipment Description List Price Locked Disc Actual Price Extended Searchin Code Desc JOKER800 800 Joker Bug Head 4 1 750 00 F 750 00 12 000 00 JOKERBOF 600 Joker Bug Beamer Optical Accessc 4 0 5 20 00 M 20 00 160 00 Ne a a JOKERBAF 800W Joker Bug Barndoor 4 1 2000 T 20 00 320 00 E Se CHIM Chimera BUGBBKH 6800 Bug A Beam Back Housing Upper 5 1 3 00 FP 3 00 60 00 7 de COMPUTER Computer JBUGPOW 800W Joker Bug Power Supply 4 1 5 00 F 5 00 80 00 g de DISTRO Distibution And Cabl JOKERHDI 25 Head Ext Joker Bug 800 400 200 8 1 5 00 F 5 00 160 00 i P E JOKER3SC 800W Joker Bug 3 Pe Scrim Set 4 1 r 0 00 gt GENERATORS Generators JOKERAPC 800W Joker Bug 4 Pc Lens Set 4 1 E 0 00 GLOBES Globes
562. x type can be entered or selected from Tax Lookup table To setup the Tax Type refer to Tax entry screen in File Maintenance menu The tax type will default over to the Subrental Vendor Pos Days per Week This value is used as default value for calculating rental prices of items sub rented from this vendor Rental Discount This value is used as default value for calculating rental discounts of items sub rented from this vendor Sales Discount This value is used as default value for calculating rental discounts of items bought from this vendor Terms When a new Sub rental PO is created and if the Vendor is selected program brings in the Vendor s Terms to the Sub rental PO s Terms Daily Weekly When a new record is added to the Subrental Rental Order Entry using any method of Subrental entries the system will default over the vendor daily weekly value into the Subrental daily weekly And if the vendor daily weekly is blank then the program will use the one from order header daily weekly Notes Enter a Brief Note about this vendor here Inactive CN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc A vendor can be made inactive If marked inactive the vendor will no longer be available to be used when entering in subrentals Contact 8 Contact record contains the personal information of the individual It is the address information of person or office that is responsible for Parent Production Order and Invoice In Contact List
563. y 1 27 2011 MODERNFAM ABC Studios 122 Part Ship m 2 9 2011 Modern Family Wireless Equipment 1 27 2011 Rental Checkin Screen This screen is divided in two sections The upper grid shows the equipment ordered against the order or selected orders Noted will be the order number the quantity ordered quantity checked out quantity checked in the quantity subrented and the quantities still out The lower section will be blank when the check in screen comes up As items are checked in the lower section will display the items as they are checked in The top section will refresh and the quantities in will update RTPro is a multi user application More than one user can be on the same orders checking in items As items are checked in the top section of the grid will display the entire counts The lower section will update with the items for the user s check in session E Rental Checki n Soren Demo Compare ET DE ARR 5758 200 ELE CT ROMIC BALLA i 00030 i i ES 00730 0003 ARR ST FVA HEAD FEECIER 2 2 d 2 1 1 OC Ed A ao PAMAN 1E EA ems Checked out showing in red ens checked in menan CAS Head Fm METETE ET 2 2 S OS 51010 51009 70 20 FRAME TUE Ta AOS g A CLS SPOTS 51008 AE A FRAME BARS i a i il Ef 5009419 2006 05 06 00 46 00 11 5003419 2006 06 05 0046 000 LA 2 2006 06 11 12300 PU 2 MEGAN 12 ROP Lait Acton Checkin Hon Barcoded Description 11 GRIP CLIP LL In the
564. y based on the sort field Allow Modify 2nd Level Accessory If the box 1s checked then program allows the user to change the quantity for 2nd level accessory within the Accessory List screen Rental Order Entry screen and also both Pick List methods Update Equip Replacement With New Item Purchase Amount If the box is checked when adding new rental inventory to the system Barcoded Noncoded program updates Equipment Replacement cost with the Purchase Amount entered on the equipment table Update Stock Cost With New Item If the box 1s checked when adding new Sales inventory to the system program updates the Replacement Cost On the sales stock table Fixed Barcode Size If your shop uses barcode labels with a fixed length number of digits then this field should be checked This allows extra validation when the scanner reads a barcode If this box is checked the system will not accept a barcode with more or less than the fixed length number of digits specified The system will make a bad beep indicating an invalid read Barcode Length If a fixed barcode size 1s used then the number of digits length should be entered Barcode Prefix RTPro has a logic written in the application to check for the accuracy of a barcode When the barcode is scanned the system will validate if the first two digits of the barcode match the digits entered in the ao Setting up RTPro 2012 Rental Tracker Inc prefix field The barcode prefix used by you
565. ystem create one invoice per order across the system when running the batch invoice create process The next batch number is the assigned number for the batch process This number should be set one time and should begin at one The system will maintain the number Next Repair Ticket Number This number should be set one time and should begin at one The system will maintain the number This is the starting number for numbering Repair Tickets PO Prefix If your shop uses the feature Assign Next PO then a PO prefix can be assigned Every time the system assigns the next PO the prefix will be included at the beginning of the PO Auto Assign Production If this item 1s checked next production number will be assigned to production code in Production Entry Screen Next Production Number This is the starting number for numbering productions This number should be set one time The system will maintain the number Use Multi Location NN Setting up RTPro O 2012 Rental Tracker Inc A multi location company is a company which has more than one location warehouse with different sets of inventory which perhaps uses the same equipment codes Please call Rental Tracker to discuss the purchase and setting up of multiple locations Use Multi Location Equipment Description If this indicator is checked users will be able to have different description for different location Refer to the Inventory screen to the rights Clicking on the grid
566. zed report will run instead of an original report You can register crystal report files from the report module by selecting crystal report from the file menu A list of registered reports will appear Press the register button and fill in the report information You can also design a new report with a new crystal report button Note Designed report files should be saved in a folder that is registered in the setup module For more details see Crystal Reports Path in management module ESS Reports 2012 Rental Tracker Inc Inventory Reports Accessory List Report This report shows a list of Equipment with their HR associated accessories The report displays Equipment Code and Description which accessories are auto Fe Daily Price included and daily pricing weekly pricing or both This report also shows the price of the complete package main E Pint Weekly Price item with all its accessories Main items will be printed f Print Daly and Weekly Price in bold and their accessories in a normal format There are filtering options available that limits the records printed Deparmert i on the report Category Filter Options Equipment Daily Price Prints a column showing Daily Prices Range a Weekly Price Prints a column showing Weekly Prices Donan po Daily and Weekly Price Prints both Daily and Cuers Pe Weekly Prices Department Shows only the equipment belonging to this Dep

User Manual - Rental Tracker

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents